Home

Sound Forge Pro 10.0 User Manual

1. amp J 0 Smooth Bass 2 samples ji aoth Bass L i o bss x es e Jd Note C 1 G9 a s Note Range Smooth Bass L 00 00 00 000 __ 00 00 00 500 00 00 01 000 A Sample i fez i _ gt oy ANTAL T Sample Waveform elim it K gt E gt ef 00 00 00 709 00 00 01 419 00 00 00 709 1 153 The left pane lists the banks instruments note ranges and recorded samples in the instrument file Click a bank or sample to select it in the waveform display Markers Jf represent each sample in the waveform display Opening musical instrument files You can open musical instrument files just like any other file type e Drag a musical instrument file to the workspace From the File menu choose Open and then use the Open dialog to browse to the file you want to open e Double click an instrument file in the Sound Forge Explorer window The following musical instrument file formats are supported e dls DLS level 1 0 and 2 0 e _ Sf2 SoundFont version 2 0 e gig GigaSampler GigaStudio version 1 2 3 Important Compressed and encrypted GigaSampler GigaStudio samples are not supported SAMPLING 239 If you want to open a sample s audio data browse to an instrument file in the Explorer window Click the down arrow next to the Views button and choose Region View from the menu Each wave is then displayed at the bottom of the Explorer window You can double
2. cece eee ees 279 Updating 4 sonogram sais dacanetanaddeesssyeaey eisai A eet dowew ia awed lew edeenwws 279 Monitoring an input and output Source 6 ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 279 FANNIA ONO Sen pen state cs cane ea AE EE E E ohn EA EETA 280 Synchronizing sonograms in a multichannel file ccc cece ence eee eee eennes 280 Returning to a spectrum graph ccc ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee e een eeeeeeeeees 280 Printing THE SOMOGIAM ucaweetewscacantout news codes EENEN nl ae es dn CERTES ARENA 280 Adjusting Spectrum Analysis S ttingS 0c cece cece cece e eee eeeeeeennenes 281 Saving spectrum graph settings cece ccc ccc eee eee eee cent eee eee ee eee eeeeees 282 BUMIN tS De ee ee rr 283 Understanding track at once and disc at once burning ccc ccc cee cee eee ees 283 TRACK RON oE EE EREE E EE EE EEE AEE bonne OEE EREE AEE EERE 283 Disc at once single session or Red Book ccc eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 283 Correcting the sample rate for CD DUINING cece cece cee ee eee eeeeeees 283 Writing mono tracks to a CD 0 ccc eee e eee e eee e ee ee eee eeeeenee 283 Burning track at once TAO CDS 2 0 ccc ccc cc ccc cece eee cece eee eeeeeeeereeees 284 ClOSING LE D sxccicewdave cesses E ones E E E E ance weet sie coeuden nies 285 Burning disc at once DAO CDS ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee teen eee eeeees 286 Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDS
3. 2 Click within a data window to select it 3 Drag horizontally in a data window to select envelope points 4 From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy 202 CHAPTER 12 5 Click to position the cursor where you want to paste envelope points Tip Click within a different data window if you want to paste envelope points across data windows 6 From the Edit menu choose Paste Copying an envelope to another data window 1 Select the Envelope tool f Click within a data window to select it 3 From the Edit menu choose Select All 4 From the Edit menu choose Copy 5 Click within a data window to select it Tip You can paste envelope points to a different envelope type by selecting the envelope where you want to paste 6 Click Go to Start H if you want the envelope to appear exactly as it was in the original data window or click to position the cursor where you want the envelope to start 7 From the Edit menu choose Paste Sound Forge effects The remainder of this chapter describes the functions located in the Effects menu Acoustic Mirror The Acoustic Mirror effect is a powerful digital signal processing tool that allows you to add environmental coloration to your existing recordings For more information see What are the Acoustic Mirror effects on page 209 Amplitude Modulation Use the Amplitude Modulation effect to apply a sinusoidal or square shaped periodic gain to the input signal The f
4. 4 05 Inf 4 4 05 4 ll K Pl E gt p Rate 0 00 BB voices Pad Paba M ry Sustaining Loop sy A AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 ie NX 00 00 04 00 00 06 Pip 4h et 4 00 00 02 890 00 00 06 644 00 00 03 753 1 256 B Voices Pad ER E aaan P Sustaining Loop a a x amp 00 00 00 4 ll K gt i E P gt pl Rate 0 00 bie LA 1 256 wo 4 00 00 02 890 00 00 06 644 00 00 03 753 264 CHAPTER 17 Setting loop tempo You can calculate and if necessary edit the tempo of your loops Loop tempo is especially important if the loop will be used for building a project in any ACID product For more information see Creating loops for ACID software on page 261 Calculating loop tempo 1 2 Select the loop From the Options menu choose Status Format and then choose Edit Tempo from the submenu The Edit Tempo dialog is displayed Specify the number of beats the loop represents in the Selection length in beats box Click the mouse pointer in the Tempo in beats per minute box The loop tempo is calculated and displayed Saving loop points To save loop information with the file select the Save metadata with file check box in the Save As dialog For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 65 LOOPING 265 266 CHAPTER 17 Chapter 18 Working with Video Sound Forge Pro software supports opening and saving Microsoft Audio and Video Interleave
5. Hover the mouse over the fader or slider control and press Ctrl while moving the mouse wheel Change the value in larger Page Up and Page Down increments or Hover the mouse over the fader or slider control and move the mouse wheel Set the control to its maximum Home and End and minimum values respectively Envelope graphs Envelope graphs are used to configure the shape of frequency or amplitude envelopes applied to audio waveforms Envelope point Envelope Show wave Amplitude or frequency axis LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 49 Understanding the envelope graph To use the envelope graph you must first understand what it represents In the previous example the horizontal axis represents time with the leftmost point representing the start of the selection and the rightmost point representing the end of the selection The vertical axis represents either amplitude or frequency depending upon the operation Moving an envelope point 1 Drag an envelope point to a new position 2 Release the mouse button The point is repositioned and the envelope adjusts Moving multiple envelope points 1 Starting in an unused area of the envelope graph drag the mouse to create a selection box containing all points to be moved 100 8 Dop amp 2 Release the mouse button The selected envelope points are displayed with a white square center 3 Drag any of the selected envelope points to the des
6. ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee ee eeees 116 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 Using command markers in streaming media files ccc cece ccc ee eee ees 118 Defining streaming Media COMMANAS ccc eee eect eee eee e eee ee eeenennees 118 Defining Scott Studios data COMMANAS ccc cece cece teen eee eect e eee eeennees 119 Inserting command markers 6 ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee e este tees ee eeeeeeeeees 119 Editing COMMANA properties cece ccc cece eee e eee e nese eee eeeeeeeeees 119 Saving command properties as a custom template cece cece eect e een e ees 119 Moving the cursor to a command marker ccc ccc ccc cece eee ene eeeeneeees 120 Deleting command markers ccc ccc eee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee eeeeeees 120 MISIMIC COONS 45 sce tear bo aien oo diego nee ce aee ees e cae eagee ite EE EAA 120 We rn ON cansaccengduuese weave eecnemamecsenuarceuadcaeuencoutensrnseeenGdeeuaeuees 120 Inserting regions automatically ccc ccc cee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeenaes 121 Naming or renaming a region eee ccc cc ee cece een eee eee e eee eee teeeeeneenees 123 SCISCTING a TEQION 44 uc cue Gotdeuantqutcadatwet nuietdrniet EEE ties ecandusases 123 MOVNO A WEQIOM arar r EENE EAEEREN EET aed eee noma oo pee ane eo eeewenen eens 124 Deleting ATEOION 4 c6544300ewaddiaeaadekcbutoudddasor osewssardanadasdehsesdtasmeineuedues 124 Deleting all markers and regions ccc ccc ccc cc
7. cece cece cee eee e eee eeen eens 286 Moving tracks on the CD layout bar ccc ccc cece cece e eee e eee e ee eeeeees 291 Editing pause time for a disc at once CD 0 ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee eeennes 292 Using the Track List WINdOW ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee e ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeees 294 Creating track lists for disc at once CDS cece ccc eee cece eee e eee e eee ee eeeees 295 Adding CD Text to disc at Once CDS ccc ccc ccc eee eee e eee e eens eeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 297 Burning a disc at Once CD 2 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc eee ence ee eeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeees 298 Optimizing for Sound Forge Pro Software ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee eeeeees 301 Defragmenting your hard drive ccc ccc cece eee n eee e eee e nee eeeeeennees 301 Increasing total buffer size 0 0 0 ccc cece cece e nee n eee e ee eeeneneeees 301 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS Turning off the playback cursor and record Counter cece cece eee eee e eens 301 Turning off the channel output Meters ccc eee cette ete ee eeennes 301 Turning on passive updating for time and video displays 0 cece cee eeeees 301 DIAG CISDIGYS TEE T E E E E E E ET A ener eansens ames eeu oonen nein 302 VIA OrOISDIAYS arer EE AE EAA E EEEE E AE EENS T 302 Synchronizing audio and video s ssssessssesessesessrseseereseesorerseseereso 302 Customizing Sound Forge Pro Software ccc cece cee cece eee eeeeeeees 303 Saving
8. 00 00 02 a It I p p me 4 K gt Et oO 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 1 512 146 CHAPTER 9 5 From the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Replicate from the submenu The Replicate dialog is displayed Replicate Wow sound edit Replicate OK Ci partials _ aaa 3 Copy pa cancel _ Whole copies 6 Select the Copy partials radio button and click OK The selection is overwritten with multiple copies of the clipboard contents A partial copy of the clipboard contents is used where appropriate ail Wow sound editing fo e eee fisie Avo lon Wow Eg vov EEI Ard easier md amp AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 lt ob je i K gt Et SY 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 1 512 Repeating an operation Once you perform an operation on an audio file you can quickly repeat it with the same parameters by choosing Repeat from the Edit menu This allows you to reapply the same effect process or function to a different section of audio using the same parameters Note n the Edit menu the Repeat command is displayed in conjunction with the name of the previous function You can also repeat an operation by doing any of the following actions e Hold Shift while choosing the command from its menu Press Ctrl Y e Click the Repeat button 5 on the Standard toolbar Using drag and drop operations You ca
9. cece eee ee eens 150 Finding and repairing audio Glitches ccc cc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee eeeees 150 EOCATIMNG GULCHOS o araa drauadtedaa cyan an wa ine ENE E a aa nnn Ona anew ee 150 ReOa ING GUGIOns ciaveoes cso nianeiss nA ea EE eens 151 SEAE Paie AUCIO E E tose ae enews eh gen E A E 153 Generating DIMF MF TONES srircrsisrissiirisritind tibs yt CEARN eE En TLAN EEEE 153 Generating audio with frequency modulation cece ccc eect e eee ee en eeeeees 154 Generating simple WavefOrMS ccc eee cece eee e eee e eee teen teen neneees 155 Using the EVENT TOON peers ren aE E E E Jase ames 157 Creating eVCliNs oacccnrrntcsactosur ae rsneeesehyeeipysotnesueceeeterpen Steno wneeeeess cs 157 MOVI UCI oc liad occupa E aan T aatee a cance meas A EER 158 Sa e OVENS ricoo54 650s T E news ners eoed ET EE EE E E E A E 158 COPY OVON rarae E E E E EE E EE EAE E EAE EEE EERO 158 CONO EYES E E E a E AIN EEE E E A E E T RNT 159 PaO E ea rE E E E E EE AAE E AIET 159 WUXI CY CIS va ciwas t are cestinnwys aaoaeedeedaaw EEE ea A EENET 159 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 Editing events continued Deleting CVGMUS 4 resnc c5 natn end es EEO cues naan cate nesta cad ee eee EAE 159 TIMING CVEMUS acarcosoxnenars eas mee esensens ae werk soe ceaweer tee eneees aaeeearcawens es 159 SPUILHAG EVENING co unudines ET anions E E E E E 160 SIPDING GVON datum snarer EE ETEA EEE EOT 160 SHP ChiIMIMING CVEMIMS 0i5 0444440ssoeseeetdewesecees
10. 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None 1 C5 1 And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None 1 C5 00 00 00 000 Note When you play your Playlist it will continue to play through the regions until it encounters a stop point This is useful when triggering playback from incoming MIDI or timecode and you only want certain sections of the Playlist to be played at a time Deleting a stop point Perform one of the following actions to remove the stop point for a Playlist e Right click a region in the Playlist window and choose Stop Point from the shortcut menu e Select a region in the Playlist window and press Not on the numeric keypad The corresponding check mark is cleared from the shortcut menu and the stop point indicated by a red circle is removed from the Playlist Playing from the Playlist The Playlist displays the sequential order in which regions play To play a region click the corresponding Play button H Playback begins with the selected region and continues through the end of the Playlist playing a region multiple times when instructed by the Count value Note Playback is interrupted if a stop point is present For more information see Using stop points on page 130 Creating a new file from the Playlist After you have auditioned and arranged all regions in the Playlist you can create a new file based on the Playlist arrangement To create a new file from the Playlist right click the
11. 1 Install and configure the MIDI controller refer to the product specific documentation for installation procedures 2 Setup MIDI input synchronization For more information see Turning on MIDI input synchronization on page 248 3 Configure the MIDI triggers to respond to the corresponding controls on the controller For more information see Configuring the MIDI trigger on page 248 Advantages of external MIDI controllers In addition to simple playback MIDI commands can be used to control a wide array of the Sound Forge navigation and editing functions In fact a quick look at the Event drop down list in the MIDI Triggers dialog can provide you with an idea of the power of MIDI commands used in conjunction with Sound Forge software Using external MIDI controller presets Sound Forge system presets support the sequencer cursor dial and function buttons on the following external MIDI controllers Roland MCR 8 Multi Controller e JLCooper Media Control Station 2 The system presets for these controllers allow you to perform the following actions e Move the cursor using the controller s dial e Drop markers by clicking the dial e Zoom in and out of the waveform using the cursor keys vertically and horizontally e Start and stop audio playback using the sequencer controls Note Users of the aforementioned external MIDI controllers need not limit themselves to the default configurations of Sony Creative Software Inc
12. APPENDIX E 339 Compression Ratio audio A compression ratio controls the ratio of input to output levels above a specific threshold This ratio determines how much a signal has to rise above the threshold for every 1 dB of increase in the output For example with a ratio of 3 1 the input level must increase by three decibels to produce a one decibel output level increase Threshold 10 dB Compression Ratio 3 1 Input 7 dB Output 9 dB Because the input is 3 dB louder than the threshold and the compression ratio is 3 1 the resulting signal is 1 dB louder than the threshold Compression Ratio file size The ratio of the size of the original uncompressed file to the compressed contents For example a 3 1 compression ratio means that the compressed file is one third the size of the original Computer ID Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate An activation number is created based on that number Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is inportant that you have Sound Forge software installed on the computer where you will be using it The Computer ID is automatically detected and provided to you when you install the software Note The Computer ID is used for registration purposes only It doesn t give Sony access to any personal information and can t be used for any purpose other than for generating a unique activation number for you to use the software See also Activation Number on
13. dllm lt in K gt i E p og Rate 0 00 lt op 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 866 1 53 791 From the Insert menu choose CD Track to add a CD track using the current selection as the track length Sound Forge also provides several other methods of adding tracks 286 CHAPTER 20 Adding CD tracks and index markers to a sound file Creating CD tracks 1 Select the time range that you want to use to create a track A track must be at least four seconds long 2 From the Insert menu choose CD Track or press N A CD track is added to the CD layout bar in the data window BB 100 Unnamed Things a I 1 Shine r 00 03 30 933 00 03 28 426 00 04 42 866 AmI ob Lella i4 gt i E gt Rate 0 00 a 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 866 1 53 791 Tip You can drag CD tracks to rearrange them drag either end ofa track to change its length or use the Track List window to edit the track s position or name Creating CD index markers You can use index markers to subdivide a track For example in a track that contains an orchestral composition index markers could allow navigation to each movement Each track on a Red Book audio CD can contain up to 99 index markers 1 Click to position the cursor where you want to add an index marker 2 From the Insert menu choose CD Index or press Shift N A CD index marker is added to the CD layout bar in the data window CD index marker
14. Note f you have the Auto play check box selected your file will automatically begin previewing when you select it 4 Click Open The file is opened and a data window containing the waveform appears BB Wow sound editing o e e Silence Ei wow FERRED Sound editing just gets easier ERJ And easier ind a E 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 00 00 02 000 j00 00 03 000 j00 00 04 000 00 lt itt H p o p me 4 i4 gt i m p gt g Rate 0 00 ai 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 1 394 Using the Explorer window In addition to using the Explorer window for locating previewing and opening media you can drag files or regions from the Explorer window to an open data window to paste or mix the data Click the right mouse button while dragging to toggle mix paste and CD track drag and drop modes You can also extract audio from a CD Previewing media The Explorer window allows you to easily preview files before you open them The Explorer window has a mini transport bar with Start Preview Stop Preview and Auto Preview buttons E When you preview a file its stream is sent to the channel meters on the main workspace for audio files or to the Video Preview window for video files Note To preview video files you must have the Video Preview window open To display the Video Preview window choose Video Preview from the View menu 1 Selecta file in the Explorer window 2 Click the Start Preview button
15. Note You can specify a MIDI input port in the MIDI Sync tab in the Preferences dialog from the Options menu choose Preferences For more information see Synchronizing with other devices on page 140 1 Click the Record button on the transport bar or press Ctrl R The Record dialog appears 2 From the Method drop down list choose Automatic MIDI Timecode 3 Choose the destination data window for your recording By default the software records into the active data window If this is not where you want to record use one of the following methods to prepare for recording If Then You want to record into a Click the Window button and choose a data window from the Record destination different data window window drop down list Click OK to return to the Record dialog You want to record intoa new Click the New button in the Record dialog and specify the attributes sample rate bit window depth and channels for the new file Click OK to return to the Record dialog 4 From the Mode drop down list choose a recording mode For more information see Choosing a recording mode on page 139 5 Use the MIDI Timecode Options tab at the bottom of the Record dialog to set the MIDI timecode interval you want to record a Select the MIDI timecode start check box and type a value in the edit box to indicate the timecode location when recording will begin b Select the MIDI timecode end check box and type a value in the edit box to indicate th
16. System requirements The following lists the minimum system requirements for using Sound Forge e Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later or Windows Vista Service Pack 2 or later e 1 0 GHz processor e 300 MB hard disk space for program installation e 512MBRAM e Microsoft Windows compatible sound card e DVD ROM drive for installation from a DVD only e Supported CD recordable drive for CD burning only e Microsoft DirectX Media 9 0c or later e Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 included on application disc Technical support The Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com support default asp has technical support reference information program updates tips and tricks user forums and a knowledge base INTRODUCTION 17 Installing Sound Forge Pro software The install utility setup exe located on the Sound Forge application disc creates the necessary folders and copies all files required to operate Sound Forge software 1 Place the Sound Forge application disc in the drive The setup screen is displayed if AutoPlay is enabled for your DVD drive Note f the drive s AutoPlay feature is not enabled click the Start button and choose Run Type D setup exe where D is the drive letter of your DVD drive and follow the on screen prompts to complete the installation 2 Click Install and follow the on screen prompts to install the appropriate version of Sound Forge for your computer Getting help
17. Tip You can also change the plug in order by right clicking a plug in in the chain and choosing either Move Left or Move Right from the shortcut menu Arranging plug in order in the Plug In Chooser You can drag an effect to a new location in the chain in the Plug In Chooser in the same way you can in the Plug In Chainer In addition you can rearrange the chain by selecting a plug in and clicking the Shift Plug In Left button or the Shift Plug In Right button to move it forward or backward in the chain To access the Plug In Chooser click the Add Plug Ins to chain button t in the Plug In Chainer window Configuring chained plug ins To configure the parameters of specific plug in select it from the chain The plug in s parameters display allowing you to adjust all controls as needed For help on the different plug in controls click the Help for Effect button or click a control and press Shift F1 194 CHAPTER 12 Bypassing effects You can bypass single effects or all effects in a chain while previewing the file Bypassing a plug in on a chain To bypass a plug in clear its check box in the Plug In Chainer window A bypassed plug in does not process the audio signal allowing you to preview the effect of the remaining plug ins Plug In Chainer 2x reme Sb o Distortion Dither Amplitude Modulation Bypassed plug in Notes e You can bypass multiple plug ins You can also
18. When working with a file that contains sustain and release loops you can quickly toggle between the loops by clicking the Loop Select button g When working with a file containing two loops this button indicates which loop is active e A selection in the middle of the Loop Select button icon g indicates that the sustaining loop is active e A selection at the end of the Loop Select button icon i indicates that the release loop is active 258 CHAPTER 17 Viewing loop amplitude The sample amplitude at the loop s start and end points appears in the lower right corner of the Loop Tuner End Loop Amplitude 1 104 4 355 Start Loop Amplitude Although it is dependent on the specific waveform a good rule of thumb is that the closer these two amplitude values are the more natural the resulting loop sounds Finding zero crossings The Loop Tuner s zero crossing finders are used to locate zero crossings adjacent to the current loop tag location a ahri 20 896 59 648 e Loop End Zero Crossing Right Loop Start Zero Crossing Right Loop End Zero Crossing Left Loop Start Zero Crossing Left The Loop Tuner contains two zero crossing finders for each of the loop points e The left button in each pair locates the zero crossing to the left of the current location e The right button in each pair locates the zero crossing to the right of the current location To use the finders click the desired button By experi
19. e Inthe Post roll box specify the amount of data played after the selection or cursor position Note The Transport menu is available only when the Show top level Transport Menu check box is selected on the General tab in the Preferences window For more information see General tab on page 306 When Loop Playback mode is turned on and you make a selection during playback playback is pre rolled from the end of the selection to help you tune long loops Specify the number of seconds before the end of the selection that you would like to pre roll Enter a value in the edit box or use the up and down arrows to specify the amount of pre roll that will be used when playing entries in the Playlist Cutlist window This allows you to easily hear the transition from one region to another without having to play all the way through the first region CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 313 Status tab The Status tab allows you to specify preferences for displaying information in the status bar Item Description Default frames per second The default frame rate used to calculate frame values Frame values are useful when trying to synchronize sound with animation Most animation players specify a playback frame rate at which video frames are shown to the user If you are using an animation that has a frame rate of 15 0 frames per second you would set the frame rate to 15 0 When status values are displayed they will be shown in values of
20. 1 Using a MIDI cable connect the MIDI output port of the sampler to the MIDI input port of the MIDI card 2 Connect the MIDI input port of the sampler to the MIDI output port of the card Note This is the same configuration used to connect a MIDI keyboard to a computer for sequencing Internal samplers do not require a MIDI card and MIDI cables however an open loop protocol may be required when sending samples to an internal sampler The sampler s documentation should specify the requirements for performing SDS transfers if the sampler supports this action Troubleshooting MIDI SDS with open loop Open loop transfers while not recommended for sending or receiving samples can assist you in troubleshooting SDS hardware setup problems If the Sampler Tool does not transfer data to or from the sampler select the open loop option and attempt single cable transfers If open loop transfers are successful but closed loop transfers are not any of the following items may be the cause e The sampler does not support closed loop transfers handshaking e One or more of the MIDI cables or connections is faulty e The MIDI card is not receiving MIDI input send or sending MIDI output receive Interrupt conflicts are common for MIDI input Setting up SCSI SMDI hardware To use the SCSI SMDI protocol with an external sampler that supports the SCSI SMDI protocol under Windows 98SE Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP only a compatible SCSI
21. EXIT USING SCRIPTING 227 Script arguments A script can accept arguments to dynamically change the behavior of a script Arguments allow you to develop a single script that performs multiple functions controlled by the arguments sent to the script Each argument is a key value pair The key is a string that identifies the argument s value Multiple arguments are delimited by an ampersand amp key1 valuel amp key2 value2 amp key3 value3 When you supply arguments to a script the following static functions can be used to extract and format the parameters public static string GETARG string key string str string val Script Args ValueOf key if val null val str return val public static int GETARG string key int ii return Script Args AsInt key ii public static Int64 GETARG string key Int64 cc return Script Args AsInt64 key cc public static bool GETARG string key bool ff return Script Args AsBool key ff public static double GETARG string key double dd return Script Args AsDouble key dd The first argument to the GETARG functions specifies a key name that is used to identify the argument to be extracted The second argument in the GETARG function is a default value to be returned if the function cannot find the key name The second argument also determines which overloaded function the script will use and how the value will be formatted For example consider a script that accepts three
22. J Note B2 C3 J Note C 3 D 3 E fd Note E3 G 3 J Note A3 B3 fd Note C4 D4 J Note D 4 E5 1 Funk Pop Bass 7 samples 2 Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples 3 Funk Split D3 10 samples 4 FunkSlap NV 8 samples 5 FunkPop NV 7 samples 6 Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples 7 Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples 8 Funk Slap NC 8 samples 9 FunkPop NC 7 samples E H SERRE EEEE o oo ww FEB r eilla K gt E K ppl 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 271 1 530 B eoe EE EE E A I 00 00 00 J Note B2 C3 a J Note C 3 C 3 JJ Note D3 D3 fd Note D 3 F 3 fd Note 63 A3 J Note A 3 D4 fd Note D 4 G4 fd Note G 4 E5 a a a R Sample Pool 15 A Funk Slap G1 le Funk Pop G1 od Funk Slap A 1 4 Funk Pop C2 4 Funk Slap C2 de Funk Slap D2 wal Funk Pop F3 A Funk Slap G3 4 Funk Pop G3 0G m eilla K gt E K D 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 271 1 530 SAMPLING 241 Processing selections 1 Select the samples you want to process If no samples are selected processing will be applied to all samples 2 Choose a command from the Process Effects or FX Favorites menu 3
23. Sets the Video Preview window background color to the system default color Sets the Video Preview window background color to black Sets the Video Preview window background color to white When selected the Video Preview frame will only be stretched by integral amounts Turning this setting on usually provides faster drawing Compensates for any spatial distortion due to non square pixel aspect ratios when viewed on a computer monitor Sends the preview out to an external monitor This only functions if your hardware supports this feature If you have not configured your external monitor settings clicking this button displays the Video tab of the Preferences dialog allowing you to choose your external monitor device For more information see Configuring your video settings on page 271 Important Pulldown is automatically added when you preview 24p video on an external monitor Reduces the overhead needed to update the Video Display window The Video Display is updated when the processor is idle Toggles the display of the toolbar at the top of the window WORKING WITH VIDEO 269 Option Description Show Status Bar Toggles the information display at the bottom of the window Resizing the Video Preview window Double click the title bar of the Video Preview window to automatically resize the window to fit the current video file Double click the title bar again to resize the window to half its previous size This smaller size
24. clear this check box GETTING STARTED 55 Using the Open dialog 1 From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears Tip You can also click the Open button on the Standard toolbar or press Ctrl O Open Lookin Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Date modified 5 11 2009 9 20 AM 5 11 2009 9 20 AM 5 11 2009 9 20 AM 5 11 2009 9 20 AM 3 6 2009 11 57 AM 3 6 2009 11 57 AM 3 6 2009 11 57 AM 3 6 2009 11 57 AM 3 6 2009 11 57 AM 3 6 2009 11 57 AM Name Ji FilelO Plug Ins J HTML_ASSETS i Script Menu J Video Hardware Drivers il Drumhit pca JFill pca El Loop pca Fa Musicbed pca 3 SAXRIFF pca a Voiceover pca File name Voiceover pca 02 Gy Type Size File Folder File Folder File Folder File Folder Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au 114 KB 99 KB 150 KB 475 KB 163 KB 169 KB m File name Voiceover pca Files of type Sony Perfect Clarity Audio pca Files of type Sony Perfect Clarity Audio pca Recent Recent E Open as read only W Auto play Open as read only Append to current data window v Auto play Merge L R to stereo ACID Comments Tutorial sound file for Sound Forge Open as CD tracks No Append to current data window I Open as CD tracks T Merge L R to stereo File type Sony Perfect
25. 0 VU is merely a reference level and your signal may exceed 0 VU To prevent clipping keep an eye on your peak meters Peak levels should never exceed 0 dB You can use the Status tab in the Preferences dialog to calibrate the VU PPM meters to their associated levels on the peak meters and adjust the VU meters sensitivity For more information see Status tab on page 314 46 CHAPTER 2 Choosing a VU or PPM scale To change the scale of the meter choose Channel Meters from the Options menu choose VU PPM Scale and then choose a setting from the submenu you can also right click the meter to set its options VU and PPM scales are most useful for displaying the average volume of the signal The meter represents the RMS average level during playback and their attack and decay are not as sensitive as the peak meter PPM scales are useful for monitoring peak levels The meters use a fixed integration time 5 or 10 ms that is sensitive to increases in volume but the meters are less sensitive to decreases in volume than the VU scales which produces less meter activity and decreased eyestrain Item Description Traditional VU The traditional VU meter is displayed with a scale of 10 dB to 2 dB 0 dB on the VU meter equals 4 dBu Extended VU The extended VU meter is displayed with a scale of 30 dB to 8 dB 0 dB on the VU meter equals 4 dBu Logarithmic VU Displays the meters in a logarithmic scale like the Sound Forge peak meters instead
26. 1 Create a command and complete the Command Properties dialog 2 Click in the Template box and enter a name for the template USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 119 3 Click the Save Template button W Tip Your metadata command templates are saved in the cmdtemp xm file in the Sound Forge program folder You can edit this file directly to modify your templates Moving the cursor to a command marker Click the command marker to place the cursor at the current command marker position Deleting command markers 1 Place the mouse pointer on the command marker The pointer changes to a hand icon d 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The command marker is removed Using regions Regions identify ranges of time and provide a way to subdivide an audio file A region is defined as the area between two region tags Regions can function as time selections that can be saved with the file For example regions can be used to indicate sections of projects such as choruses or verses or they can be used to make notes in the project You can also add regions to the Playlist and use regions to create new files The Regions List window contains all of the regions and markers that exist in the active data window Inserting regions You can use multiple methods of inserting regions including a menu command drag and drop operations a time ruler shortcut and a keyboard shortc
27. 132 copying events to 158 copying file properties to 101 copying metadata to 25 copying Playlist to 132 copying Regions List to 127 copying track lists to 296 cutting events to 159 mixing audio from 75 pasting events from 159 playing contents 70 recycling contents 70 viewing content details 70 Clipboard Contents window 70 clipped audio detecting 116 marking 116 resetting indicators 45 Clipped Peak Restoration button 42 closing CDs 285 command line 227 command markers benefits of using 113 deleting 120 editing properties 119 for streaming media 118 inserting 119 Scott Studios 119 commands customizing shortcut assignments 319 320 descriptions in status bar 43 compressing audio 104 configuring MIDI devices 248 MIDI keyboard 243 MIDI triggers 248 plug ins on a chain 194 controls envelope graphs 49 51 faders 49 mouse shortcuts 330 sliders 49 converting file formats 106 mono to stereo 105 mono to stereo or multichannel 175 stereo to mono 105 176 Copy button 36 Copy Other Channel button 42 copying audio to clipboard 70 current video frame 268 data to new files 64 events 158 track lists to clipboard 296 Count column in Playlist 128 Crash Recovery dialog 80 creating CD tracks from events 287 CD tracks from files 288 290 CD tracks from regions 288 CDs See disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning custom templates 67 data windows 64 events 157 files from
28. 198 loading saved chains 196 loading saved presets 196 Multi Band Dynamics 41 204 Multi Tap Delay 41 203 Noise Gate 41 206 Pitch Bend 41 206 207 Pitch Shift 41 207 Plug In Manager 197 Preset Manager 199 previewing automation 201 removing automation envelopes 201 removing plug ins from chains 194 renaming 198 Resonant Filter 41 207 Reverb 41 208 saving chains 195 Saving settings as a preset 196 Saving settings as presets 192 Simple Delay 41 203 toolbar 41 Vibrato 41 208 envelopes adjusting 202 adjusting effect parameters 201 bypassing effect automation 201 copying to another data window 203 creating pan envelopes 185 cutting copying and pasting points 202 effect automation envelopes 200 enabling effect automation 201 fade curves 202 removing effect automation 201 showing hiding effect automation envelopes 201 volume or panning 200 EQ 178 error messages for Acoustic Mirror 219 estimating DC offset 177 Event tool 36 157 163 events applying envelopes 162 copying 158 creating 157 creating CD tracks from 287 crossfade types 161 crossfading 161 lastique Timestretch process 40 189 See also Time Stretch process embedding additional information in files 107 Envelope effect 41 205 206 envelope graphs adding points 50 202 changing fade curves 50 clearing all points 50 deleting all points 51 deleting points 50 displaying multichannel waveforms
29. 4 Measures amp Beats Changes the status format to Measures g a SMPTE EBU Changes the status format to SMPTE EBU 25 fps SMPTE Non Drop Changes the status format to SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Drop Changes the status format to SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video a SMPTE 30 Changes the status format to SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio Audio CD Time Changes the status format to Audio CD Time Edit Tempo Calculates the musical tempo beats per minute based upon the current selection Regions Playlist toolbar The Regions Playlist toolbar contains the Regions List and Playlist buttons as well as buttons corresponding to synchronization commands and status displays w wl Te Regions List Displays the Regions List For more information see Using the Regions List on page 126 Playlist Displays the playlist For more information see Using the Playlist on page 128 Trigger from MIDI Timecode Configures the software to be triggered by MIDI commands received through the MIDI input port The MIDI input port is specified on the MIDI Sync tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Turning on MIDI input synchronization on page 248 Playlist Position display Generate MIDI Timecode Configures the software to send MIDI timecode through the MIDI output port The MIDI output port is specified on the MIDI Sync tab of the Preferences dialog Pre Queue for MIDI Timecode Opens the wave device and pre
30. 51 displaying waveforms 51 flipping 202 moving multiple points 50 moving points 50 resetting 51 selecting all points 50 understanding 50 envelope points adding 50 202 changing fade curves 50 clearing all 50 deleting 50 deleting all 51 flipping 202 moving 50 moving multiple 50 resetting 51 selecting all 50 Envelope Tool button 36 cutting 159 deleting 159 fade in volume 163 fade out volume 163 fade types 163 mixing 159 pasting 159 processing 163 selecting 164 setting volume 162 slipping 160 slip trimming 160 Snapping to 94 165 splitting 160 trimming 159 zooming 165 Explorer window editing CD information 57 extracting audio from CDs 58 getting CD Text 58 obtaining CD information 57 opening files 57 overview 24 57 previewing files 57 views 59 exporting track lists as text files 296 external MIDI devices 250 monitors for video previewing 270 samplers 235 INDEX v extracting audio from CDs button 42 creating markers for each index change 142 creating regions for each track 142 from dialog 142 143 from Explorer window 58 previewing CD tracks 143 proper use of software 143 refreshing dialog 143 extracting regions to new files 42 125 fade curves 202 fade envelopes fadein 180 fade out 180 graphic fade 178 179 Fade In button 40 Fade Out button 40 fade types 163 faders resetting 49 shortcuts 49 using 49
31. 6 0 lt iit P 4 gt Id gt i m p gt g Rate 0 00 lt o 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 444 00 00 00 444 1 192 Length Trigger Chan 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 44 00 00 00 4 None 00 00 01 219 00 00 01 501 00 00 00 282 None B Drum Fill iim 4 r 4b i4 gt i E gt oa Rate 0 00 sor 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 444 00 00 00 444 1 192 Inserting regions using the time ruler shortcut 1 Create another selection in the waveform display 2 Right click the time ruler and choose Insert Marker Region from the shortcut menu The region is inserted Inserting regions using the keyboard 1 Create a selection in the waveform display 2 Press R The region is inserted and numbered region markers F are placed at the start and end of the selected area Inserting regions automatically In addition to the previously described methods you can also insert regions automatically Inserting regions while recording The most efficient way of inserting regions is to do it while recording your audio This is especially useful when working on a project that you will piece together from multiple takes To create regions while recording specify Multiple takes creating Regions from the Mode drop down list in the Record dialog For more information see Multiple takes creating Regions on page 139 Tip Regions are automatically named for you while recording You can customize this automatic labeling feature For more in
32. 98 CHAPTER 4 Chapter 5 Changing File Properties and Formats This chapter deals with the supported file properties and formats in Sound Forge Pro software and discusses file summary information Editing file properties When you open or create a file its properties are displayed in the first four boxes of the status bar at the bottom of the Sound Forge workspace The file properties are sample rate bit depth channels and length 44 100 Hz 16 bit Stereo 00 45 08 906 00 28 51 093 11 697 0 MB Sample Rate BitDepth Channels Total Length CD Time Remaining Free Storage Note The CD Time Remaining box is displayed only when CD tracks exist in the active data window Double click the Sample Rate Bit Depth Channels or Total Length box in the status bar to edit properties quickly Note You cannot modify file properties for musical instrument files Editing file properties in the File Properties window You can edit file properties in the File Properties window 1 From the View menu choose File Properties The File Properties window appears Tip You can also access the File Properties window by performing either of the following actions e Right click the waveform display and choose Properties Press Alt Enter 2 Edit the file properties as needed and click OK File Properties Attribute 1 Mono 00 00 05 000 220 507 samples Fa a a m O G O alala m m D
33. B E de ilaa dda u B ra a Ga a i kK gt E gt ofc Rate 0 00 e Drag along the divider between channels or the loop bar above the ruler to select all channels A E ooo00 a ODDE Inf B Inf 4 a Inf B Inf 4 Inf Inf lt 0 kK gt E gt ofje Rate 0 00 e Hold Ctrl and click a channel to add or remove it from the current selection N amp AE 00 00 00 00 00 15 her Inf Inf Inf BR leah Inf ail CJ 2 Be eon kK gt E gt oe Rate 0 00 Toggling channel selections After you place the cursor or create a selection in a multichannel file you can cycle through channel options by pressing Tab 52 CHAPTER 2 Previewing channels The single channel selection option allows you to preview channels in a multichannel file individually Open a multichannel file and select all data Click the Play Normal button All channels play Click the Stop button E Press Tab The first channel is selected Click the Play Normal button Only the first channel plays Click the Stop button E Press Tab The second channel is selected ee a E Click the Play Normal button f Only the second channel plays Click the Stop button E Single channel editing You have the ability to cut copy and paste data in single channels of a multichannel file However channel lengths must always remain equal in multichannel f
34. Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate An activation number is created based on that number When you register the software Sony will generate an activation number for you Once the activation number is entered the software will not time out Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is important that you have Sound Forge software installed on the computer where you will be using it See also Computer ID on page 340 ActiveX A Microsoft technology that enables different programs to share information ActiveX extends Microsoft Windows based architecture to include Internet and corporate intranet features and capabilities Developers use it to build user interactivity into programs and World Wide Web pages Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM A method of compressing audio data Although the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example Microsoft s ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association s IMA approved ADPCM Advanced Streaming Format ASF See Windows Media Format on page 352 Aliasing A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recording high frequencies with a low sample rate For example in a motion picture when a car s wheels appear to slowly spin backward while the car is quickly moving forward you are seeing the effects of aliasing Similarly when you try to record a fre
35. For example placing a microphone to the left of the speaker produces an impulse that approximates a source located on the left side of the screen Panning with head related transfer functions A head related transfer function HRTF contains the frequency and phase response information required to make a sound seem to originate from a specific direction in a three dimensional space The Acoustic Mirror Impulse Files HRTF Impulses folder on the Sound Forge application disc contains a collection of impulse files that contain directional cues To achieve optimal results using these impulse files the original file should be mono and playback should be monitored using headphones To begin convert the mono file to stereo by replicating the mono signal in each channel After the audio is converted to stereo choose an impulse file from the HRTF Impulses folder You will notice that the HRTF Impulses folder is further divided into Left and Right directories Opening the desired folder displays the available impulse files all of which are named based on their elevation up or down and azimuth left or right angles in degrees The following table provides some examples File Name Impulse positioning OEOOOL Straight ahead OEO90L Far left OEO90R Far right 90EOOOL Directly above your head OE180L Directly behind you 20E120L Below behind and to your left Note Refer to Readme doc in the HRTF Impulses folder for more information Troubleshooting
36. From the Process menu choose Pan Expand The Pan Expand dialog is displayed 3 From the Preset drop down list choose Left to right linear The pan envelope is displayed on the graph Pan Expand Example music bed Preset l x Cancel Preview L Dypass Process mode Pan preserve stereo separation 0 0 dB 100 00 Let Hard left at start of audio Output gain Right a Hard right at end of audio 60 to 20 dB 0 25 50 9 75 jon ae Show wave Mono sour Reset Envel s Mono source _Reset Envelope _ Moren The pan envelope is displayed on the graph 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 4 Click OK The file is converted to stereo and a left to right pan is added 5 Play the file The audio source seems to move from the left channel to the right channel during playback Note A pan by nature cannot be created in a mono file Creating a custom pan You can create complex custom panning effects using up to 16 envelope points 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Pan Expand The Pan Expand dialog is displayed 3 Configure the pan envelope using the following controls e Click the envelope to create a new point Drag a point to move it to a new position e Double click or right click a point to delete it e Right click an envelope segment and choose a new fade type from the shortcut menu For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49
37. Modulation Rate o chorus_ o Modulation Depth Delay Preset CMTE Bx renee Chorus Size Invert Chorus Phase SONY S 9 Invert Feedback Phase 0 0 dB 6 0 dB 4 4 dB Attenuate High Frequencies Attenuation Frequencies ak Input Gain Invert chorus phase Dry Out Invert feedback phase PAREN Out ypass Chorus size 1 to 3 J i Modulation Period Modulation Period Multiplier Input gain Dry out Chorus out Tempo Sync Inf to 0 dB Inf to 0 dB Inf to 0 dB Modulation rate 0 001 to 20 0 Hz 0 800 Modulation depth 1 to 100 Feedback 0 to 100 0 40 0 EE D Chorus out delay 0 1 to 100 0 ms Attenuate high frequencies above Hz CPU Tip The Parameter Chooser is displayed on the right side of the Plug In Chainer window when you add a plug in that supports automation Click the Show Parameter Chooser button or press Ctrl H to show or hide the chooser 2 Select the Automate check box for each parameter you want to control with an envelope An envelope is added to the data window for each selected check box Adding a volume or panning envelope Panning envelopes will have no effect on mono source data Convert mono sound data to stereo before adding a panning envelope 1 Click within a data window to give it focus 2 Press V to add a volume envelope or press P to add a panning envelope An envelope is added to the data window and the Sound Forge Volume or Sound For
38. None And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None Changing region order By default the Regions List displays regions in alphabetical order by name but you can specify an alternate order by clicking the column heading to sort in ascending stt l or descending stt l order 126 CHAPTER 7 Saving a Regions List file You can save a file s Regions List to an external file This offers the flexibility of using multiple Regions Lists for the same audio file 1 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Save As from the submenu or right click the Regions List and choose Save As from the shortcut menu Use the Save Regions Playlist As dialog to specify a folder and file name Click Save Opening a Regions List file Importing a Regions List file offers the flexibility of using multiple Regions List files for the same audio file Opening a new Regions List file clears the current Regions List Make sure you have saved the current Regions List before continuing Is From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Open from the submenu or right click the Regions List and choose Open from the shortcut menu Use the Open Regions Playlist dialog to locate an existing file Specify the type of regions you want to import from the Files of type drop down list e Choose Playlist File sfl to import a Sound Forge regions Playlist file e Choose Session 8 File
39. and 1633 Hz sine waves e MF signals are used internally by the telephone networks and are generated with a combination of 700 900 1100 1300 1500 and 1700 Hz sine waves Specify the output length in seconds of each tone in the Single tone length box Specify the length in seconds of silence between tones in the Break length box Specify the pause length in seconds to be inserted for a pause character in the Pause length box AE a i Select the Fade the edges of each tone check box to help prevent glitching 9 Specify the pause character in the Pause character box 10 Use the Insert new tone sequence at drop down list to specify where the generated tone is placed in the audio file 11 Click OK EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 153 Generating audio with frequency modulation The Sound Forge FM Synthesis feature can be used to create complex sounds from simple waveforms using frequency modulation FM In frequency modulation the frequency of a waveform carrier is modulated by the output of another waveform modulator to create a new waveform If the frequency of the modulator is low the carrier is detuned slowly over time If the frequency of the modulator is high the carrier is modulated so quickly that numerous additional frequencies or sidebands will be created Using the FM Synthesis tool up to four waveforms operators can be used in a variety of configurations Depending on the configuration a wa
40. and choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed 4 From the Show wave drop down list choose Mono source The Musicbed pca waveform is displayed in the graph For more information on the dialog controls see Graphic Fade controls on page 179 5 From the Preset drop down list choose 6 dB exponential fade out The fade s envelope is displayed in relation to the waveform in the graph Graphic Fade Example music bed Preset Sys 6 dB exponential fade out m x Gain canel e 100 To ERT ooo Full volume at start of selection 75 9 E Bypass 50 fo 25 Pale ra biasa Matie L h Dia l r m ji lal 0 0 25 3 50 3b 75 Maximum Gain 100 0dB 200 5 dB 400 12 dB Show wave Mono source Reset Envelope More 00 00 04 738 00 00 09 858 00 00 05 119 e Zero volume at end of selection 100 178 CHAPTER 11 6 Click OK The specified fade is applied to the selection a Example music bed amp E DNONM Im P llm Ad 00 00 04 738 00 00 09 858 00 00 05 120 1 908 Creating a custom graphic fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file Select the first half of the audio approximately five seconds From the Process menu choose Fade and choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed Pr N From the Show wave drop down list choose Mono source The Musicbed pca waveform displays in the graph For more information on the dialo
41. automatically In some very fast computers automatic scrolling while selecting is too fast to use accurately When this option is turned on drag selecting will cause a slow scroll Tip Click the right mouse button while selecting to toggle slow scrolling Select this check box if you want to be warned before mixing data that has different sample rates Mixing data of different sample rates may produce unintended results Select this check box if you want the application to present a confirmation message box before exiting Because the application s drawing routines are highly optimized they increase the chance of causing little known video card problems to arise Some video cards have bugs in their drivers that can make your system lock up when the application tries to draw a waveform Compatible draw mode uses a different method of drawing the waveform that although not as smooth puts less stress on the video card With some video cards this mode actually increases the draw speed However more flashing can occur When this check box is selected a less optimized method of scrolling the data window will be used In some instances this can reduce interference problems between your audio and video card when Smooth Scrolling playback is selected When this check box is selected a stucco texture will be used for the application background Select this check box to enable support for WAV files up to 4 GB Clear the check box for compatibi
42. convert the file into separate mono files you can select a channel and drag it to the Sound Forge workspace to create a new file quickly apply the process and merge the files into a new multichannel file 2 Choose a command from the Process Effects or FX Favorites menu The dialog for the selected effect is displayed Plug in I ___ ______ 2 oonlinehel Sony Simple Delay Shine meen p Preset Preset x SONY imple Delay E cancel 3 0 dB 3 0 dB r m Delay time 0 001 to 5 0 seconds 0 400 Preview Preview Stop H Bypass Tempo sync delay V Real time Effect controls V Multiple delays Feedback Decay time 0 1 to 20 0 seconds 2 0 Tempo s deca UU easure Dry out Delay out Inf to 0 dB Inf to 0 dB TE CPU T 00 00 00 000 00 00 30 650 00 00 30 650 Go to Previous Next Event buttons 3 Choose a preset from the Preset drop down list and adjust the parameters in the dialog to achieve the effect you want For help on the different controls in the effect dialog click the Help button 5 WORKING WITH EFFECTS 191 4 Click the Preview button to test out the effect Adjust the settings as needed and click Stop to end the preview Tips Ifthe selection you made in the data window needs to be adjusted click the Selection button to eee the selection selected and preview and P the effect for each event 5 Click OK During processing a progress meter
43. decibels defined 43 digital vs analog levels 44 setting digital audio levels 44 mono files converting from stereo 176 converting to stereo or multichannel 175 mono to stereo conversion 105 See also stereo to mono conversion mono compatibility meters 48 mouse shortcuts 330 mouse terminology 21 mouse wheel navigation 21 moving markers 115 regions 124 MTC sync 251 253 MTU 335 Multi Band Dynamics effect 41 204 multichannel audio applying effects 191 cutting selections in 72 deleting selections in 73 editing 109 112 editing files 110 opening files 110 recording 134 136 routing channels to hardware outputs 110 supported file formats 109 synchronizing sonograms 280 synchronizing Spectrum Analysis graphs 276 multichannel files creating from mono 175 overview 51 previewing channels 53 selecting data 51 single channel editing 53 toggling channel selections 52 Multi Tap Delay effect 41 203 musical instrument files 239 242 musical time intervals 122 Mute button 40 Mute process 182 naming automatically naming markers 115 automatically naming regions 123 markers 114 regions 123 navigating overview bar 83 previewing audio with pre roll 81 scrubbing 84 85 setting cursor position 81 Spectrum Analysis graphs 276 navigating continued using mouse wheel 21 Navigation toolbar 38 New button 36 New Window dialog 64 new windows See data windows creating Noise Gate effect 41 10
44. to listen to the file 3 Click the Stop Preview button or select a different file to stop previewing the file Tip To automatically preview selected files click the Auto Preview button on the Explorer window s transport bar Opening media To open a media file into a new data window from the Explorer window double click the file To open a media file in a specific data window drag the media file from the Explorer window to the data window Obtaining or editing CD information If Sound Forge can access information about a track or CD either from the file or CD itself or from a local cache it automatically reads and displays this information when you insert a CD or browse your computer However if this information is not available the software can retrieve information over the Internet from Gracenote MusiclD Once Sound Forge obtains information from Gracenote MusiclD it is saved to a local cache so the information appears more quickly the next time the tracks are displayed GETTING STARTED 57 If the software cannot connect to the Gracenote Media Database and the appropriate CD information is not available on your computer the tracks are simply listed numerically In this case you can edit CD information and submit it to the Gracenote Media Database Notes e Using Gracenote MusiclD requires an active Internet connection e For more information on using Gracenote MusiclD refer to the Gracenote Web site at
45. 00 00 02 00 00 04 m o Drag the selection to the E destination window Inf BB wow sound editing l ar Si RE V EJE Sound editing just ge EREI And ea EF An 00 00 02 00 00 04 gt i Selection is pasted into z Drag and drop the destination window ig paste indicator Jard M gt Ebt WY 00 00 03 299 5 Release the mouse button The selection is pasted into the destination window 148 CHAPTER 9 Elsien Eivo amp at 00 00 00 ERED Sound editing just gets easier vr A 00 00 00 301 00 00 02 3 00 00 04 mob me mab 1 512 00 00 06 TEAST 1 819 Mixing yi Open the Voiceover pca and Drumhit pca audio files Select all audio data in the Drumhit data window Drag the selection to the Voiceover data window e A shaded region representing the source selection appears in the destination window e An M appears in the box adjacent to the pointer Tip When dragging a selection to paste sound data drag up or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length B wow sound editing Cole E Silence EEA Wow EJE Sound editing just gets easier FERRY And easier F A AE 00 00 00 0 Inf 4 0 pem Pa T K pi E gt efe 00 00 01 475 00 00 04 473 00 00 02 997 1 512 Drag and drop mix indicator f Position the leading edge o
46. 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog is displayed 2 Choose Default from the Keyboard map drop down list and click OK to restore the default configuration 320 CHAPTER 22 Appendix A Shortcuts This appendix contains information about the shortcuts you can use to make editing in Sound Forge Pro software quicker and easier Keyboard shortcuts The following shortcuts represent the default configuration Your system may differ if you ve used the Customize Keyboard window to customize your keyboard shortcuts For more information see Customizing keyboard shortcuts on page 319 The available shortcut keys are arranged in tables according to function Project file shortcuts Command Keyboard Shortcut Create a new data window Ctrl N Create a new data window without displaying the New Window dialog Ctrl Shift N Open a sound file or project Ctrl O Save modified sound data back to the file Ctrl S Display File Properties window Alt Enter Close the active data window Ctrl W Exit Sound Forge Alt F4 APPENDIX A 321 Magnification and view shortcuts Command Keyboard Shortcut Set input focus to the waveform display in the active window Alt 0 Show set input focus to the Explorer window Alt 1 Show set input focus to the File Properties window Alt 2 or Alt Enter Show set input focus to the Video Preview window Alt 3 Show set input focus to the Time Display window Alt 4 Show se
47. 112 Using Markers Regions and the Playlist Cutlist 0 ccc cece cece eee eeees 113 Why use markers regions and the Playlist 0 0 0 cece cece cc cee eee eee e ee eeeees 113 RAVIGINAVIOAHON 2h esa eer Hips coun Clatau raced eae O ENEE 113 Added effects for streaming media ccc ccc cece cece tence eee e eee ee eeeneneeneees 113 MultipleVersions Of edits 2 4 0 2 c 0i4eenseresacusense eased aundaesseesiateeseeestasiweaass 113 MIDI synchronization and triggering cece ccc cece eee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeees 113 SIM MN GLK ON Gs cas s cvateseouina e unas ee E E 10s s ce E E ae deans ree eeeee tne 114 iNsering Markers lt caccaccaveuiecesscueuncusedad EEEN ESANA EAT EEA EEEE ARARA 114 Naming or renaming Markers ssssususuesunsueseesuseesorsorseesorserresserseserseeso 114 Changing the marker position ccc eee eee eee e eee e eens eee eeeeeeeeeeeenes 115 Delenn k E chon ches ans das Hee ceeny Cl aues sean cad sates ags E ENER 115 Deleting all markers ANd regions ccc ccc cc ccc cece eee eee eee eee e nent eeeeenees 115 Deleting all markers within the selected area 1 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc ee eee ee eeeeeeees 116 PrEVIE WING a IMOLKel E E E E E E E E newaaaneuueweaseniawen 116 Triggering a marker using MIDI commands cece ccc eee eee e ee eeeeeen eens 116 Using markers to create regiOns ccc ccc cc ccc eect eee teen eee eee nent eeeeneees 116 Detecting and marking clipping
48. 195 SAVING PIG CHAINS gence tect E E N E E A EE E E 195 Saving individual plug in settings as a custom preset cece cece ee ee eee ete eeees 196 Loading plug in chains or plug in presets ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 196 Using the Plug In Manager cc ccc ccc cee eee ee eee eee eee eee e eee eeeeees 197 Applying a plug in or chain to a Media file 0 ccc ccc cece cence ee eee nee eeeeennes 197 Renaming a PU Nie 2easacvsewedoedcouscusemidnecacasicddvedacenadht RERA RASENE SAFIER 198 MANGU oreen E N E E ESEE E 198 Organizing effects in the FX Favorites Menu sssssussesussesesesreseseererrsrsressers 198 Using the Preset Manager ccc ccc ccc cece eee EEEE 199 Automating effect parameters cece ccc ccc eee eee nett e eee eeeeeeneees 200 Adding an effect automation envelope ccc cece cect cece eee e eee ee eeeneeeeneees 200 Adding a volume or panning envelope ccc ccc cece eee eee cece eens eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 200 Adjusting effect parameters with envelopes ccc cece ccc eee eect eee e ee eneeeeeneees 201 Previewing effect automation 0 ccc ccc cc ccc eee e eee e ene e eee eee eeeennees 201 Applying GHects AULOMAUON 3 24 0 500 videsiess iri tend exon eri hina ceeded Cider iohewateddausns 201 Showing or hiding effect automation envelopes cece eee cece eee eee eeees 201 Enabling or bypassing effect automation envelopes cece cece ence eee e
49. 206 207 Pitch Shift effect 41 207 Play All button 37 Play as Cutlist button 34 Play as Sample button 34 Play button 37 Play Clipboard button 36 Play Normal button 34 Play Plug In Chainer button 34 playback mode 34 playbar current playback mode 34 Forward button 34 overview 34 Rewind button 34 shuttle controls 34 playing clipboard contents 70 playing files 60 auto scrolling 60 current playback position 60 from Playlist 130 from specified point 61 Loop Playback mode 61 overview bar 83 selections 61 playing recorded audio 140 Playlist adding regions using commands 128 adding regions using drag and drop 128 benefits of using 113 button 39 changing region order 129 copying to clipboard 132 Count column 128 creating files from 130 deleting regions from 129 X INDEX Playlist continued editing regions 129 moving regions 129 opening Playlist files 132 overview 26 playing from 130 repeating regions during playback 129 replicating regions 129 saving to file 131 stop points 130 treating as Cutlist 131 understanding 128 viewing 128 Playlist files opening 132 saving 131 Playlist toolbar See Regions Playlist toolbar Plug In Chainer Adding plug ins 197 adding plug ins to chains 193 audio tail data processing mode 195 bypassing plug ins 195 configuring plug ins 194 creating chains 193 loading saved chains 196 loading saved presets 196 Plug In Manager 197 Preset Man
50. 250 CHAPTER 16 Sound Forge software and MIDI timecode synchronization MIDI timecode MTC is a method of using SMPTE timing signals to synchronize multiple devices Although MIDI timecode is typically used to synchronize audio and video it can also be used to synchronize playback devices You can synchronize to external MTC or generate MTC for other devices to follow For more information see SMPTE Timecode on page 333 You can also specify start times of regions in the Regions List to synchronize digital audio with additional timed events For example if a MIDI sequencer generates SMPTE timecode you can synchronize to it with its own SMPTE timecode and initiate region playback at specified times MTC synchronization versus Note On MIDI triggering Synchronizing to MTC is similar to synchronizing to other MIDI events and can be used in many of the same situations The major advantage of MTC synchronization is that it allows for you to specify accurate SMPTE start times However MTC synchronization requires more of your system s processing power When triggering a limited number of sounds in the software from a sequencer it is preferable to use Note On MIDI Triggering For more information see Triggering file playback on page 247 Playing regions using MTC from a sequencer Triggering region playback in Sound Forge software from a sequencer using MTC involves three procedures e Configuring the regions e Enabling MIDI input synchr
51. 4 Click OK The custom pan is applied to the file PROCESSING AUDIO 185 Pan Expand controls The following controls are located in the Pan Expand dialog Control Description Process mode The Process mode drop down list contains the following options e Pan preserve stereo separation Applies the pan effect without mixing the channels thereby simulating the spectral positioning of stereo recordings e Pan mix channels before panning Mixes the left and right channels prior to applying panning effects e Stereo expand Allows you to contract or expand the image of stereo audio from dead center mono to completely panned wide no center channel e Mix mid side MS recording to left and right channels Simulates a recording technique in which one microphone is pointed directly at the source and used to record the center mid channel and a second microphone is pointed 90 degrees away from the source side and used to record the stereo image For proper playback on most systems MS recordings must be converted to standard left right orientation To convert an MS recorded track to a left right track first ensure that the center channel is in the left track and the side channel on the right The MS mix function is then used to set the width of the stereo image for the converted track Output gain Determines the amount of gain applied to the signal following pan expand processing Show wave The Show wave drop down list provides s
52. 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Redo H Redo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 3 Inthe Redo pane click the Play button corresponding to the Mix operation The audio file plays with the mixed drum track 4 Select the Mix operation again and choose Redo from the Edit menu The drum track is remixed into the Voiceover pca waveform and the Mix operation is returned to the Undo pane 5 Select the Trim Crop operation in the Undo pane and click the Undo button 4 Only the Mix operation is undone and moved to the Redo pane This is due to the fact that operations can only be undone or redone in the order originally performed GETTING STARTED 77 6 Double click the Cut operation in the Undo pane The Cut and Trim Crop operations are both undone in the waveform and moved to the Redo pane Undo Redo History Undo Redo History Undo Undo H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 Be Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Redo H Redo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 Redo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Redo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Redo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 Tip To quickly undo and redo operations in the Undo Redo History window double click the operation Clearing the Undo Redo History for the current file Clearing the current file s Undo Redo
53. 5 From the Preset drop down list choose the 3 dB exponential fade out preset Notice that the dialog s controls update to reflect the new preset and the effect automatically previews 6 Select the Bypass check box The original audio previews with no effects For more information see Bypassing a process while previewing on page 169 7 Clear the Bypass check box and click OK The 3 dB exponential fade out preset is applied to the audio file Note An effect or process is not applied to the audio data until you click OK PROCESSING AUDIO 167 Creating presets You can also create custom effects and save them as presets 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and then choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed 3 From the Preset drop down list choose the 3 dB exponential fade out preset The dialog s controls change to reflect the preset 4 Drag any of the graphic fade points to a new position Graphic Fade Wow sound editing Preset Sys 3 dB exponential fade out kd m x Maximum Gain 100 0dB 200 5 dE 400 12 dB Show wave Reset Envelope 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 5 Click the Save Preset button The Save Preset dialog appears 6 Enter a name for the preset and click OK The new preset is saved and added to the dialog s drop down list Deleting presets To delete a preset choose it from the Preset
54. 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Services supplied and or device manufactured under license for following Open Globe Inc United States Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype MusiclD and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote LPEC LPEC is a trademark of Sony Corporation Microsoft DirectX programming interface Portions utilize Microsoft DirectX technologies Copyright 1999 2008 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Microsoft Windows Media 9 Portions utilize Microsoft Windows Media technologies Copyright 1999 2008 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved PNG file format Copyright 2008 World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathematics Keio University All rights reserved This work is distributed under the W3C Software License in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTIBILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE http www w3 org Consortium Legal 2002 copyright software 20021231 Real RealMedia RealAudio and RealVideo applications 2008 RealNetworks Inc Patents Pending All rights reserved Real Real Media RealAudio RealVideo and the Real logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of RealNetworks Inc
55. AE E 207 ROVE eaa E E A A E E EAA ARSA AAA 208 le a eO E A E E E E pan EEE E E E EEE EEN 208 WaVe FI O E r E EET ES E E A A NEE E E E 208 Using Acoustic Mirror and Wave Hammer cece cece eee e eee eeeeeeeees 209 What are the Acoustic Mirror effects 2 0 0 0 ccc cece eect cece e eee e ee eeeeeneees 209 WE aCOUStIC sgnal Ore 46 icadovetucueun EEFE AAIE EEEIEE NEREA 209 Adding an acoustic signature to an audio file ccc cc ccc cece eee e eee eeeees 209 Adjusting the acoustic signature ccc eee cece ence eee e eee e eens eeeeeeannes 209 GeNelal TAO COMUO erener era EEEE lew wesrsas EEEE RTTE neon 210 Envelope tab controls 2 0 cece cece ene e eee ee eeeeeeeees 211 Summary tab controls scceuaqucedusceuncacasinatas ones cone suena dawadenscueeteneouncnaeees 212 Recover Tab CONOIS wewwcaedouws oxcsn eeu yeaa EETA PETEA EENT rSn 212 Creating IMPUSE TES s rererere rrr EEEE EERE EEr EEN 214 What you need to create custom impulses ccc ccc cent eee eee een eee eeennees 214 Recording the impulse in an acoustic space 6 ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeeees 214 Recording the impulse through an electronic device cece ccc ccc eee eeeeeeee 215 Recovering TNE IMPUISE circav c wek crved i tinner EErEE A EFN EEE 215 Trimming the impulse file ssisessisrisireserirircisicesiesisr esere ie esie enir ssia 216 Adding summary information to your impulse file cc cece ccc ene e eee eees 217 Using the new
56. AVI Windows Media Video WMV QuickTime MOV and MPEG video files You can edit a video file s audio track with single frame accuracy Viewing video You can view the video portion of a file in the data window s video strip and in the Video Preview window You can also view video on an external monitor Using the video strip Though Sound Forge software does not perform video editing the video strip display allows you to navigate video files Right click the Edit Tool Selector to view the video strip r a Moon mov Status Time Ruler yo v v v Time Zoom Overview in Video Strip eee v J Small triangle indicates i the location of the frame on the timeline Level Ruler Level Zoom Scrollbar CD Tracks m dan Inf 4 Data Window Only Set as Default dia lt K a Eet or 00 00 00 000 00 00 06 005 1 512 By default the video strip appears when you open a file containing video If the video strip is not displayed right click the data window s Edit Tool Selector and choose Video Strip from the shortcut menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command and the video strip is displayed To hide the video strip choose Video Strip from the shortcut menu again Changing video strip height You can change the video strip height by dragging the thin bar at the bottom of the video strip To change the default height for all video files you open choose Preferences from the O
57. Artist Integrated logo Beatmapper Cinescore CD Architect DVD Architect Jam Trax Perfect Clarity Audio Photo Go Sound Forge Super Duper Music Looper Vegas Vision Series and Visual Creation Studio are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Creative Software Inc in the United States and other countries All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners in the United States and other countries Apple QuickTime Apple QuickTime application is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF file format Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Boost Software License Version 1 0 August 17th 2003 Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license the Software to use reproduce display distribute execute and transmit the Software and to prepare derivative works of the Software and to permit third parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so all subject to the following The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement including the above license grant this restriction and the following disclaimer must be included in all copies of the Software in whole or in part and all derivative
58. Because the signal to noise ratio decreases when you decrease the bit depth of a file you should maximize the volume of the sound file using the Volume or Normalize functions before performing the conversion 1 From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose iZotope MBIT Dither from the submenu The iZotope MBIT Dither dialog is displayed iZotope MBIT Dither Example music bed Preset Hx cani Bit depth a r Dither mode Tye o Preview Noise shaping None ti Bypass Dither bits ati i Auto blank Minimize peaks Silence harmonics More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed Item Description Bit depth Choose the desired bit depth from the drop down list Note ncreasing a file s bit depth cannot improve the quality of the existing audio but does allow higher resolution for processing Dither mode Choose a setting from the drop down to choose the type of dithering that will be applied to mask quantization noise e Type 1 Uses a traditional rectangular probability distribution function e Type 2 Uses a traditional rectangular probability distribution function e MBIT Uses a proprietary algorithm to offer superior results for all types of source material Noise shaping Choose a setting from the drop down list to control the amount of noise shaping that will be applied When Ty
59. Choose a preset from the Preset drop down list or adjust the dialog controls as needed For more information see Applying presets on page 167 Note Plug ins that can change the length of audio data such as reverb or delay will use Insert Tail Data mode Tails will be added to the waveform and audio to the right of the tail will be moved to accommodate the extra audio 4 Click the Preview button to hear the effects of your processing settings Select the Bypass check box to hear the unprocessed signal 5 Click the OK button to start processing During processing a progress meter is displayed at the bottom of the data window You can cancel the operation at any time by clicking the Cancel button to the left of the progress meter or you can press the Escape key Note When applying an effect to a file via scripting you can only specify the current time channel selection DoMenu or a new time channel selection DoEffect Event selection is not exposed to scripts When processing musical instrument files all events in the time channel selection will be processed If no selection exists or the entire file is selected as when using the Batch Converter all events will be processed Saving changes After you re finished processing a musical instrument file you can use the Save or Save As commands to save your changes to the original file or to a new file For more information see Saving a file on page 65 and Using the Save As Render
60. Clarity Audio Format Sony Perfect Clarity Audio Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono Length 00 00 05 000 x Video No Video Length File information Select to automatically Unity note Loops SMPTE Rgns Play Cmds Yes No No preview files The Open dialog contains several features that allow you to locate and open audio files These features are detailed below Feature Files of type Recent Open as read only Auto play Append to current data window Open as CD tracks Merge L R to stereo 2 56 CHAPTER 3 Description Use this drop down list to specify the file format displayed in the system A variety of file formats are supported Tip Choose the CD Audio cda option from this list to extract audio tracks from a CD Use this drop down list to locate recently accessed folders Select this check box if you want to open sound files but you do not want to alter the data in the files This feature is useful if you only need to play the file or copy sections from the file You can still change the Regions List Playlist and summary information for the file but these changes must be saved to a new file Select this check box to automatically preview files as you select them in the Open dialog If you have multiple files selected you can select the Append to current data window check box to add the selected files to the end of the current data window Note When appending files to a data window be sure to use files
61. Compressor tab are used to compress the audio signal When applied properly compression reduces the dynamic range of audio and allows you increase overall loudness Compression has various uses For example applying heavy compression at a low threshold to electric guitar produces distortion The controls are explained below Sony Wave Harmer Example music bed reset Ont TE SONY Wave Hammer bout Cancel Bypass Compressor Inf Inf 0 0 eview 12 0 dE 40 1 0 0dB Scan mode el 3 Peak tee A Bypass Ae 12 RMS aa EF Ps Pal ey F Real time L Auto gain compensate pm 2 Use longer look ahead cae Smooth saturation 0 fE ee e Threshold Ratio Output gain input 60 to 0 dB 1 1 to Inf 1 30 to 30 dB Inpu Attack time 0 to 500 ms J 2 0 Release time 0 to 1 000 ms 4 100 0 Smartrelease 0 to 100 J a Compressor Volume Maximizer More CPL o 00 00 00 000 00 00 03 858 00 00 09 858 Control Description Threshold The Threshold fader is used to adjust the audio level at which compression is applied Audio with levels higher than the Threshold value are compressed while audio at levels lower than this value pass through the compressor uninterrupted Ratio The Ratio slider determines the amount of compression applied to audio signals surpassing the threshold A ratio of 1 1 applies no compression to audio surpassing the threshold while a ratio of 2 1 requires a 2 dB increase in actual volume t
62. Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl R Ctrl Shift R Ctrl S F3 Shift F3 Ctrl F3 Ctrl Shift F3 Drag and drop shortcuts Drag and drop allows you to quickly perform operations crossing between open data windows the Playlist Cutlist window the Regions List and the time ruler Command Drag to New Drag Mix Drag Paste Drag to Regions List Drag to Playlist Drag to Time Ruler Drag to Track List Drag CD Track Function To create a new file from the current selection drag the selection to an open area of the Sound Forge desktop Note You can also drag regions from the Regions List to the desktop To mix a selection drag the selection from the source to the place where you want to mix the selected data You can drag the selection to the same data window or another data window Note When dragging a selection to mix sound data drag up or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length To paste a selection hold Ctrl and drag the selection from the source to the place where you want to paste the selected data You can drag the selection to the same data window or another data window Note When dragging a selection to paste sound data drag up or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length To add the current selection to the Regions List drag it to
63. Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories AAC is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories lastique Pro Portions of this product use zplane lastique Pro V2 audio time stretching technology FLAC Ogg File Formats 2008 Xiph org Foundation Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the foundation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Gracenote CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132
64. Disc Information dialog appears Use the Gracenote MusiclD Disc Information dialog to edit information about the CD For help on submitting CD information click the Help Guidelines button in this dialog When you are finished entering the information click the OK button to submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote database Extracting audio from CDs The Explorer window allows you to easily extract audio from a CD into a data window Each audio track on the CD is extracted into a separate data window 1 Use the Explorer window to browse to and select your CD drive The CD s audio tracks appear in the right pane of the Explorer window Select the tracks you want to extract Drag the tracks to the main Sound Forge workspace The software begins extracting the selected tracks into individual data windows To stop the extraction process you can click the Cancel button on the status bar to stop the whole process or on the individual data windows to stop extracting a specific track Tip To extract a single audio track into a new data window double click the track in the right pane of the Explorer window 58 CHAPTER 3 Using Explorer views You can control the information that appears in the Explorer window by clicking the Views button and selecting a view These options are explained below Item Description Tree View Displays all of the available drives and folders that you can choose from to find files Region View Dis
65. From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears From the Save as type drop down list choose a video file format Name the file in the File name box Select or clear the following check boxes as needed Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox Selecting this check box stretches the source video frame if the destination frame size differs When this check box is cleared letterboxing or pillarboxing is used to keep the frame aspect correct Fast video resizing Selecting this check box speeds the process of saving video When this check box is cleared the time required to save the file can increase dramatically Clear this check box only when you have critical material where nothing but the highest quality video rendering will do From the Template drop down list select a template for rendering and compressing the file You can click Custom to customize the settings in the Custom Settings dialog For help on the different settings click the Help button or press Shift F1 Click OK to close the Custom Settings dialog and return to the Save As dialog Tip You can save the custom settings to use again by entering a template name in the Template box and clicking the Save Template button W Click Save 272 CHAPTER 18 Chapter 19 Using Spectrum Analysis This chapter introduces you to the concept of frequency and describes the Sound Forge Pro Spectrum Analysis Spectrum Analysis allows y
66. From the Tools menu choose Repair and choose Replace from the submenu The selection is replaced with the selection of identical length immediately preceding the damaged data In addition rapid crossfades are created at the beginning and end of the replacement selection to prevent a new glitch from being created E sound L frg H H E 00 00 00 000 Replacement data Selection data Repairing audio glitches manually with the Pencil tool The Pencil tool is for users who prefer to repair their audio glitches manually This tool allows you to repair waveform glitches by redrawing the damaged waveform section However the Pencil tool can only be used when a file s waveform displays at a zoom ratio of 1 32 or lower 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Zoomin tightly on the glitch 3 Select the Pencil tool using any of the following methods e From the Edit menu choose Tool and choose Pencil from the submenu e Click the Pencil Tool button 4 in the Standard toolbar e Click the Edit Tool Selector in the top left corner of the data window until the Pencil tool is displayed 152 CHAPTER 9 4 Drag to draw a new waveform section The new section is integrated into the original waveform replacing the section containing the glitch Repairing audio using Audio Restoration plug in Sound Forge software includes an DirectX plug in part of the Noise Reduction plug in called Audio Restoration that you can use to remove surfac
67. History frees up disk space by deleting the file s temporary undo redo files However deleting these temporary files prevents you from undoing changes made to the file since it was last saved or beyond if you have the Allow Undo past Save check box enabled on the General tab of the Preferences dialog To clear the undo redo history for the current file go to the Edit menu and choose Clear Undo Redo History Note A file s undo redo history is also automatically cleared when you close the file or exit the software Selecting status formats The status format determines how a file s position and length information is displayed The following table briefly describes supported status formats hh hours mm minutes ss seconds and ff frames For more information see SMPTE Timecode on page 333 Format Format name Description Samples Number of samples Numbered starting with zero Time Hours minutes seconds and milliseconds hh mmiss sss Seconds Seconds and fractions of seconds SSSSS SSS to three decimal places Time amp Frames Hours minutes seconds and frames hh mm ss ff Absolute Frames Frames and fractions of frames Numbered starting with zero to three decimal places Measures amp Beats Measures beats and quarter beats measu res beats q uarters SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps SMPTE at 24 frames per second for hh mmiss ff synchronizing with film SMPTE EBU 25 fps Video SMPTE at 25 frames per second for hh mm ss f
68. ISRF ITCH DISP TLEN TRCK TURL TVER LOCA TORG 30 CHAPTER 2 Name Commissioned Comments Copyright Creation Date Cropped Dimensions Dots Per Inch Engineer Genre Keywords Lightness Medium Name Title CD Text Palette Setting Product Subject Software Sharpness Source Album Source Form Technician Sound Scheme Title Text Length ms Track Number URL Version Location Organization Description The name of the person or organization that commissioned the subject of the file General comments about the file or the subject of the file If the comment is several sentences long end each sentence with a period Do not include new line characters Copyright information for the file For example Copyright 2009 Sony Creative Software Inc If there are multiple copyrights separate them with a semicolon followed by a space The date the subject of the file was created List dates in year month day format padding one digit months and days with a zero on the left For example 1964 03 02 for March 2 1964 Describes whether an image or sound has been cropped and if so how it was cropped For example Third movement first through fourth bars The size of the original subject of the file For example 8 5 in h 11 in w The dots per inch setting of the digitizer used to produce the file The name of the engineer who worked on the file If there are multiple enginee
69. In the following example channel 1 is routed to the sound card s first output channel 2 is routed to the second output and so on Enable 1 2 3 4 5 a Analog out 1 O H H H Analog out 2 H O O O Analog out 3 O O O Analog out 4 O O O H Analog out 5 O O O O g Analog out 6 O O O O O Analog out 7 O O O O OL Analog out 6 H H H H rae gt Playback buffering seconds Specifies the total amount of buffering that is used during playback The larger the number the more buffering is performed during playback This value must be as low as possible without gapping To set it start at 25 and play back a typical song Move some of the track faders If the playback gaps try increasing this slider in small increments until the gapping goes away If you simply cannot get playback to be free of gapping you need to install more RAM in your computer so you can increase buffering buy a faster access hard drive or minimize the number of audio plug ins you are trying to use simultaneously Record Click the Record tab to adjust record input routing and buffering settings Recording device routing Use this control to assign channels from multichannel audio files to outputs on your sound card the numbered columns represent audio channels and the rows represent the selected record device s inputs Select the Enable check box to enable an input and select a radio button to assign the input to a channel In the following exam
70. Lock Loop Length button a second time turns this feature off and allows loop points to be edited independently with no regard for the loop s original length Tip The Lock Loop Length button has the same function as the Lock Loop Region Length command in the Options menu Crossfading loops You can use the Crossfade Loop tool to loop audio from difficult source material It allows you to crossfade the end of a loop with the beginning of the loop in order to create a smoother more natural sounding transition In addition you can configure the Crossfade Loop tool to crossfade the beginning of the audio loop with the beginning of the post loop audio on the loop s final pass This smooths the occasionally awkward transition from looped to non looped audio Tip Use the Loop Tuner before applying the Crossfade Loop command to match the loop ends as well as possible Using the Crossfade Loop tool 1 Open the Loop pca file A sustaining loop appears in the data window 2 From the Tools menu choose Crossfade Loop The Crossfade Loop dialog is displayed 3 Drag the Loop slider to configure the percentage of the loop to be crossfaded Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release ey T DO A _ ye NY PENN a be M Loop 1 to 100 30 M Loop 1 to 100 a0 Post Loop 1 to 100 Post Loop 1 to 100 Preview mode al Preview mode eT ot Loop the Lo
71. MDUISe ile v 2dcadaacacedrccdw ds EEEn EEREN LEESE beeen wade 217 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Using impulse files in creative WAYS cc ccc cece nent eee e eee eeeeeeneeees 217 Processing individual audio elements ccc cece eee e eee eee eee eennees 217 Adding realistic stereo to MONO recordings ccc ee eee eee e nent eee e ee eeeeeeeeaes 217 Cheating Specia CCCs ncscvecedeacueeidascdinweediaeieused eseheteeciendedudhings seunaaess 217 Recreating spaces for foley effects and dialog replacement cc cece e eee e eee ees 218 Panning with head related transfer functions cece cece eee eee eeeennnees 218 Troubleshooting the Acoustic Mirror effect 0 cece cece eee eee ee een enneees 218 Stuttering during real time previewing cece cece cece cette eee e ee eeeeees 218 Impulses do not recover properly ccc cece cc ccc ee ee ence eee e eee e ee eennaes 219 Recovered impulse iS too NOISY 6 ccc eee ARTET E eee e nena eeeennaes 219 Error Message explanations ccc cece cece eee eee eee eee e eee e eee eeeeenees 219 What is the Wave Hammer plug in 0 0 0 cece eee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 221 Displaying the Wave Hammer plug in ccc ccc ccc cence eee eee e eee eee eennees 221 The Wave Hammer dialog cc ccc ccc ce eee eee eee ence eee eect eeeeees 221 COMPLesSOrlaOr sons c5caesie ethene cary i aaeeea iy sodd Gee wae eens eee sae eet oun ERIN 221 Vo
72. MIDI In Out and choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate that synchronization to MTC is ready Configuring the sequencer 1 Set the sequencer s MIDI output port to correspond with the Sound Forge MIDI input port 2 Turn on the sequencer s MTC output If the sequencer supports generating MTC it is now ready to sync 3 Press the sequencer s Play button The Sound Forge MIDI In status box displays the same SMPTE time as the sequencer s SMPTE time At the specified SMPTE time playback of the region is started without interrupting the sequencer s output to other devices Playing regions using MTC from an external device When using a hardware device that generates MTC the configuration procedure is basically the same as outlined above Simply specify the device s MTC output driver as the Sound Forge MIDI input port in the Preferences dialog s MIDI Sync tab Using Sound Forge software to generate MTC for a MIDI sequencer You can generate MTC for other devices to follow However it is important to understand that the software only generates MTC while playing a file or from a playlist Generating MTC involves two procedures e Configuring the Sound Forge software e Configuring the sequencer Configuring Sound Forge software 1 Open an audio file 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed 3 Click the MIDI Sync tab
73. Monitor check box to enable the recording meters The peak meters represent the volume of the recording input For best results the peak level should be somewhere in the yellow range with an occasional red you want your input to be as loud as possible without clipping You can display a peak meter VU PPM a phase scope and mono compatibility meter for each channel To toggle the display of each meter right click the Meters tab in the Record dialog and choose a command from the shortcut menu A check mark is displayed to indicate which meters are currently visible For more information about the VU PPM meters see Using the VU PPM meters on page 46 For more information about the phase scopes see Using phase scopes on page 48 For more information about the mono compatibility meters see Using the mono compatibility meters on page 48 You can work with the record input meters in much the same way you do with other meters in the application For more information see Monitoring levels in digital audio on page 43 Tips e Click the Reset button or press Alt T to reset clip indicators or held peaks or valleys e Right click the meters and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the meters scale e Ifyou are going to decrease the bit depth of your sound file after recording it is particularly important that you record with the loudest possible levels High recording levels ensure that you will use the maximum possible dynamic range
74. Note Turning this option off can correct the artifacts but your rendering times will increase significantly For more information see Saving a video file on page 272 10 Click the Save button 66 CHAPTER 3 Creating custom templates If the file type you select supports it you can create custom settings for saving files by clicking the Custom button Note f a file type supports custom templates a Custom button appears next to the Template drop down list after you choose the file type When you click the Custom button a Custom Settings dialog appears Adjust the settings for the different template properties as needed For help on the different settings click the Help button or press Shift F1 When you are finished editing the template properties click the OK button Saving custom templates You can save a custom template to use again by typing a template name in the Template box and clicking the Save Template button id Deleting custom templates You can delete a custom template by selecting the template from the Template drop down list and clicking the Delete Template button X Creating custom rendering settings The Custom Settings dialog appears when you click Custom in the Render As dialog You can use the Custom Settings dialog to create custom encoding templates for many of the file formats available in the software 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears 2 Choose your p
75. Pencil Tool Selects the Pencil tool For more information clipboard This command has no effect if there is no see Repairing audio glitches manually with the Pencil tool on selection For more information see Cutting on page 72 page 152 Copy Copies selected audio data to the clipboard This Event Tool Selects the Event tool For more information see command has no effect if there is no selection For more Using the Event Tool on page 157 information see Copying on page 70 Paste Inserts a copy of the clipboard data at the current f Envelope Tool Selects the Envelope tool For more insertion point If there is a selection this command information see Adjusting envelopes on page 202 replaces the selected data with the clipboard data For more information see Pasting on page 71 Mix Mixes a copy of the clipboard data with the current Interactive Tutorials Opens the Interactive Tutorials window where you can select tutorials and learn about the features in Sound Forge Transport toolbar The Transport toolbar also displays by default and contains basic audio transport buttons Record Click to display the Record dialog Loop Playback Toggles Loop Playback mode on and off Play All Plays the entire file from beginning to end regardless of cursor position selection or playlist Playback for musical instrument files behaves slightly differently than playback in a normal data window If no samples are
76. Pencil tool will be available Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the speed that will be used for scrubbing the timeline with the JKL keys or with a multimedia controller Specify the amount of RAM you want Sound Forge Pro to reserve for media recently read from or written to disk Reserving excessive amounts of RAM may decrease overall performance To turn off the cache choose 0 Type a value in the Wet Gain box or use the spinner to set the default level of the processed signal that will be mixed into the output Type a value in the Dry Gain box or use the spinner to set the default level of the unprocessed signal that will be mixed into the output Option Description Fade In Type a value in the Fade In box or use the spinner to set the default length of the fade in between the processed and unprocessed signal Click the Fade Curves button J and choose a curve type from the menu to set the speed of the fade in Fade Out Type a value in the Fade Out box or use the spinner to set the default length of the fade out between the processed and unprocessed signal Click the Fade Curves button fade out EN and choose a curve type from the menu to set the speed of the Labels tab The Labels tab allows you modify the default names that are assigned to data windows regions and markers Editing default data window names The Window labels section of the Labels tab allows you to modify
77. Regions List Recording begins at the position displayed in the Start box when you click the Record button and continues until you click the Stop button E When you stop recording the stop position becomes the start position for the next take which can be recorded immediately For more information see Using the Regions List on page 126 Multiple takes no Regions mode also allows several takes to be recorded without these takes being defined as regions Like the previous mode recording starts at the position displayed in the Start box when you click the Record button and continues until you click the Stop button Mf When you stop recording the stop position becomes the start position for the next take which can be recorded immediately Create a new window for each take is similar to Multiple takes creating Regions but creates a new data window for each take This is useful when recording audio data in which you will save each take as an individual file Punch In mode is used to record over a specific selection in an existing data window Specifying Punch In activates the Start End and Length boxes Recording begins at the position displayed in the Start box when you click the Record button and continues until one of the following occurs You click the Stop button W The cursor in the data window reaches the position displayed in the End box The length of the recorded data equals the value in the Leng
78. Right click the marker tag F and choose Update from the shortcut menu The marker is moved to the current cursor location Moving the marker to a specific location 1 Right click the marker tag F and choose Edit from the shortcut menu The Regions List window is displayed and the marker is selected in the list 2 Type a value in the Start box for the marker and press Enter The marker is moved to the new location Deleting markers Right click the marker tag F and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Deleting all markers and regions Right click in the marker bar choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All from the submenu All markers and regions are removed USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 115 Deleting all markers within the selected area Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All in Selection from the submenu All markers and regions in the selected area are removed Previewing a marker Click a marker s Play button in the Regions List 1 Right click the marker tag F and choose Edit from the shortcut menu The Regions List appears 2 Click the marker s Play button Triggering a marker using MIDI commands 1 Right click the marker tag F and choose Edit from the shortcut menu The Regions List appears 2 Choose a trigger type from the Trigger drop down list 3 Inthe Channel box specify the MIDI input channel for triggering 4 Inthe Note
79. SMPTE Film Sync time format runs at 24 fps frames per second This frame rate matches the standard crystal sync 16 33 mm film rate of 24 fps APPENDIX C 333 334 APPENDIX C Appendix D Using CSOUND MTU IRCAM BICSF and EBICSF Files Although Sound Forge Pro software supports a large number of sound file formats directly it does not support the CSOUND MTU IRCAM BICSF or EBICSF file types However you can use the Sound Forge Raw File Type capabilities to extract sound data from these file types About IRCAM files The IRCAM or IRCAM Gross format consists of a 1024 byte header prior to the audio data This header contains standard information like the number of channels sampling rate and data format but can also contain the name of the sample and comments This format is used by the MTU system and these files are frequently referred to as MTU files IRCAM files support two types of data formats 16 bit linear PCM and floating point data About BICSF and EBICSF files BICSF and EBICSF files Berkeley IRCAM CARL Sound File or Extended BICSF are extensions of the IRCAM format Instead of using the standard IRCAM header these files replace the first 28 bytes of the header with a standard NeXT Sun header This allows the IRCAM format to store additional information in its 1024 byte header while also allowing the files to be read by software that supports the NeXT Sun file format such as Sound Forge software Opening files B
80. This lowers the perceived noise floor and creates the illusion of cleaner audio High pass contour noise shaping attempts to push all quantization noise and error into high frequencies Equal loudness contour noise shaping attempts to push the noise under an equal loudness type of curve Click this button to view additional options that you can use to adjust your data window selection For more information see Adjusting the data window selection on page 170 Noise shaping places quantization noise near the audio s Nyquist frequency a value equal to one half of the file s sample rate Consider the following information e A file with a sample rate of 44 1 kHz has a Nyquist frequency of 22 05 kHz at the high end of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio perceived to be cleaner than it actually is A file with a sample rate of 22 kHz has a Nyquist frequency of 11 kHz well within the sensitive range of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio that is perceived to be noisier than it actually is lronically this defeats the entire purpose of the Noise shape control For this reason we do not recommend using noise shaping on files with sample rates less than 44 1 kHz PROCESSING AUDIO 173 iZotope MBIT Dither From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose iZotope MBIT Dither from the submenu to convert sound files to different bit depths and apply dithering Tip
81. Uniform Code Council For more information see http www uc council ord First track number on disc Type a number in the box to specify the track number of the first track Note Specifying a value other than 1 will produce a valid Red Book CD but some audio CD players may be unable to play the disc Name Title CD Text Type a title for the project If you select the Write CD Text check box on the Burn Disc at Once CD dialog this data will be written to your disc In order to display CD Text your CD player must support CD Text Notes In order to burn valid CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist information is optional If the Name Title box in the CD Information or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed e You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text Artist CD Text Type the name of the artist If you select the Write CD Text check box on the Burn Disc at Once CD dialog this data will be written to your disc In order to display CD Text your CD player must support CD Text Engineer Type the name of the person who mixed or edited the project Copyright Type copyright information for the project Comments Type any comments you want to associate with the project Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 From the View menu
82. a volume or panning envelope on page 200 Insert Pan Envelope Adds a panning envelope to the active data window For more information see Adding a volume or panning envelope on page 200 Insert Silence Inserts user configurable silence into audio files For more information see Inserting silence into a file on page 181 DTMF MF Tones Synthesis Generates dial tones used by telephone companies For more information see Generating DTMF MF tones on page 153 FM Synthesis Uses frequency modulation and additive synthesis to create complex sounds from simple waveforms For more information see Generating audio with frequency modulation on page 154 Simple Synthesis Generates a simple waveform of a given shape pitch and length For more information see Generating simple waveforms on page 155 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 39 Process toolbar The Process toolbar contains buttons corresponding to all commands located in the Process menu amp J Auto Trim Crop Removes silence and automatically fades in out the end points of each phrase For more information see Auto Trim Crop on page 171 Bit Depth Converter Converts a file to a different bit depth For more information see Bit Depth Converter on page 172 iZotope MBIT Dither Converts a file to a different bit depth and applies dithering For more information see iZotope MBIT Dither on page 174 Channel Converter Converts between mono and multichannel f
83. adapter is needed The computer and sampler must be powered down prior to connecting or disconnecting SCSI cables to prevent damage to the computer and or hardware Troubleshooting SCSI SMDI A brief description of some common problems encountered with SCSI and samplers follows Conflicting SCSI IDs When connecting devices on a SCSI chain each device must have a unique device identifier ID SCSI allows for up to eight unique ID values numbered 0 to 7 Typically device ID 7 is used for the internal SCSI controller card leaving ID 0 through 6 for other devices Note The ID of a bootable SCSI hard drive must be set to 0 The following table describes a typical SCSI configuration ID Devices 0 Hard Drive 1 CD ROM DVD ROM Drive 2 6 Samplers 7 SCSI Controller Card SAMPLING 245 Periodic transfer failures Messages such as The SCSI Device is not responding or A problem was encountered while transferring the sample may indicate a problem with a SCSI bus 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog is displayed 2 Click Configure The Sampler Configuration dialog is displayed 3 Repeat the selection of the SCSI host This causes a series of SCSI commands to be executed that may settle the bus If the problem persists power down and restart all equipment Sampler is recognized but does not transfer reliably The following items are possible causes of unreliable SCSI transfers Synchronous trans
84. amplitude of 0 5 LSB least significant bit Rectangular Identical to Half Rectangular but with a maximum dither noise amplitude of 1 LSB least significant bit Triangular Eliminates distortion products as well as any noise floor modulation but results in a slightly higher noise level The option typically works well in conjunction with noise shaping For more information see Noise shaping on page 103 Highpass Behaves like triangular dither but shifts its noise into higher frequencies This is typically the best option Triangular when used in conjunction with noise shaping For more information see Noise shaping on page 103 Gaussian Does not perform as well as Rectangular and Triangular dither but may be suitable for certain audio Noise shaping The Noise shaping value determines the aural positioning of quantization noise Using this control you can shift the noise into audio registers that are less perceptible to human hearing This lowers the perceived noise floor and creates the illusion of cleaner audio High pass contour noise shaping attempts to push all quantization noise and error into high frequencies Equal loudness contour noise shaping attempts to push the noise under an equal loudness type of curve Noise shaping dangers Noise shaping places quantization noise near the audio s Nyquist frequency a value equal to one half of the file s sample rate Consider the following information e A file with a sample r
85. and recalling window layOuts cece cece cee ence eens eee eeeeees 303 Loading default Window layouts cece cece cence eee eee e ene e eee eeneeeeees 303 Saving a window lay OUL 5 amecrou cca rennet rat peousiuinenenrteeruea nes Serre a 303 Loading a Saved layout ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee e eee eee eee e eee e eee eee eeeees 304 Adding a layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu cece cece e nent eeeees 304 Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu 0c cece cece eee ees 304 Deleting a layout from your computer 6 eect eee eee eee eee eeenes 304 Customizing the Time Display WINdOW 0c cece cece cece ence eee e eee eeeeees 305 DECUING I CICVCIICES ceniuvewecsaunde ENEIT ENEAN EVERTI ay aedaudalaas E 306 GMC e 4 oe vrata uae sine oh ee ter t eao Geass E dane cana EE teen seas os 306 Display ta Gankerenwacesiourunpedwe teen eays Gages so awedeewon senna en E E CEA 308 EGQUING 140 so e502tioouesesainwaeeones cies ge nescesucsteesatie E EEEE TA 310 Eio Sn e EE E T ch sancdaes ton eecen sere en EEEE E 311 FHS Ty GS Ae aa r E E A AE EEEE EEE EAE 312 MID SYNC TA eea aa E E E E E A E E AEE 312 PEVE ta eoar R NEE EE E AAA E E AE ARRENE CANAAN AEE ESA 313 SC LLY ea e S a E E E E EE E E E E ere 314 TOOD OD reaa ae E EEA AEE AA AAE E EEE ANEA E ASEEN E 314 COS a eae EEEE EEEE E E E E EAEE 315 AUTIO aD aE E EE E N E EE S ann seen e 316 WIQGO Gal 62444005 ESEE EA EEEE EE AEAE
86. applied where needed Fast Fourier Transform A Fourier transform is computationally intensive and for this reason it is common to use a technique called a Fast Fourier Transform FFT to perform spectral analysis The FFT utilizes mathematical shortcuts to reduce the processing time at the expense of putting limitations on the analysis size The analysis size also referred to as the FFT size indicates the number of samples from the audio signal used in analysis and also determines the number of discrete frequency bands When a large number of frequency bands are used the bands have a smaller bandwidth and this provides for more accurate frequency readings However because complex sounds have a rapidly changing spectrum a large analysis size can blur the time changing frequencies of a sound For example when performing FFT analysis of an audio file sampled at 44 100 Hz using an analysis size of 4096 almost 100 milliseconds 44 100 4096 of sound are analyzed If the sound is not constant for those 100 milliseconds it is impossible to focus on the instantaneous spectrum at smaller time intervals This is the trade off between time resolution and frequency resolution encountered when analyzing audio signals Spectrum Analysis allows you to perform precise FFT analysis and displays the resulting data in a spectrum graph ora sonogram display The spectrum graph allows real time monitoring of playback or input while the sonogram displays a playba
87. box specify the MIDI note that will trigger marker playback This value can be entered as a MIDI note value such as C4 or as a MIDI note number such as 60 Notes Ifthe Trigger from MIDI Timecode command Options gt MIDI In Out submenu is selected you can auto complete the Channel and Note values by pressing a key on your MIDI keyboard Triggers in the Regions List function differently from triggers specified in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist When using triggers in the Playlist Regions List or MIDI Triggers dialog be aware that they can interact to create unexpected results Sound Forge software first looks at the MIDI Triggers then the Regions List and then the Playlist when determining what to do when a MIDI command is detected If you want to use the triggers in the Regions List only turn off all the triggers in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist Using markers to create regions Once you have placed markers in a waveform you can use them to create regions For more information see Inserting regions based on marker positions on page 123 Detecting and marking clipping The clip indicators in the channel meters help you determine whether clipping occurs in your file and you can use the Find command to find audio that matches levels you specify For more control however you can use the Detect Clipping tool From the Tools menu choose Detect Clipping to scan a selection of audio for clipping and add markers w
88. button 4 in the Plug In Chainer window is not available when the Event Tool is selected Add Plug Ins to Chain Remove Selected Plug In Preview _ Selection Plug In Chainer E3 D x amp mi oe a a a ag d BI a Chain preset Parameter Automate Show Enable Modulation Rate Effects chain o chorus _ v Distortion o Modulation Depth Delay Effect preset Preset HEX Feedback Chorus Size Invert Chorus Phase SONY i So 9 Invert Feedback Phase 0 0 dB 6 0 dB 4 4 dB Attenuate High Frequencies Attenuation Frequencies Jb Input Gain Invert chorus phase Dry Out Invert feedback phase eas Out ypass Chorus size 1to 3 J 3 Modulation Period Effect controls 192 CHAPTER 12 Input gain Dry out Chorus out Inf to 0 dB dnf to 0 dB Inf to 0 dB Modulation rate 0 001 to 20 0 Hz J 0 800 Modulation depth 1 to 100 LJ 3 Feedback 0 to 100 LJ 0 Chorus out delay 0 1 to 100 0 ms ad _ 40 0 Attenuate high frequencies above Hz Modulation Period Multiplier Tempo Sync CPU Creating a plug in chain 1 2 ri Select the data you want to process If no data is selected the effect chain is applied to the entire file From the View menu choose Plug In Chainer or click the Open Plug In Chainer button t on the data window The Plug In Chainer window is displayed To use an existing chain preset choose the chain from the Chain Pre
89. cc ccc eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 Deleting all markers and regions within the selected area ccc ccc ee eee eee 124 PIEVIEWING a FEQION 11 ee van ierti Crt trd een ENEE ECOr NENESE ENTERESE EIEEE SAKETE ENCENSA E 124 SIROTE ONS rer eaae E E E EE EAE EEE E E EE AE EOT 124 Triggering a region using MIDI commands cece cece eee eee eee e eee eee eee eees 125 Using markers to create regionS ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eect eeeeen eee eeeeeees 125 Locking loop and region lengths ccc ccc ccc ccc cc eee eee e ee ee een eeeeeeeees 125 Creating new files from regions ccc ccc cece eee eee eee e eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 125 Using the Regions List ccc ccc cc cece eee ee eee eee eee eeeenes 126 Displaying the Regions List cc cece cece eee e eee e eee ence eeeeennaes 126 Working with the Regions List cece cece e cece eee e eens tees ee eeeeeeaaeees 126 USING the Playlist nut inunetoeeonen eines eon bub en eure ETENE EEEIEE needa 4 padse pads 128 Displaying the Playlist careivwotacieanaceengetearnerenenanerateanpeowsusennearekmaewnernwent 128 Adding regions to the Playlist ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeennees 128 Arranging the Playlist lt ancsavatariqeeswue te eacudenuesteedueew EEEN EAEN ANETE EA 129 Editing a Playlist Cutlist region snnnnsunnnsususonneserneesesosoesesorsoeseroroeeeso 129 WSING OD DO e EEE E AE E EA EAA E E AA A NE gees 130 Playin
90. channel value to 1 The MIDI device is configured Turning on MIDI input synchronization 1 2 3 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears Click the MIDI Sync tab From the Input drop down list choose the appropriate MIDI router and click OK Configuring the MIDI trigger From the Options menu choose MIDI Triggers The MIDI Triggers dialog appears Select Play All from the Event list box In the Trigger section select the Note radio button The Channel and Note boxes become available Trigger None Channel 1 to 16 i Note 5 Controller Mote CO to G10 c4 L Type 1 in the Channel box Type C4 in the Note box and click OK The Sound Forge software is now configured to play the Voiceover pca file when it receives a C4 Note On command on MIDI Channel 1 248 CHAPTER 16 Starting playback 1 From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu A check mark appears adjacent to the command indicating that it is active and the software is ready to receive MIDI commands 2 Click the C4 key on the MIDI Keyboard Keyboard Lon 000 Acoustic GrandPigno O O ooo o a Ela a The Voiceover pca file is played in its entirety Resetting MIDI triggers Once set MIDI triggers are not permanent They can be edited or deleted as needed 1 From the Options menu choose MIDI Triggers The MIDI Triggers dialog is displayed 2 From
91. check box is cleared an effect automation envelope is ignored and the effect s initial state is used for the duration of the data window Bypassed envelopes are drawn with a dashed line in the data window Removing effect automation envelopes Click the Automate None button in the Plug In Chainer to remove all automation envelopes for the selected plug in Choose Empty Chain or another preset from the Chain Preset drop down list at the top left corner of the Plug In Chainer to clear the plug in chain and remove all effect automation envelopes WORKING WITH EFFECTS 201 Adjusting envelopes When the Envelope tool on the main workspace is selected you can add remove select or adjust envelope points on effect automation envelopes The Edit tool allows you to add remove or adjust envelope points but you cannot select envelope points with the Edit tool By default a new envelope will contain a single envelope point If you want to adjust the overall level of an envelope drag the envelope up or down A floating ToolTip will show you the envelope s current setting If an envelope has multiple points you can drag each point or you can drag envelope segments up or down Tips Hold Ctrl while dragging an envelope point or segment to adjust the value in fine increments without changing the envelope points horizontal positions Hold Ctri Alt while dragging an envelope point or segment to adjust the value i
92. choose Delete from the shortcut menu e To change the fade curve between two points right click an envelope segment and choose a command from the shortcut menu Fade Type Fade In Out Envelope Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade Hold LP To move all envelope points press Ctrl A and drag when the envelope has focus The cursor will be displayed as a hand d Note You can create up to 16 envelope points Click the Reset Envelope button to reset the graph to a simple ADSR Attack Decay Sustain Release curve 3 Select the Smooth gain to minimize distortion on steep slopes check box to prevent the gain from changing too quickly which might result in unwanted distortion Also when this option is on the gain will always begin at 0 4 Click the OK button WORKING WITH EFFECTS 205 Displaying the waveform Choose a command from the Show wave drop down list if you want to display the waveform in the envelope graph If you re working with a multichannel file you can choose to view individual channels or the mixed waveform Note The waveform is unavailable when the selection is greater than 300 000 samples Flange Wah Wah From the Effects menu choose Flange Wah Wah to apply flanging phasing and wah wah effects to a sound For information about using the Flange Wah Wah effect click the Help button E in the Sony Flange Wah Wah dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the H
93. choose Metadata and then choose Sampler Loops from the submenu to view or edit loops and sampler information saved in the active file Item Description Sample type Displays the type of sample loop you re creating Click the down arrow to choose a new setting e None Removes the loop from the file e One shot Causes the sound file to play normally with no loops e Sustaining Causes the file to repeat the sustaining loop region the specified number of times e Sustaining with release Causes the sound file to play the sustaining loop region the number of times you specify play the region between the sustaining and release loops and then play the release loop region the number of times you specify Sustain start Displays the beginning of the sustaining loop You can double click the value to edit it 28 CHAPTER 2 Item Sustain end Sustain length Sustain count Release start Release end Release length Release count Manufacturer Product Sample period Unity note Fine tune SMPTE format SMPTE offset FourCC Code IARL ART Description Displays the end of the sustaining loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the end will automatically update the Sustain length value Displays the length of the sustaining loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the length will automatically update the Sustain end value Indicates how many times the sustaining loop shou
94. clipboard you can paste or mix it into an existing data window or use it to create a new data window Pasting data in an existing data window 1 2 3 Notes e Pasting into a multichannel file will insert data to all channels the channels in a multichannel file must always be equal in length Silence is pasted to the unselected channel If multiple channels are selected the same data is pasted to all selected channels and silence is pasted to the unselected channel If no channels are selected the same data is pasted to all channels e Pasting data of different sample rates will cause the data in the clipboard to play at the same rate as the rate of the window in which the data is pasted Ifany regions markers or loops are present in with the original sound data they will also be pasted into the destination sound file To turn this feature off turn off the Paste Markers Regions command on the Options menu After you have cut or copied your data move the cursor to the beginning of the Voiceover pca file by clicking the Go to Start button I in the playbar For more information on cutting or copying data see Copying on page 70 or Cutting on page 72 For more information on the playbar see Playbar on page 34 From the Edit menu choose Paste or click the Paste button The clipboard data is inserted into the file and the data for Wow appears on the left side of the waveform Note f there is a se
95. create several regions in it 2 From the Tools menu choose Extract Regions The Extract Regions dialog appears and all current regions appear in the Regions to extract pane 3 Select the regions to be extracted Extract Regions Example music bed Regions to extract Cancel Play Select all Destination folder Users Administrator Documents Browse File name prefix Example music bed W Use long file names for destination file names 4 Ifthe path in the Destination folder box is not appropriate click the Browse button and browse to the desired destination folder 5 Type the desired prefix in the File name prefix box USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 125 6 If desired clear the Use long file names for destination file names check box and enter an appropriate numeric value in the Start file counter index box 7 Type a name in the File name prefix box if you want add a prefix to extracted regions For example enter Test to extract the files Test Region 001 wav Test Region 002 wav Test Region 003 wav and so on Note Select the Use long file names for destination file names check box to allow file names of up to 128 characters including spaces The files names will consist of the value in the File name prefix box and the region name When this check box is cleared file names will conform to the 8 3 naming convention These names consist of the first 5 characters from th
96. created containing the Wow audio data 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu The ACID Properties window appears 4 Select One Shot from the ACID type drop down list 5 From the File menu choose Save As and save the file with a descriptive name Creating an ACID loop file Loops are musical building blocks and are by far the most common type of file used in ACID software Loops stretch with an ACID project s tempo and can be configured to change pitch 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing the And easier and drag it to the workspace A new data window is created containing the And easier audio data 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu The ACID Properties window appears 4 Select Loop from the ACID type drop down list The Time signature Root note for transposing and Number of beats boxes are added to the ACID Properties window ACID Properties Name Don t transpose a 5 Choose one of the following options for the Root note for transposing box If Then The loop should be transposed when inserted in an Choose it s root note from the Root note for ACID project transposing drop down list The loop should not be transposed in an ACID project Choose Don t transpose from the drop down list 6 Specify the length of the loop in beats in the Number of beat
97. creating a selection you may discover that the start or end point has not been positioned properly In cases like this you can try to reselect the data but it can be difficult to accurately create selection points For this reason you have a number of tools designed to help you fine tune selections If you find that the selection jumps unexpectedly as you fine tune it snapping may be turned on For more information see Understanding snapping on page 94 Adjusting a selection with the mouse You can fine tune selection start and end points by dragging the edge of the selection to a new location 1 Opena file and create a selection in the waveform 2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the selection edges The pointer is displayed as a bi directional arrow 4 3 Drag the selection edge to a new position BB Example music bed o mes a Example music bed o mes p EE a NI i 4 N amp AE 00 00 00 amp AE 00 00 00 l 4 w e leila 4 u H p 4b K gt Pe r 00 00 01 297 00 00 03 335 00 00 02 038 1 908 K gt E gt or 00 00 01 297 00 00 05 373 00 00 04 076 1 908 Drag the edge of the selection to a new position 4 Release the mouse button The selection is updated Adjusting a selection with the keyboard Using the keyboard you can quickly and accurately select data or update a selection For more information see Data selection shortcuts on page 325 Restoring a
98. data window BB Wow sound editing Wow iso editing just gets easier 00 00 01 000 Zooming in on a selection decreases the size of the dark gray area K gt meet lt lt 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 256 However the selection remains the same size and does not move This allows you to quickly locate a selection even when another section of an audio file is displayed Navigating in the overview bar Open the Voiceover pca file Click the Zoom In button until you reach a 1 32 zoom ratio Click outside the dark gray in the overview bar The cursor position changes but the cursor is located beyond the scope of the data window BB Wow sound editing n eon x amp E vy 00 00 01 100 _ j00 00 01 200 4 00 00 01 300 50 Inf 50 4 i P o K h Et SP 00 00 01 705 00 00 05 000 1 32 a kK h Et SP 00 00 02 060 00 00 05 000 1 32 Playing audio in the overview bar To make navigating a file from the overview bar easier you can start audio playback from the overview bar Is 2 3 4 Open the Voiceover pca file Right click the overview bar Playback of the file begins from the cursor location Right click the overview bar again Playback pauses Right click the overview bar once more and immediately left click at several random positions in the overview bar Each time you click the mouse in the overview bar during playback the cur
99. down list choose 6 dB boost 200 and click OK The specified boost is applied to the selection 5 Play the file The Wow data clips and distorts upon playback Exercise caution when using the Volume command Unlike Normalize Volume performs no pre processing scans and offers no options for clipping audio data a4 Wow sound editing kaba msm E P PF siere QE vow EME Sood etting us oes esser EEA eser EY Create a selection amp 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 02 A 4 0 Inf 4 Volume Wow sound editing B meson Preset UME r Gx a 5 0 tited Sys 6 dB Boost 200 Cancel Sys 6 dB Cut 50 K ll lt in ee See Sys Mute Preview K gt Ee 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 534 H Bypass B wow sound editing a fom Ex ss Wow E Sourd editing just gets easier EFA Ard esser Gain Inf to 20 dB 00 00 04 More 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 lt it TEIT K gt E gt 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 534 Audio following volume increase Note When audio data is clipped it cannot be restored by performing a second Volume operation The initial Volume operation must be undone Volume control The Volume dialog contains only one control Gain The Gain fader determines the new volume of a selection Negative decibel values decrease the selection s volume while positive decibel val
100. edits The Playlist and Cutlist allow you to try out different edits before committing to them You can add regions to the Playlist or Cutlist and then rearrange and audition them endlessly without requiring the software to perform an edit on the file Another advantage is that you can quickly save regions organized in the Playlist or Cutlist as a new file based on the finished arrangement MIDI synchronization and triggering You can trigger regions created in Sound Forge software using MIDI or SMPTE timecode This feature is used for synchronizing audio files to sequencers MIDI controllers or any other time based media For example a MIDI trigger can be assigned to an audio file in the software and triggered by a sequencer along with other MIDI instruments For more information see Triggering region playback on page 249 You can also assign SMPTE times to special effect audio files This allows you to match audio to the action on the screen USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 113 Using markers A marker is a tag placed in an audio file that is used as a reference point Markers make navigating a file easier and more efficient Markers can be quickly selected from the list in the Go To dialog Also markers are displayed in the Regions List for quick playback Inserting markers 1 Click to position the cursor in the waveform 2 From the Insert menu choose Marker A marker is placed in the waveform at the exact loca
101. ee atndwee A EE E 160 CHOSSTACING CV CIS eine binds iuenwtuda woe enae chee obs on dens beeen bnkewd oon ddoe esas 161 Using automatic crossfadeS s ccxcdwduwadoneens ners ENAS EEEN EIEE ANE 161 Manually setting a crossfade ccc ccc ccc ence nee eee ene e nent e ee eeeeneeeenes 161 Changing crossfade CUIVES a csnsevdssvacsnxedendsewsnaad versa OINETARA A ben EAA nets 162 Using event envelopes ASR 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee cent e eee e nett eeeeees 162 Setting an event s volume 22 cece cece eee eee e eee eee eee eee ee eeeeeees 162 Setting an event s fade in and fade out ccc ccc eee cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeees 163 Applying processes and effects to events cece eect cece nent ee eee enee teens 163 SCICCEING CV GING EEEE ET A erane eee eawens opened veratehesteneacannaces 164 Selecting events USING MENU COMMANAS cece cee cece eet e eee eee eee eeeeeees 164 Selecting events using keyboard shortcuts ccc cece cece eee eee e eee eeeeeees 164 Selecting multiple events cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 164 LOOMING VEMS cusycaeweataasesaes EAEEREN loony peer ean ee teeun e 165 SNAPPING to events cc cece cc eee cece teen eee eee eee teen eee eeeeeeeteenaes 165 PROCESSING AUIGIO 4524 34he antnteaas ge busateanessanpeesesoadeeesesougaaraaecans 167 PAD DIVING DTE SE niare aes EAEE cow nanens opera cpand EREE 167 USNO fe 2 2 aa ee ere ee en re ee ee ee ee ee ee E 167 CYEAtING DIESELS reirrr ortor a
102. eeeeennaes 25 Script Editor window Ctrl Alt 2 2 2 0 ccc ccc cece cece cece eee e ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 Loop Tuner window Ctrl Alt 3 2 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece ee ence e eee eee teeeeeeeees 25 Metadata WINdGOWS ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee e eee essen eeeeeeenes 25 Copying metadata to the clipboard 2 0 cece eee nee e ene eee eeeeeeenenees 25 Regions List window CtrI AIt M 0 2 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee ee eee ee eeenenes 26 Playlist window Ctrl AIt M 1 2 0 0 0 ccc cece cece ccc eee n eect eee eee een neeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 26 Track List window Ctrl Alt M 2 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cee cee ee ee ee een eee eeeeeeeee 26 ACID Properties window Ctrl Alt M 3 0 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece ence eee eee eens eeeeeeees 27 Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeees 27 CD Information window Ctrl Alt M 5 2 0 ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee ee enneeeneeees 28 Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 ccc ccc ccc cece eee ee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeees 28 Summary Information window Ctrl AIt M 7 0 0 ccc cece cece eee e eee eee eee nee eeneeeees 29 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Data WINGOW Sot ccnit soak dbanchenetnaceebrs conned ones ibesetbecauiweneutseuaksvackea 31 Data WINDOW COMPONENTS 0222404 ntesernsene nied ICETA RENERE needs 31 Displaying data window components cece eee e eee e eee eee eee eeeeaes 33 Arranging data WINGOWS 605 604 s0dGtewada s
103. eees 65 Creating CUSTOM templates cece ccc Sri IERES AERE VEREA RESER RISA 67 Creating custom rendering settings ccc cece cece eee eee eeeaeeeees 67 Saving all open audio files 2 6 ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 67 Saving files as A WORKS DAC OC eaucsavensatencenweiagewe daad AAEE ii edasgss east tedden ee 67 Working With projects ccc cece cece eee eee eee ee eee eee e eee e eee e eben eee eeeeeeeeee 68 VATO 0k eee ee er eee et eee ee ee ee eee eT 68 Saving the project path in the rendered file 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee neeeeeees 69 Editing a media file s Source project ccc ccc ence nent e eet ee eeeen teens 69 EANG DUNO ces 6 5 chien eE ies Outs Pee oe ae wid ben ewe eee ouene eee hens 70 COD VIG cugc5ccccecenae aden ueewes oce hoeeenae beer enereesees seueesee nese uienonieceseeeaeeese 70 PAS GINO oi race a ate wae ose eee ne ep ee ee a ee eee eee oh E eee 71 CUNNING i a aa a A cache aye ns aes eueat ec hean eel cubed A AA SA A 72 BEE e irradia ud E E eens a yan aad Cie yan anus ain EEE EE A aie eee eres 73 Urine ChODOING acco 2 csectexssssaanteertoncaeeelessepsatsaosesoe seen eseeaassaaeseoeae 74 WIDUIC sarap ay caetus awn deena saeeeeweeuiae Goan O aeenaen canes E 74 Using Undo and REO 1 ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eeeenes 76 Using the Undo Redo History WINdOW cece ccc eee eee e eee e nee eee eeeennnes 76 SOLECHING Status TONGS 424
104. entire frequency spectrum prevent the output from sounding too filtered e Using a frequency sweep as an impulse creates a frequency dependent delay effect e Panning within the impulse causes the stereo image of the output to flutter between channels e Using staccato sounds such as drum hits creates a variety of echo effects USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 217 Recreating spaces for foley effects and dialog replacement Frequently dialogue recorded in the field is rendered unusable by ambient noise If you are shooting in the field and realize that overdubbing will be necessary you should create an impulse in each filming location This allows you to overdub dialog during post production that is indistinguishable from dialog recorded on location If you intend to use the Acoustic Mirror effect as a film video post production tool there are some factors to keep in mind Distance information is determined by the distance between the source and the microphone when creating the impulse Record multiple impulses at various distances for each location to create realistic dialog effects when matching audio processing to approximate camera positioning e The frequency response of the human ear changes as the volume of a sound increases As a result impulses created from a significant distance may sound unusual at high volumes Placing a microphone off center allows you to create directional information in the recovered impulse
105. equal loudness contou Normalize to aoe belo i 60 to 0 dB Laces Scan Levels IF clipping occurs Apply dynamic compression Peak E E E EE RMS More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 3 From the Preset drop down list choose Normalize RMS to 16 dB music and click OK The file is normalized and its overall loudness is increased a Example music bed 00 00 00 000 Normalize controls The following controls are located in the Normalize dialog Control Description Normalize using Peak This radio button normalizes the audio file using the maximum instantaneous sample values detected A level constant gain is then applied to the audio Normalize using Average This radio button normalizes the audio file using the detected average RMS value of the audio file This is RMS level loudness helpful for matching the apparent loudness of a number of individual recordings PROCESSING AUDIO 183 Control Normalize to Ignore below Attack time Release time Use equal loudness contour Scan Levels If clipping occurs Use current scan level do not scan selection 184 CHAPTER 11 Description This fader specifies the level to which the highest peak should be set With Peak level if the peak level is 10 dB and the Normalize to value is 3 dB a constant boost of 7 dB is applied to the entire file With Average RMS level normalizing to 0 dB means boosting the signa
106. existing file For more information see iZotope 64 Bit SRC on page 188 Reverse Reverses the current selection For more information see Reverse on page 189 Rotate Audio Moves the current selection to the opposite end of the file For more information see Rotating audio on page 264 Smooth Enhance Opens the XFX Smooth Enhance tool For more information click the Help button e in the process dialog Time Stretch Opens the XFX Time Stretch tool For more information click the Help button 2 in the process dialog lastique Timestretch Opens the lastique Timestretch tool For more information click the Help button B in the process dialog Volume Adjusts the volume of an audio file For more information see Volume on page 190 Effects toolbar The Effects toolbar contains buttons corresponding to all Sound Forge built in XFX plug ins ANE fy Acoustic Mirror Adds environmental coloration to your existing recordings For more information see What are the Acoustic Mirror effects on page 209 Amplitude Modulation Applies a sinusoidal or square shaped periodic gain to the input signal For more information click the Help button BD in the effect dialog Chorus Simulates multiple audio sources from a single sound For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Multi Tap Delay Creates a delay with up to eight delay taps spaced anywhere within 2 5 seconds of the original
107. file Any time you delete a section of a sound file in Sound Forge software the sound file on disk is actually rewritten without the deleted section See also Nondestructive Editing on page 346 Digital Rights Management DRM A system for delivering songs videos and other media over the Internet in a file format that protects copyrighted material Current proposals include some form of certificates that validate copyright ownership and restrict unauthorized redistribution Digital Signal Processing DSP A general term describing anything that alters digital data Signal processors have existed for a very long time tone controls distortion boxes wah wah pedals in the analog electrical domain Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques DSP techniques are used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations additions and multiplications both your computer s processor and specialized DSP chips can be used to perform any DSP operation The difference is that DSP chips are optimized specifically for mathematical functions while your computer s microprocessor is not This results in a difference in processing speed APPENDIX E 341 DirectX A set of Application Program Interfaces designed by Microsoft for multimedia development A DirectX plug in such as the So
108. for quick access to time magnification levels that you use frequently Creating custom zoom settings 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears Click the Display tab 2 3 Select time magnification settings from the Custom zoom ratio 1 and Custom zoom ratio 2 drop down lists 4 Click OK Zooming to custom settings From the View menu choose Zoom Time and choose a custom zoom setting from the submenu Tip You can also click a Custom Zoom button or amp on the Navigation toolbar or press 1 or 2 on the numeric keypad 88 CHAPTER 4 Using zooming shortcuts Zooming to a selection 1 Create a selection If no selection is created the Zoom Selection function is not available 2 Right click the waveform and choose Zoom Selection from the shortcut menu The minimum zoom ratio that allows the full selection to appear in the window is calculated and the selection is then zoomed and centered in the data window Note 7o reverse this function right click the waveform choose Zoom and choose Out Full from the submenu Zooming the window Right click the level ruler and choose Zoom Window from the shortcut menu The maximum zoom level that allows the loudest portion of the selection to appear in the window is calculated and the entire sound file is adjusted Note 7o reverse this function right click the level ruler and choose Zoom Out Full from the shortcut menu Zooming out full T
109. from the Explorer window to an existing data window For more information see Using drag and drop operations on page 147 Processing selections For more information see Applying an effect on page 191 The following steps demonstrate creating events by copying and pasting a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 Create a selection containing Wow a Wow sound editing m amp f 00 00 00 000 fi in fe ERA sound editing just gets easier And easier a TESST Kd Pi aee Rate 0 00 se 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 347 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button Move the cursor to the beginning of the Voiceover pca file by clicking the Go to Start button i on the playbar From the Edit menu choose Paste or click the Paste button The clipboard data in inserted into the file and the data for Wow appears on the left side of the waveform B Wow sound editing Cola E l JAvow ERA sieve Epon EB ison editing just gets easier EGA And case md amp At 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 00 09 02 000 00 00 03 000 00 00 04 000 00 00 05 000 60 Inf 4 50 4 lt 4 t O Ki bi m p Rate 0 00 i 00 00 00 733 00 00 00 733 1 398 USING THE EVENT TOOL 157 6 Choose the Event tool 4 Notice that the file contains two events one eve
110. from the Mix Replace dialog are used by default You can click the right mouse button while dragging to toggle mix paste and CD track drag and drop modes Tip When dragging a selection within the same data window drag up or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length If you want the Fade In and Fade Out curves to pay attention to the destination selection and file length when mixing between files select the Auto crossfade Mix with selection check box on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog When you release the mouse button to drop the selection the Mix Replace dialog appears If you want to bypass the Mix Replace dialog hold Shift when you release the mouse button 74 CHAPTER 3 To customize your mix settings choose a setting from the Preset drop down list in the Mix Replace dialog or adjust the controls as needed Item Description Source Drag the Source fader to adjust the volume of the selection you want to mix Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the sustain portion of the wet gain envelope in the data window Select the Invert Data check box to invert the source audio at the baseline reverse the phase Inverting data can help match transitions and compare the phase relationship of the two sound files Destination Drag the Destination fader to adjust the volume of the selection you want to mix over Changing t
111. http www gracenote com company_info FAQ FAQs Locating matching CD information using Gracenote Insert a CD in your drive Browse to the CD and click the MusiclD button in the Explorer window Gracenote MusiclD attempts to obtain matching CD information and displays artist album and track data e Ifthe service locates an exact match this information automatically appears No additional action is necessary If the service locates multiple possible matches the Match dialog appears Proceed to step 3 Choose a method for completing the CD information e f none of the possible matches is appropriate click the Submit New button The Gracenote MusiclD Disc Information dialog appears allowing you to complete information for the CD and submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database For help on submitting CD information click the Help Guidelines button in this dialog When you are finished typing information click the OK button to submit your data e Select the appropriate match from the list and click the Accept Match button The artist album and track information is displayed based on your selection in the right side of the PC pane Editing and submitting CD information to Gracenote If a CD is not currently part of the Gracenote Media Database you can submit it for inclusion 1 2 Insert a CD in your drive Browse to the CD and click the MusicID button in the Explorer window The Gracenote MusicID
112. in the converted file Enabling input monitoring Click the Advanced tab at the bottom of the Record dialog and select the Enable audio input monitoring check box if you want to route the audio received by the input device to the current output device Note This check box is available only when the Monitor check box is selected Inserting markers while recording Click the Insert Marker button in the Record dialog s mini transport bar or press M to insert a marker in the data window during recording You can then use the Markers to Regions command to convert markers into regions For more information see Inserting regions based on marker positions on page 123 Automatically labeling windows and regions Windows and regions can be automatically named for you as you record This automatic labeling feature is particularly useful when recording in Multiple takes creating Regions mode or Create a new window for each take mode For more information see Choosing a recording mode on page 139 Right click the Record dialog and choose Automatic Labeling from the shortcut menu to access the Automatic Labeling dialog For more information see Customizing region labeling on page 123 Changing blinking status The Recording message located to the right of the mini transport bar in the Record dialog can display within a flashing or solid red frame RECORDING AND EXTRACTING AUDIO 141 To toggle between the blinking status settings righ
113. is at low levels such as during a fade out Reactive Preview Reactive previews allow for the adjustment of parameters in a function dialog while the preview is playing When a parameter is changed the preview will automatically rebuild and continue playback Real Time Streaming Protocol RTSP A proposed standard for controlling broadcast of streaming media RTSP was submitted by a body of companies including RealNetworks and Netscape Redirector File A metafile that provides information to a media player about streaming media files To start a streaming media presentation a Web page will include a link to a redirector file Linking to a redirector file allows a file to stream if you link to the media file it will be downloaded before playback begins Windows Media redirector files use the asx or wax extension RealMedia redirector files use the ram rpm or smi extension Region A region in Sound Forge software is a subsection of a sound file You can define any number of regions in a sound file which are stored in the Regions List Regions List The Regions List is simply the list containing all of the regions and markers defined within the sound file From this list you can preview and edit the regions as well as drag them to the Playlist or to the desktop to create new files from them Resample The act of recalculating samples in a sound file at a different rate than the file was originally recorded If a sample is re
114. is required when using higher sample rates In the following example each red dot represents one sample Because the lower waveform is represented by twice as many samples as the top waveform the samples are able to better approximate the original waveform Sample Size See Bit Depth on page 339 APPENDIX E 349 Sample Value The Sample Value also referred to as sample amplitude is the number stored by a single sample The number stored by a single sample e In 32 bit audio these values range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 e In 24 bit audio they range from 8388608 to 8388607 e In 16 bit audio they range from 32768 to 32767 e In 8 bit audio they range from 128 to 127 The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or 0 dB Sampler A sampler is a device that records sounds digitally Although in theory your sound card is a sampler the term usually refers to a device used to trigger and play back samples while changing the sample pitch Secure Digital Music Initiative SDMI The Secure Digital Music Initiative SDMI is a consortium of recording industry and technology companies organized to develop standards for the secure distribution of digital music The SDMI specification will answer consumer demand for convenient accessibility to quality digital music enable copyright protection for artists work and enable technology and music companies to build successful businesses SCSI MIDI Device Int
115. left pane D 1 Funk Pop Bass 7 samples as M A Slap Bass 8 samples F gpl kegel nepal bggbegal bagga enya 2 Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples C 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 3 Funk Split D3 10 samples 4 FunkSlap NV 8 samples 5 FunkPop NV 7 samples 6 Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples 7 Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples 8 Funk Slap NC 8 samples 9 FunkPop NC 7 samples 10 Funk Slap amp Pop NC 15 samples 11 Funk Split D3 NC 10 samples 5 8 Sample Pool 15 od Funk Slap G1 4 Funk Pop G1 sali Funk Slap A 1 po Funk and Q r eil ul Funk Slap C2 00 00 00 271 1 530 if 6 a E H S ae g 7s m m m m a m m m m m Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples Funk Split D3 10 samples Funk Slap NV 8 samples FunkPop NV 7 samples Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples 8 Funk Slap NC 8 samples 9 FunkPop NC 7 samples 10 Funk Slap amp Pop NC 15 samples E M 11 Funk Split D3 NC 10 samples 5 8 Sample Pool 15 wal Funk Slap G1 Funk Pop G1 de Funk Slap A 1 nd Funk Pop C2 gt tlle laa al Funk Slap C2 00 00 00 271 1 530 FF amp EE a e fi Bank0 6M 0 Funk Slap Bass 8 samples bA JJ Note A2 A 2
116. level ruler formatting 87 optimizing scaling 89 restoring default level 89 zooming 86 87 zooming with Magnify tool 90 levels monitoring 43 44 setting 44 toolbar 42 locking loop and region lengths 125 Loop Playback button 37 61 Loop Tuner displaying 258 finding zero crossings 259 locking loop length 260 playing loops 258 INDEX vii Loop Tuner continued switching between sustain and release loops 258 viewing loop amplitude 259 window 25 loops creating for ACID 261 265 doubling 263 editing 257 260 halving 263 locking length 260 locking lengths 125 release 255 rotating audio 264 saving 265 setting tempo 265 shifting selections left right 263 sustaining 255 Magnify tool button 36 overview 89 zooming level ruler 90 zooming time and level ruler 90 zooming time ruler 90 main window components 22 overview 22 Mark In command 38 91 Mark Out button 38 Mark Out command 91 markers automatically naming 115 benefits of using 113 changing position 115 changing position using drag and drop 115 creating regions from 116 123 deleting 115 deleting all 115 deleting all within a selection 116 editing default names 311 inserting 114 inserting during playback 114 inserting during recording 114 inserting for clipped audio 116 inserting while recording 141 moving 115 moving to specific locations 115 naming 114 previewing 116 renaming 114 Snapping to 94 triggering u
117. new CD in the system s CD or DVD drive This allows you to view the contents of the new CD without closing and reopening the Extract Audio from CD dialog Proper use of software Sound Forge software is not intended for and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using Sound Forge software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement RECORDING AND EXTRACTING AUDIO 143 144 CHAPTER 8 Chapter 9 Editing Repairing and Synthesizing Audio This chapter introduces some of the Sound Forge Pro advanced editing repair and synthesis features Overwriting and replicating Earlier in this manual paste and mix were described as ways of adding clipboard contents to the current data window As your audio editing projects become more elaborate you may discover the need for two more sophisticated paste operations overwrite and replicate Overwriting Overwriting allows you to replace the current selection with the contents of the clipboard and has two basic guidelines If Then The selection is longer than the clipboard contents Data is overwritten from the beginning of the selection for the length of
118. notice that mixing does not change the length of the file Using Undo and Redo You can easily undo and redo edit operations even prior to your last save operation e You can undo any edit operation by choosing Undo from the Edit menu or by clicking the Undo button on the Standard toolbar e You can redo any undone edit operation by choosing Redo from the Edit menu or by clicking the Redo button on the Standard toolbar Important The ability to undo past save is disabled by default To enable this functionality choose Preferences from the Options menu click the General tab and select the Allow Undo past Save check box When this option is enabled your undo redo history is retained until you close the file or exit the software Using the Undo Redo History window The Undo Redo History window may seem confusing at first but you will find it invaluable once you have mastered it This window allows the audio file to be auditioned in various versions by undoing and redoing multiple operations To display the Undo Redo History window choose Undo Redo History from the View menu or press Alt 7 Note The undo redo history for an audio file is retained until you close the file or exit the software If you want to retain undo redo history indefinitely you should work with a Sound Forge project frg file Undo Redo History Undo Play button H Undo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 0
119. of the fade applied to a section of audio prior to the detected trim crop start point Determines the length in milliseconds of the fade applied to a section of audio following the detected trim crop end point PROCESSING AUDIO 171 Control Description Minimum inter phrase When you choose the Remove silence between phrases mode the Minimum inter phrase silence value silence determines the minimum amount of silence needed between phrases for a new region to be created Minimum length When you choose the Remove data beyond loop points mode the Minimum length following loop end following loop end value determines the number of samples that must follow a loop More Click this button to view additional options that you can use to adjust your data window selection For more information see Adjusting the data window selection on page 170 Bit Depth Converter The Bit Depth Converter is used to increase decrease the bit depth of a file while concealing the resulting quantization noise Decreasing a file s bit depth decreases the overall size of the file but results in added quantization noise which can be masked using dither and noise shaping Increasing a file s bit depth while not improving the quality of the audio allows subsequent audio processing to be performed with greater accuracy and resolution Prior to decreasing a file s bit depth you should optimize the audio for conversion For more information see Minimizing
120. on page 207 e Custom selection grid lines For more information see Using selection grid lines on page 93 e You can now set default fade types for effects on the Editing tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Editing tab on page 310 Enhanced Broadcast Wave Format bwf support For more information see Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 on page 27 Welcome After Sound Forge software is installed and you start it for the first time the registration wizard is displayed This wizard offers easy steps that allow you to register the software online with Sony Creative Software Inc Alternatively you can register online at http www sonycreativesoftware com reg software at any time Registration assistance Registration assistance is available online at http www sonycreativesoftware com chat or by fax at 608 250 1745 Customer service sales For a detailed list of Customer Service options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support custserv asp Use the following numbers for telephone support during normal weekday business hours Telephone Fax Country 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 204 7703 for all other countries 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Technical support For a detailed list of technical support options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support default asp To listen to your support options please call 6
121. or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length GETTING STARTED 71 4 When you release the mouse button to drop the selection the selection is pasted Pasting in a new data window To use data from the clipboard to create a new data window go to the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Paste to New from the submenu A new window containing the clipboard data is created Cutting Cutting allows you to remove a section of sound data from a data window and store it on the clipboard until you paste or mix it into another file Cutting sound data replaces the previous contents of the clipboard When deciding between cut and copy consider the following information e Copying data has no effect on the original file e Cutting data modifies the original file Cutting data from a window Note f you cut data from individual channels of multichannel files the waveform will contain silence at the end of the cut channel The channels in a multichannel file must always be equal in length 1 Create a selection containing the second Wow there should be two if you are following the examples in Voiceover pca a Wow sound editing kabe Ee fAvow gjase i Wow Eson editing just gets easier EFA And esser by amp E 00 00 00 00 90 02 j 00 00 04 l A il 4 it W p op 4 K gt E gt ai 00 00 01 475 00
122. other Sound Forge users we recommend adding summary information and BMP images to your files 1 Open the impulse file in the software 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Summary Information from the submenu The Summary window is displayed 3 Enter the appropriate information in each box Note f the data you want to edit is not displayed in the window you can right click the window choose Insert from the shortcut menu and then choose a metadata field from the submenu Using the new impulse file To use your new impulse file open the Acoustic Mirror dialog and choose it from the Impulse drop down list as you would any other impulse file If you performed the previous procedures properly the custom impulse file should realistically recreate the reverberation characteristics of the electronic device or acoustic space Using impulse files in creative ways Now that you understand the use and creation of impulse files you may want to begin using the Acoustic Mirror tool in more interesting ways than simply applying an impulse to an audio file The following sections describe some creative and advanced uses for Acoustic Mirror technology that can contribute to the professionalism of your work Processing individual audio elements Instead of applying an impulse file to an entire song try applying an impulse to individual elements of the song Applying an impulse to specific notes chords riffs or phrases can quick
123. previous event in the data window Selecting events using keyboard shortcuts You can use the following keyboard shortcuts to select events while using the Event tool Command Keyboard shortcut Select the next event Shift Right Arrow Select the previous event Shift Left Arrow Extend the selection to the next event Shift Ctrl Right Arrow Extend the selection to the previous event Shift Ctrl Left Arrow Selecting multiple events You can select multiple events in your project using two methods Selecting nonadjacent events 1 Hold the Ctrl key 2 Select the events by clicking them To deselect an event click it again to toggle the event selection on or off e Rate 0 00 00 00 00 000 00 00 39 653 Selected events 164 CHAPTER 10 Selecting a range of events 1 Hold the Shift key 2 Click the first event that you want to select 3 Click the last event that you want to select All events between the first and last selected events are selected Zooming events To zoom an event right click the event and choose Zoom Event from the shortcut menu or press Ctrl Up Arrow The event is Zoomed to fit the width of the data window Snapping to events When snapping is enabled and you re using the Event tool f you can choose to have events snap to other events in the data window From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Events from the submenu to toggle snapping to event edges Snap
124. prm to import a file that supports both Session 8 and Sound Forge regions e Choose Windows Media Script File txt to import a file that includes Windows Media script commands e Choose Wave File wav to import markers and regions from another audio file Click Open Copying the Regions List to the clipboard Editing a Regions List in a text editor allows you to make an annotated list that you can print for reference From the Edit menu choose Regions List and then choose Copy onto Clipboard or right click the Regions List and choose Copy onto Clipboard from the shortcut menu The list is copied to the Windows clipboard USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 127 Using the Playlist After you create regions you can arrange them in the Playlist Unlike the Regions List which displays its contents in alphabetical or chronological order the Playlist displays and plays its regions in a user specified arrangement In addition you can rearrange and audition regions endlessly in the Playlist without performing a destructive edit when you save the file As with the Regions List you can save the Playlist information as metadata in most file types You also have the option of saving the Playlist to an external Playlist file Displaying the Playlist 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Regions List from the submen
125. radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel You can use this file as a backup or to share your keyboard shortcuts with other Sound Forge users Deleting a keyboard mapping 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog is displayed 2 Choose a mapping from the Keyboard map drop down list and click the Delete button to remove the selected keyboard mapping Note You cannot delete the default Sound Forge keyboard mapping Importing or renaming a keyboard mapping Copy a Sound Forge keyboard mapping ini file to the following folder e Windows Vista C Users user name AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 e Windows XP C Documents and Settings user name Application Data Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Note The AppData or Application Data folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel The next time you start Sound Forge the new keyboard mapping will be available from the Keyboard map drop down list in the Customize Keyboard dialog Tip f you want to edit a the name used to identify a keyboard mapping in the Customize Keyboard dialog open the ini file in a text editor and change the lt Display Name gt portion of the Name lt Display Name gt entry Save the ini file and restart Sound Forge to use the new name Resetting the default keyboard mapping
126. recalibrate at any time even during recording However it is preferable to perform recalibration with silence at the record inputs Playing back recorded audio Audition your recorded audio by playing it back in the Record dialog Click the Play button to begin playback and click the Stop button E to end playback You can use the other buttons on the mini transport bar in the Record dialog to navigate to different locations in the file Arm Arm r Go to start of file Record 4d Go to start of last take p Play pi Go to end of file J Insert marker LB Go to Adjusting pre post roll for punch in and automatic retake recording playback Once you have recorded a punch in or an automatic retake you can audition it with user configured pre roll and post roll to evaluate the performance This option allows you to indicate the amount of sound data that should be played preceding or following your recorded take when you review your takes Reviewing with pre and post roll helps you review your takes in context 1 Select the Review pre post roll check box in the Record dialog The two corresponding boxes become active 2 Enter appropriate pre roll and post roll values in the respective boxes En Review pre post roll 0 to 30 seconds 0 000 0 000 r Note n Automatic retake mode the post roll control is unavailable 3 Click the Play button The punch in segment plays with the configured pre roll and post roll Note R
127. region is added to the Playlist Adding regions to the Playlist using drag and drop 1 Select a region in the Regions List 2 Drag the region into the Playlist 3 Release the mouse button 128 CHAPTER 7 Arranging the Playlist Moving regions After you have added regions to the Playlist you can arrange them using drag and drop 1 Silence 1 Wow 1 Sound editing just gets easier 00 00 OL 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 00 00 00 000 Andeasier _00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 An E AE E T Replicating a region in the Playlist A major advantage of arranging the Playlist is the ability to repeat a region in multiple places without actually copying the audio data This feature is called replicating 1 Right click the region to be replicated and choose Replicate from the shortcut menu The region is replicated in the Playlist 2 Drag the replicated region to its new position in the Playlist Tip You can also replicate a region by holding Ctrl while dragging the region to a new position in the Playlist Deleting a region from the Playlist You can delete regions from the Playlist without affecting the audio file 1 Select the region that you would like to delete 2 From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and then choose Delete from the submenu or right click the Playlist window and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Changing region order order based on the column s c
128. script You can open and run a script that has already been developed Warning Scripts can pose a security risk to your computer A script has the power to delete files read files write files execute programs access the Internet access files on your network and so on Always examine the contents of a script before running it If you don t understand the script do not run it unless it comes from a trusted source In general take the same precautions you would take for any program you download from the Internet or receive in an e mail attachment Running a script from the Script Editor window Po a Click in the data window where you want to apply the script to establish focus From the View menu choose Script Editor to display the Script Editor window if it isn t already displayed Click the Open button E in the Script Editor toolbar The Open Script window is displayed Select the script file vb js cs or dll that you want to run The script data is displayed in the top portion of the Script Editor window If you need to pass an argument to the script type it in the Script Args box Arguments are specified as follows ArgName ArgValue amp ArgName2 ArgValuez2 For example a script that uses an argument to indicate where files should be saved could use the following argument to save files to a ScriptOutput folder on your D drive dir d ScriptOutput If your script can create a log file to record the results of
129. selection increases L Drum Fil ame a Drum Fil coe SS oo Te a coon oe E 4 i K gt E gt biel i La he La 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 1 256 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 1 256 The selection is level Zoomed Selection box spans the width of the window Zooming both time and level with the Magnify tool 1 Drag the Magnify tool on the waveform to make a small selection box 2 Toggle click the mouse until the selection appears as a box 3 Drag the Magnify tool to create a time level zoom selection and release the mouse button The level zoom and time zoom of the selection increase E Drum Fill E Drum Fill l s N i a Q 00 00 00 000 100 00 01 000 100 00 02 000 z a Q j00 00 00 150 A j00 00 00 200 j00 00 00 250 P j00 00 00 300 j00 00 00 350 an 4 Il K gt E gt e 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 1 256 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 1 25 The selection time and level are zoomed Selection displays as a box 90 CHAPTER 4 Selecting audio using start and end values You can select audio by dragging the mouse or by using keyboard shortcuts For more information see Data selection shortcuts on page 325 For the sake of accuracy however it is often useful to create selections by entering specific start and end point values The Set Selection dialog allows you to create selections in this way or by choosing a preset selection from the Selection drop down list 1 From the Edit men
130. settings as a custom preset by clicking Save As and entering a name for the new preset Click OK to save the new preset 282 CHAPTER 19 Chapter 20 Burning CDs You can write audio to CD if your system is configured with a supported CD R RW drive and the necessary drivers Understanding track at once and disc at once burning Sound Forge Pro software provides two ways to burn audio to a CD track at once and disc at once Track at once Track at once burning records individual tracks to the disc and results in a partially recorded disc However the CD remains unplayable on most systems until you close the disc The advantage of track at once burning is you can record tracks onto the disc as you finish them versus waiting until you have finished your whole album Track at once writing burns the entire project as a single track Disc at once single session or Red Book Disc at once burning is the most common burning method in the music industry This writing mode is used when creating a master disc to be sent to a disc manufacturer for mass replication Disc at once works just as it sounds Multiple tracks of audio are written to the CD in one recording session Correcting the sample rate for CD burning Sample rates deviating from 44 100 Hz cause CD track lengths to be miscalculated When attempting to write a file to CD that deviates from the 44 100 Hz sample rate you are prompted to change the sample rate Selecting Yes autom
131. shortcuts available in the Sound Forge interface You can access the Keyboard map by choosing Customize Keyboard from the Options menu For more information see Customizing keyboard shortcuts on page 319 Monitoring levels in digital audio The Sound Forge channel meters display peak levels during playback Use the meters to monitor levels and ensure no clipping occurs in your file Decibels The standard method for digital metering is to use the maximum possible sample value as a reference point This value is referred to as 0 dB Decibels are used to represent fractions logarithmically In this case the fraction is sample amplitude divided by the maximum possible amplitude The actual equation used to convert to decibels is dB 20 log amplitude 32 768 To illustrate this consider a sine wave with a peak amplitude of 50 percent of full scale Inserting the values in the appropriate places yields 20 log 0 50 6 0 dB Each time a signal s amplitude is divided by two its dB value is decreased by 6 dB Likewise doubling the amplitude of a signal increases its dB value by 6 dB Dividing the sine wave until its peak amplitude is equal to 1 produces lowest peak dB possible 90 3 dB Why are dBs used when talking about audio Decibels are typically used when dealing with sound pressure levels because of the vast range of sound about 120 dB that the human ear can perceive It s also easier to say 90 dB than 0 000030 1 32 768 LEARNI
132. software and its related tools Add a faster floating point arithmetic processor Many high speed processors are still lacking in speed when processing floating point arithmetic We recommend using high speed processors that provide exceptional floating point arithmetic for reliable real time previewing Impulses do not recover properly If you experience problems recovering custom impulse recordings verify each of the following 1 Verify that you have trimmed the recorded test tone based on the mode chosen from the Impulse recovery mode drop down list For more information see Trimming the test tone on page 215 2 Verify that the second spike is present in the recorded test tone if the Auto detect timing spikes options is specified 3 Verify that the file specified in the Test file used box is the exact test tone used to make to field recording and that neither its length or data has been changed 4 ftheimpulse still does not recover properly in Auto detect timing spikes mode normalize the spikes in the recorded test tone file This should aid the auto detect algorithm in detecting the timing spikes and recovering the impulse Recovered impulse is too noisy To maximize the impulse s signal to noise ratio you should verify that the field recording s noise floor is not too high When recording in noisy environments increase the test tone s amplitude until the test tone is at least 25 dB louder than the noise floor At least 40
133. sound For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Simple Delay Adds a delayed copy of the audio signal to the file For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Distortion Simulates the overloading of an amplifier For more information click the Help button e in the effect dialog Graphic Dynamics Applies compression expansion and limiting to affect the dynamic range of an audio file For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Multi Band Dynamics Allows compression and limiting to be placed on up to four different frequency bands For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Envelope Forces the amplitude envelope of a waveform to match a specified envelope shape For more information see Envelope on page 205 fm dhb ig iT Flange Wah Wah Mixes a modulated delay signal with the original signal For more information click the Help button 2 in the effect dialog Gapper Snipper Removes inserts sections of silence at regular intervals to create unusual effects For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Noise Gate Removes signals below a set amplitude threshold For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Pitch Bend Creates a modified sound envelope that corresponds to increasing or decreasing the pitch of a sound file over time For more informat
134. temporarily use the Magnify tool When you select the Magnify tool the cursor appears as a magnifying glass You can use this tool to create a selection box indicating how audio data is magnified By using the Magnify tool and toggle clicking the mouse you can toggle between time zoom level zoom and simultaneous time level zoom For more information see Using the mouse on page 21 NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 89 Zooming the time ruler with the Magnify tool 1 2 3 Drag the Magnify tool on the waveform to make a small selection box Toggle click the mouse until the selection box is the same height as the data window Drag the Magnify tool to create a time zoom selection and release the mouse button The zoom ratio of the selection increases B Drum Fill zeka B Drum Fill a foe x Q 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 00 00 02 000 aa j00 00 00 400 00 00 00 500 00 00 00 600 00 00 0 Inf 4 0 mmr E E 4 n m t O K gt E gt e 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 1 256 K gt Eee 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 1 36 The selection is time zoomed Selection box spans the height of the window Zooming the level ruler with the Magnify tool 1 Drag the Magnify tool on the waveform to make a small selection box 2 Toggle click the mouse until the selection box is the full width of the data window 3 Drag the Magnify tool to create a level zoom selection and release the mouse button The zoom ratio of the
135. that can be recovered list Crash Recovery Files that can be recovered Your last editing session terminated improperly Click Recover to restore your edits and undo history If you dick Cancel you will lose your edits and undo history Your media files will remain unchanged Deleting recovered files Click the Cancel button to delete the temporary files The original media files remain unchanged 80 CHAPTER 3 Chapter 4 Navigating Zooming and Selecting This chapter introduces some of the Sound Forge Pro navigation and selection features Setting the cursor position While you can click anywhere in the waveform to position the cursor there are times when you may need to position the cursor more precisely You can use the Go To dialog to move the cursor to a specific point in an audio file and center it in the data window Tip You can also use a variety of keyboard shortcuts to position the cursor For more information see Cursor movement shortcuts on page 324 1 Choose Go To from the Edit menu The Go To dialog appears Tip You can also use the following methods e Right click the waveform choose Cursor and choose Go To from the submenu e Press Ctrl G Go To Example music bed Custom bd i Cancel Position 00 00 00 000 hrimn sc XXX Input format Time bl 2 Set the cursor position using one of the following methods From the Go To drop down list choose a preset
136. that will separate columns of text and choose whether to include a header row to identify the columns 4 Click OK to save your file 296 CHAPTER 20 Printing track lists 1 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Print Track List from the submenu The Print Track List dialog is displayed Tip Right click the Track List window and choose Print Track List from the shortcut menu Print Track List Format for track list output OK Cue sheet for replication show absolute times SSS CD liner notes show times relative to track 1 Cancel M Indude summary information with track list output 2 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information e Cue sheet for replication The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the beginning of the CD This is the preferred format for CD replication houses e CD liner notes The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the first track on the disc 3 Select the Include summary information with track list output check box if you want to include UPC MCN title engineer and comment information with the track list 4 Click OK to send the track list information to your printer Adding CD Text to disc at once CDs When you add CD Text to your disc title and artist information will be displayed when your CD is played on a CD player that supports CD Text Notes e When you create a track using a media file tha
137. the Bypass button fg in the Plug In Chainer to bypass all effects in the chain or clear an effect s check box chorus _ to bypass individual effects Tip You can also click the Play Plug In Chainer button in a data window s playbar to hear the effects of a chain on the data window Click the Play Normal button in the playbar to hear the unprocessed sound Applying effects automation To apply effect automation to a data window click the Process Selection button 1 in the Plug In Chainer window Showing or hiding effect automation envelopes 1 Inthe Plug In Chainer select the button cherus_ for an effect that includes automatable parameters The plug in s controls are displayed and a list of the effect s automatable parameters is displayed on the right side of the Plug In Chainer 2 Select the Show check box to display a parameter s envelope or clear the check box to hide it Hiding an envelope simply removes the line from the data window while it retains the playback properties Enabling or bypassing effect automation envelopes 1 Inthe Plug In Chainer select the button chorus for an effect that includes automatable parameters The plug in s controls are displayed and a list of the effect s automatable parameters is displayed on the right side of the Plug In Chainer 2 Select the Enable check box to apply an automation envelope to your audio signal or clear the check box to ignore it When the
138. the Drumhit pca window is active and choose Select All from the Edit menu or press Ctrl A The entire waveform is selected 3 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button 4 Activate the Voiceover pca data window and click the Go To Start button i on the playbar The cursor moves to the start of the file 5 From the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Mix from the submenu or click the Mix button The Mix Replace dialog appears Mix Replace Wow sound editing Preset Untitted b x Source Clipboard Destination Wow sound editing Cancel 0 00 dB 0 00 dB 100 00 100 00 Preview E Bypass Start 00 00 00 000 Start 00 00 00 000 End 00 00 02 997 End 00 00 02 997 Real time Channels 1 Channels 1 Volume Toma eee eee Volume faeces at nf wsd Invert data Inf to 6 dB E Invert data Fade In 00 00 00 000 Z Proportional fade lengths Fade Out 00 00 00 000 Total mix length 00 00 02 997 More CPU o 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 997 00 00 02 997 GETTING STARTED 75 6 Verify that the Source and Destination volume faders are set to 0 dB and click OK The drum hit is mixed equally with the spoken passage BB Wow sound editing o mes l Wow Esee E i a t 00 00 00 000 j00 00 01 000 00 00 02 000 00 00 03 000 nmr ET Tee mT K gt E gt lt er 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 997 1 332 Preview the file and
139. the Preset drop down list choose Reset all triggers to none and click OK Triggering region playback Frequently it is preferable to use a MIDI device to control the triggering of the individual regions within a file As in the previous example the MIDI Keyboard will be used to demonstrate this function Note Before performing this procedure reset all triggers For more information see Resetting MIDI triggers on page 249 Configuring region playback triggers 1 Display and configure the MIDI Keyboard For more information see Configuring the MIDI device on page 248 Set up the MIDI input synchronization For more information see Turning on MIDI input synchronization on page 248 3 Open the Voiceover pca file and display its Regions List 4 Select the Wow region 5 From the Trigger drop down list choose Note On Play Regions List Name Start End Length Trigger Chan Note 1 H Silence 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None 1 C5 1 aH Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 i c5 3H Sound editing just gets easier 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 T None 4 H And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 Note On Play Note On Play Off Stop i Note On Queue Off Play WORKING WITH MIDI SMPTE 249 6 Type 1 in the Channel box and C4 in the Note box A small musical note appears adjacent to the Wow region in the Regions List to ind
140. the docking area You can also use the following shortcut keys to manage the workspace Note These shortcuts do not apply to floating docks Shortcut key Description F11 Show hide windows docked at bottom of workspace Shift F11 Show hide windows docked on left right sides of workspace Ctrl F11 Show hide all docked windows Explorer window Alt 1 The Explorer window is used to find preview and open media files From the View menu choose Explorer to show or hide the Explorer window For more information see Using the Explorer window on page 57 File Properties window Alt 2 The File Properties window is used to view or edit information saved in the active file From the View menu choose File Properties to show or hide the File Properties window For more information see Editing file properties on page 99 Video Preview window Alt 3 The Video Preview window shows the video frame at the current cursor or play position From the View menu choose Video Preview to show or hide the Video Preview window For more information see Previewing files with video on page 269 Time Display window Alt 4 The Time Display window displays the current cursor or play position From the View menu choose Time Display to show or hide the Time Display window For more information see Customizing the Time Display window on page 305 Channel Meters window Alt 5 Sound Forge software provides peak and VU PPM peak program meters that you
141. the format for copying file properties to the clipboard right click the File Properties window and choose Custom Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu The Copy Metadata dialog is displayed to let you choose whether you want to copy the data as formatted text or delimited text set a delimiter and choose whether you want to include a header row Copy Metadata EA Copy formatted text C Copy delimited text Tab Indude tite row Indude header raw F Include header underscores Click OK to copy the file s properties to the clipboard and you can then paste the information wherever you need it Changing the sample rate The sample rate is the number of samples per second measured in hertz Hz used to record audio You can specify sample rates from 2 000 Hz to 192 000 Hz Typical sample rates are stored as presets in the Sample rate drop down list In addition you can increase or decrease the sample rate of an existing audio file 1 Open and play the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application Right click the Sample Rate status box and choose 48 000 from the shortcut menu Play the file Notice that the pitch is higher and the duration is slightly shorter Right click the Sample Rate status box and choose 8 000 from the shortcut menu oe oe Play the file Notice that the pitch is lower and the duration is longer Changing the sample rate of a file also changes the pitch
142. the names that are assigned to new data windows when you create a new data window or choose Create a new window for each take from the Mode drop down list in the Record dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Labels tab 2 Select the New window prefix check box and type a prefix in the box if you want to display a name in the new window s title bar Clear the check box if you do not want to include a prefix if you want to number windows only for example 3 Select the Use counter and start at check box and type a number in the box if you want to number new data windows 4 Select the Insert leading zeros in field width of check box and specify a field width if you want to use leading zeros in window names For example if you specify a field width of 3 windows numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 5 Click the OK button Editing default region names The Region Labels section of the Labels tab allows you to modify the names that are assigned to regions when you insert regions or choose Multiple takes creating regions from the Mode drop down list in the Record dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Labels tab 2 Select the Label Regions check box to display text labels for regions in the data window when you insert regions or choose Multiple takes creating regions from the Mode drop down list in the Record dialog 3 Adjust additional settings as necessary Item Descri
143. the unity note up from 0 to 99 999 cents Sound Forge software does not fine tune the sound file when fine tuning is used and not all samplers support the setting This option is an informational setting that will be transmitted to a sampler via a sample transfer procedure A sampler such as the K2000 can use this information to play back the sample The K2000 should accurately display this information on the Master Sample Misc page as Pitch Adjust Indicates the type of SMPTE offset that has been set for the file Indicates whether a SMPTE time offset has been set for the file Sound Forge software ignores this offset value and not all samplers can store a SMPTE offset value in the sample Summary Information window Ctrl Alt M 7 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Summary Information from the submenu to display the Summary Information window where you can view and edit information saved in the active file If the data you want to edit is not displayed in the window you can right click the window choose Insert from the shortcut menu and then choose a metadata field from the submenu Description Archival Location Indicates where the subject of the file is archived Artist CD Text The artist of the original subject of the file LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 29 FourCC Code ICMS ICMT ICOP ICRD ICRP IDIM IDPI IENG IGNR IKEY ILGT IMED INAM IPLT IPRD ISBJ ISFT ISHP ISRC
144. the workspace Displaying data window components You can customize the appearance of individual data windows From the Options menu choose Data Window and then choose components from the submenu to display or hide those components Choose Set as Default to set the current configuration as the default data window appearance Tip Right click the Edit Tool Selector to display or hide components for the selected data window Orum Hit Status Time Ruler Time oom Overview S S SSSR SS Level Ruler Level Zoom Scrollbar CD Tracks i Data Window Only Set as Default Arranging data windows Video Strip be You can use the commands on the Window menu to arrange data windows in the Sound Forge workspace Tip Press Ctrl Tab to switch forward through the open windows or press Ctrl Shift Tab to switch backward through the open windows Command New Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons Maximize All Minimize All Restore All Close All Window List Description Creates a new data window Arranges all open data windows so they overlap with the title bar of each window remaining visible Arranges all open data windows top to bottom with no overlapping Note This command affects only non minimized windows Arranges all open data windows left to right with no overlapping Note This command affects only non minimized windows Arranges minimized data windows at the bottom o
145. this option is turned on the compressed audio sounds warmer and not overly bright This meter allows you to monitor the level of the incoming and outgoing signals When the Input button is displayed the meters display the incoming signal level Clicking Input toggles the button to an Output button and displays the outgoing signal level Clicking Output returns you to the incoming signal display This meter allows you to monitor the audio signal attenuation derived from the current settings Volume Maximizer tab The controls on the Volume Maximizer tab are used to limit the peak amplitude of an audio file or to boost the overall level without clipping the waveform and distorting the audio These controls are explained below Sony Wave Hammer Example music bed Preset Untitled Hx SONY Wave Hammer About Cancel Bypass Volume Maximizer e E Preview 0 0 dE 0 0 dE F Use longer look ahead i Bypass W Real time Threshold Output level 60 to 0 dB 30 to 0 dB Release time 0 to 1 000 ms _ Compressor Volume Maximizer More CPU 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Control Description Threshold The Threshold fader is used to adjust the audio level at which the volume maximizer activates Audio with levels higher than the Threshold value are affected while audio at levels lower than this value pass through the volume maximizer uninterrupted Output level The Output level fader allows
146. to mask quantization distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth You can select from several shapes each roughly describing the pattern that would be produced if you plotted a graph with the dither amplitude on the X axis and the probability of the dither values on the Y axis As is frequently the case when working with audio experimentation with dither values yields the best results however keep the following information in mind e Half Rectangular Eliminates distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth but the noise level is more likely to be dependent on the signal This setting uses a maximum dither noise amplitude of 0 5 LSB least significant bit e Rectangular Identical to Half Rectangular but with a maximum dither noise amplitude of 1 LSB least significant bit e Triangular Eliminates distortion products as well as any noise floor modulation but results in a slightly higher noise level The option typically works well in conjunction with noise shaping e Highpass Triangular Behaves like triangular dither but shifts its noise into higher frequencies This is typically the best option when used in conjunction with noise shaping e Gaussian Does not perform as well as Rectangular and Triangular dither but may be suitable for certain audio Determines the aural positioning of quantization noise Using this control you can shift the noise into audio registers that are less perceptible to human hearing
147. window allows for faster video frame previewing Using an external monitor You have the option of viewing video on an external monitor To use this feature you must have an OHCl compliant IEEE 1394 DV interface and a device to convert the DV signal to video such as a DV camcorder deck or media converter Note Pulldown is automatically added when you preview 24p video on an external monitor 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Video tab or click the External Monitor button on the Video Preview window 2 From the External monitor device drop down list select the appropriate device 3 Click Properties and adjust the following settings as needed If Then Your source media does not conform to DV standards Choose a setting from the If project format is invalid for DV output conform to the following drop down list The video is automatically adjusted to display properly on your external monitor Your audio is not synchronized with your external You can configure an offset for your hardware Drag the Sync offset frames slider monitor to synchronize audio and video This setting affects synchronization for previewing on an external monitor only audio and video synchronization in the file is unaffected 4 Click Close to close the External Monitor dialog 5 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Attaching video to an audio file Once you have edited an audio file to your satisfaction you can a
148. with matching formats or perform any required sample rate or bit depth conversion before appending the files If the formats of the selected files do not match they will play back at the target format without any conversion If the sample rates do not match for example pitch will not be preserved When the check box is not selected multiple files will be opened to separate data windows Select this check box if you want to create a disc at once CD track when opening a file If you have multiple files selected you can select the Append to current data window check box to add the selected files to the end of the current data window and create a disc at once CD track for each file When the check box is not selected multiple files will be opened to separate data windows Note Disc at once CD tracks must be at least four seconds long If you select a file that is less than four seconds long silence will be added as needed Select this check box and hold the Ctrl button while selecting two mono files in the browse window The two mono files will be merged to the left and right channels of a new stereo file The first file you select will be placed in the left channel and the second file will be placed in the right channel Compressed files are not supported for merging Locate and select a media file using the Look in drop down list at the top of the dialog 3 To preview the file before adding it to your project click the Play button
149. works of the Software unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine executable object code generated by a source language processor THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Dolby Dolby Digital AC 3 and AAC encoding This product contains one or more programs protected under international and U S copyright laws as unpublished works They are confidential and proprietary to Dolby Laboratories Their reproduction or disclosure in whole or in part or the production of derivative works therefrom without the express permission of Dolby Laboratories is prohibited Copyright 1992 2008 Dolby Laboratories All rights reserved Dolby Digital 5 1 Creator technology is not intended for use in content creation for commercial or broadcast distribution or content that displays Dolby trademarks and logos Only Approved Dolby Digital Professional Encoders may be used for content that is commercially distributed or carries the Dolby Digital trademark and logo Dolby the double D symbol AC 3 and Dolby
150. 0 ms 1 20 Hz the pitch of the loop may not equal the sample pitch Pitch tuning a loop is accomplished by creating short loops with a length equal to 1 frequency For example a sample of pitch 440 Hz corresponds to A5 on the keyboard meaning the loop can be pitch tuned 2 27 ms However pitched loops do not sound like the original sample Editing loops The loop you initially create in any situation is rarely perfect Frequently loops require some degree of editing before they are usable Once you create a loop you can quickly edit its beginning and end and subsequently its length by dragging the markers to a new location Editing a loop without the Loop Tuner After you create a loop you can quickly edit its beginning and end and subsequently its length by dragging the markers to a new location However this method frequently does not provide the control required to create seamless loops In this case you should edit the loop using the Loop Tuner Editing a loop with the Loop Tuner The Loop Tuner allows you to precisely edit loop points in order to prevent distracting audio glitches This is accomplished by greatly magnifying the waveform and displaying the loop tags in relation to one another You can also use the Loop Tuner to adjust the starting and ending points of a loop or selection to create smooth transitions LOOPING 257 The left side of the Loop Tuner window displays the end of the loop while the right side displays
151. 00 H Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 l H Undo Faste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Performed operations Undone operations 76 CHAPTER 3 Undoing and redoing 1 Verify that the Voiceover pca data window is active and choose Undo Redo History from the View menu The Undo Redo History window appears If you have performed the previous procedures the window should look like the figure below Undo Redo History Undo H Undo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Notice that the Mix operation appears at the top of the Undo pane The most recent operations always appear at the top of the appropriate list In the Undo pane click the Play button H corresponding to the Mix operation The audio file plays without the drum track Undo Rede History Undo thee Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 2 Select the Mix operation and choose Undo from the Edit menu The drum track is extracted from the Voiceover pca data window and the Mix operation moves to the Redo pane w Undo Mix Alt Back Ctrl Can t Redo Ctrl Shitt 2 O Repeat Mix Replace Ctrl V F4 Undo Redo History Undo H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Cut 00 00 01
152. 00 02 209 00 00 00 733 1 523 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut or click the Cut button 4 The selected data is removed from the file and placed on the clipboard B wow sound editing D E00 JAvow Rise Elson editing just gets easier EFA Ard esser bq amp 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 j00 00 02 000 j00 00 03 000 j00 00 04 000 00 K gt Ee m 00 00 01 475 1 456 3 Click the Play All button Wow Sound editing just gets easier and easier plays back 72 CHAPTER 3 Previewing a cut You can preview cuts prior to performing the edit This option allows you to determine if you made the selection accurately and if the results are desirable by playing the data before and after the current selection 1 Create a selection anywhere in Voiceover pca 2 From the Transport menu choose Preview Cut Cursor or press Ctrl K The selection is ignored and the audio before and after the selection is played to allow you to preview the cut Notes The Transport menu is available only when the Show Transport menu check box is selected on the General tab in the Preferences window For more information see General tab on page 306 To set the amount of pre and post roll that will be played when you preview a cut choose Preferences from the Options menu and choose the Previews tab Type values in the Pre roll and Post roll boxes in the Cut preview configuration section of the dialog f th
153. 08 256 5555 About your rights in Sound Forge software Sound Forge software is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement you entered into with Sony Creative Software Inc About your privacy Sony Creative Software Inc respects your privacy and is committed to protecting personal information Your use of the software is governed by the Software Privacy Policy A copy of this policy is incorporated into the registration process and you are asked to agree to its terms prior to accepting the terms of the End User License Agreement Please review its contents carefully as its terms and conditions affect your rights with respect to the information that is collected by the software For your reference a copy of the Software Privacy Policy is located at http www sonycreativesoftware com corporate privacy asp Proper use of software Sound Forge software is not intended and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using Sound Forge software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement Legal notices ACID ACIDized ACIDplanet com ACIDplanet the ACIDplanet logo ACID XMC Artist Integrated the
154. 4 206 Noise Reduction button 42 noise shaping dangers of 103 173 overview 103 173 Normal zoom ratio preference 86 Normalize button 40 Normalize process applying dynamic compression 104 overview 104 183 online help 18 Open dialog 36 56 opening Cutlist files 132 files 55 57 multichannel audio files 110 Playlist files 132 Regions List files 127 workspaces 68 optimization hard disk defragmentation 301 meters 301 passive update 301 302 playback cursor and record counter 301 total buffer size 301 overview bar audio event locator 84 navigating 83 playing audio 83 understanding 82 83 overwriting selections 145 pan envelopes creating 185 customizing 185 Pan Expand button 40 Pan Expand process creating pan envelopes 185 customizing pan envelopes 185 Paragraphic EQ 40 178 Parametric EQ 40 178 passive updating of displays 301 302 Paste button 36 Paste Markers Regions option 71 paste special overwriting 145 replicating 146 INDEX ix Paste to New command 72 pasting by dragging and dropping 71 72 drag and drop 148 events 159 in existing data windows 71 in new data windows 72 Pause button 37 pause time 292 294 peak files 59 peak program meters See VU PPM meters Pencil tool 36 152 phase scopes Lissajous Rotated style 48 Lissajous XY Plot style 48 Polar Circular Plot style 48 Polar Linear Plot style 48 showing hiding 48 style 48 Pitch Bend effect 41
155. 4 Specify the Sound Forge MIDI output that corresponds to the input port of the sequencer and click OK 5 From the Options menu choose MIDI Triggers The MIDI Triggers dialog is displayed 6 From the Preset drop down list choose Reset all triggers to none This prevents other MIDI commands from creating additional triggers Click OK From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu A check mark appears adjacent to the command indicating that the software is ready to generate MTC 252 CHAPTER 16 Configuring the sequencer 1 Specify the sequencer s MIDI input port that corresponds to the Sound Forge MIDI output port 2 Set the sequencer s SMPTE offset time value as needed Note Sound Forge software uses 00 00 00 00 as its output start point but certain sequencers recommend a SMPTE offset time of at least four seconds to ensure synchronization 3 Turn on the sequencer s MTC input 4 lf required by the sequencer press the Play button The sequencer does not begin playback but switches to Waiting for MTC mode 5 Start playback of the file in the software When the SMPTE offset time is satisfied the sequencer locks to and follows the MTC generated by the Sound Forge application Using Sound Forge software to generate MTC for an external device To use the software to send MTC to an external device follow the previous instructions but configure the Sound F
156. 5 cnte tn oe ered eecia seen E A sewer ada E et neeaes 78 Experimenting with status formats cece ccc ccc cee eee eee e ene e eee eee eeeenes 79 Configuring the Measures amp Beats format cece cece cee eee e nent eeeeeeneeeeeenes 79 P blishing THES tothe WED soxccacwudwewnnacensadiunteereuciawaweancedouedeatiawewss 80 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 Recovering TIES after a crash 406 0006 aciisvi esoediictwds cenwanewed sexed edins Sen sieis 80 RECOVEl ING TES acecescrssancancenessaccontatdonscanscadawescsaan ease tea tenes tee A eres 80 Deleting recovered files 24 cisccancckccieddaneens lt asiap he niectaidenesseaneed eeeeeecaaudanees 80 Navigating Zooming and Selecting cece cece cece e eee e eee e cence eeees 81 Setting the cursor POSITION 6 ccc cece cece eee eee eaeeneenaenes 81 Previewing audio with pre roll 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eeeeeeee ee ee eeeeees 81 Using the overview Dalia 4nd vaiwd naw wddaw thaw natis ereis TAPENE EAEEREN canes 82 Understanding the overview bar ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee e ee ee ee eeeeeeenes 82 Navigating in the Overview bar ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee e eee e eee en eee eeeeneees 83 Playing audio in the overview bar cece ccc cece cence cee eee eee e eee eeeeeneaes 83 SCIOOOIN Gc iataqedo44ee AE EE ee eer es en eee ee EALAR AA 84 ZOOMING ANG Magnif yiNG essre ssrsesrerss rek rne dares saeneanwns caueseadeceusacwads 85 Zooming the tim
157. 64 active vs inactive 64 arranging 33 components 31 creating 64 creating for each recorded take 139 creating with drag and drop 150 customizing 33 overview 31 INDEX iii data windows continued overview bar 82 83 playbar 34 scrolling during playback 60 DC Offset button 40 calibrating for recording 139 dialog 178 estimating 177 overview 177 recalibrating for recording 140 decibels defined 43 Default time between CD tracks preference 290 defragmenting the hard disk 301 Delay Echo effects 203 Delete Clear command 73 deleting all Cutlist regions 131 all markers and regions 115 124 all markers and regions within a selection 124 all markers within a selection 116 CD tracks 291 command markers 120 custom templates 67 events 159 keyboard maps 320 markers 115 presets 168 recovered files 80 regions 124 regions from Playlist 129 selections 73 Detect Clipping button 42 digital vs analog levels 44 DirectX plug ins See effects Disable auto snapping below 1 4 zoom ratios preference 96 disc at once CD burning bonus tracks 290 burning CDs 298 299 CD layout bar 291 CD Text 294 297 298 creating CD tracks from events 287 creating CD tracks from regions 288 defined 283 displaying CD track position in Time Display window 286 dragging and dropping files 288 290 inserting CD index markers 287 inserting CD tracks 287 ISRC codes 295 mono tracks 283 pause time 292 294 pre em
158. 742 None New region is added to the Cutlist i lt T K gt Pe 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 4 Click the Play Cutlist button p on the data window s playbar The file plays with the Cutlisted region omitted Creating a new file from the Cutlist Once all superfluous regions are placed in the Cutlist you can create a new audio file and Regions List from the remaining region From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and choose Convert to New from the submenu or right click the Cutlist and choose Convert to New from the shortcut menu Deleting all Cutlist regions 1 Select a region in the Playlist Cutlist window If the window is not visible press Alt 3 2 From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and then choose Delete from the submenu or press Delete Reverting to Playlist function To use the Cutlist as a Playlist again right click the Cutlist and choose Treat as Cutlist from the shortcut menu The check mark is cleared from the corresponding command in the shortcut menu and the Playlist function is restored Saving a Playlist Cutlist file You can save a file s Playlist Cutlist to an external file This offers the flexibility of using multiple Playlists for the same file 1 From the Edit menu choose Regions List or Playlist Cutlist and choose Save As from the submenu or right click the Playlist Cutlist and choose Save As from the shortcut menu 2 Use the Save Regions Playlis
159. 8 000 Hz that is indistinguishable from the quality at 8 000 Hz Resample controls The following controls are located in the Resample dialog Control Description New sample rate Determines the sample rate in Hz at which the file is resampled Tip Processing is quicker when downsampling by an even multiple such as when going from 44 kHz to 22 kHz Interpolation accuracy The Interpolation accuracy value determines the complexity of the interpolation method used during resampling Interpolation accuracy is most apparent in high frequencies but the audible difference between the values is subtle and often undetectable without the use of test tones A value of 1 is suitable for general purpose audio A value of 2 or 3 is good for high end audio applications A value of 4 results in professional quality audio but requires substantial processing Apply an anti alias filter during Selecting this check box applies an anti aliasing filter during the resampling process resample Remember that the maximum frequency that can be represented by a sample rate is one half of the sampling rate the Nyquist frequency Therefore high frequencies cannot be accurately represented when downsampling The anti aliasing filter prevents high frequencies from becoming low frequency distortion Tip t is also advisable to apply an anti aliasing low pass filter to an audio file prior to resampling to a lower sample rate Set the sample rate only do
160. 8 1 1 Level zoom out maximum a Example music bed lt 4 I kK a D P gt Rate 0 00 j00 00 00 070 r O af 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 1 Level zoom in maximum Both data windows display the same audio file at a 1 1 zoom ratio The window on the left shows the level ruler zoomed to its maximum out position The window on the right shows the level ruler zoomed to its maximum in position Notice that wave peaks clearly visible in the left window are out of display range in the right window Using zoom level commands If you prefer using commands you can control the level magnification from the View menu The following table briefly describes the three available zoom level commands You can access these commands from the View menu by choosing Zoom Level and choosing the desired command from the submenu Command Description Out Full Window window Selection Formatting the level ruler Decreases the zoom level to minimize the display of the file s amplitude Changes the level zoom to display the entire waveform amplitude in the data Maximizes the display of the selection vertically and horizontally in the data window You can configure the level ruler to appear in decibels or percent by right clicking the ruler and choosing Label in Percent or Label in dB from the shortcut menu NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 87 Using custom zoom settings You can create two custom time zoom settings
161. 90 Average value dB 45 060 Ave rage DC offset value Zero crossings Hz 1 141 62 PROCESSING AUDIO 177 DC Offset controls Choose DC Offset from the Process menu to display the DC Offset dialog The following controls are located in the DC Offset dialog Control Description Automatically detect and Calculates and corrects the DC offset for each channel individually remove Adjust DC offset by Allows you to specify a DC offset value manually 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 for 32 bit data 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 for 24 bit data 32 768 to 32 767 for 16 bit data 128 to 127 for 8 bit data Compute DC offset from Selecting this check box specifies that only the first five seconds of a file are analyzed when measuring the DC first 5 seconds only offset Be aware that five seconds is not sufficient if the beginning of a file has a long fade in or mute EQ Three EQ options are available in the Process menu Graphic Paragraphic and Parametric Each of these options launch the appropriate XFX effect For more information on using the XFX EQ effects click the Help button E in the process dialog Fade Graphic Fade Graphic fade allows you to create custom fade envelopes to apply to audio data You can use up to 16 envelope points to create complex graphic fades Creating a graphic fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 Select the last half of the audio approximately five seconds 3 From the Process menu choose Fade
162. Absolute Frames button 38 ACID Properties window 27 ACID software 69 ACID creating loops for 261 265 ACIDplanet com 80 ACM 331 Acoustic Mirror See also impulse files adding acoustic signatures to files 209 adjusting acoustic signatures 209 adjusting impulse length 211 button 41 Envelope tab 211 error messages 219 General tab 210 Head related transfer functions 218 limiting length of impulse 210 overview 209 Recover tab 212 saving the impulse with a preset 211 Summary tab 212 troubleshooting 218 active data windows vs inactive data windows 64 adding regions to the Playlist 128 adjusting envelopes 202 adjusting selections with keyboard 92 with mouse 92 Allow Undo past Save preference 55 76 Always open dropped files in new window preference 71 74 308 Amplitude Modulation effect 41 203 analog vs digital levels 44 animating video strip 268 applying effects automation 201 arguments 228 ASIO driver support 133 attaching video to audio files 270 audio increasing volume 190 mixing from the clipboard 75 normalizing 183 184 processing 167 190 recording 133 142 repairing 150 153 reversing 189 setting volume 190 synthesizing 153 156 Audio CD Time button 38 audio configuration 133 audio editing copying 70 cutting selections 72 73 deleting selections 73 drag and drop 147 150 mixing 74 76 overwriting 145 pasting 71 72 repeating an operation 147 replicating 146 trimming c
163. As dialog on page 65 Musical instrument files must be saved to the original format 242 CHAPTER 15 Using the MIDI keyboard With the MIDI keyboard you can control internal external synthesizers and samplers from the Sound Forge application The MIDI keyboard can also be used to listen to the sounds on a synthesizer or in the synthesis section of the sound card Displaying the MIDI keyboard To display the MIDI keyboard choose Keyboard from the View menu The keyboard can be resized moved or docked within the workspace On Off Voice Note Chord Output Channel 000 Acoustic Grand Piano SIENE deta Output Velocity Turning on the MIDI keyboard Clicking any key turns the keyboard on If you do not hear any sound verify that the output is connected to the MIDI Output device Configuring the MIDI keyboard output port and channel 1 Click the MIDI Out button 2 and choose an output device from the menu Keyboard 000 Acoustic Grand Piano Note if Za 22 Feel a 7 Microsoft MIDI Mapper Microsoft GS Wavetable Synth Ww Out USB Keystation Send Program Changes 2 Choose Send Program Changes from the menu if the keyboard will be used to choose instrument voices A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate that this option is turned on 3 Configure the MIDI input channel of the selected device to correspond to the keyboard s output channel Note Most MIDI devices are configurab
164. B Wow sound editing Eo vow FERRE Silene EEJ Sound editing just gets easier ERG Ard easier N AE 00 00 00 000 mompa m e eiil K gt Ee wr 00 00 00 000 00 00 03 639 00 00 03 639 1 456 A ad Wow sound editing mo mje Fow Eisi ERED Sound editing just gets easier sgl AE 00 00 00 000 Tf W p o p 4 K h Et x 00 00 00 000 00 00 03 639 00 00 03 639 1 332 Mixing Mixing is a powerful editing function that allows you to mix a copy of the clipboard contents at the current cursor position Mixing by dragging and dropping a selection 1 2 3 Open and play the Drumhit pca file The file contains a snare drum and crash cymbal sound Choose the Edit tool Drag the mouse over the data window to select the entire waveform Tip fthe Always open dropped files in new window check box on the General page of the Preferences dialog is cleared you can also drag a file or region from the Explorer window to a data window to paste sound data When the check box is selected dropping a file on the Sound Forge workspace always creates a new data window For more information see General tab on page 306 Drag the selection to the beginning of the Voiceover pca file The cursor appears as a mouse pointer with the letter M anda shaded selection box appears to show you where the mix will occur An envelope is drawn to show you the mix and fade levels The last used settings
165. Burning disc at once DAO CDs From the Tools menu choose Burn Disc at Once Audio CD to burn a disc at once CD using the current CD layout Use DAO CDs when you need to create a master disc for mass replication Tip When creating DAO CDs right click the ruler or Time Display window and choose Audio CD Time from the shortcut menu to help you arrange your project In Audio CD Time format the ruler will display hh mm ss ff hours minutes seconds frames Audio CD time uses a frame rate of 75 fps Next choose Quantize to Frames from the Options menu to ensure that any edits you make will occur on frame boundaries If your first track region begins before 00 00 02 00 a timeline offset is automatically added so the first track begins at exactly two seconds This offset is added for burning only and is not reflected in the data window If you want to display track numbers in the Time Display window right click the Time Display window and choose CD Track Position from the shortcut menu In this mode the Time Display will show track numbers and the running time for each track Negative values indicate the pause time before a track Time Display 03 00 00 52 Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDs A disc at once CD requires that you define a track list before burning BB 100 Unnamed Things o E l r N 8 af 00 00 00 302 h 304 06 f j00 10 00 Be Inf 4 Inf 4 Track 1 Shine 00 03 30 933
166. CHAPTER 18 Previewing files with video If you are working with a media file that contains video you can use the Video Preview window for previewing You must have the Video Preview window displayed to preview the audio stream You can hide or display the Video Preview window by choosing Video Preview from the View menu To begin previewing the current data window click the Play All button I on the transport bar Tip To display the Video Preview window press Alt 4 Video Preview E g 160x120 320x240 29 970 fps Frame 0000137 Frame Rate Current Display Size Original Frame Size Frame Number Copy Frame to Clipboard Copies the current frame to the clipboard External Monitor Sets up previewing on an external monitor Changing the Video Preview settings The Video Preview window can be configured in a number of ways to make it more useful The Video Preview window can be used on a separate monitor if your video hardware supports this feature docked at the bottom of the workspace or floated freely on the screen You can quickly access settings for the Video Preview window using the shortcut menu Right click the Video Preview window to adjust the following options Option Copy Frame Default Background Black Background White Background Integral Stretch Simulate Device Aspect Ration External Monitor Passive Update Show Toolbar Description Copies the contents of the frame to Windows Clipboard
167. Choose Bottom to display tabs below the waveform display aa i 00 00 20 lip H H g gt aje Rate 0 00 A Shine Play One of These Days White When tabs are displayed you can click a data window s tab to bring it to the foreground When you have multiple data windows open and maximized you can drag files to a specific data window While dragging a file or selection hover over a data window s tab to bring it to the foreground You can then drop the file or selection in the desired data window The color preferences section allows you set a custom color for a variety of graphics within the Sound Forge interface 1 Choose a screen element from the Color preference for drop down list 2 Setthe color of the selected item Drag the Hue slider to change the color of the selected item Drag the Saturation and Brightness sliders to adjust the intensity of the selected color Note When adjusting the display color for channel waveforms the Saturation and Brightness sliders are not available To adjust saturation and brightness for all channels choose Wave All Channels from the Color preference for drop down list and then adjust the controls 2 Click the Default button to restore a custom color to the default setting 3 Click the OK button Drag the slider to adjust the color intensity of icons in the Sound Forge window Drag to the left to decrease the color saturation or drag to the right to increase it Dr
168. Creating CD tracks from events in a data window If you re working with a data window that contains multiple events you can create tracks automatically using the events 1 Create events on the timeline to lay out your CD For more information see Using the Event Tool on page 157 2 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Create CD Tracks from Events from the submenu Each event is marked with a CD track Note Tracks are not created for events less than four seconds long You can drag CD tracks to rearrange them drag either end of a track to change its length or use the Track List window to edit the track s position or name Tip When space exists between events Sound Forge Pro creates separate tracks for each event If you want to create a track that spans multiple events you can abut or overlap the events to create a single track BURNING CDS 287 Creating CD tracks from regions in a file If you have a live recording that uses regions to indicate the sections of the recording you can use this feature to create tracks without having to scan through the audio and create tracks manually 1 Add regions as necessary to indicate the tracks in your recording BB 100 Unnamed Things frg elle a lt i o My 40 io eo oe ee 2 ee 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 863 1 48 312 2 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Create Tracks from Regions
169. E AE EER EERE ASEE EA SAA TESA 317 YTE CA e EAE EEE E A EEE EE E AEE EE E 318 Customizing keyboard shortcuts ccc ccc eect eee eee eee eee e ee eeeeeeees 319 Editing or creating shortcuts 2 0 ccc ccc cece tee eee eee e ete e teen eennees 319 Saving a keyboard Mapping cece cc cece cece e eee e eee eee eee eee E ES 320 Deleting a keyboard mapping ccc cece e eee eee eee eee eee ennees 320 Importing or renaming a keyboard Mapping ccc cece cece eee ee ee eee e ee eeeees 320 Resetting the default keyboard Mapping ccc cece ccc e eee e eee e eee eee eeenes 320 TABLE OF CONTENTS 15 SOME CUIES seeded te e eee e etn ee ies ese oh ak wick ti fet fee tee decd ac te en ae ae ese ee a en ee 321 Keyboard shortcuts 0 ccc ccc cece eee e eee e nee e eee eee eee eenneaes 321 Project IG SMOGLCULS usp a onniors dale area aaiere ote nanan ER dus EEEa 321 Magnification and view shortcuts ccc cece cece eee e eect eee eee eee eeeeeeeees 322 Data window shortcuts lt icceudatncctncerteduteteneddasaesieserseeetewenasekearesawadwase es 323 Cursor movement shortcuts ssusssuesuesseeerresrerrersrresrrsrerererrrerrersrrese 324 Data selection SNOMCULS erirecrreri d rite rrin NEETER O Era ea 325 Navigation and playback shortcuts ssusesessesesessesesocsesesorsesessesoereseso 326 Event tool keyboard shortcuts sssussesesessesesesessesesorsesorsrserresesoreeseso 327 Record dialog SN
170. EBU television systems SMPTE 25 EBU format is used for PAL DV D1 video projects SMPTE Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Drop Frame timecode runs at 29 97 fps and matches the frame rate used by NTSC television systems North America Japan SMPTE Drop Frame format is used for NTSC DV D1 video projects Both SMPTE Drop and SMPTE Non Drop run at 29 97 fps In both formats the actual frames are not discarded but they are numbered differently SMPTE Drop removes certain frame numbers from the counting system to keep the SMPTE clock from drifting from real wall clock time The time is adjusted forward by two frames on every minute boundary except 0 10 20 30 40 and 50 For example when SMPTE Drop time increments from 00 00 59 29 the next value is 00 01 00 02 SMPTE Non Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Non Drop Frame timecode runs at a rate of 29 97 fps This leads to a discrepancy between real wall clock time and the SMPTE time because there is no compensation in the counting system as there is in SMPTE Drop Frame SMPTE Non Drop format is used for NTSC D1 video projects that are recorded on master tapes striped with Non Drop timecode SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio SMPTE 30 is an audio only format and runs at exactly 30 fps SMPTE 30 is commonly used when synchronizing audio applications such as multitrack recorders or MIDI sequencers This format is not used when working with video SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps The
171. EE 181 WIIG rE E E E E E E E EE E E 182 NOMIMGIIZE e aE E EAE E A AEE E AE EEA ATAA A OEE 183 elade o EEA A E EE EEN E E EE E 185 Ea S1 E P AE AE A IE AAE E E 186 Z OtODE OA BI RE erra rit Er N TEATERETS EEEE E REETAN CROA LAIKRE ERSA 188 BE E E EE E E S E E A E E E E EE 189 ROTTE AUO aeaaaee EEE EEE naa ETEA E N A AN EA AEREE AAA 189 DINOCIM E NANCE eerror erer E r E E E E E A RT TEA 189 Time Mme Stret h ca csequrige ene oho rE rP aoe ea ETO ERED AONTA ao ee eke eae 189 Time lastique Timestretch ccc ccc ccc cc cece ee eee eee n ee eee eee nese ee eeeeeeeeeees 189 MOWING E E A E E wee E E E E eae E 190 WOrkinNg With EMEC eerie EE a eiA 191 POGUING T O nich octane EEEE cans E STEA EE TEE EA 191 ADOIWING EEE E e S ensued EE E E E T E E ows 191 Saving effect settings as a custom preset suesusesersesrerereersrereserrererreres 192 Using the Plug In ChadaiNer ssrersscerarrartis ten ENI nTEN E ERISTEEN E 192 Creating a plug in Cha cucesusieccewdenadeiies widawtee ARTTA AET EAE EE EEA 193 Adding a plug in to a chain sssesesossssssesersecsessessesecsecssesesssrsessessrreese 193 Removing a plug in from a chain 2 1 6 cece ccc cee eee eee e ene e eee eee eennees 194 Configuring chained pIUG INS ccc ccc cece cece eee eens eee eeeeeenneeeenes 194 Bypassing eNet coracesacueaeeneonereadermoantawenireonsamueniyeeeianeshecaasaemataaces 195 Selecting the processing mode for audio tail data ccc ccc cence eee e eens
172. ENG Enginee John Feith 3 ICOP Copyright 1996 Sonic Foundry Inc 4 ICMT ts Tutorial sound file for Sound Forge 5 Viewing and editing summary information The Summary window is used to view and edit the summary information stored in the file 1 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Summary Information from the submenu The Summary window appears 2 Edit the summary information as needed You can insert additional summary information by right clicking in the Summary window and choosing additional summary fields from the Insert submenu Value 1 INA Name Title CD Text Funky saxophone riff 2 IENG Engineer John Feith 3 ICOP Ci t 1996 Sonic Foundry Inc 4 ICMT Co Tutorial sound file for Sound Forge 5 IART Ar Insert j Archival Location Delete Commissioned Edit Creation date N Cropped Clear All RPPS Dimensions Copy to Clipboard Dots Perindh Custom Copy to Clipboard ae Keywords Lightness Saving summary information You can save files containing summary information that have been edited in Sound Forge software with or without summary information 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears 2 Select the Save metadata with file check box and click OK Note f you save to a file type that doesn t support metadata this check box is unavailable Including additional embedded information Some file formats allow non text data such as embedded bitmaps and metafi
173. Each region is marked with a CD track a 100 Unnamed Things frg Eo l 23 3 a AE 00 00 00 00 02 00 ovosoo 00 06 00 E 00 10 00 mZ i Ee eee ee D ia iat i al Le e Track 3 00 03 30 920 00 04 42 866 l lt i th gt teh K gt E gt Rate 0 00 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 863 1 48 312 You can drag CD tracks to rearrange them drag either end of a track to change its length or use the Track List window to edit the track s position or name Adding files to a data window and creating tracks Tip When you create a track using a media file that includes title and artist metadata this information will be added to the Track List window as CD Text Dragging files to the CD layout bar Drag a file to the CD layout bar at the bottom of a data window An indicator is displayed to show you where the track will be added when you release the mouse When you drop the file a track is created and pause time is added before the new track Track placement indicator Yea 3 One of These Days Si DOW Bee Note f you want to add a CD track without pause time drag the file to the waveform display above the CD layout bar If Options gt Drag and Drop Editing gt CD Track isn t selected click the right mouse button while dragging until the cursor is displayed with a CD icon cf to show you where the track will be added 288 CHA
174. Fast Fourier Transform FFT 273 file formats converting 106 file properties copying to clipboard 101 editing 99 106 editing extended summary information 107 editing in File Properties window 99 editing in status bar 100 editing summary information 107 viewing extended summary information 107 viewing summary information 107 window 24 files automatically previewing 57 channels 105 copying data to new files 64 creating CD tracks from 288 290 creating from Cutlist 131 creating from Playlist 130 creating from regions 125 deleting recovered files 80 detaching video 271 editing source project 69 embedding additional information 107 Explorer window 57 59 opening 55 57 playing 60 previewing 57 publishing to Web 80 recovering after crash 80 saving 65 saving all 67 vi INDEX files continued saving metadata with 107 Statistics 63 video 59 Find tool 42 150 finding and repairing audio glitches 150 Flange Wah Wah effect 41 206 flipping envelope graphs 202 floating windows See windows FM synthesis 39 154 155 Focus to Data Window command 64 Forward button 34 37 frame animation 267 frame numbering 268 frg files 55 FX Favorites menu 198 Gapper Snipper effect 41 206 Gaussian dither 173 generating MIDI timecode 39 252 Get CD Text button 58 GigaStudio GigaSampler files 239 242 glitches finding 150 repairing by copying the other channel 151 repairing by interpolating audi
175. From the Input format drop down list choose a format and type an appropriate value in the Position box 3 Click OK The cursor is placed at the specified position in the data window Previewing audio with pre roll Many audio editing operations depend upon accurate placement of the cursor in the data window The Pre roll to Cursor command allows you to preview audio data leading up to the current cursor position This command is extremely useful when recording punch ins For more information see Choosing a recording mode on page 139 A 1 5 second pre roll is automatically designated However you can change this value if necessary For more information see Configuring cut pre roll and post roll lengths on page 73 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the data window 2 From the Transport menu choose Pre roll to Cursor or press Ctrl Shift K Sound Forge software plays the audio leading up to the cursor and stops at the cursor Note The Transport menu is available only when the Show Transport menu check box is selected on the General tab in the Preferences window For more information see General tab on page 306 NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 81 Using the overview bar When navigating or editing a file the overview bar changes to reflect the current position in the file Title bar Overview bar 4 Wow sound editing Time ruler The overview bar represents the length of the entire file zoomed out to its maximum posi
176. Hz turn these displays off to minimize processing overhead 1 From the Options menus choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Click the General tab 3 Clear the Show the position of the playback cursor and Show the record counter while recording check boxes and click OK Turning off the channel output meters Sound Forge channel meters use a small amount of processing overhead during playback However if you detect dropouts during playback and previous fixes have failed try turning off these meters From the View menu choose Channel Meters The check mark adjacent to the command is cleared indicating that the channel meters are turned off Turning on passive updating for time and video displays Passive update options lower the priority of redrawing the time and video displays during playback When these options are turned on the displays update only if there is ample time Frequently this goes unnoticed and enabling these options minimizes playback overhead with little or no inconvenience OPTIMIZING FOR SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 301 Time displays From the Options menu choose Time Display and choose Passive Update from the submenu A check mark appears next to the command to indicate that this option is turned on Video displays From the Options menu choose Video and choose Passive Update from the submenu A check mark appears next to the command to indicate that this option is turned on Sync
177. ICSF and EBICSF files 0 ccc cc cc cece ee ccc eee eee eee e ee eeeeenees 335 QOSMIO TGS eenaa nee ae tue ge tow oesnveyeeeeens vies E E E A 335 BICSF and EBICSF fles 222 22 00sctdciatdased cdectdeveddddddtdatahtandtedatdeiededde cadads 335 IRCAM CSOUND and MTU files 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee e seen eee eeeeenes 335 SAVING WES 102 cer aace cae auseueetee ont oeaetiesnaentuauecd inane AS ESER 336 GIOSSANY saint ete R beees bned ener pasendhnenen cand sun Sawa E 337 NVC ss aces bee wean nt ooh tre aan og ood i EE ate shod euee son euuasyaeenornwas ob daeus 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Introducing Sound Forge Pro software Thank you for purchasing Sound Forge Pro software and for your continued support of the Sony Creative Software Inc family of products The software provides you with the powerful features you have come to expect as well as a number of new features designed to make digital audio editing quick and easy Sample files Throughout the manual you will find references to six sample audio files The manual directs you to use these files as you experiment with different Sound Forge features These files are installed in the same folder as the application Drumhit pca Fill pca e Loop pca e Musicbed pca Saxriff pca e Voiceover pca The files are saved in Perfect Clarity Audio PCA format a Sony Creative Software Inc proprietary lossless audio compression format
178. ICSF and EBICSF files When reading BICSF and EBICSF files the software identifies them as NeXT Sun files This is because the header of the BICSF file has been modified to allow it to be read as a NeXT Sun file These files are read as long as they are in one of the supported NeXT Sun data formats IRCAM CSOUND and MTU files To read these formats users must import them as Raw data files This is best accomplished by configuring the parameters in the Raw File Type dialog and saving them as presets The Raw File import function allows these files to be opened providing they are stored in 16 bit linear format Sound Forge software does not open floating point format IRCAM files APPENDIX D 335 Opening an IRCAM file oo i a From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears Specify Raw Audio from the Files of type drop down list Select an IRCAM file to open and click Open The Raw File Type dialog appears Configure the following parameters e Specify a sample rate from the Sample rate drop down list e Inthe Sample type area select the 16 bit PCM radio button In the Format area select the Signed radio button Select the appropriate Byte order radio button Choose a setting from the Channels drop down list to select the number of channels stored in the file Set the Header value to 1024 bytes Set the Trailer value to 0 bytes To automatically use these settings to open all Raw files select the Remember my preference and a
179. IDI In Out submenu is selected you can auto complete the Channel and Note values by pressing a key on your MIDI keyboard Triggers in the Regions List function differently from triggers specified in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist When using triggers in the Playlist Regions List or MIDI Triggers dialog be aware that they can interact to create unexpected results Sound Forge software first looks at the MIDI Triggers then the Regions List and then the Playlist when determining what to do when a MIDI command is detected If you only want to use the triggers in the Regions List turn off all the triggers in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist Using markers to create regions Once you have placed markers in a waveform you can use them to create regions For more information see Inserting regions based on marker positions on page 123 Locking loop and region lengths From the Options menu choose Lock Loop Region Length to force the length of a region to remain constant when changing the start or end time of a region or loop When this option is not selected you can hold the Alt key while dragging region markers to lock the length of a region To move a loop without changing its length drag the bar between the loop markers Creating new files from regions You can quickly create a new file from each region in a file Each region is named by appending a numerical value to a user specified prefix 1 Open an audio file and
180. If this check box is selected the playback rate is changed without resampling the data not resample This means that the pitch of the original file is not preserved For this reason this option is only useful for quickly converting between two similar sample rates PROCESSING AUDIO 187 iZotope 64 Bit SRC You can use the iZotope 64 Bit SRC process to change the sample rate of an existing sound file 1 From the Process menu choose Resample and then choose iZotope 64 Bit SRC from the submenu The iZotope 64 Bit DSRC dialog is displayed Zotope 64 Bit SRC Example music bed Preset x x New sample rate 2 000 to 192 000 Hz 22 050 kd Preview E Bypass 50 00 Use simplified Quality setting Steepness 0 to 200 32 Max filter length 10K to 2M 500 000 Cutoff scaling 0 5 to 2 0 1 00 Alias suppression 50 to 200 175 00 Prering 3 100 00 3 Set the sample rate only do not resample More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed Item Description New sample rate Specify the sample rate to which the sound file will be converted Note ncreasing a file s sample rate cannot improve the quality of the existing audio but does allow higher resolution for processing Quality When the Use simplified Quality setting check box is selected you can drag the Quality slider to adjust the plug in s
181. Inserting markers while recording ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee e eee e eee eeneees 141 Automatically labeling windows and regions cece cece eee eee ne eee eeeeeeaees 141 Changing Dinking StAtUs seresirrrsceie sssrin de CAEN SEENE 141 Extracting audio rom CDS as s ck manne dtu idavatsewstateeeaiweide oeabidenwenae aus 142 PreVIEWING CD UACKS cscaiwusisueeeetentasderandaa an aber meucded ahut eters se oramiwdambeows 143 Refreshing the Extract Audio from CD dialog cece ccc ccc cee eee e teen eennenees 143 Proper use Of software s srrsssssrests tts due tod stert nae ison AS ESEESE SENESE 143 Editing Repairing and Synthesizing Audio cece eee cece cece eee eenes 145 Overwriting and replicating cece cece cece cece e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeenaeees 145 SE e ss aera edt etna Sey ae ee ware were oan aude oe On eueea ee eens 145 REDIICATING 53564000 oceseacinwee noes nie E R A senses EN 146 Repeating an Operation cece ccc cece cece cence eee e teense eee eee ASES 147 Using drag and drop Operations ccc cc ccc cece cece cece e eee eee eee eeeeeeeees 147 Dragging mono selections into multichannel destinations cece cece ee eee ees 147 Snapping to points in drag and drop operations cece cece cece cece eee eens 147 Pasting mixing and creating CD tracks with drag and drop kkk ccc cc cee eee 148 Creating new windows by dragging and dropping a selection
182. MB of storage Waveform A waveform is the visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light For example when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time pressure variations usually form a smooth waveform Waveform Display Each event shows a graph of the sound data waveform The vertical axis corresponds to the amplitude of the wave For 24 bit audio they range from 8388608 to 8388607 For 16 bit sounds the amplitude range is 32 768 to 32 767 For 8 bit sounds the range is 128 to 127 The horizontal axis corresponds to time with the leftmost point being the start of the waveform In memory the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file Windows Media Format Microsoft s Windows Media file format that can handle audio and video presentations and other data such as scripts URL flips images and HTML tags 352 APPENDIX E Zero Crossing A zero crossing is the point where a fluctuating signal crosses the baseline By making edits at zero crossings with the same slope the chance of creating glitches is minimized Zipper Noise Zipper noise occurs when you apply a changing gain to a signal such as when fading out If the gain does not change in small enough increments zipper noise can become very noticeable Fades are accomplished using 64 bit arithmetic thereby creating no audible zipper noise APPENDIX E 353 354 APPENDIX E Index
183. ND WAVE HAMMER 219 An error occurred reading the test tone file Either the test tone file was not found or is not a valid test tone file Always use a test tone file provided on the Sound Forge application disc The selected Recorded file is much smaller than the test tone size This may indicate that the test tone or the recorded file specified in the Recover tab is not correct Verify that the length of the recorded file roughly the same size as the test tone file The end spike was not found Verify that the spike following the test tone is present in the recorded file when recovering impulses in Auto detect timing spikes mode 220 CHAPTER 13 What is the Wave Hammer plug in The Wave Hammer DirectX plug in is an audio mastering tool consisting of a classic compressor and a volume maximizer The Wave Hammer tool can be used in any Microsoft DirectX compatible host application for example Sound Forge and ACID Pro software and the quality and functionality of the Wave Hammer plug in is the same in each host application however the method of previewing effects is different Consult your host application s documentation to determine the available previewing methods Displaying the Wave Hammer plug in To display the Wave Hammer tool choose Wave Hammer from the Effects menu The Wave Hammer dialog The Wave Hammer controls are divided into two tabs Compressor and Volume Maximizer Compressor tab The controls on the
184. NG THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 43 Digital versus analog levels When recording to an analog medium such as magnetic tape recording engineers typically try to keep VU volume unit meters as close to zero as possible This ensures a high signal to noise ratio while preserving adequate headroom to keep the tape from saturating and distorting In addition occasional peaks above 0 do not cause problems because the tape saturation point is not an absolute However this is not true in the digital realm where amplitudes are stored as discrete numbers instead of continuous variables The flexible recording ceiling of analog is replaced by the absolute maximum sample values of digital audio Stored signals must never have a value above these maximums as the wave peaks are literally clipped This clipping adds audible distortion and though it can go unnoticed it can also ruin an entire project Therefore sample with the understanding that digital audio has absolutely no headroom Setting digital audio levels Because digital audio has no headroom setting the sampling level becomes critical If the loudest section of the audio is identified in advance the recording level should be set so that the peak is as close to 0 dB as possible to maximize the dynamic range of the digital medium If the loudest section of audio is unknown allow 3 to 6 dB of headroom for unexpected peaks Tip From the Tools menu choose Find and use the Find dialog to identify t
185. OMCULS 4scrswsawadatietanaews de eneaun ae ee ied ries inter EERE ENEE 327 Plug In Chainer shortcuts 2 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee sees sense eeeeeeeeeeeees 327 Regions List SMOVICUNS sorrisi tenaa ESEETO dia cow teu dn ECARE ET EEEE ETOR EIAN 327 Playlist Cu tlistShOrtCUTS so nwssnieeduiientrow ea wewee eri rE EE eE EOE 328 SCOP ECIFOl SNOU ce pee EE E E E E E EEEE 328 Drag and drop SNOItCUtS 0 ccc ccc ccc cee ce eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeenes 329 Mouse SMO MECUICS src cuieu cuttneeuten denen cont EEEE cede webeciaeaeeweeeeeseeues 330 Microsoft Audio Compression Manager c cece cece cece eee e eee eeeneeees 331 Audio data compression and decompression 2 cece cece cee e cette eee e ee eeeees 331 Transparent playback and recording of non hardware supported audio files 332 SMPTE MIME COGS chat sacar ri EE sends eae becseaeeseeeeaausescs 333 SMPTE 25 EBU 25 10S VIGGO 26 25 2cccscccnaceesctcmeceent coins EEEREN tonne ares 333 SMPTE Drop Frame 29 97 fps VIGGO 6 cc cece cece eee e eee eee eeeeees 333 SMPTE Non Drop Frame 29 97 fps VIGO 6 ccc eee cece cece eee e eee eeeeees 333 SMPTE 50150 Fes AUGIO catecoetecousereuceweteesbeseneesaeacabeedacevarseaareesads 333 SMPTE Film Sync 24 10S orendi nir nnn rnEeE NEONA EE EE 333 Using CSOUND MTU IRCAM BICSF and EBICSF Files ccc cece eee 335 About IRCAM HGS pccvaaucaarns ooo guesneentas wens a ee eerie oe ene ees 335 About B
186. P to apply the effect chain Adding a plug in to a chain You can add plug ins to a chain in the Plug In Chainer in several ways 1 2 3 Click the Add Plug Ins to chain button t on the Plug In Chainer window or press Ctrl E The Plug In Chooser window is displayed listing all available DirectX plug ins installed on your system Plug In Chooser L o Chorus Distortion o es eg gp amne E Plug Ins i Amplitude Modulation P1 Graphic Dynamics 07 All Audio Restoration hy Graphic EQ J Sony ifi Chorus fi Multi Band Dynamics I Third Party Hy Click and Crackle Removal Hv Multi Tap Delay SaveAs J DirectX Hv Clipped Peak Restoration Hy Noise Gate J vst Pfi Distortion Hv Noise Reduction JJ Automatable Hy Dither fF Pan J Packaged Chains iv ExpressFX Amplitude Modulation Re Paragraphic EQ i E FX Favorites iv ExpressFX Audio Restoration Hy Parametric EQ iv ExpressFX Chorus Hy Pitch Shift iy ExpressFX Delay Hy Resonan t Filter iy ExpressFX Distortion fF Reverb iy ExpressFX Dynamics 34 Simple Delay hy ExpressFX Equalization FF Smooth Enhance iy ExpressFX Flange Wah Wah Hiv Time Stretch Why ExpressFX Graphic EQ Wi Track Compressor iv ExpressFX Noise Gate Hie Track EQ Why ExpressFX Reverb Hi Track Noise Gate Why ExpressFX Stutter Pii Vibrato iv ExpressFX Time Stretch PR Volume ifi Flange Wah Wah i Wave Hammer Surrou
187. PTER 20 Dragging files to the Track List window Drag a file to the Track List window An indicator is displayed to show you where the track will be added when you release the mouse When you drop the file a track is created and pause time is added before the new track Track List 1 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 933 00 03 30 933 Shine The Dorot 1 00 03 32 933 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 426 Play The Dorot 1 00 07 03 360 00 11 45 226 00 04 42 866 One of These Days The Dorot Track ol acement indicator Dragging files from the Explorer window From the Options menu choose Drag and Drop Editing and then choose CD Track from the submenu if you want to create disc at once tracks by dragging files from the Explorer window or Windows Explorer to a data window Choosing this command has the same effect as toggle clicking the right mouse button while dragging until the cursor is displayed with a CD icon of to show you where the track will be added When you drop the file the audio in the data window will be replaced and no pause time will be added Tip You can use the Default time between CD tracks control on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog to adjust the default pause time For more information see CD Settings tab on page 315 Opening multiple files as CD tracks In the Open dialog hold Ctrl or Shift to select the files you want to open as CD tracks and then select the Open as CD tracks and Append to cu
188. Playlist 130 markers for each index change in extracted CD track 142 new windows for each recorded take 139 pan envelopes 185 presets 168 projects 55 regions for each extracted CD track 142 regions from markers 116 release loops 256 sampler configurations 236 sustaining loops 255 views 97 Crop button See Trim Crop button cropping audio 74 171 172 Crossfade Loop button 42 Crossfade Loop tool 260 crossfade types 161 crossfading events 161 CSOUND 335 cue sheets See track lists current playback mode 34 Cursor Center button 38 cursor position 81 Cursor to Selection End button 38 Cursor to Selection Start button 38 Custom Settings dialog 67 custom templates creating 67 deleting 67 saving 67 Custom Zoom 1 button 38 88 Custom Zoom 2 button 38 88 customizing channel meters 45 data windows 33 keyboard shortcuts 43 319 320 preferences 306 318 selection grid lines 93 Time Display window 305 toolbars 35 314 Cut button 36 Cut preview configuration preferences 73 Cutlist adding regions to 131 benefits of using 113 copying to clipboard 132 creating files from 131 deleting all regions 131 editing regions 129 opening Cutlist files 132 reverting to Playlist 131 saving to file 131 viewing 131 Cutlist files opening 132 saving 131 cutting events 159 previewing cuts 73 selections 72 73 Cycle Selection command 92 DAO CDs See disc at once CD burning data windows activating
189. Playlist and choose Convert to New from the shortcut menu Note f the original file has both audio and video components such as an AVI file the new file created from the Playlist contains the audio portion only Configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist When trimming lengthy recordings configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist can sometimes decrease editing time In Play as Cutlist mode the original file is played but all regions placed on the Cutlist are ignored Click the Play as Cutlist button p on the playbar to enter Play as Cutlist mode 130 CHAPTER 7 Treating the Playlist as a Cutlist 1 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Playlist from the submenu The Playlist window is displayed 2 Right click the Playlist and choose Treat as Cutlist from the shortcut menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command in the shortcut menu and the Cutlist appears The Play as Cutlist button p appears in the playbar Adding regions to the Cutlist 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 Open the Cutlist 3 Select the Silence region and drag it to the Cutlist or press Delete The region is added to the Cutlist and the selection area in the waveform display is shaded B Wow sound editing D Xx Silence ER vow ee a te At 00 00 00 000 00 01 00 00 00 03 000 Cutlist E3 Name Start End Length 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00
190. S capable sampler option If the sampler supports the specified protocol the Sampler Tool should interface with the sampler 236 CHAPTER 15 4 Specify input output settings for the sampler If Then Your sampler uses MIDI SDS transfer Select the MIDI radio button and choose input and output ports in the MIDI In and MIDI Out boxes Your sampler uses SCSI SMDI transfer Select the SCSI radio button and select your sampler in the Sampler box Note The Sampler box lists all devices connected to the selected SCSI host including devices that are not samplers 5 If desired enter a value in the Sample bias box Sample bias is a user specified value that is added to the logical sample number to determine the actual sample number used for sending or receiving Additionally sample bias can be used to define unique biases for multiple projects For example when composing multiple pieces using different samples it is possible to create unique sampler configurations for each project Simply establish a unique sample bias to segregate the samples within the sampler 6 Enter a value in the MIDI channel box to specify which MIDI channel 1 16 is used when transferring samples 7 Select the Open loop check box if you want to send SDS sample data immediately upon clicking the Send Sample button This is an unconditional transfer of sample data no handshake 8 Select the Send request when retrieving samples check box if you want the Sampler Tool
191. SINGS s ssssseessssesssnressoreesseeeseorrrsoresseoresoeres so 95 Snapping the current selection ccc eee nent e een eeeeeees 95 Disabling auto snapping at high magnifications ccc ccc cee eee eee eee eeeees 96 QUANTIZING to FFAMES 2 0 ccc E e eee e eee eee e S 96 Creating and USING VIEWS lt o65 lt 02s0s eon she gd peaad pekae er eeeheene dr oReaedaeeeeseeeS 97 Displaying the Views toolbar ccc ccc cence eee e nena eeeeeenees 97 CRAIG VIEWS srersei tirer SRA yt nantes Hace dba ad pe ceed tana bahed 44 ese need eeweneeganak ns 97 Changing File Properties and Formats cc cece cece cece eee eeenaees 99 EPE DIODEMIES can c4025 doe r sacra naas E E Holos boas 99 Editing file properties in the File Properties WINdOW ccc ccc eect eee ene eeeeeaas 99 Editing file properties in the status bar 0 ccc ccc cece cece eee e teen eee eennnees 100 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Copying file properties to the clipboard 0 cece ccc eect e eee eeeeeeaes 101 Changing the Sample Tate occu ss06 04 conenwrdohoea ne dane E eae scent ebeteesesweweeds 101 Changing the bit depth cece cee eect eee e eee e ttini neaeh 102 Increasing Dit depth 2 0 0 ccc cece eee ee eee rAr RENTA E EEEE PAIAR 102 Decreasing DIL CEDCN socials ects sete oni irren dds ete dN a SERN aces Reais 102 Understanding dither and noise shaping ccc ccc ccc cece eee ence eee eeeeeeeeees 103 Minimizing Q
192. SONY Sound Forge Prolo User Manual Revised August 12 2009 What s new in version 10 e Event based editing For more information see Using the Event Tool on page 157 Disc at once CD burning For more information see Burning disc at once DAO CDs on page 286 Enhanced timestretch and pitch shifting with the lastique Timestretch plug in For more information see Time lastique Timestretch on page 189 e Support for processing musical instrument files dls sf2 gig For more information see Processing musical instrument files on page 239 e The Global media cache setting on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog allows you to reserve RAM for media recently read from or written to disk For more information see Editing tab on page 310 e Metadata windows For more information see Metadata windows on page 25 e Floating window docks For more information see Floating and docking windows on page 23 e Enhanced window layout management save recall and share custom window layouts For more information see Saving and recalling window layouts on page 303 e Tabbed browsing for maximized data windows For more information see Display tab on page 308 e iZotope MBIT Dither bit depth conversion and 64 Bit SRC sample rate conversion For more information see iZotope MBIT Dither on page 174 and iZotope 64 Bit SRC on page 188 e Resonant Filter plug in For more information see Resonant Filter
193. Scale Integration time UKPPM 10ms o EBU PPM 10 ms DIN PPM 5 ms Nordic PPM 5ms LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 47 Using phase scopes You can display a phase scope in the Channel Meters and Hardware Meters windows to find phase cancellation among the channels in an audio file For more information on channel meters see Using the channel meters on page 44 For more information on hardware meters see Using the hardware meters on page 111 Right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window and choose Show Phase Scope from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the phase scope To change the display right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window choose Phase Scope Style from the shortcut menu and then choose a setting from the submenu Style Description Lissajous XY Plot Displays the right and left channels plotted along the X and Y axes of the graph Lissajous Rotated Displays the right and left channels plotted along the X and Y axes of the graph This setting is identical to the Lissajous XY Plot setting but the graph is rotated 45 degrees Polar Linear Plot Displays the right and left channels plotted vertically on the graph Polar Circular Plot Displays the right and left channels plotted on a circular graph Using the mono compatibility meters You can display a mono compatibility meter in the Channel Meters and Hardware Meters windows to detect correlations or differences between th
194. Select the Write CD Text check box if you want to write CD Text data to your CD In order to display CD Text your CD player must support CD Text The following information will be written Item Source Disc Title Name Title CD Text box in the CD Information window Disc Artist Artist CD Text box in the CD Information window Track Title Title CD Text column in the Track List window Track Artist Artist CD Text column in the Track List window Notes In order to burn valid CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist information is optional If the Title box in the CD Information window or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed e You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text 10 Click OK to start burning BURNING CDS 299 300 CHAPTER 20 Chapter 21 Optimizing for Sound Forge Pro Software This chapter contains information on configuring your system to optimize the performance of Sound Forge Pro software Defragmenting your hard drive The Sound Forge application is a disk based digital audio editor that allows editing operations to be performed on the system s hard drive rather than in memory Because of this you are able to edit large files as well as retain extensive undo redo information and clipboard data This also means
195. Shortcuts on page 321 Using the mouse wheel The following table describes the available mouse wheel functionality you can use to navigate audio files Mouse Functionality Wheel Up Wheel Down Ctrl Wheel Up Ctrlt Wheel Down Shift Wheel Up Shift Wheel Down Ctrl Shift Wheel Up Ctrl Shift Wheel Down Description Zoom in horizontally Zoom out horizontally Zoom in vertically Zoom out vertically Scroll left in tenths of screen width Scroll right in tenths of screen width Move cursor left or move current selection point left if there is a selection Move cursor right or move current selection point right if there is a selection LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 21 The main window When you start the application the main window is displayed The main window s workspace is where you perform all audio editing Sound Forge Pro 10 0 babas Menu bar Fie Edit View Insert Process Effects Tools FX Favorites Options Window Help Standard toolbar OS H wi a Transport bar Channel Meters docked Workspace 3 208 48 Status bar Main window components The following table describes the major components of the main window Component Menu bar Standard toolbar Transport bar Status bar Workspace Channel Meters 22 CHAPTER 2 Description Displays the menu headings for the available functions Provides quick access to some of the most
196. The cursor then moves to the location of the glitch to allow you to repair it This tool locates only one glitch at a time Therefore it may be necessary to execute this command several times on a file to locate all glitches 1 Open any audio file containing glitches 2 From the Tools menu choose Find The Find dialog is displayed Find Sound 1 Preset Hx Cancel Find Glitch r TO 35 0 dB 1 78 50 More o la Threshold slope Sensitivity 60 to 6 dB 0 to 100 3 From the Find drop down list choose Glitch 4 Adjust the Threshold slope fader to configure the minimum slope that constitutes a glitch e A high value detects only glitches with steep slopes A lower value detects glitches with both steep and more gradual slopes 5 Adjust the Sensitivity fader to determine the sensitivity of the detection algorithm e A high value results in any part of the waveform with a slope greater than the Threshold slope being detected as a glitch e A lower value forces the algorithm to verify that the slope is indeed a glitch and not simply a portion of the smooth waveform 150 CHAPTER 9 6 Click OK The first glitch in the file is found and its location is marked with the cursor Tip f you can hear glitches that the Find tool does not locate decrease the Threshold slope and increase the Sensitivity Locating additional glitches using the same settings Once you have configured the settings in the Find d
197. The Fade Out command is used to linearly fade a selection from a volume of 0 dB to a volume of Inf The size of the selection determines the length of the fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file and select all audio data 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and choose Out from the submenu The fade is applied and the volume decreases over the length of the entire file BB Example music bed amp E DNONM m o ella H hH E lt gt 00 00 00 000 180 CHAPTER 11 Insert Silence The Insert Silence command allows you to place sections of silence in audio files Inserting silence into a file 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Insert menu choose Silence The Insert Silence dialog is displayed Tip You can also click the Insert Silence button on the Insert toolbar Insert Silence Exarnple music bed Preset Untitted w x canel e Insert hr imn sc xxx 00 00 01 800 at Cursor Total samples to be inserted 79 380 Maximum length allowed for insert 00 10 00 000 3 Perform one of the following actions From the Preset drop down list choose a preset that has been stored for the plug in e Specify the length of silence that you want to add in the Insert box and choose a setting from the at drop down list to specify where the silence should be inserted Setting Description Cursor Inserts silence at the current cursor position Start of file Inserts silence at the beginni
198. To undock a window click the handle and drag it out of the docking area or floating dock e To prevent a window from docking when you drag it hold the Ctrl key Note When the Allow floating windows to dock check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is cleared windows will not dock unless you hold the Ctrl key When the check box is selected you can prevent a window from docking by holding the Ctrl key For more information see General tab on page 306 e To expand a docked window so it fills the docking area click the Maximize button 4 Click again to restore the window to its previous size e To remove a window from the docking area or a floating dock click the Close button x Sound Forge Pro Dock Close window x f Name f sati End Length Expand window H Silence 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None Handle 2 H Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 None 3 Sound editing just gets eas 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None 4 H And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None 4 TT Playlist Regions List Explorer Plug In Manager Time Display You can dock several windows in the same area of the screen and the windows will be layered Click a window s tab to bring it to the top LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 23 Hiding the window docking areas You can double click the separator between the workspace and window docking area to hide
199. Tr ona a sduready eeu eseensaw AARET EAE O EONA 168 DElCTING DIESCTS AE A EAE E EAE E E E 168 Rasening Dal aMelels us si ar SEEE ANEA ANANA ESATEN ABATANA RENA 168 Managing Pros iS ererig eoi tarr EEEE EEEE EEEE E EEEE EENT 169 Previewing processed audio ccc ccc ccc ccc cece ee eee eee eee eee eeeeeenes 169 Setting CUSTOM preview parameters cece cece eee cece tenet eee eee eee teeeeeeeennees 169 Bypassing a process while previewing ccc ccc cece eee n cece e eee e eee eee eee teens 169 Adjusting the data window selection cece cece cece cette teen nent eeeeeeees 170 Sound Forge PrOCeSSES cece cece cece ee eee eee e eee e sees sees EErEE r 171 PUN TMV CIOD 200 ncosca cecuocetaeseceuecasaeneneeenasseeuesaiweteaueneseceseaccteausens 171 BIt Depth CONVENE 144 cich cranked ddabdniws dads seeadedndds Ocean a de ebee ea ee an 172 IZOCO Pe MBITA DINNG voncadacteeteeceewesteuas Gea cuteens ah atcdes ie desc auw seeders aieaties 174 Channel CONVENE sorrreirririort ritiri roenan EEIE ER EEPE TET er EORR ANDi 175 IC OMSEE EIE TEE TETEE PEET EEE TEET E TOET EE 177 SO I N E A S E ATE A E E en E A E 178 Fade Graphic Fade seasriresererne iner EELE EAE EANA EERE 178 Face Fade Ul eea A E A N A eeu E A ESS 180 Fade Fade O 0 eee ee ee ee ee ee E ee ee eee ee eee 180 n qe ee ee E A ee ee ee E ee er ree 181 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Sound Forge processes continued AAE ea FID EEE E E dane EE A EEEE EEE EEE EE nee TE EE
200. UANTIZATION error 1 cc cece eee e eee e teen eee eee ee eeeeeeees 103 Converting mono stereo cChannels cece cece eee e eee e eee eeeeees 105 Converting from MONO tO stereo 0 ccc cee eee eee eee e nent eee ee eeeneeneees 105 Converting from stereo tO MONO eee ccc cee eee eee e eee e eee ee eeeeneennees 105 Using the Channel Converter resserrer iTEC AEN TEONE ENTE 106 Converting MIG TONNES 6 10655 005050 06eracdarethordvesau sida eeeaeeweiwesesae nse 106 Adding summary information ccc cece cee e ene e eee e eee eee e ene eeennes 107 Viewing and editing summary information cc ccc ccc eee cence een eeenennes 107 Saving summary information o 460isrdadunseses lt eneenesecda ders areedsenoee oaseseeeiowe 107 Including additional embedded information cc cece ccc eee eee e eee eeeeeenes 107 Editing Multichannel Audio ccc cece cece cece eee eee e eee ee ee eeeeees 109 Routing channels to hardware OUtTPUtS cece ccc cc ccc cece eee eee eee eeeeees 110 Opening and editing multichannel audio fileS ccc ccc eee teen eeees 110 Recording multichannel audio files 0 ccc ccc ccc ee eee eee e ee enennes 111 Using the hardware Meters ccc ccc ccc cee cece eee eee eee eeeneeenes 111 Adj stng output levels lt csreate nn coanonk error TESLE SINEN wa Ee euen ex wanee ed deoaws 111 Showing or hiding Meters cee eee ee eee eee e eee eee eee eeeeeees
201. You can access two varieties of help within Sound Forge e Online help Interactive tutorials Online help To access online help choose Contents and Index from the Help menu or press F1 Ey Sound Forge Pro Online Help baka Toolbar aiy Hide Options Shortcuts Glossary Tabs t _ Contents index Search Favortes The online help window has four tabs that you can use to find the information you need Tab Contents Index Search Favorites 18 CHAPTER 1 Q Introduction F Using Help 2 Technical Support 2 Optimizing Sound Forge 2 Legal Notices The Sound Forge Window How Do I Working with Projects Working with Files Editing Multichannel Audio Working with Video Files Previewing a File Na Monitoring Levels MIDI Synchronization Spectrum Analysis Acoustic Mirror Sound Forge Pro 10 Professional Digital Audio Editor Sound Forge software is the workhorse of countless audio professionals and it just keeps getting better You ll find that the new features in this version will help simplify your life by consolidating common tasks and allowing you to customize the software to suit your needs What s new in version 10 iZotope MBIT Dither bit depth conversion and 64 Bit SRC sample rate conversion Resonant Filter plug in Custom selection grid lines 2 Wf soEvent based editing Recording Kop Wf Disc at once CD burning Selecting Data and Pos
202. a drum sample for example choose Don t transpose e Tempo Double click to edit the original tempo of the clip e Downbeat offset samples Double click to edit the location in samples of the track s first downbeat Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Broadcast Wave from the submenu to display the Broadcast Wave window where you can view and edit information about a Broadcast Wave Format BWF file You can double click values in the Broadcast Wave window to edit them If the data you want to edit is not displayed in the window you can right click the window choose Insert from the shortcut menu and then choose a metadata field from the submenu LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 27 CD Information window Ctrl Alt M 5 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose CD Information from the submenu to display the CD Information window where you can view and edit information about a disc at once audio CD Item Description Universal Product Code Media_ Universal product codes UPC or media catalog numbers MCN can be written to a Catalog Number CD as a means of identification However not all CD R drives support this feature Check your CD R drive documentation to determine if your drive will write these codes Type the code in this box and the codes will be written to the CD with the rest of the project Universal product codes are administered by the
203. a scripting operation you could append that argument as follows dir d ScriptOutput amp logFileName myLog txt In this example the ampersand amp separates the two arguments The first argument sets the save folder and the second argument sets the file name for the log file For more information see Script arguments on page 228 Click the Run Script button Running a script from the Scripting menu Click in the data window where you want to apply the script to establish focus From the Tools menu choose Scripting Choose a script from the submenu or choose Run Script from the submenu to browse to the script file vb js cs or dll that you want to run Running a script from the command line In addition to running scripts from the Script Editor and the Scripting menu you can run scripts directly from the command line using the following commands SCRIPT Starts Sound Forge and runs the specified script Example C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Forge10 exe SCRIPT C Scripts MyScript cs SCRIPTARGS Starts Sound Forge and passes the specified arguments to a script Example C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Forge1 exe SCRIPTARGS in C Test input dls amp out C Test output dls amp repeat 2 SCRIPT C Scripts MyScript cs EXIT Exits Sound Forge after running the specified script Example C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Forge100 exe SCRIPT C Scripts MyScript cs
204. ack will restart when you position the cursor If you do not want to interrupt playback when positioning the cursor clear this command Playing a selection You can play specific portions of audio data by creating selections in the waveform display 1 Drag the mouse within the data window Notice that the waveform is selected as the mouse is dragged 2 Click the Play button Only the selection plays 4 Wow sound editing o aam fisie EFA Ard esser ky a 00 00 00 000 00 01 000 l l 00 00 03 000 _ l 00 00 04 000 Selection status bar iq z D gt ope Rate 0 00 9 10 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 rey 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 Tip When Options gt Seek Cursor on Playback is selected playback will restart when you position the cursor If you do not want to interrupt playback when positioning the cursor clear this command GETTING STARTED 61 Viewing selection status When a selection exists the boxes in the selection status bar in the bottom right corner of the data window contain values These values indicate the start end and length of the selection Double click a box to edit the value No selection Selection 00 00 02 207 00 00 05 000 00 00 00 42 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 Cursor position Selection start Selectionend Selection length Selecting the status format You can display status values in any supported format You can change the format by ri
205. ader on the General tab For more information see Dry Out on page 210 This control is identical to the Wet Out fader on the General tab For more information see Wet Out on page 210 This control is identical to the Quality speed check box on the General tab For more information see Quality speed on page 210 The Recover tab is used in creating your own impulse files For more information see Creating impulse files on page 214 The following section describes all controls located on the Recover tab Control Recorded file Test file used Impulse output Remove very low frequencies Recover Impulse 212 CHAPTER 13 Description The Recorded file box allows you to select the file containing the test tone recorded in the field You can enter the path directly into the box or click Browse to locate and select a file The Test file used box allows you to select the file that was used as a test tone You can enter the path directly into the box or click Browse to locate and select a file Note You should use one of the test files included in the Acoustic Mirror Impulse Files Test Tones folder on the Sound Forge application disc The Impulse output box allows you to specify where the recovered impulse response file is saved You can enter the path directly into the box or click Browse to locate and select a folder When you select this check box very low frequencies which are typically comprised of noise are removed from
206. aes 255 Creating a sustaining loop with a release lOOP cece eee e cece cence nent ee eeeeeaes 256 Looping TOCMMIOUES sino seer ca dsmadiwer diag siner Gsneh Genes toneweunsohesoessecened 257 Match endpoint amplitudes 0 ccc cece ee ee eee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeees 257 Match endpoint waveform slope 2 0 ccc cece ee eee cece eee e eee eee eee eet eeeeees 257 Match endpoint sound levels cece cece eee ee eee eee e eee eeeeees 257 Avoid very short IOODS 2x lt cctcuancctraastenadsadedudeunidacede tonadadenss Uautesaseeiaanasann 257 EGIEMNG JOO OSs snc npn eetisbn erika ged a dita eae tered aaa news ata EE EEE 257 Editing a loop without the Loop Tuner i ccc ccc ce ccc eee cent eee eee eenenes 257 Editing a loop with the Loop Tuner 1 ccc ccc cece eect ee eee eee eeneees 257 Crossrading JOODS cave cae tanraetecaw tie aetaden Ea a eeta 260 Using the Crossfade Loop tool s ssesesesuesesusseseseserreserrerrsrsrereseererrsree 260 Creating loops for ACID software sssusussssussesreseserseseeseseereserseseer 261 Creating an AGID ones hotTile ssrriseeriiirieis ririri ensani reor EETA EA 261 Creating an ACID loop file 2 0 0 icc ccc cence eee n eee nent eee e eee eeeneneeee 261 Creating an ACID beatmapped file 2 0 ccc cece cece cee e een e eee ee eeeeneeeeees 262 Editing loops for ACID software cece ccc ccc cece ene e eee e eee eee eeeeenenees 263 Halving or doubling a 1OOD s0s c0wne
207. ag the slider to adjust the amount of tinting that is applied to the icons in the Sound Forge window Drag the slider to the right to add an average of the title bar colors to the icons Drag to the left to decrease the amount of tinting applied Tip You can use the Display Properties or Personalization control panel to change your active window title bar colors In Windows XP open the Display Properties control panel and select the Appearance tab Then click the Advanced button and choose Active Title Bar from the Item drop down list e In Windows Vista open the Personalization control panel Click the Window Color and Appearance link to open the Appearance Settings dialog Then click the Advanced button and choose Active Title Bar from the Item drop down list CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 309 Editing tab Option Disable triple clicking to select all sound file data Disable auto snapping below 1 4 zoom ratios Force loop bar to match selection Update loop bar on Mark In Out Auto crossfade Mix with selection Drag amp drop auto rise delay Snap to zero crossing slope Zero cross scan time Zero cross level threshold Pencil tool maximum zoom ratio JKL shuttle speed Global media cache Wet Gain dB Dry Gain dB 310 CHAPTER 22 The Editing tab allows you to specify preferences for editing and undo operations Description Select this check box if you don t want to select all data when y
208. ager 199 removing plug ins from chains 194 saving chains 195 Saving settings as a preset 196 VST Effects 192 window 25 Plug In Manager overview 197 window 25 plug ins See effects PQ lists See track lists pre emphasis boost 295 preferences Audio tab 316 317 CD Settings tab 315 Display tab 308 309 Editing tab 310 File Types tab 312 General tab 306 308 Labels tab 311 312 MIDI Sync tab 312 Previews tab 313 Status tab 314 Toolbars tab 314 Video tab 317 318 VST Effects tab 318 Pre Queue for MIDI Timecode button 39 Pre roll to Cursor command 81 Preset Manager 42 199 presets applying 167 creating 168 deleting 168 overview 167 resetting parameters 168 saving in Spectrum Analysis graph 282 previewing CD tracks 143 channels in multichannel files 53 cuts 73 effect automation 201 markers 116 processed audio 169 regions 124 video 269 270 previewing files in Explorer window 57 pre roll to cursor 81 previewing processed audio bypassing processes 169 customizing parameters 169 printing sonograms 280 spectrum graphs 278 track lists 297 Process toolbar 40 processes adjusting data window selection 170 applying in Event mode 163 Auto Trim Crop 171 172 Bit Depth Converter 172 173 Channel Converter 175 DC Offset 177 lastique Timestretch process 189 EQ 178 Fade In 180 Fade Out 180 Graphic Fade 178 179 Insert Silence 181 Invert Flip 181 iZotope 64 Bit SRC 40 188
209. ains fixed and the media is slipped past the left edge of the event This slip mode is useful when you want to slip an event without changing its last frame e Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping 160 CHAPTER 10 Crossfading events You can crossfade between two events on the same channel Crossfading fades out one event s volume while another event s volume fades in AIOE TY Fade in volume line Fade out volume line Note You can show or hide the crossfade length ToolTip by selecting Event and then Show Crossfade Lengths from the Options menu or pressing Ctrl Shift T Using automatic crossfades The automatic crossfades features turns the overlapping portions of two events into a crossfade From the Options menu choose Event and then choose Automatic Crossfades or press Ctrl Shift X to turn automatic crossfades on and off Events before crossfade Events after crossfade Drag one event to overlap the other Manually setting a crossfade An automatic crossfade is not inserted if a shorter event is placed within the same time frame of a longer event In this case the longer event begins playing then the shorter event plays punch in and then the longer event resumes playing You can manually create a crossfade to fade in or out of the shorter event This is a fast and effective method of inserting a voiceover on top of background music although the music fades out completely or to replace a bad
210. alog or press Alt R Recording begins Stop button appears OLEC Irs nes Time recorded 00 00 12 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Time recorded value increases 13 Click the Stop button E to stop recording 14 Click the Close button to close the Record dialog Recording automatically In addition to the normal recording method there are three automatic recording methods Time Threshold and MIDI Timecode These recording methods enable you to trigger recording to begin automatically using a specified device with no intervention necessary using a timer by detecting when audio exceeds a set threshold or when MIDI timecode is detected When your re using threshold triggered recording you can choose to record continuously set a buffer size and the recorded audio will fill the buffer discarding the oldest data as new data is recorded If you want to save data from the buffer you can save it to disk You can set up multiple automatic recording sessions to take place at different times and set a session s recurrence level for one time daily or weekly For your recording sessions to take place the Sound Forge application must be started and armed for recording Triggering by time 1 Click the Record button on the transport bar or press Ctrl R The Record dialog appears 2 From the Method drop down list choose Automatic Time 3 Choose the destination data window for your recording By default the software rec
211. and add the files that you want to process When you start the Batch Converter any open data windows will be included in the list If Then You want to add individual files Click the Add File button browse to a file and click the Open button You want to add all files within a folder Click the Add Folder button select a folder and click the OK button Note Subfolders are not included when selecting a folder You want to add files by dragging Drag files from the Windows Explorer to the Files to convert tab 4 Select the Process tab and verify the processing settings For more information see Creating or editing a batch job on page 233 Tip When you convert files to a compressed format such as MP3 peaks that are at or near 0 dB may be clipped by the compression process You may want to consider normalizing first to reduce the possibility of clipped peaks Normalizing to a peak level of 0 9 dB is a good starting point 5 Select the Metadata tab and type values for any metadata file information that you want to save in the output files If Then The Overwrite check box is not selected and The existing information is preserved keywords however will be appended the destination file already includes information for a metadata item The Overwrite check box is selected andthe The existing information is overwritten with the information from the Metadata tab destination file already includes information existing information will be er
212. and duration To change the sample rate of a file while preserving its duration and pitch use the Resample command For more information see Resample on page 186 CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 101 Changing the bit depth Bit depth refers to the number of bits used to represent a sound You can increase or decrease a file s bit depth Increasing bit depth Increasing the bit depth does not improve the quality of a file but it allows subsequent processing to be performed with increased precision 1 Open a file with a small bit depth 2 From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose Bit Depth Converter from the submenu The Bit Depth Converter dialog appears Preset Untitled HX w Cancel Bit depth 16 bit Dither Nome ti Preview Noise shaping of Z Bypass More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 3 From the Bit depth drop down list choose a larger value and click OK Note When increasing a file s bit depth the Dither and Noise shaping controls should be set to None and Off respectively Decreasing bit depth To maximize storage space larger sound files 24 and 16 bit are frequently converted to smaller 16 and 8 bit files However representing a sound file at a decreased bit depth results in audible distortion referred to as quantization error 1 Opena 16 bit file 2 From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose Bit Depth Converter from the
213. and then choose the window layout you want to use from the submenu Tip To load a layout quickly press Alt D release the keys and then press a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to recall the layout saved in that space If no layout is saved in that space nothing will happen when you press the shortcut keys If you ve modified the current window layout choose Window Layouts and then choose Reload Selected Layout from the submenu to reset the window layout to the last saved version Adding a layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Select a layout in the Available layouts in current folder box This box lists the ForgeWindowLayout files in the folder displayed in the Current layout folder box If the layout you want to use is saved in a different folder you can click the Browse button to choose a new folder 3 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box Click the Assign or Replace button to add the layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu You can click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of the layouts in the menu 5 Click the Activate button to apply the selected layout to the Sound Forge Pro workspace 6 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu 1 F
214. ange Create CO tracks from full subcode scan Drive E SONY DD Rw Dw 01204 PY S3 Speed Max Configure Eject Selected length 00 00 00 3 From the Action drop down list choose the method you want to use for extracting the CD audio Method Description Read by track Use this option to select the tracks you want to extract from the CD Each track is extracted into a unique data window Read entire disc Use this option to automatically extract all tracks on the disc The entire CD is extracted into a single data window Read by range Use this option to extract audio from a specified range of time Type appropriate values in the Start and End or Length boxes The range of audio is extracted into a single data window 4 If you choose Read by track or Read by range from the Action drop down list select the tracks or time range you want to extract Note Click Play to preview your selection During playback the button changes to a Stop button 5 Select extraction options as needed Select the Create regions for each track check box to add each extracted track to the file s Regions List e Select the Create markers for each index change check box to place markers in the extracted file at all points where indices occur in the original track 142 CHAPTER 8 6 Select the Create CD tracks from full subcode scan check box if you want to create a disc at once CD track for each extracted track Note Wh
215. ansa Gudaeatewseeeies Koen eceukcenieeeweowksekoens 33 PIQVIOEI lt 4 EEE canes ee eaeeu va Wer eeaenn enue E EEE EEEE E 34 TOOD on dan sataes aenod wan eset o gad Coan amen anes eoene teers Soe eae eeaeaercens 35 Displaying a toolbar 6 ccc ccc eee ee eee eee e eee eee eben eee e eee eee eeeees 35 CUSTOMIZING a TOOIDEl errereen N scewoue widen eee es esuae cere eudeina tons 35 Dockinga toolbar pone a tut ceed rir EENEN INE EESE ELETAN NANA 36 Foma TOODA serrer ee terrena eA NE EA EA E A r 36 Stand tOOlOal ares eE ERER EE EEEE EOE EE E EEEE E EEE E EDEA 36 Transport toolDar seritrsririsrrid irski AAA a 37 Naviga dom toODar soararn E EEEE EEEE E EA EEE 38 WIGWS TOOIDar lt aa4 5n0suees aso s ENTREES RR TAA ERRE E ERASE 38 Status Selection toolbar sesususssusussssesesssseseseesesorresesoereesereesesesoereso 38 Regions Playlist toolbar srserreirariensis ttit ienen ARRAT EPERRA ARa 39 HOODIE scagneed erea a R A E OE EE E 39 PIOGCSS OOD eea E EE E AAE bam EE TA ou eee Gres 40 Eec OO a one R EE E E E A EEE ET 41 TOCIS TOOlDal risi aaan AN EAEE EA AAN E A E E E T 42 Lave OOD eE sho aban EE E AN ATA EE EA 42 SCHDUMNG OODATI wossecescitatareesactanianaameed EEEE EE E 43 TWOOMUIDS eera A EEEE E A E E E A 43 USING TOOWMMDS acc0tnsa0s cateedardiatasucleetwressusniesariied ESEE AEN rii 43 Tormmipg o LOOWNDS erirerrrireria rier A socks Eni eo 43 Command descriptos oserririiri irer Es twdseaecutereadsecka EOE E 43 Key DOGG SIMOFICULS o2onacuehonsaeem
216. aping off ax canei Preview Bypass Clicking the More button displays additional information you can use to adjust your data Start 00 00 00 000 ef End 00 00 03 666 window selection To hide this information Length 00 00 03 666 ef Channels 1 al click the Less button 00 00 00 000 00 00 03 666 00 00 03 666 Control Start End Length Channels Go to Previous Event Go to Next Event 170 CHAPTER 11 Description Determines the starting point for your selection in the data window The Length field adjusts automatically according to your input in this box Click the Lock Start button ef if you want to preserve the selection start when adjusting the Length or End settings Note When working with the Event tool amp the Start box is automatically locked Determines the ending point for your selection in the data window The Length field adjusts automatically according to your input in this box Note When working with the Event tool x the End box is not available Determines the length of your selection in the data window Click the Lock Length button to lock or unlock the current selection length When the selection length is locked Sound Forge will adjust the values in the Start or End boxes to retain the specified selection length Note When working with the Event tool ts the Length box is automatically locked Determines the channel s inclu
217. ar The Scripting toolbar allows you to show hide or activate the Script Editor and display the Batch Converter window You can also add buttons for scripts to the toolbar For more information see Using the Scripting toolbar on page 230 Script Editor Allows you to create edit or run scripts For Batch Converter Allows you to modify and manipulate more information see Using the Script Editor window on multiple audio files without having to process each file page 226 individually For more information see Using the Batch Converter on page 232 ToolTips Using ToolTips Hovering the mouse pointer over a button or status bar box for longer than one second displays a small text box adjacent to the pointer This text called a ToolTip is a brief description of the item s function Using ToolTips is an effective way to quickly familiarize yourself with features m e el ae 639 O0 00 02 677 1 960 ToolTip Selection Length j Turning off ToolTips 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Clear the Show ToolTips check box and click OK Command descriptions When you click and hold a menu item or a button in a toolbar a brief description of the command appears in the lower left corner of the status bar If you release the mouse button outside of the menu item or toolbar the command is not executed Keyboard shortcuts The Keyboard map allows you to customize the keyboard
218. art and stop a Drag the Threshold fader to set the audio level at which recording will begin b Drag the Release slider to set the amount of time the audio level should be below the Threshold setting before recording will stop c Select the Automatically rearm after record check box if you want to continue monitoring audio levels and recording until you click the Stop button E Click the Arm button Arm in the Record dialog Recording will begin when the audio signal meets the threshold level and will stop after the level falls below the threshold for the specified release time To end audio monitoring and recording click the Stop button E Click the Close button to close the Record dialog RECORDING AND EXTRACTING AUDIO 137 Setting a prerecord buffer for threshold recording On the Advanced tab at the bottom of the Record dialog select the Prerecord buffer check box and type a value in the edit box to maintain a set amount of time in a buffer when Sound Forge software is armed for recording A prerecording buffer helps to ensure you won t miss a perfect take if you ve set the threshold a bit too high When the prerecording buffer is enabled recording begins when the audio input reaches the threshold level and the sound data in the buffer is committed to disk For example if you set a 15 second buffer recording effectively begins 15 seconds before the input reaches the set threshold level Triggering by MIDI timecode
219. art or end Start of block snaps to labeled divisions on time ruler Start of block snaps to the start of video frames appearing in the video strip Start of block snaps to the start or end of an event Pasting mixing and creating CD tracks with drag and drop You can drag an audio selection and paste mix or create a CD track in another data window Pasting 1 2 Open the Voiceover pca and Drumhit pca files Select all audio data in Drumhit pca B Drum Hit z AE 00 00 00 000 4 Il Hp gt of Rate 0 00 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 997 00 00 02 997 source window Create a selection in the BB wow sound editing l Drag the selection into the destination window and then press and hold Ctrl 4 Il K gt E gt 3 Hold the Ctrl key and drag the selection to the Voiceover data window e Avertical line representing the leading edge of the source selection appears in the destination window e The letter P appears in the box adjacent to the pointer Tip When dragging a selection to paste sound data drag up or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length 4 Usethe mouse to position the line in the destination window where the source data will be pasted a Wow sound editing fs fon Elsie RPA iow EJEJ Sound editing just gets easier EEJ And easier b AE 00 00 00
220. ased if the box is blank for a metadata item Note f a metadata type is not supported by the output format it will be ignored 232 CHAPTER 14 6 Select the Save tab and verify the file output settings For more information see Creating or editing a batch job on page 233 Note f you want to convert to multiple formats at once click the Add Save Options button to create a setting for each file type that you want to convert 7 Click the Run Job button to start processing The Batch Converter will then display the Status tab to allow you to monitor the progress of your batch job Creating or editing a batch job 1 From the Tools menu choose Batch Converter The Batch Converter window is displayed Pd Batch Converter SHB o Files to Convert Process Metadata Save Status Add File Add Folder Remove File Folder Size KB Modified Musicbed pea C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 485 1 26 2009 3 04 PM Select a combination of files processes metadata and save options then click Run Job 2 Create anew batch job or open the batch job that you want to edit If Then You want to create a new batch job Click the New Batch Job button You want to edit an existing job Click the Open Job button E select a batch job and click the Open button 3 Select the Process tab to choose the processing settings that you want to apply T
221. ases the amount of processing required In addition selecting this check box results in the impulse fading according to the Envelope Graph configured on the dialog s Envelope tab For more information see Envelope Graph on page 211 Acoustic Mirror high and low shelving filters to allow you to tailor the frequency response of the impulse Notice that you can adjust the cutoff frequency and boost attenuation of each filter independently Selecting the Convert mono to stereo check box converts a mono signal to stereo output If the impulse file is in stereo selecting this check box imparts a pseudo stereo effect on the mono input The Quality Speed slider allows you to strike a balance between the quality and speed of the audio processing Lowering this value immediately affects the frequency response of the impulse The processed signal sounds dull and high frequencies sound unnatural At very low values the length of the impulse is shortened When this control is set to a high value the audio quality is excellent but the processing takes longer If you are experiencing difficulty previewing processing in real time decrease the Quality speed value However you must return this value to 5 prior to actually processing the file to output the highest possible quality Envelope tab controls The following sections describe all controls located on the Envelope tab Control Description Impulse This control is identical to the Impulse dro
222. ate button amp and choose C JScript or VBScript A new script is displayed in the Script Editor window with what is needed to write a script Script Editor Untitled Ln 8 Col 4 Script Aras BA B g F using System using System Windows Forms using DoundForge public class EntryPoint public void Begin TScriptableApp app public void FProm oundForge ScriptableApp app Forgetpp app ewecution begins here app fetttatusText Ptring Format Seript 0 is cumming Ecript Hame Begin app app ZetttatusTest Jtring Format Script 0 is done Zeript Hame public static fcriptableApp ForgeApp null public static void DPF string ss ForgeApp OutputText iss public static void DEF string fmt params object args ForgeApp OutputTesxt 3tring Format int args fEntryPoint 3 Replace the begin here text with your script 4 Click the Compile Script button 4 to compile and test your script If there are any errors they will be displayed at the bottom of the window 5 Click the Save button to choose the file name and location that you want to use to save your script Editing an existing script Editing a script in the Script Editor window should not be very difficult as the scripts that are included with Sound Forge software are fully commented to help you find and edit the parameters you need 1 From the View menu choose Script Editor to display
223. ate of 44 1 kHz has a Nyquist frequency of 22 05 kHz at the high end of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio perceived to be cleaner than it actually is e A file with a sample rate of 22 kHz has a Nyquist frequency of 11 kHz well within the sensitive range of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio that is perceived to be noisier than it actually is lronically this defeats the entire purpose of noise shaping For this reason we do not recommend using noise shaping on files with sample rates less than 44 1 kHz Minimizing quantization error There are at least three methods of minimizing quantization error when decreasing a file s bit depth noise gating compression and normalization CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 103 Noise gating Frequently low level signals become noise when a file s bit depth is decreased For this reason it is preferable to have complete silence between sounds in an audio file 1 From the Effects menu choose Noise Gate The Noise Gate dialog appears 2 Choose a noise gate preset from the Preset drop down list and click OK A noise gate is applied to the audio negating its low level signals Preset Untitted v Untitled i Eys Sys Long de Moise gate 2 Sys Slow attack Sys Strong beats only Compressing Decreasing the dynamic range of a sound file makes it easier to represent with decreased bit depth 1 Fr
224. atically resamples audio to 44 100 Hz In addition you can use the Resample tool to change the sample rate of a file prior to burning the CD For more information see Resample on page 186 Writing mono tracks to a CD If you attempt to write mono audio tracks to a CD you are prompted to create a stereo file by copying the mono data to both channels BURNING CDS 283 Burning track at once TAO CDs You should always save your audio files prior to writing them to CD 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn Track at Once Audio CD The Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog is displayed The bottom of the dialog displays the length of the current audio file and the amount of time remaining on the CD currently in the CD R RW Note f there is no CD in the current drive only the Drive and Speed drop down menus and the Close button are available in this dialog If you insert a disc or select a different drive after this dialog is displayed it takes amoment to recognize the disc and make all options available Burn Track at Once Audio CD E RE Action Burn audio Start Buffer underun protection Erase Aw disc before burning Close diec when done burning Eject disc when done Burn selection only Drive E SONY DYD AW DW O1 204 PrSa Speed Max ka Eject Time needed for audio 45 minute s 11 second s Time available on disc 9 minute s 59 second s 2 Choose a setting from the Action drop down list Settin
225. ation see Setting the cursor position on page 81 To determine which inputs are recorded type a value in the Channels box For example you could type 1 4 to record channels 1 through 4 or type 1 3 4 to record only channels 1 3 and 4 Click the Arm button Arm to have recording begin as soon as possible after you click the Record button Arming Sound Forge software prior to recording opens the wave device and loads all recording buffers in order to minimize the amount of time between clicking the Record button and when the recording starts This optional step can allow for more accurate takes when recording in Punch In mode If desired click the Advanced tab and select the Prerecord buffer check box and specify the amount of time to buffer prior to recording when the software is armed for recording A prerecording buffer helps to ensure you won t miss a perfect take if you re a bit slow to click the Record button When you click the Record button recording begins and the sound data in the buffer is committed to disk For example if you set a 15 second buffer recording effectively begins 15 seconds before you click the Record button Note The prerecord buffer is unavailable in punch in mode If necessary select the DC Adjust check box and calibrate the DC offset adjustment For more information see Adjusting for DC offset on page 139 RECORDING AND EXTRACTING AUDIO 135 12 Click the Record button in the Record di
226. ation see Creating a sampler configuration on page 236 4 Click Receive Sample Sample transfer starts A meter in the status bar indicates the progress of the transfer You can cancel a transfer at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing Esc MIDI unity note and Fine tune Once you specify a configuration in the Sampler dialog the Sampler area near the bottom of the dialog displays all relevant sampler configuration information The bottom pane of the dialog contains two additional parameters MIDI unity note and Fine tune MIDI unity note C5 60 Fine tune cents 0 000 Parameter Description MIDI unity note The MIDI unity note value indicates the pitch to which the sample is tuned Fine tune The Fine tune value indicates any minor tuning differences measured in cents in the sample 238 CHAPTER 15 Editing MIDI unity note and Fine tune Both values can be edited and used with samplers that support tuning information in the Sampler Loops window For more information see Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 on page 28 Note The software does not use this information Processing musical instrument files Sound Forge can open and save DLS GigaStudio GigaSampler and SoundFont 2 0 musical instrument files allowing you to add effects and processing to existing samples When you open a musical instrument file you ll notice some additions to the data window BB Smooth Bass s Balik LT eff Banko E a Instrument
227. ation is saved and can now be chosen from the Configuration drop down list in the Sampler dialog Note Jo delete a preset choose it from the Preset drop down list and click Delete Sending and receiving samples Once you have accurately configured the sampler setup you can send and receive samples using the Send Sample and Get Sample buttons in the Sampler dialog Sending a sample 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog is displayed 2 From the Configuration drop down list choose the sampler configuration 3 Enter the sample number to be sent in the Logical send receive sample number box The Sampler Tool takes into account the configuration s sample bias and displays values for the Actual send sample number and Actual receive sample number For more information see Creating a sampler configuration on page 236 4 Click Send Sample Sample transfer starts A meter in the status bar indicates the progress of the transfer You can cancel a transfer at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing Esc Receiving a sample 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog appears 2 From the Configuration drop down list choose the sampler configuration 3 Enter the sample number to be received in the Logical send receive sample number box The Sampler Tool takes into account the configuration s sample bias and displays values for the Actual send sample number and Actual receive sample number For more inform
228. aybar The looped snare selection repeats ten times before the cymbal crash Creating a sustaining loop with a release loop To add a release loop to the sustaining loop created in the previous procedure you must insert another sample loop in the Sampler Loops window and rearrange the loop tags in the data window 1 Right click the sustaining loop and choose Edit Sample Loop from the shortcut menu or press Alt Shift L The Sampler Loops window appears 2 Inthe Sample type box choose Sustaining with Release A release loop is created for the same length as the sustaining loop 3 Edit the length of the new release loop to contain the cymbal crash 4 Typea value of 5 in the Release count box Both loops sustaining and release are configured Sampler Loops Attribute Value 1 Sample type Sustaining with Release 2 5 t 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 005 3 0 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 99 00 00 00 133 4 Sustain length 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 128 5 Sustain count 0 to 999 iterations 10 6 Release s 0 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 150 7 Release end 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 374 8 gth 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 224 count 1 to 999 iterations wT 5 Click the Play as Sample button 4 in the playbar The entire file plays with the snare hit repeated ten times followed by the cymbal crash five times BB Drum Hit fs fone x eee y DER n iim 4 i r a gt K
229. ayed after the processed selection Use this to listen to the transition from processed to unprocessed data Tip Post roll can be toggled on and off by right clicking the dialog and choosing Post roll from the shortcut menu Select this check box to automatically recalculate and play back the preview buffer if the parameters of an effect change This allows for immediate feedback of the effects of a change This option is most useful when using a fast computer limiting preview times and not using processor intensive effects Note You can temporarily suspend Reactive Previewing by holding down the Shift key while making parameter changes Use the Pre roll and Loop time settings to control how the audio event locator plays audio e Inthe Pre roll box specify the amount of data played prior to the cursor position e Inthe Loop time box specify the amount of time that will loop when you stop the cursor while clicking and dragging in the overview bar To use the audio event locator click the overview bar and drag the mouse Similar to a scrub control playback follows mouse movement and loops around the cursor position when the mouse is still Playback stops when the mouse button is released Use the Pre roll and Post roll settings to control the amount of data that is played back when you choose Preview Cut Cursor from the Transport menu e Inthe Pre roll box specify the amount of data played prior to the selection or cursor position
230. ays the current playback position is indicated in the data window in three ways e A cursor travels across the visible portion of the data window e The current playback position in relation to the entire file appears in the overview bar e The first selection status box in the playbar displays the current position in the user specified format For more information see Selecting status formats on page 78 a Wow sound editing b verview Dar current position amp E 00 00 00 000 0 00 01 0 i 00 00 02 000 Cursor position pelle i H H E p e Rate 0 00 o gt 00 00 02 317 00 00 05 000 Status box value Data window scrolling during playback From the Options menu choose Scroll Playback or press F6 to enable automatic data window scrolling during playback When the cursor moves off of the current window it will quickly scroll to show another full window of data To enable smooth scrolling select the Scroll Smoothly option from the Options menu or press Shift F6 When this option is selected the cursor will slowly move back to the center of the display and the wave data will scroll past it This allows you to view upcoming data while the file is being played 60 CHAPTER 3 Playing a file from a specified point You can begin playback from any point in a file 1 Click to position the cursor in the data window A flashing cursor spanning the height of the waveform display is displayed 2 Click
231. back cursor is offset from what you are hearing enable this option for the playback device If the position of playback or recording does not match what you hear after you enable Interpolate position you can attempt to compensate using the Position bias slider Moving this slider will offset the position forward or backward to compensate for the inaccuracies of the device When this check box is selected the software will not create buffers prior to starting playback Some devices do not behave properly if this check box is cleared If your audio stutters when you start playback try selecting this check box Drag the slider to set the number of audio buffers that will be used Adjusting this setting can decrease gapping or help you synchronize the input and output Choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate the buffer size you want to use Choose MME to use the Playback buffering setting on the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog For example if you choose MME from the Buffer size drop down set the Audio buffers slider to 5 and set Playback buffering to 0 35 seconds five 0 07 second buffers are created If you choose 1024 from the Buffer size drop down and set the Audio buffers slider to 5 five 1024 byte buffers are created Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the priority that is assigned to your audio buffers Increasing the buffers priority can help you attain smoother playback but it can also adversel
232. ber display enabled To display frame numbers choose the Frame number option To display timecode choose the Media timecode option Allow pulldown removal when If you want to automatically remove pulldown fields when opening 24 fps opening 24p DV progressive scan DV video files select this check box To open your 24p DV video files as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i clear this check box Deinterlace method Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine how the two fields that make up a video frame are separated when you render to a progressive format Blend Fields Maintains the data in the two fields by blending them together This method can produce a smooth motion blurred image Interpolate Deletes one field and uses the remaining field to interpolate the deleted lines This produces sharper images than Blend Fields but can introduce jagged motion or stair stepping artifacts Resample source video when Select this check box if you want to interpolate video frames when you render to a rendering to a higher frame frame rate that is greater than the source file s frame rate rate External monitor device Allows you to identify an external video device with which Sound Forge software can communicate This video device is used to display previews on an external monitor Important Pulldown is automatically added when you preview 24p video on an external monitor WORKING WITH VIDEO 271 Saving a video file 1 2 3 4
233. box if you want to sweep the range logarithmically when the check box is cleared the sweep is linear Use the Amplitude fader to set the peak level of the waveform Note When you choose Noise in the Waveform shape drop down list the amplitude is affected by the specified cutoff frequency EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 155 7 From the Insert new waveform at drop down list choose a position to determine where the waveform is placed in the data window 8 Click OK 156 CHAPTER 9 Chapter 10 Using the Event Tool The Event tool f in Sound Forge Pro software allows you to edit multiple audio events in a single data window which can be an easier way to edit edges and fades and lay out tracks for disc at once CDs Notes Events do not loop and cannot exceed the start end or channels of the underlying media For example you cannot trim an event past its right edge to insert silence To preserve events in a file after saving use a Sound Forge Pro project file For more information see Working with projects on page 68 Creating events Events are created when you perform any of the following actions on an audio file Cutting coping and pasting selections and events For more information see Editing audio on page 70 and Editing events on page 158 Splitting existing events For more information see Splitting events on page 160 Dragging selections and events from other files or dragging files
234. but may contain a bit error where burning stopped and restarted Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster disc 5 Choose a radio button in the Burn mode box Item Description Burn CDs Begins recording audio to your CD immediately Test first then burn CDs Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD during the test and recording begins after the test if it is successful Test only do not burn CDs Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD 298 CHAPTER 20 6 Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file before recording Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real time Note The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit the application If an image file exists when you open the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image 7 Select the Automatically erase rewritable discs check box if you re burning to rewritable media and want to erase the disc before burning 8 Select the Eject when done check box if you want to eject the CD automatically when burning has completed 9
235. bypass the plug in by right clicking a plug in in the chain and choosing Bypass from the shortcut menu Bypassing the plug in chain To bypass the entire chain click the Bypass button fm or press Ctrl B in the Plug In Chainer window Click the Bypass button again to restore the chain s processing of the audio Selecting the processing mode for audio tail data Some effects such as Reverb or Simple Delay create a tail at the end of the selected audio This tail consists of the echo or reverb created by the effect that lasts beyond the end of the selection When you select a portion of a file and apply the effect using the Plug In Chainer you can select one of three buttons to determine how the audio tail is processed If Then You want to ignore the tail Select the Ignore Tail Data button ls The effect ends abruptly at the end of the selection You want to mix the tail into the adjacent material Select the Mix Tail Data button This is the most natural sounding option You want to insert the audio tail Select the Insert Tail Data button a All audio to the right of the tail moves over to accommodate the extra audio Notes e Press Ctrl T to toggle through the three audio tail data processing modes e The Insert Tail Data and Mix Tail Data commands may not function when using third party reverb plug ins You can use the Insert Silence command to make room for the tails or apply the reverb in a new data window that
236. can use to monitor your audio levels From the View menu choose Channel Meters to show or hide the channel meters For more information see Using the channel meters on page 44 Hardware Meters window Alt 6 The Hardware Meters window allows you to monitor hardware outputs and adjust preview levels From the View menu choose Hardware Meters to show or hide the Hardware Meters window For more information see Using the hardware meters on page 111 Undo Redo History window Alt 7 The Undo Redo History window allows you to see all of your edit operations From the View menu choose Undo Redo History to show or hide the Undo Redo History window For more information see Using the Undo Redo History window on page 76 Spectrum Analysis window Alt 8 The Spectrum Analysis window allows you to examine the fundamental frequency and overtones present in a recording From the View menu choose Spectrum Analysis to show or hide the Spectrum Analysis window For more information see Using Spectrum Analysis on page 273 24 CHAPTER 2 Plug In Chainer window Alt 9 The Plug In Chainer window allows you to link up to 32 DirectX and VST plug ins into a single processing chain From the View menu choose Plug In Chainer to show or hide the Plug In Chainer window For more information see Using the Plug In Chainer on page 192 Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 0 The Plug In Manager window displays your plug ins in a tree view like Windows Explore
237. ce Audio CD dialog to write CD Text while burning When the check box is cleared CD Text entries from the CD Information window and Track List window will be ignored Burning a disc at once CD After you ve created tracks in a disc at once CD project you re ready to burn your disc If you want to burn multiple copies the application will prompt you to burn another copy after each disc is completed 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn Disc at Once Audio CD The Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog is displayed Burn Disc at Once Audio CD B E Drive E SONY DWD Rw D w 01204 PYS3 speed Max g Eject Buffer underun protection Burn mode Burn CDs Test first then burn CDs Test only do not burn CDs v Render temporary image before burning Automatically erase rewritable discs C Eject when done Write CD Text Disc status Empty CD A disc a 7 Cancel 2 From the Drive drop down list choose the CD drive that you want to use to burn your CD 3 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s fastest possible speed Decrease the setting to prevent the possibility of buffer underruns 4 Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning Warning Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players
238. ch channel thereby allowing you to intermix the channels of a multichannel file to create pan effects To use this tool choose Channel Converter from the Process menu For more information see Channel Converter on page 175 Converting file formats The previous sections have described changing a file s sample rate bit depth and channel configuration You can also convert a file s format and compression settings To demonstrate this open the Voiceover pca file and choose Save As from the File menu Notice the Save as Type and Template drop down lists For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 65 Option Description Save as type In the Save As dialog the Save as type drop down list defaults to the Sound Forge Pro Project File frg format However using the Save as type drop down list you can specify any supported file type Template The Template drop down list provides standard settings for saving your audio file If the templates do not match your particular needs click the Custom button to create custom settings 106 CHAPTER 5 Adding summary information Specific audio file types allow you to store text fields of summary information in addition to the audio and video data File types offering this feature include WAV AVI ASF and RealMedia file formats You can view and edit these text fields Summary E Fourcc Attribute Value T INAM _ Name Title CD Text Funky saxophone riff 2 I
239. channel meters Routing channels to hardware outputs You can change channel assignments from the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or the Channel Meters window Changing the setting in either location updates your preferences and affects all open data windows To change a channel s output device using the Channel Meters window click the channel number and choose a new output port from the menu Channel Meters E B Li Left Front L Right Front I i2 Center 18 LFE 14 Left Rear 30 Right Rear RERE For more information on changing channel assignments in the Preferences dialog see Audio tab on page 316 Using the VU PPM meters You can display volume unit VU and peak program PPM meters in the Channel Meters and Hardware Meters windows to help you determine the perceived loudness of your audio signal peak program meters provide faster response times to volume increases than VU meters For more information on channel meters see Using the channel meters on page 44 For more information on hardware meters see Using the hardware meters on page 111 VU PPM meters are especially helpful when you re mastering Comparing two audio files VU PPM readings will help take the guesswork out of matching levels Right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window and choose Show VU PPM from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the VU PPM meters VU PPM readings should fall near the 0 or reference mark
240. channels drop down list to create a mono file b Click in the Source 1 box and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original left channel that will be mixed to the new mono file c Click in the Source 2 box and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original right channel that will be mixed to the new mono file d Select the Invert Mix check box if you want to reverse the phase of the new left channel mix 4 Click the OK button Intermixing channels in a file 1 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter 2 Adjust the controls as needed a Choose a setting from the Output channels drop down list to indicate the number of channels in the converted file b Click in the Source box for each output channel and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original channel that will be mixed to the new channel c Select the Invert Mix check box if you want to reverse the phase of the new channel s content 3 Click the OK button Swapping stereo channels 1 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter 2 From the Preset drop down list choose the Stereo to Stereo Swap Channels preset 3 Click the OK button 176 CHAPTER 11 Channel Converter controls The following controls are located in the Channel Converter dialog Control Description Output channels This drop down determines the number of channels in the output file Source Determine
241. ck cursor for real time preview Both formats make it easy to navigate data and read audio frequency and position USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 273 Using a spectrum graph In the spectrum graph the horizontal axis represents frequency in Hertz Hz while the vertical axis represents amplitude in decibels dB Displaying a spectrum graph 1 Open an audio file 2 Select the portion of the waveform you want to analyze The sound or note you want to analyze should be in the center of the highlighted area Note Analyzing long sections of audio can take a long time and decreases the time resolution so your selection should be relatively short Also if the audio has a low amplitude level you can boost it by using the Volume or Normalize functions For more information see Volume on page 190 and Normalize on page 183 3 From the View menu choose Spectrum Analysis The Spectrum Analysis window is displayed Spectrum Analysis l 2 048 v Blakmannaris r m A 22S aa M Soana n 3 aajo Frequency Hz Decibels dB iNi Snapshot 1 j Snapshot 2 Snapshot 3 Snapshot 4 4 Use the toolbar at the top of the window to set your display options Tip You can also click the Settings button x in the Spectrum Analysis window to set additional options The spectrum graph displays the amplitude in dB of each frequency component from 0 Hz DC to the Nyquist frequency Frequency is displayed al
242. click a wave to open it as a wave file Exploring G Media DLS_Sets J DLS Sets a lax lrartie gala Z2 Desktop ja Euro Lead dls a HiHats Collection dls a Computer J Ed Fairy Bells dls ia Hip Hop Kit 01 dls eH Floppy Disk Drive A la Finga Bass dls a Hip Hop Kit 02 dls ag C Funk Bass dls la Hip Hop Kit 03 dls ka Harps O Space dls a Hip Hop Kit 04 dls la High Rez dls ka Hip Hop Kit 05 dls 4 per Blue G Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono 15 waves 00 00 05 722 DLS Instrument J Ghost ei Media Format A Length 100 Unnamed TI i dii 5 G i 7 i i a a im 6Ch_Demo frg Funk Slap Gl 16 bits mono 00 00 00 330 a ji EEST T Funk Pop G1 a 16 bits mono 00 00 00 268 5 l m And Easier_frg Funk Slap A 1 16 bits mone 00 00 00 411 m Audio Files Funk Pop C2 16 bits mono 00 00 00 290 Funk Slap C2 16 bits mono 00 00 00 320 di DLS Instruments Funk Slap D2 16 bits mono 00 00 00 570 m DLS Sets Funk Pop F3 16 bits mono 00 00 00 292 Funk Slap G3 16 bits mono 00 00 00 612 Previewing samples Playback for musical instrument files behaves slightly differently than playback in a normal data window e Ifno samples are selected click Play All 1 to play all samples in the data window Click Play to play all samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window e If you have samples selected click Play All 1 to play all selected samples in the data window Cl
243. common tasks in the application For more information see Standard toolbar on page 36 Provides quick access to basic audio transport functions For more information see Transport toolbar on page 37 Help and processing information is displayed on the left side The boxes on the right side display the playback sample rate bit depth channel configuration length of the active data window CD time remaining and total free storage space Note The CD Time Remaining box is displayed only when CD tracks exist in the active data window With the exceptions of the CD Time Remaining and Free Storage boxes you can edit these boxes by double clicking or right clicking them When no data windows are open only the Free Storage box contains a value For more information see Editing file properties on page 99 This is the area located behind the data windows Audio selections dragged to the workspace automatically become new data windows Windows such as the Regions List and Playlist can be docked along the edges of the workspace or in floating window docks Displays the level of the output audio signal These meters can be toggled on off by choosing Channel Meters from the View menu Right clicking the channel meters displays a shortcut menu that allows you to precisely configure the appearance of the meters Floating and docking windows Your workspace can become cluttered quickly if you have several windows and toolbars visible You can
244. compatibility meters see Using the mono compatibility meters on page 48 112 CHAPTER 6 Chapter 7 Using Markers Regions and the Playlist Cutlist This chapter describes the use of markers Command markers the Regions List and the Playlist Cutlist These tools allow you to tag and organize audio data and make audio editing more efficient Sound Forge Pro software can save marker Regions List and Playlist Cutlist information as metadata in most file types You also have the option of saving the Regions List and Playlist Cutlist to an external file Why use markers regions and the Playlist There are at least four reasons for you to master the use of these features e Rapid navigation e Added effects for streaming media e Multiple versions of edits e MIDI synchronization and triggering Rapid navigation The most obvious use of the Regions List is for dissecting an audio file into multiple regions Once created regions can be selected and played in the data window You are also able to tag important time positions with markers This allows you to navigate large files and locate important audio events Added effects for streaming media Command markers allow you to add interactivity to media streamed over the Internet by inserting metadata into streaming media files As your file plays any number of other actions can be triggered including opening a Web page in a browser or displaying caption text Multiple versions of
245. compression and decompression is performed while opening and saving the files This limitation is fairly insignificant and the compressed sound files are saved using the best possible quality something that cannot always be done in real time Compressed sound files saved with the software typically sound better than those recorded with audio compression After you save uncompressed audio data to a compressed format you should audition the file Compression and decompression are performed during opening and saving therefore the compressed file is not accurately represented until it has been reopened 332 APPENDIX B Appendix C SMPTE Timecode The Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE timecode may be one of the most misunderstood concepts among individuals within the music industry The problem with SMPTE timecode formats is that they may mean different things to people in the audio and video fields What follows is a brief description of each SMPTE timecode format Important When synchronizing audio to video it is crucial that the SMPTE timecode format used in the sequencer or digital audio workstation is the same as the SMPTE timecode striped onto the video This guarantees that the SMPTE times on the video screen and computer monitor synchronize during playback SMPTE 25 EBU 25 fps Video SMPTE 25 EBU timecode runs at 25 fps frames per second and matches the frame rate used by European Broadcasting Union
246. controls automatically Dragging the slider sets the balance of audio quality vs processing speed A setting of 50 works well for most applications Increasing the setting improves the quality of the plug in but requires more processing power When the Use simplified Quality setting check box is cleared you can adjust the plug in s controls manually Steepness The plug in uses a low pass filter to discard frequencies that cannot be represented or are undesirable in your audio output This setting establishes the steepness of the transition band of the low pass filter Higher settings will reject unwanted frequencies but can cause more ringing in the time domain and a higher CPU load Max filter length Sets the maximum length of the filters used for resampling The default setting will work well for most applications but you can increase the setting if very high quality output is desired for uncommon source or destination sampling rates Cutoff scaling Allows you to scale the cutoff frequency of the plug in s low pass filter from the Nyquist frequency Typical values are near 1 Higher values will offer a flatter pass band and lower values will offer better aliasing suppression Alias suppression Sets the amount of suppression in the low pass filter s stop band Frequencies in the stop band that are not fully attenuated will result in aliasing Higher settings will result in better quality and lower settings can minimize CPU l
247. create multiple window docks to organize your Sound Forge windows These docks can be anchored to the perimeter of the Sound Forge workspace or they can float over the workspace or on a secondary monitor Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Wow sound editing Colle os B File Edit View Insert Transport Process Effects Tools FXFavorites Options Window Help a x SBHABS XBRP LEC H Ga gt gt N EK Sp Di We eee eevee x BES L fAwow Sound editing just gets easier EG A And case 8 00 00 00 000 j00 00 01 000 j00 00 02 000 j00 00 03 000 3 j00 00 04 000 A 7 00 0 2 54 4 0 Maximized Inf 4 data windows Docked channel 12 0 with tabs SA meters 2 5 4 lt 4 hit om tb k gt i m p e Rate 0 00 i 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 1 255 Example music bed Wow sound editing Drum Fill x a Off 000 Acoustic Grand Piano v Note z 1 fa ib 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None s E 22 ax 7 20 Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 None 30 Sound editing just gets eas 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None 4H And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None Docked windows with Docked keyboard tabs 4 uw p Playlist Regions List Explorer Plug In Manager Time Display 3 4 5 6 44 100 Hz 16bit Mono 00 00 05 000 13 840 7 MB e To dock a window drag it to a floating dock or to any edge of the Sound Forge workspace e
248. ction is greater than 300 000 samples Shift The Shift effect allows you to change the pitch of a sound with or without preserving the duration of the selection For information about using the Pitch Shift effect click the Help button E in the Sony Pitch Shift dialog or refer to Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Resonant Filter From the Effects menu choose Resonant Filter to restrict the range of a sound using low pass band pass or high pass filtering and then boost and add oscillation to the resonant frequency For information about using the Resonant Filter plug in click the Help button E in the Sony Resonant Filter dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index WORKING WITH EFFECTS 207 Reverb From the Effects menu choose Reverb to simulate various acoustic spaces Reverb consists of early reflections which are the first reflections that arrive back to your ear and the reverb itself For information about using the Reverb plug in click the Help button E in the Sony Reverb dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Vibrato From the Effects menu choose Vibrato to apply periodic pitch modulation to a selection For information about using the Vibrato effect click the Help button E in the Sony Vibrato dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Co
249. cursor position will appear e Values Appears as an integer The range is from 8388608 to 8388607 in 24 bit audio 32768 to 32767 in 16 bit audio and 128 and 127 in 8 bit audio e Decibels Appears as decibels A value of 0 dB corresponds to maximum absolute amplitude and negative infinity Inf corresponds to complete silence In 16 bit audio 90 3 dB is the lowest possible dB value sample value of 1 e Percentages Appears as a percentage ranging from 100 to 100 percent The cursor position in samples from the start of the audio file The actual number stored by a single sample The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or 0 cB The maximum and minimum sample values and the locations in samples where they occur These values may help determine if clipping will occur in the audio file These values can also be used to determine the noise level of a signal for use with the Noise Gate effect a built in XFX plug in installed with Sound Forge For example to determine the noise amplitude of a file run Statistics on a region of noisy silence The Root Mean Square of the sample values relative to the RMS value of a maximum amplitude square wave the loudest possible recording On short intervals this value relates to the volume level of the audio file If used ona large selection with large volume variation this value becomes less meaningful The sum of all sample values in the selected region divided b
250. cursor to the end of the file Select from the cursor to the next region loop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file Extend selection to the next previous event when the Event tool 4 is selected Select from the cursor to the beginning of the file Select from the cursor to the previous region loop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file Select from the cursor to the next sample Select from the cursor to the previous sample Select 10 samples past the current cursor Select 10 samples prior to the current cursor Snap to grid Snap edge to grid Snap to next zero crossing Snap edge to next zero crossing Switch the selection through the channels in a multichannel file Shift current selection to the left by the length of the selection Shift current selection to the right by the length of the selection Cut the current selection length in half Double the current selection length Rotate audio Restore previous five time selections Toggle last selection cursor position Create a loop from the current selection Create a loop from the current selection without displaying the Sampler Loops window Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl Shift D Shift Right Left Arrow Shift Ctrl Alt Right Left Arrow Shift Alt Right Left Arrow Shift Home Shift End Ctrl Shift Home Ctrl Shift End Shift Page Up Shift Page Down Shift Ctrl Page Up Shift Ctrl Page Down Ctrl Shift Right Arrow Ct
251. cut menu Use the cursor to display lt musical note equivalent Freg OD Ds Oe ee 00002 597 0 004 35 D006 207 D0 Oe D009 812 la 0 ce TS 150 de Right click the Spectrum Analysis window and choose Show Statistics from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the Statistics area at the bottom of the Spectrum Analysis window Updating a sonogram A sonogram updates in the same method as a spectrum graph For more information see Updating a spectrum graph on page 276 Monitoring an input and output source Click the Real Time Monitoring button to turn real time spectrum analysis on or off Click the down arrow next to the button and choose a command from the menu to specify whether you want to monitor your sound card s input e When you choose Monitor Input Sound Forge will monitor the recording devices selected on the Record page of the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog e When you choose Monitor Output a cursor is displayed in the sonogram to indicate the play position real time output monitoring is not available in sonogram display mode USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 279 Tuning a sonogram It is frequently necessary to experiment with the control parameters in the Spectrum Settings dialog to produce the best possible sonogram For more information see Adjusting Spectrum Analysis settings on page 281 Improving the graph s contrast To improve the contrast of the sonogram decrease the frequen
252. cy and amplitude ranges as much as possible Smoothing the graph s display If the graph appears too pixelated raise the Set sonogram resolution value to 200 Improving the frequency resolution For greater frequency resolution choose a higher value from the FFT size drop down list Reducing the processing time To reduce processing time decrease the Set sonogram resolution value and or choose a lower value from the FFT size drop down list Adjusting color intensity Adjust the sonogram s color intensity using the Color slider located directly beneath the sonogram Notice that the bottom pane of the dialog depicts the color scale in dB 000 02 591 Adjust the color intensity Tip This function may be fairly slow if you do not have a palletized driver or if Video for Windows is not installed Synchronizing sonograms in a multichannel file When viewing a sonogram for a multichannel file an individual graph displays for each channel Click the Sync button amp to synchronize the displays so you can view the same region of the FFT in all channels Returning to a spectrum graph To return to the spectrum graph click the Normal Display button la in the toolbar Printing the sonogram Click the Print button 4 to print the contents of the Spectrum Analysis window including the sonogram and statistics data 280 CHAPTER 19 Adjusting Spectrum Analysis settings From the Spectrum Analysis toolbar click the S
253. dB of signal to noise is recommended for optimal impulses If you cannot avoid noise when recording in the field the Noise Reduction tool can salvage a session Speaker nonlinear distortion can also cause noisy impulses The most common source of nonlinear distortion is loudspeaker harmonics Most speakers display substantial harmonic distortion at low frequencies For example when you play a 60 Hz tone the speaker vibrates at 60 Hz but also outputs lower level audio at multiples of 60 Hz 120 180 etc The impulse recovery method greatly minimizes these low frequency distortions however inexpensive tweeters often display substantial high frequency distortion that can disrupt the recovery process When possible use high quality components and do not overdrive the speakers Error message explanations The following sections briefly describe Acoustic Mirror error messages that you may encounter The selected file is not a valid test file The file specified in the Test file used box is not a test tone file included on the Sound Forge application disc The level of the first spike is low Do you wish to use it as a timing spike This typically means that no actual timing spike was detected Verify that the first spike is within one second of the start of the recorded file If the recording is noisy and the spike is not very pronounced you can aid detection by muting the audio immediately before and after the spike USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR A
254. data windows When multiple data windows are displayed on the workspace only the window currently being edited is active and all operations affect this window exclusively Activating a window To activate a data window click anywhere within it The title bar changes to the color defined as the active window color and the previously active window is deactivated Note Choosing Focus to Data Window from the View menu also results in the focus being returned to the current data window Copying data to a new file You can create new audio files by copying data to a new data window 1 2 3 4 Open an audio file and create a selection From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button The selection is copied to the clipboard Create a new data window For more information see Creating data windows on page 64 From the Edit menu choose Paste or click the Paste button The selected data is pasted in the new data window 64 CHAPTER 3 Working with files You can save a file in a variety of formats including popular audio formats such as WAV and AIFF and streaming media formats such as Windows Media You can save a file using a standard template or you can customize the settings to suit your needs Once you create custom settings you can save those settings as a template You have the option to save all open files at once or to save all open files as a workspace file Saving a file 1 Click anywhere in
255. de a plug in within the software without removing the plug in from your system 1 Right click a plug in in the Plug In Manager and choose Hide from the shortcut menu You are prompted to confirm that you want to permanently hide the plug in 2 Click Yes The plug in no longer appears in Sound Forge software Tip To restore hidden plug ins you can force Sound Forge to rescan your system for plug ins by deleting the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Sony Creative Software Sound Forge Pro 10 0 FXCache key in the Windows Registry Organizing effects in the FX Favorites menu The FX Favorites menu provides easy access to the plug ins you use most frequently You can add and remove plug ins and folders to organize the menu however you like You can also automatically add all plug ins on your system to the menu For more information see Automatically adding and organizing plug ins on page 199 Once you add a plug in to the FX Favorites menu you can apply the plug in to a file by selecting it from the menu For more information see Adding effects on page 191 198 CHAPTER 12 1 From the FX Favorites menu choose Organize The Organize Favorites dialog is displayed 2 Organize your plug ins e Drag plug ins to the FX Favorites folder to add them to the FX Favorites menu e Create submenus in the FX Favorites menu by clicking the FX Favorites folder and clicking the Create New Folder button j After you have created a new folder drag plug ins t
256. ded in the data window selection Type a number in the box to change the channel selection while retaining the start end and length selections Click the Lock Channels button to preserve to Channels setting when adjusting the time selection in the data window Note When working in event editing mode the Channels box is automatically locked If you re working with the Event tool 4f and have multiple events selected you can click the Go to Previous Sound Forge processes The remainder of this chapter describes the functions located in the Process menu Auto Trim Crop Auto Trim Crop removes silence from an audio file In addition this function automatically fades the endpoints of a phrase Using Auto Trim Crop 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Auto Trim Crop The Auto Trim Crop dialog is displayed Auto Trim Crop Wow sound editing Preset Untitled Cancel Function Keep edges outside of the selection ha 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 1 00 1 00 Fade in 0 to 5 000 ms 30 l l Fade out 0 to 5 000 ms 20 Attack threshold Release threshold Inf to 0 dB Inf to 0 dB 0 0 More 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 3 From the Preset drop down list choose Phrase Concatenator 1 and click OK The Auto Trim Crop function deletes silence in the file and creates new regions based on the preset s parameters For more information see Auto Trim Crop control
257. dex markers edit track position and length edit track names adjust pause time toggle protection and emphasis flags and edit ISRC data You can also copy save and print the contents of the Track List window if you need to provide a track list to a CD duplicator Reordering tracks 1 Click in the numbered column to select a row 2 Drag the row to a new position Track List 2 1 00 03 32 2 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 Play The Dorothy Heralds g0 00 02 ogg 3 E E 00 07 03 360 00 11 46 225 00 04 42 856 One of These Days The Dorothy Heralds Tee ee i 1 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 933 00 03 30 933 Shine The Dorothy Herald The track is moved to the position where you drop it and the timeline is updated Editing track position and length Double click the Start End and Length boxes and type a new value in the box to edit a CD track s starting or ending point or length Typing a new value in the boxes has the same effect as moving or resizing the CD track on the CD layout bar e Editing the Start or End value moves the track forward or backward in time while preserving its length e Editing only the Length value changes the track s ending time while preserving its start time Editing track title and artist information Double click the Title CD Text and Artist CD Text boxes to edit their contents Notes In order to burn valid CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist in
258. dia Copyright RealMedia 118 CHAPTER 7 Description Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user s Internet browser to change the content being displayed With this command you enter the URL that appears at a specific time during the file s playback Displays text in the captioning area in Windows Media Player located below the video display area You enter the text that appears during playback Note To view captions during playback in Windows Media Player 9 or later choose Captions and Subtitles from the Windows Media Player Play menu and then choose On if Available from the submenu Displays the entered text on the media player s title bar Note When rendering Windows Media files title information is based on the settings in the Summary window View gt Metadata gt Summary Information or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Summary window will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Displays the entered text author s name when a user selects About This Presentation from the RealPlayer shortcut menu Note When rendering Windows Media files title information is based on the settings in the Summary window View gt Metadata gt Summary Information or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialo
259. ding scripts to the Scripting submenu 228 API and sample scripts 225 arguments 228 Batch Converter 232 command line 227 creating scripts 229 editing existing scripts 229 online forum 225 running scripts 227 Script Editor window 25 226 toolbar 230 Scripting toolbar adding or removing toolbar buttons 230 creating custom button images 231 overview 43 running scripts from 231 Scroll Playback command 60 Scroll Smoothly command 60 scrolling during playback 60 smooth 60 scrub control slider 84 scrubbing configuring audio event locator 85 Normal Rate indicator 84 on timeline 84 with audio event locator 84 with keyboard 84 with scrub control slider 84 SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI 235 SCSI SMDI hardware setup 245 troubleshooting 245 Seconds button 38 Seek Cursor on Playback command 61 selecting events 164 regions 123 Selection Grid Lines option 93 selections adjusting from process dialogs 170 adjusting with keyboard 92 adjusting with mouse 92 creating data windows from 150 selections continued creating using start and end values 91 deleting all markers and regions within 116 124 during playback 91 muting 182 on the fly 91 playing 61 restoring 92 shifting left right 263 Snapping 94 96 Statistics 63 status boxes 62 sending samples 238 Set button 38 97 Set Grid Divisions command 93 Set Selection dialog 91 setting volume 190 sfk files 59 sfl files 107 sfw
260. dk Heke weremdiwnie eeeedeeiGier essen anew eesee es 263 Shifting a selection left Or right 0 ccc ccc ccc cee eee e nee e nese eeeeeeneees 263 ROCA GUGINO suse earn E one se temeud E aed ean E E EEE EA 264 Seting lop TOMO sser tu aougeeheadhessd ee E ue vend tecud uataeasneatneeewaneneus 265 SAVING OOD POMS ino aes nase win gor peed suede knee eeat ee Sheen Shaw 265 WOKING WIEN VIDEO x 60 v2 06 vsiaeww enue AE aadwen EE ene konswaeeeur 267 VIEWING VIGGO o5cuconseseese tur gap veds puede puede wink oe0ed oh EEE EAEE E 267 Using the video SUD sca cow ctewdasadaaadaurd stews sedan ears ee on9u ae dt tees Cae ed ondseesaeews 267 Previewing THES WIEN videO osrirccirt irid rerr er Coed sewn aan E EEA 269 Using an external monitor 45 000 ow seen adercuans oho inere te ods heenanuahs aor d auGonsere ee 270 Attaching video to an audio file 0 cc ccc ccc cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeneees 270 Detaching video from an audio file ccc cc ccc ccc ee eee eee nett eee eeenneees 271 Setting Video OPTIONS 6 ccc cece cece teen eee EEEREN EEEE 271 Video HIE properes acsa255 0025 b5 tive i Iiri ANTEA rI aban FAAETAETA aS 271 Configuring your video settings s sususususesesesesesereseseseresesererrsesosese 271 Saving a video file tev ntceuwdn ated awdadahweideud baewed dante den etianeawanebidonntduneedn 272 USING opec ANAYSSI Se siya enatecan ace EEEE TAE ENE 273 Working in the frequency domain sesususssesesensesesesesorers
261. drop down list and click the Delete Preset button x Note Built in presets cannot be deleted Resetting parameters To reset all dialog controls to their default settings right click the dialog and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu Graphic Fade Wow sound editing Preset Sys 3 dB exponential fade out x car 100 4 Reset Channel Meters oer 75 Pre rall C Bypass Post roll 50 9 Select Original Select All Data ari Reset All Save Current X N Preferences i Maximum Gain 100 0dB 200 6 dE 400 12 dB Show wave Resettvebre J a 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 168 CHAPTER 11 Managing presets After you have created custom presets you can use the Sound Forge Preset Manager to back up transfer or delete custom presets from any of the installed effects processes tools and plug ins You can also use the Preset Manager to manage your ACID and Vegas presets For more information see Using the Preset Manager on page 199 Previewing processed audio You can preview the effect that a process has on a file by using the Preview button found in most audio processing dialogs You can use previews to fine tune effect parameters without leaving the dialog More importantly using previews reduces wasted processing time Setting custom preview parameters You can customize the preview parameters to satisfy your editing pre
262. ds into the window using the saved settings for each DirectX and VST plug in in the chain Loading an individual DirectX plug in preset Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list The plug in settings stored in the preset are loaded 196 CHAPTER 12 Loading an individual VST plug in preset 1 Click the Open VST Preset button E3 The Open VST Preset dialog is displayed 2 Browse to the fxp file that you want to use 3 Click the Open button The current VST preset is replaced with the settings stored in the fxp file Loading a bank of VST plug in presets 1 Click the Open VST Bank button The Open VST Bank dialog is displayed 2 Browse to the fxb file that you want to use 3 Click the Open button All presets for the current VST plug in are replaced with the settings stored in the fxb file and the first preset in the bank is loaded by default Using the Plug In Manager You have several tools to help you manage your plug ins including the Plug In Manager FX Favorites menu and the Preset Manager The Plug In Manager window not only allows you to add plug ins and saved plug in chains but it also provides a way to manage your plug in files to rename plug ins hide plug ins create folders add plug ins to an FX Favorites folder and perform other standard file management tasks Plug In Manager BB Sony E a x Be ifi Amplitude Modulation fy Audio Restoration fP Chorus i Views His Click and Crac
263. e Big Endian byte ordering Sony Creative Software Inc recommends initially trying a file in Big Endian Note You may want to save presets for byte ordering as well as mono or multichannel when receiving CSOUND files from a number of source computers Saving files You cannot save these files in their original format You must select a Sound Forge supported file format To save files for use with software that supports the BICSF EBICSF format use the NeXT Sun format This format does not save the additional information found in BICSF EBICSF files but allows the data to be read as a NeXT Sun file 336 APPENDIX D Appendix E Glossary A Law A Law is a compounded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines A Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in United States telecommunications A Law is very similar to u Law however each uses a Slightly different coder and decoder Acoustic Signature The acoustic signature of a system is data containing all of the sound characteristics of a system This includes such things as reverb time frequency response and other timbral qualities Impulse files used by Acoustic Mirror can be thought of as acoustic signatures Activation Number This number is based on the Computer ID number of the computer on which Sound Forge software is installed
264. e Closing a CD on page 285 Eject disc when done Select this check box to eject the CD automatically when burning has completed Burn selection only Select this check box to burn only the audio within the loop region 4 From the Drive drop down list choose the CD R RW drive that you want to use to burn your CD 5 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s fastest possible speed decrease the setting if you have difficulty burning 284 CHAPTER 20 Click the Start button Important Clicking Cancel after the CD writing process begins renders the CD unusable After the audio is written to CD the CD Operation dialog indicates whether the writing was successful Click OK to clear the message Closing a CD Closing the CD allows you to listen to it in an audio CD player However you cannot add tracks to a CD once it is closed 1 2 3 4 From the Tools menu choose Burn Track at Once Audio CD The Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog is displayed From the Action drop down list choose Close Disc If desired select the Eject disc when done check box to eject the CD automatically when the disc has been closed Click the Start button The Sound Forge application begins closing the CD and displays a progress meter in the dialog After the CD is closed the CD Operation dialog indicates whether the closing was successful Click OK to clear the message BURNING CDS 285
265. e File name prefix and a unique three digit number starting with the number specified in the Start file counter index box For example if you have 4 regions selected for extraction and your prefix is set to PREFIX the names used will be PREFIO00 wav PREFIOO1 wav PREFIOO2 wav PREFIO0O3 wav 8 Click Extract Using the Regions List The Regions List contains information pertaining to all regions in the current data window The Regions List information can be saved as metadata in most file types You also have the option of saving the Regions List to an external Playlist file Displaying the Regions List 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 Fromthe View menu choose Metadata and then choose Regions List from the submenu or press Ctrl Alt M 0 The Regions List for Voiceover pca appears Working with the Regions List By default the Regions List displays the following information for each region in the current data window e Asmall Play button dedicated to the region e The region s name e The region s start point e The region s end point e The region s length e The region s trigger e The region s channel e The region s note Regions List Start End Length 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 None Sound editing just gets easi 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163
266. e Insert Silence Resample Time Stretch Gapper Snipper Pitch Bend and Pitch Shift without preserving duration If you want to apply one of these processes in a single channel convert the file into separate mono files you can select a channel and drag it to the Sound Forge workspace to create a new file quickly apply the process and merge the files into a new multichannel file 3 Select the desired plug ins Note Effects chains including packages created in Vegas or ACID appear in the DirectX Chains folder in the Plug In Manager 4 Drag the plug ins from the Plug In Manager window to the Plug In Chainer window The selected plug ins are added to the chain Tip You can also drag plug ins or a plug in chain from the Plug In Manager window to a data window The Plug In Chainer window is opened with the selected effects in a new chain 5 Use the Plug In Chainer to preview your effects and adjust settings as needed You can select the Bypass button fm to hear the Original unprocessed audio 6 When you are satisfied with the chain click the Process Selection button 14 in the Plug In Chainer to apply the effect Renaming a plug in You can customize the names of plug ins within the software 1 Right click a plug in in the Plug In Manager and choose Rename from the shortcut menu 2 Type a new name and press Enter Hiding a plug in All DirectX plug ins on your system are automatically available to you You may want to hi
267. e M key E Drum Fill fs fone x j00 a AE Joo 00 00 000 ee ee a e 4 l Po 4 Id gt i m P e Rate 0 00 lt 4 00 00 01 380 00 00 00 004 1 192 3 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Markers to Regions from the submenu or right click the Regions List and choose Markers to Regions from the shortcut menu You are prompted to verify whether the markers should be used to create regions 4 Click Yes Regions are created and added to the Regions List Naming or renaming a region Right click the starting region tag F and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type the name of the region in the edit box and press Enter when your re finished Double click to the right of the region marker and type a name in the edit box Customizing region labeling You can set Sound Forge to automatically label new regions as they are created 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Labels tab 3 In the Region labels area adjust the labeling controls as desired Control Description Label Regions Select this check box if you want Sound Forge to automatically name regions when you insert them Prefix Type a prefix in the box if you want Sound Forge to assign a name to new regions when you insert one Clear the box if you do not want to include a prefix if you want to number regions only for example Use counter and start at Select thi
268. e Open Impulse File dialog and allows you to locate an impulse file from your local system or network You can use the Response width slider to create some simple stereo expansion and stereo collapsing effects This control s default setting of 50 represents normal stereo operation and is recommended to maintain the stereo field of the impulse response A higher setting expands the stereo field but may result in an unnatural sounding effect Lowering this setting narrows the stereo field A setting of 0 is essentially mono The Response delay slider controls the time in milliseconds that elapses between the dry signal and the processed output This control can be used to create interesting effects and add new dimensions to an acoustic signature Configuring this control with a positive value results in the processed output following the dry output A negative value results in the processed output preceding the dry signal or a pre delay The Pan slider controls the balance between the left and right channels in stereo files The default value is 0 and indicates a typical center position The Dry Out fader controls the amount of unprocessed signal mixed into the output The Wet Out fader controls the amount of processed signal mixed into the output When you select this check box the length of the impulse is limited to the time specified in the adjacent box Limiting the length of an impulse file shortens the decay of the reverberation and decre
269. e Selection and choose Shift Right from the submenu LOOPING 263 Rotating audio You can move the beginning of a loop to the end or the end of a loop to the beginning by rotating the audio From the Process menu choose Rotate Audio Notes Ifthe selected audio does not originate from the start or end of a loop Rotate Audio has no effect e Rotating the audio has different effects depending on what is selected Ifno audio is selected Rotate Audio transfers the first 25 percent of the loop to the end of the loop B Voices Pad o E BB voices Pad a Sustaining Loop 4 7 Sustaining Loop 4 a 5 a 5 amp af 00 00 00 00 00 02 A 00 00 04 00 00 06 A amp E 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 j00 00 06 4 0 5 4 0 In Inf 4 0 4 0 am a It gt oe 4b 4 it Poe A Ki gt i E gt of p Rate 0 00 lt o 00 00 00 000 00 00 06 644 1 256 Ki gt i E gt ob p Rate 0 00 lt o 00 00 00 000 00 00 06 644 1 256 e If audio is selected from the start of a loop Rotate Audio transfers the selection to the end of the loop a Voices Pad z AE 00 00 00 ella lt lt id Pl E gt of p Rate 0 00 Amim roe o asi 4 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 101 00 00 02 101 1 256 a Voices Pad Sustaining Loop y z NI AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 ella lt lt K gt i E gt ob p Rate 0 00 Pie 4b bint 4 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 101 00 00 02 101 1 256
270. e Spectrum Analysis dialog and choose Grab Pan from the shortcut menu A check mark appears next to this option when Grab Pan mode is enabled The cursor appears as a hand f and you can drag horizontally or vertically to scroll through the graph When you are zoomed into a selection of the spectrum graph you can drag the horizontal and vertical sliders to scroll through the graph The thumbnail image in the lower left corner of the Spectrum Analysis window will show you which part of the graph is being displayed To turn off Grab Pan mode choose Grab Pan from the shortcut menu again Changing the graph type Click the down arrow next to the Normal Display button E and choose Line Graph Filled Graph or Bar Graph from the menu to change the type of graph displayed in the Spectrum Analysis window A check mark is displayed next to the selected graph type Note Some video drivers have problems displaying Filled Graph and Bar Graph modes Ifyou encounter problems such as incorrect shading or very slow drawing use the Line Graph option or change video drivers If you re analyzing a multichannel file you can click the down arrow next to the Normal Display button and choose Single Graph to see all channels in a single graph Right click the graph and choose Logarithmic from the shortcut menu to toggle the x axis between logarithmic and linear mode In logarithmic mode more of the graph is devoted to lower frequencies Changing the zoom l
271. e _ Item Description File name The name of the file saved on disk Location The folder where the file is saved File size The size of the file on disk CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 99 Item File attributes Last saved File type Audio format Audio sample rate Audio bit rate Audio bit depth Audio channels Audio length Video format Video attributes Video length Video field order Video pixel aspect ratio Description Indicates whether file attributes read only hidden etc have been set The date and time the file was saved The file type for the file The format used to save the audio stream Click the down arrow and choose a sample rate from the drop down list or choose Custom to type a value in the edit box to set the number of samples per second used to represent the audio Note This setting will not resample the sound file If the playback rate is different from the originally recorded rate the pitch will vary unless the file is resampled Displays the bit rate of the audio file Click the down arrow and choose a bit depth from the drop down list to set the number of bits used to represent each sample Note Use the Bit Depth Converter to perform advanced channel mixing Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the drop down list to set the number of channels stored in the file Note Use the Channel Converter to perform advanced channel mixing The duration in tim
272. e accurate Selecting this option can prevent gapping during playback on slower computers CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 305 Setting preferences Preferences affect how Sound Forge software functions Any changes that you make to the preferences remain set until you change them again or reset Sound Forge software to use the default presets You can access the Preferences dialog by choosing Preferences from the Options menu This dialog contains tabbed pages The following sections explain the settings on each tab General tab The General tab allows you to set miscellaneous Sound Forge options Option Description Show logo splash screen on startup When this check box is selected the Sound Forge splash screen will be displayed briefly upon startup Open default Workspace on startup If this check box is selected files that were open when you last exited the program will be opened Default to slow scroll when drag selecting Warn when Paste or Mix formats do not match Confirm on close Compatible draw mode for broken video drivers Compatible scroll mode for other broken video drivers Show a textured background on the Workspace Allow Wave renders up to 4 GB Ignore fact chunk when opening compressed WAV files Show free storage space on Status Bar Show shuttle controls on Data Window transport Auto power MIDI keyboard window Use Net Notify to stay informed about Sony products 306 CHAPTER 22
273. e and perform any necessary trimming or editing For more information see Trimming the impulse file on page 216 Trimming the impulse file After the impulse file is recovered it may still require minor trimming In general you should try to make the impulse response as short as possible to increase processing speed when using the Acoustic Mirror tool Impulse files greater than 131 071 samples about 3 seconds in length require substantial processing time When possible trim the impulse response to less than 65 535 samples about 1 5 seconds In addition we recommend fading the tail of the impulse Of course this is not always an option when dealing with spaces that produce extended reverberations 1 Open the recovered impulse file in Sound Forge software and play it 2 Delete any silence or low level noise that occurs before or after the actual audio data Typically there are between 900 and 1100 samples of data at the beginning of the impulse that should be removed 3 Save the trimmed impulse response file using the standard WAV format Tip To prevent phase problems when mixing the dry and wet signals you may also want to verify the phase of the impulse file The file should begin by going positive above the centerline If the impulse file has a negative below the centerline phase choose Invert Flip from the Process menu 216 CHAPTER 13 Adding summary information to your impulse file If you plan on sharing impulses with
274. e and samples of the audio file Displays the format used to save the video stream Displays the frame size color depth and frame rate of the video stream Displays the length in time and frames of the video stream Displays the field order of the video stream Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the drop down list to change the field order Displays the pixel aspect ratio of the video stream Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the drop down list to change the pixel aspect ratio Computers display pixels as squares or a ratio of 1 0 Televisions display pixels as rectangles ratios other than 1 0 Using the incorrect setting can result in distortion or stretching Consult your capture video output card s manual for the proper settings Editing file properties in the status bar You can quickly edit individual file properties from the status bar using either of the following methods e Right click the status value to be changed and choose a new value from the shortcut menu e Double click the status value to be changed and type a new value in the edit box 100 CHAPTER 5 Copying file properties to the clipboard If you want to copy file properties to the clipboard right click the File Properties window and choose Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu File Properties E Edit Copy to Clipboard X b3 06 11 57 20 ae oe f orr r E TECT Wiel L 1 If you want to customize
275. e channels of a file that can cause phase cancellation when downmixing to mono For more information on channel meters see Using the channel meters on page 44 For more information on hardware meters see Using the hardware meters on page 111 Right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window and choose Show Mono Compatibility Meter from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the mono compatibility meter When the channels are similar the right or top half of the meter is illuminated EEE When the channels exhibit phase cancellations the left or bottom half of the meter is illuminated EEE 48 CHAPTER 2 Controls A major step in mastering Sound Forge software is becoming familiar with the controls used to set and adjust feature parameters including faders sliders and envelope graphs Faders and sliders Faders and sliders are frequently used to edit effect and process parameters To use either control drag the control to the desired position and release eee Fader 15 85 Drag to set value Normalize to J F 60 to 0 dB Response width 0 to 100 50 Slider Resetting fader and slider values Double click to return the control to its default value Fader and slider shortcuts There are numerous keyboard shortcuts available when using faders and sliders If you want to Then use the following shortcuts Change the value in small Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow and Right Arrow increments or
276. e displayed periodically at startup Clear the check box to bypass the Net Notify dialog Option Allow floating windows to dock Spacebar and F12 Play Pause instead of Play Stop Warn when metadata cannot be saved in the file Show the position of the playback cursor Show the record counter while recording Automatically reopen file after Save As Prompt to open new file after Save As Keep media files locked Delete temporary files on close Hide new temporary files Always proxy compressed formats Remember last used sample rate for vox and ivc files Remember last used settings for raw files Allow Undo past Save Use floating point temporary files Allow Ctrl drag style cursor scrub in data windows Description When this check box is selected windows will automatically be docked when you drag them to the edges of the Sound Forge workspace You can hold the Ctrl key while dragging a window to prevent it from docking When this check box is cleared windows will not dock unless you hold the Ctrl key Select this check box if you want the F12 and spacebar keyboard shortcuts to toggle between Play and Pause mode In this mode the cursor will maintain its position Select this check box if you want to be prompted to save metadata to a separate file if it cannot be saved within the media file When the check box is cleared metadata will automatically be saved to a separate file if necessary When this c
277. e edge Tips e You can also press Shift T e To change the resolution of the grid choose Status Format from the Options menu and then choose a setting from the submenu or right click the time ruler and choose a format from the shortcut menu This option forces both edges of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file Tips e You can also press Z e The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a negative positive or any zero crossing This option forces the active edge of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file The active edge of a selection is defined by the blinking cursor Press Home or End to change the active edge Tips e You can also press Shift Z e The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a negative positive or any zero crossing NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 95 Command Description Extend to Next Zero This option forces both edges of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file Tips You can also press Z e The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a nega
278. e flag Check your CD drive documentation to determine whether your drive supports pre emphasis flags Editing ISRC codes The Track List window allows you to specify an ISRC International Standard Recording Code that will be used to identify the tracks on your disc For more information about ISRC codes see http www ifpi org content section_resources isrc html 1 Double click the ISRC box in a track row 2 Type the appropriate code for the track 3 Press Enter Industry Standard Recording Codes ISRC were designed to identify CD tracks The ISRC code is a 12 character alphanumeric sequence in the following format Field A B C D E Sample ISRC SE T38 86 302 12 Field Description A Country Represents the recording s country of origin B First Owner Assigned ID for the producer of the project Each country has a board that assigns these codes C Year of Recording Represents the year the recording was made Recording Represents the recording s serial number made by the same producer in that year This value will use three digits 300 999 when the CD has 10 or more tracks This value will use four digits 0001 2999 when the CD has 9 or fewer tracks E Recording Item 1 or 2 digits Identifies tracks on a CD each track can have a different ISRC code Creating track lists PQ lists or cue sheets You can right click the Track List window and choose Copy Track List to Clipboard Export Track List or Print Track List t
279. e glitch undo it and apply Copy Other Channel again this time using a longer selection Interpolating new audio This is the most basic method of repairing glitches New audio data is simply interpolated based on the data at the beginning and end of the selection This method results in a straight line connecting the beginning and end of the selection Interpolation should be used to repair only small less than 2 ms glitches 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Right click the data window and choose Zoom from the shortcut menu and choose In Full from the submenu The file is displayed at a 24 1 zoom ratio 3 Create a selection containing the glitch Tip To improve the accuracy of this feature the selection should be as small as possible while still containing the glitch EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 151 4 From the Tools menu choose Repair and choose Interpolate from the submenu The glitch data is replaced with interpolated data E sound L frg Data is interpolated within the selection Replacing audio with preceding data The Replace tool allows you to repair audio files by replacing the damaged data with the data immediately preceding it This repair method is useful for repairing longer glitches such as needle drops and scratches 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Create a5 to 50 ms selection containing the damaged audio Note The maximum allowed replace time is 0 5 seconds 3
280. e if no anti aliasing filter is used while recording Object Linking and Embedding OLE OLE is a technology developed by Microsoft to allow independent applications to behave as though they are tightly integrated This allows objects such as Sound Forge audio files to be integrated into other applications such as a Microsoft Word document Overview The Overview is the area on the data window directly under the title bar The entire length of the overview represents the entire sound file Cursor selection and position information is shown relative to the entire length of the sound file One Shot One shots are RAM based audio clips that are not designed to loop Things such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Longer files can be treated as one shots if your computer has sufficient memory Pan To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers Pause Time Pause time is the space between CD tracks This space may contain silence as in a standard commercially produced CD or can contain audio as in a live performance captured on CD The Red Book standard calls for two seconds of pause time but you can edit the default pause time on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog Peak Data File The file created by Sound Forge software when a file is opened for the first time This file stores the information regarding the graphic display of the waveform so that open
281. e noise from old recordings For more information on this plug in see the Sound Forge online help file accessible from the Help menu by choosing Contents and Index Synthesizing audio You can generate custom tones and waveforms for use in your audio projects Generating DIMF MF tones You can generate standard dial tones used by telephone companies 1 From the Insert menu choose Synthesis and choose DTMF MF Tones from the submenu The DTMF MF Tones dialog appears Tip You can also click the DTMF MF Tones Synthesis button on the Insert toolbar DTMF MF Tones Sound 3 Preset MEE E x Cancel Dial string 1234567890ABCD 123456 7890ABCD Preview 12 0 dB Tone style to generate DTMF MF 25 12 Single tone length 0 001 to 2 seconds 0 200 Break length 0 001 to 2 seconds 0 100 Pause length 0 001 to 5 seconds 0 200 V Fade the edges ofeach tone Pause character Amplitude SS as 0 dB Insert new tone sequence at End of file kd 2 Enter the phone number to be generated in the Dial string edit box including pause characters Note Unknown characters are ignored 3 Use the Amplitude fader to set the peak level of the waveform 4 Select the Tone style to generate radio button corresponding to the tone to be generated e DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals are used by standard push button telephones and are generated using combinations of 679 770 852 941 1209 1336 1477
282. e outputs Sound Forge provides you with a great deal of flexibility in routing the channels to the outputs on your sound card you can route each channel to a separate output or you can route all the stereo pairs to a single set of outputs to simulate a stereo downmix 4 e 4 Left Front Right Front Center LFE Left Rear Right Rear EIS uy 8 8 ae E ip 60 4 i eo l The Hardware Meters window displays a meter and gain fader for each enabled output port For more information see Using the hardware meters on page 111 You can change channel assignments from the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or the Channel Meters window Changing the setting in either location updates your preferences and affects all open data windows For information about using the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to enable and map channels see Audio tab on page 316 To change a channel s output device using the Channel Meters window click the channel number and choose a new output port from the menu Opening and editing multichannel audio files If you ve used Sound Forge to edit stereo files before you already know everything you need to know to edit multichannel files You can open multichannel audio files just like any other supported media type For more information see Getting media files on page 55 When you open the file you ll notice that the data window displays the channels as stereo pairs Ba Inf Ba In
283. e perceived differently depending on the direction the sound comes from This occurs because of the echoes bouncing from your shoulders and nose and the shape of your ears A head related transfer function contains the frequency and phase response information required to make a sound appear to originate from a certain direction in 3 dimensional space Hertz Hz The unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second CPS High Pass Filter A high pass filter attenuates all frequencies below a cutoff frequency It is usually used to remove low frequency rumble from audio files Insertion Point The insertion point also referred to as the cursor position is analogous to the cursor in a word processor It is where markers or commands may be inserted depending on the operation The insertion point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved by clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the data window Inverse Telecine IVTC Telecine is the process of converting 24 fps cinema source to 30 fps video television by adding pulldown fields Inverse telecine then is the process of converting 30 fps television video to 24 fps cinema by removing pulldown See also Pulldown on page 347 Telecine on page 351 InterVoice Sound File Support The InterVoice sound file format IVC commonly used in telephony applications is now supported and includes G 711 Law and A Law G 721 ADPCM 32 kb s and G 723 ADPCM 24 kb s da
284. e ruler horizontal 6 cece eee eee eee nent nneeeeeees 85 Zooming the level ruler vertical cece cece eee e eee eeeeeeees 86 Using custom Zoom SCIINGS sts cdyaaaradcee gn ae Enine EEE EEEREN E EERS 88 Using ZOOMING SNOFTCUtS ccssrisriricredrer isre rrer r EESE rT ETE ai 89 Using the Magnify tOOl sererrssisissedsewes arIa nn RETRETAS ENERE EA EEEE EAIA 89 Selecting audio using start and end valueS cece cece eee cette tent eee eanes 91 Using the Set Selection dialog ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc cence ee ee eee sense eee eeeeeeeees 91 Selecting audio during playback cece cece cece cece eee e eee e eee eee eeeeee 91 Fine tuning ASEIECTION 6 cece cc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeees 92 Adjusting a selection with the MOUSE cece ccc cee nent e eee e eee eeneeeees 92 Adjusting a selection with the keyboard 0 cc cece ccc eee nent eee eee eeeeeeeeneees 92 REStOMING a SCICCIION oxendustecusdvenoadatesitewcal EEEE TER EEE EEEE EEEE 92 Using Selection grid LINES 0 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee ANEN 93 Understanding SNA DONNG 544 4055 anac o nee cen cere iser eee TENETE oe NENN EAEE 94 TOMA SNAPPING ON OF Os acacses seus rieni ennu R EIAS EEEREN NEN 94 SHAPING tO TEON serrer e sr Er REE E EE EEE casa e bee daw eee aeons 94 Snapping to markers s snsesusesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesereseseresee 94 DINGO ONG WO EVEN eyar anra Nr aes A E EE EAEE 94 Snapping tO zero CFOS
285. e the controls in the Customize Toolbar dialog to add remove or rearrange the buttons on the selected toolbar All scripts from the Script Menu folder are listed in the Available tools column If you want to Add a script to the toolbar Remove a script from the toolbar Rearrange the buttons Restore the toolbar to its default setting 5 Click the OK button 230 CHAPTER 14 Then Select a script in the Available tools column and click the Add button Note The script will appear before the currently selected button Select a script in the Current tools column and click the Remove button Select a script in the Current tools column and click the Move Up or Move Down button Click the Reset button Creating custom button images You can display custom button images for the scripts that you have added to the toolbar by adding png files to your Script Menu folder 1 Create a png file with the icon that you want to use Note cons should be 16x16 pixels Transparency is supported 2 Save the png file in your Script Menu folder using the same name as the name of the script that you want it to represent i e to assign a custom icon to the HelloWorld js script the icon should be saved as HelloWorld js png Note The Script Menu folder can typically be found in the following location C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Script Menu 3 Customize the toolbar as needed The custom icons will display on the Scriptin
286. e timecode location when recording will end If you don t indicate a stop time recording will continue until you click the Stop button E to stop recording 6 Click the Arm button Arm Recording will begin when Sound Forge software detects the timecode specified in the MIDI timecode start box and will stop when the software detects the timecode specified in the MIDI timecode end box 7 To end recording click the Stop button E Click the Close button to close the Record dialog 138 CHAPTER 8 Choosing a recording mode You can choose any of several recording modes in the Record dialog s Mode drop down list Mode Automatic retake automatically rewind Multiple takes creating Regions Multiple takes no Regions Create a new window for each take Punch In record a specific length Adjusting for DC offset Description Automatic retake mode is the easiest method of recording Recording begins at the position displayed in the Start box when you click the Record button and continues until you click the Stop button E When you stop recording the start position resets to the beginning of the take allowing for immediate review and retake Note Automatic retake is the default mode when recording into an empty data window or when recording with no data selected in the current data window Multiple takes creating Regions mode allows you to record several takes with each take defining a region in the
287. eal time Impulse output Browse V Remove very low frequencies Recover Impulse Impulse recovery mode Use the start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes The recorded file must be trimmed so that the timing spikes occur at the very start and end samples of the file gt Auto detect timing spikes The first timing spike must be present within first second of recorded file Do not use timing spikes The recorded test tone begins at the start of the recorded file General Envelope Summary Recover More CPU o 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 500 00 00 02 500 3 Enter the name and path of your impulse file in the Recorded File box or click Browse and locate the file 4 Enter the name of the original test tone file in the Test file used box 5 Enter the desired name for the impulse response file to be created in the Impulse output box If necessary click Browse and specify the folder in which the impulse file will be saved 6 Select the Remove very low frequencies check box 7 Ifthe recorded file was trimmed exactly to the start and end spikes using the procedure described previously choose Use start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes from the Impulse recovery mode drop down list For more information see Trimming the test tone on page 215 8 Click the Recover Impulse button to begin recovering the impulse After processing is complete you can open the impulse file in the Sound Forge softwar
288. ect click the Help button E in the Sony Distortion dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Dynamics From the Effects menu choose Dynamics and then choose a command from the submenu to modify the dynamic range of a selection For more information about using the Graphic Dynamics and Multi Band Dynamics effects click the Help button E in the plug in dialogs or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index 204 CHAPTER 12 Envelope From the Effects menu choose Envelope to apply an envelope to vary the amplitude of a waveform over time Unlike the Graphic Fade command which simply fades a waveform by a specific amount over time the gain at each point is dynamically calculated to achieve the exact specified envelope Applying an amplitude envelope 1 From the Effects menu choose Envelope The Envelope dialog appears Envelope Example music bed F mee a aX Level Cancel 100 2o Preview Oe a TACT Tb TT Th NG AER rm eg A 0 0 25 0 50 Yo 75 9p 100 4 Smooth gain to minimize distortion on steep slopes Show wave Mono source Reset Envelope More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Adjust the envelope to achieve the desired sound Drag the small envelope points up or down e Tocreate a new envelope point double click the envelope e To delete an envelope point right click it and
289. ect video options Fast video resizing GETTING STARTED 65 1 Click anywhere in the data window to activate it 2 From the File menu choose Save As to display the Save As dialog If you re working with a Sound Forge project file you can use the Save As dialog to save your project to a different name or location Choose Render As to save your project as a media file 3 Select the folder where you want to save the file a From the Save in drop down list choose a drive and folder or b From the Recent drop down list choose a folder where you have previously saved files 4 Inthe File name box type a name for the file or select a file in the browse window to replace the existing file 5 From the Save as type drop down list choose a file format If the selected file type supports it you can choose an encoding template from the Template drop down list or click Custom to create a new template For more information see Creating custom rendering settings on page 67 If you know that the file format is unsupported select Raw Audio and click the Custom button to display the Custom Template dialog where you can specify format parameters For more information see Creating custom templates on page 67 6 Inthe Template drop down list choose a setting that will be used to save your file or click the Custom button to create a new template For more information see Creating custom templates on page 67 Notes e When you co
290. ect was created e The project s source media must exist on the editing computer If the media files do not use the same file path as on the computer where the project was created you will be prompted to choose a new folder or replacement files 3 Edit the project as necessary 4 Render the edited project using the same name as the original media file and close the editing application Note f you are editing an existing track your project will automatically be updated with the latest rendered media file GETTING STARTED 69 Editing audio New Sound Forge users should remember that even the most complex editing is derived from a few simple operations copy paste cut delete clear trim crop and mix The following table provides a brief description of the basic editing operations Editing Operation Description Copy Copies data from the window to the clipboard Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the window at the current cursor position If a selection exists in the data window the pasted data replaces the current selection Cut Deletes data from the window and copies it to the clipboard Delete Clear Deletes data from the window but does not copy it to the clipboard Trim Crop Deletes all data in the window with the exception of the selection Mix Mixes data from the clipboard with the data in the current window starting at the current cursor position or the start of the current selection Copying Yo
291. ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee e eee eeneeeees 240 Selec ing SAIMDICS aanre r EE EEEE NEESER EATEN 240 Processing SEIGCTIONS ccsresrerisrtierorero damier ran RER ENERET Ei 242 SAVING ChaNOes E E E E enous T AE E T E E 242 Using the MIDI keyboard ccc cece ccc eee eee e eee e eee eee ee eenneas 243 Displaying the MIDI keyboard cece ccc cee eee e eee n nent eee eeeneaes 243 Turning on the MIDI keyboard cece ccc cece cece ence ee eee eee eeeeeeennaes 243 Configuring the MIDI keyboard output port and channel cece eee e eee eees 243 Troubleshooting the MIDI keyboard ccc ccc cece ee ee eee e eee eeennaes 243 Specifying MONUMENTS ocvcn0ssesensexodintusws p4evedess EENE AE NTE sees 244 cene nO CNOIGS sence ntenonsaaus ood vesa EEDE ES E EE OEO E EOE EAE AEEA ERA 244 Setting up MIDI SDS hardware ccc cece cece ence eee eee eeeenaneeees 245 Troubleshooting MIDI SDS with open lOOP ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee cece eeees 245 Setting up SCSI SMDI hardware ccc ccc cc ccc eee eee e ee eeeeeeeaeenes 245 Troubleshooting SCSI SMDI 0 cc ccc cece ce eee eee e eee eee eee ee eeeeneeenes 245 Cne INO S COS w10cutenweeedetadaesonnceaaeuetseudanwae si orisssaaredenieberauense 245 Periodic transter alles sesracisr inserit r ienr AEF EEEIEE TERIN EEEE EE ETE 246 Sampler is recognized but does not transfer reliably 0 cc ccc ccc ee eee ee eens 246 Working w
292. ees onde E EEA en aneekeaeeks 21 Using the Mouse WhE el 0 ccc ccc cc cece eee eee eee eee eee eeeeenes 21 THE Main WINDOW 6 i0 008 50 s00 sedan Pren TETE ETETE EEE EEEIEE ENEA EEEE EA 22 Main window components s vasceecccevdcsewiscdeas ddatesdctensennosate tdateassean ced 22 Floating and docking windows ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cent e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 23 Hiding the window docking areas cc ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee e eee e eee neeeeeeeees 24 Explorer window AIt 1 2 0 0 ccc cece ee ee cece cere cence eee eee ee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 24 File Properties window AIt 2 2 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cence eee ee ee ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 24 Video Preview window Alt 3 2 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cc eee eee eee eee eee e ee ee nent ee eeeeeeeee 24 Time Display window AIt 4 0 00 ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee e nee e eens eeeeeeanes 24 Channel Meters window AIt 5 ccc cece eee eee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 24 Hardware Meters window AIt 6 cece ccc cece eee ene eee eeeeees 24 Undo Redo History Window AIt 7 0 0 ccc cece cece ence eee een eee e eee eennees 24 Spectrum Analysis window AIt 8 0 ccc cece cece eee eee e eee eee e ee eeeeeeeees 24 Plug In Chainer Window AIt 9 2 0 ccc ccc ccc cece ene nent e eee eee eennnnes 25 Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 0 2 0 00 ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeee 25 Keyboard window Ctrl Alt 1 2 0 0 ccc cece cece ene ene e eee e eee e eee
293. egardless of the data window s current status format pre roll and post roll values are measured in seconds Synchronizing with other devices Sound Forge software can generate MTC SMPTE synchronization while recording 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the MIDI Sync tab 2 On the MIDI Sync tab choose the trigger device from the Input drop down list and click the OK button 3 From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu to enable MIDI timecode output Click the Record button Click the Advanced tab at the bottom of the Record dialog Select the Enable MTC SMPTE Output Synchronization check box Select the Start check box and specify the time you want to start recording Select the Pre Roll check box and type a value in the edit box to begin SMPTE output at a specified time before recording Click the Close button E Se i a 140 CHAPTER 8 Monitoring audio input The input meters in the Meters tab at the bottom of the Record dialog show the level of the incoming signal For recording purposes the incoming audio should remain primarily in the yellow only occasionally entering the red Enabling the recording meters Recording meters are displayed in the Meters tab at the bottom of the Record dialog so you can check your input level before recording Click the Meters tab at the bottom of the Record dialog to display recording meters and then select the
294. egions List shortcuts Command Play or stop the active marker or region Edit the active marker or region Delete the active marker or region Create region from the current selection Keyboard Shortcut D or Shift D S Ctrl Shift T Ctrl Shift X Shift Right Arrow Shift Left Arrow Shift Ctrl Right Arrow Shift Ctrl Left Arrow Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl R Alt R Alt P Alt T Esc Alt Z M Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl P Ctrl Shift P Ctrl B Ctrl S Ctrl T Ctrl E Ctrl Delete Ctrl Tab Ctrl Shift Tab Ctrl H Keyboard Shortcut Spacebar Enter Delete R APPENDIX A 327 Playlist Cutlist shortcuts Command Play or stop the active playlist entry Edit the active playlist entry Delete the active playlist entry Add one to the active playlist entry play count Subtract one from the active playlist entry play count Add or remove a stop point on the active playlist entry Toggle pre roll on and off for the playlist Script Editor shortcuts Command Create a new script Open a script Run script Compile script Save script Find next instance of last searched text Find previous instance of last searched text Find next instance of the selected text Find previous instance of the selected text 328 APPENDIX A Keyboard Shortcut Spacebar Enter Delete plus sign minus sign not numeric keypad asterisk not numeric keypad forward slash not numeric keypad Keyboard Shortcut
295. el waveforms The Show Wave drop down list allows you to specify how multichannel files appear in the envelope graph Multichannel files When a data window displays a multichannel file all channels are shown at the same time Working with multichannel files When playing editing or processing multichannel files you can select a single channel or all channels However certain processing tasks cannot be performed on an individual channel of a multichannel file For more information see Single channel editing on page 53 or Editing Multichannel Audio on page 109 Selecting data in multichannel files When editing a multichannel file you can use the mouse to select data by clicking and dragging in a data window There are several options for data selection in multichannel files 1 Open a multichannel file 2 From the Edit menu choose Tool and then choose Edit from the submenu to select the Edit tool Tip Press Ctrl D or click the Edit Tool button on the Standard toolbar 3 Select the data e Drag within a channel to select that channel only lt u Hp gt of Rate 0 00 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 51 e Double click a channel number to select the entire channel a t oomo BT anes tres oak R Inf Inf a Inf SE k gt m e Reo e Drag across channels to select multiple channels amp 00 00 00 aa cot TELET LJ Inf sreete sjenshfo te AA
296. elete and arrange envelope points just as you can in all of the Sound Forge envelope graphs For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49 Note The fade value at any point in a curve does not use the same vertical logarithmic dB scale used for displaying the impulse file Reset Clicking this button resets the envelope points to 100 indicating no fade Package Impulse into Preset Clicking this button creates a link between the current preset and the selected impulse file along with encoding the impulse information You can use the Preset Manager to share presets and the accompanying impulse files between computers without losing information For more information see Using the Preset Manager on page 199 Adjusting the impulse length Drag the vertical Envelope Endpoint line to the desired location The Envelope Endpoint is repositioned and the length of the impulse is adjusted 0 Time seconds L55 o Time seconds L55 Repositioning the envelope endpoint line USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 211 Summary tab controls The Summary tab provides information about the impulse file The following section describes all controls located on the Summary tab Control Impulse Dry Out Wet Out Quality speed Recover tab controls Description This control is identical to the Impulse drop down list on the General tab For more information see Impulse on page 210 This control is identical to the Dry Out f
297. elp menu choose Contents and Index Gapper Snipper From the Effects menu choose Gapper Snipper to cut chunks from the sound file or insert silence in the sound file periodically at a set frequency For information about using the Gapper Snipper effect click the Help button E in the Sony Gapper Snipper dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Noise Gate From the Effects menu choose Noise Gate to remove signals below a specified threshold This effect is used to remove noise from silent breaks in a sound file For information about using the Noise Gate effect click the Help button E in the Sony Noise Gate dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Pitch From the Effects menu choose Pitch and then choose a command from the submenu to change the pitch of a selection Bend The Bend command allows you to draw an envelope that increases or decreases the pitch of a sound file over time 1 From the Effects menu choose Pitch and then choose Bend from the submenu The Pitch Bend dialog appears Pitch Bend Example music bed a EH not ET SSX Semitones Cancel 5 aes Preview El Bypass Range 0 25 0 50 Fo 75 3 100 o 24 E Preserve original duration Show wave Mono source r Reset Envelope i More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Drag the Range slider t
298. els 24 1 zoom ratio Normal Returns the file to its default zoom ratio Out Full Changes the zoom ratio to display the entire file within the data window Selection Changes the zoom ratio to maximize the display and center the selection within the data window Custom Zoom X Y Sets the zoom ratio to a custom setting For more information see Using custom zoom settings on page 88 Zooming the level ruler vertical Zooming along the level ruler displays a larger vertical waveform and allows for more precise editing at low audio amplitudes BB Example music bed Eo l ay E At 00 00 00 _ 00 00 02 s 00 00 04 Level ruler zooming controls eet T gt Pele K gt a be igs 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 512 f f Zoom in Zoom out Changing the level zoom To edit the level ruler zoom use the Zoom In Out spinner control located above the playbar e Clicking the plus minus buttons increases decreases the level ruler zoom by single step increments e Dragging the spin control increments the level ruler zoom quickly in the corresponding direction At high zoom levels only low level samples are visible because the peaks of the waveform move beyond the vertical scope of the data window Consider the following data windows 86 CHAPTER 4 a Example music bed a fog ex a t l i 00 00 00 070 6 0 Inf 4 6 0 iim lt gt 4 gt I Di m p e Rate 0 00 40 gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 85
299. en you select the Create CD tracks from full subcode scan check box the software will create a disc at once track list based on the PQ data on the disc ISRC data is added to each track if the data exists on the disc Universal product code media catalog number information is updated in the CD Information window 7 From the Drive drop down list choose the CD drive that contains the CD from which you want to extract audio 8 Click the MusiclD button if you want to obtain CD information using Gracenote MusiclD If CD information is not available you can click the CD Info button to display a dialog box where you can edit the CD information and submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database For more information see Obtaining or editing CD information on page 57 9 From the Speed drop down list choose the rate at which you want to extract audio If you experience gapping or glitching decrease the speed or click Configure and adjust the Audio extract optimization setting Note To eject the CD at any time prior to beginning the extraction process click the Eject button 10 Click OK The data extraction from the CD begins and a progress meter is displayed Previewing CD tracks In the Extract Audio from CD dialog select a track and click the Play button to preview a track prior to extracting it from the CD To end the preview click Stop Refreshing the Extract Audio from CD dialog Click the Refresh button after you insert a
300. ent information with the track list 4 Click OK to send the track list information to the clipboard You can then paste the information into a text editor or e mail message Exporting track lists as text files 1 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Export Track List from the submenu The Export Track List dialog is displayed Tip Right click the Track List window and choose Export Track List from the shortcut menu Export Track List Format for track list output Cue sheet for replication show absolute times CD liner notes show times relative to track 1 Export as formatted text W Indude summary information with track list output Export as delimited text de header ros OK Cancel 2 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information e Cue sheet for replication The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the beginning of the CD This is the preferred format for CD replication houses e CD liner notes The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the first track on the disc 3 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information e Export as formatted text Track information is formatted in a table Select the Include summary information with track list output check box if you want to include UPC MCN title engineer and comment information with the track list e Export as delimited text You can choose the character
301. enter Release Start Moves the cursor to the beginning of the release loop Center Release End Moves the cursor to the end of the release loop Double Selection Doubles the size of the current selection Halve Selection Divides the current selection in half Shift Selection Left Shifts the current selection to the left so the current start point becomes the end point Shift Selection Right Shifts the current selection to the right so the current end point becomes the start point The Navigation toolbar also contains a Tempo box that appears to the right of the toolbar buttons This box calculates and displays the tempo of the current selection as is if the selection represents a complete measure Views toolbar The Views toolbar contains buttons used to store and retrieve data window views Toggles views 1 8 between setting and restoring Status Selection toolbar 2 Stores and recalls specific selection views The Status Selection toolbar contains buttons used to specify a file s status format and control snapping functions Samples Changes the status format to Samples Time Changes the status format to Time Seconds Changes the status format to Seconds Gg Time amp Frames Changes the status format to Time amp Frames a Absolute Frames Changes the status format to Absolute Frames amp Beats aal SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps Changes the status format to SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps 38 CHAPTER 2
302. eo or multichannel 1 Open the Voiceover pca file Notice that this is a mono file 2 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter The Channel Converter dialog appears Channel Converter Wow sound editing Preset Sys Mono to Stereo 100 UX OK Cancel Output channels 2 r _ canci Invert Mix 100 0 Preview z 0 0 dE yi E wi Output 2 100 0 Bypass Start 00 00 00 000 Length 00 00 05 000 a End 00 00 05 000 Channels 1 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 PROCESSING AUDIO 175 3 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed a Choose a setting from the Output channels drop down list to indicate the number of channels in the converted file b Click in the Output box for each output channel and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original mono file that will be mixed to the new channel cC Select the Invert Mix check box if you want to reverse the phase of the new channel s content 4 Click the OK button The file is converted to stereo Wow sound editing amp E 00 00 00 000 4 ki H E p e Rate 0 00 mer 00 00 00 000 Converting a stereo file to mono 1 Open the saxriff wav file Notice that this is a stereo file 2 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter 3 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed a Choose 1 from the Output
303. epending upon the editing operation you may want to view the entire file at once or a small portion of data in greater detail For this reason you can utilize two varieties of zooming time ruler Zooming and level ruler Zooming You can also zoom to events when using the Event tool Zooming the time ruler horizontal The current time ruler magnification ratio appears in the lower right corner of the data window above the status boxes BB Example music bed Cole E a eey l 00 00 02 00 00 04 Zoom in 4 0 Zoom out inf 4 0 a lla Maximize width of window t b k l 00 00 00 000 1512 Zoom ratio Understanding the zoom ratio The zoom ratio determines the number of samples represented by each horizontal point on the screen The zoom ratio is a value of X Y where X is the number of horizontal points and Y is the number of samples If the ratio is 1 1 each point on the screen represents one sample At this zoom ratio a brief but detailed selection of time is displayed a Example music bed P e XT AE 00 00 00 070 L Waveform at 1 1 zoom ratio 00 00 00 000 Rate 0 00 40 gt A Conversely if the zoom ratio is 1 1024 1 024 samples are represented by each point on the screen and a greater length of time is displayed For very precise editing you may want to zoom in more tightly than a 1 1 ratio Sound Forge allows up to a 24 1 ratio where 24 points on the screen represent one
304. eplace the existing file 5 From the Save as type drop down list choose Sound Forge Pro Project File frg Sound Forge software creates a frg file in the folder you specified and creates a subfolder to store your sound and temporary files Note Because a Sound Forge project contains all your original sound data plus all PCM temporary files they can take some time to create Warning Deleting a project s filename _frg folder will break the project 68 CHAPTER 3 Saving the project path in the rendered file 1 Save your Sound Forge project The project must be saved before you can embed the project reference in the rendered file 2 Follow the steps in Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 65 to choose the file type and location for rendering your files and then select the Save project as path reference in rendered media check box Note This check box will be unavailable if you did not save your project or if you are rendering using a third party file format plug in 3 Click Yes if you want to open the file in a new window or click No if you want to close the dialog and return to the Sound Forge window Note f you modify the project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer Editing a media file s source project When your Sound Forge project uses source media files that are
305. er Zero crossing preference When using a Snap Zero command you can configure the application to snap to positive slope negative slope or either slope zero crossings 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Editing tab 2 From the Snap to zero crossing slope drop down list choose the desired slope and click OK Selecting audio during playback You can create selections during playback using the Mark In and Mark Out commands These commands place temporary markers in the data window which are then used to create a loop region While you can place these markers by choosing Mark In and Mark Out from the Selection submenu under the Edit menu the keyboard equivalents are more useful 1 Play the audio file in the current data window 2 During playback press where the selection will begin 3 Press O where the selection will end A loop region is created using the in and out points you identified NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 91 You can then right click the bar at the top of the loop region to insert a region toggle looped playback or select the loop region Tip Select the Update loop bar on Mark In Out check box on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog if you want the loop bar ina data window to be updated when you mark the beginning or end of a selection When the check box is cleared the loop bar isn t updated until you ve marked both ends of the selection Fine tuning a selection After
306. ere is no selection the playback will pre and post roll around the cursor position Configuring cut pre roll and post roll lengths Frequently the default pre roll and post roll lengths are insufficient to evaluate the accuracy of an edit For this reason you can configure pre roll and post roll lengths 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Previews tab 3 Configure the Pre roll and Post roll values in the Cut preview configuration area of the dialog and click OK Deleting Deleting a selection permanently removes it without placing it on the clipboard To delete data choose Delete Clear from the Edit menu or press the Delete key Notes If you delete data from individual channels of multichannel files the waveform will contain silence at the end of the deleted channel The channels in a multichannel file must always be equal in length Ifthe Treat as Cutlist command available in the Edit menu Playlist Cutlist submenu is selected deleting a selection creates a region in the Cutlist window but does not remove the selection For more information see Configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist on page 130 GETTING STARTED 73 Trimming Cropping Trimming allows you to retain a selection while deleting all surrounding data 1 Create a selection containing Wow sound editing just gets easier in Voiceover pca but do not select the second and easier B
307. ere you like to display the docked window Copying metadata to the clipboard Note These procedures do not apply to the Regions List Playlist and Track List If you want to copy metadata to the clipboard right click the window and choose Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu File Properties Edit Copy to Clipboard Custom Copy to Clipboard Tro LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 25 If you want to customize the format for copying metadata to the clipboard right click the window and choose Custom Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu The Copy Metadata dialog is displayed to let you choose whether you want to copy the data as formatted text or delimited text set a delimiter and choose whether you want to include a header row Copy Metadata ee Ox Copy formatted text Copy delimited text Tab IM Indude tite row W Indude header row MW Indude header underscores OK Cancel Click OK to copy the metadata to the clipboard and you can then paste the information wherever you need it Regions List window Ctrl Alt M 0 The Regions List window contains all regions and markers that exist in the active data window From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Regions List from the submenu to show or hide the Regions List window For more information see Using the Regions List on page 126 Playlist window Ctrl Alt M 1 The Playlist window is
308. ereo conversion Stop button 34 37 stop points creating 130 deleting 130 streaming media commands 118 Summary Information window 29 107 108 sustaining loops 255 swapping stereo channels 176 synchronizing MIDI timecode 251 253 synthesizing audio DTMF MF tones 153 FM synthesis 154 155 simple synthesis 155 system requirements 17 Tabs for maximized data windows preference 33 309 TAO CDs See track at once CD burning technical support 17 tempo building regions using current tempo 122 calculating for loops 265 specifying for ACID loops 262 threshold recording 137 138 Time button 38 Time Display customizing 305 window 24 305 time ruler optimizing scaling 89 overview 85 restoring default level 89 zooming with Magnify tool 90 Time Stretch process 40 189 See also lastique Timestretch process timecode SMPTE 333 Times amp Frames button 38 Toggle Selection command 92 toolbars See also entries of specific toolbars customizing 35 314 displaying 35 314 docking 36 floating 36 Tools toolbar 42 tools See entries of specific tools ToolTips showing hiding 43 314 using 43 total buffer size 301 track lists adjusting track lengths 294 adjusting track position 294 CD Text 294 297 298 copying to clipboard 296 displaying 294 Emph check box 295 exporting as text files 296 ISRC codes 295 overview 26 pause time 294 printing 297 Prot check box 295 reordering tracks 294 track a
309. ereseseseserese 273 Fast Fourier I TAaNSIOUM sistens kartero enni rrer IIET SNE ESANERA E ET 273 TABLE OF CONTENTS 13 Using aspectrum ON MONA 5 treet cerncts ee eid eerie waren aden NANENANE ESNEA 274 Displaying aspectum OMAN sccs lt i eenseesxedee ens eeeweiee ens KETENEN AENA REEI RR 274 Monitoring an input and output Source 6 ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee e tees eeeeeeees 275 Viewing frequency and amplitude values notes and statistics cece cece eee eens 275 Navigating a spectrum graph ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee e een eeeeeeeeees 276 Changing the graph type ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee eee ee ee ee ee eee eeeeeees 276 Changing the zoom level of the graph cece ccc cence eee eee ene e eee eeeeeees 276 Synchronizing graphs in a multichannel file cc ccc cece eee e ene eens 276 Updating a spectrum graph ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeneeeees 276 Viewing multiple spectrum graphs ccc eee cence cece eset teen eeeeeeees 277 Creating and comparing snapshots of the Spectrum Analysis window 0008 277 PANUNG MEGa ll accacucunducsd byesdus oncadeundeanecatausiendendseasendeaansenadaasea eden 278 Using ce SOMOOIAIN 4c aincine ta cwoea ew kte errre enedahadenewege euags EER 278 Displaying a sonogram ctu hacowiruicaunees cru esseneuametaeeneenons ess onormeneeunskanns 278 Displaying frequency and amplitude values notes and statistics
310. erface SMDI SMDI is a standardized protocol for music equipment communication Instead of using the slower standard MIDI serial protocol it uses a SCSI bus for transferring information Because of its speed SMDI is often used for sample dumps Shortcut Menu A context sensitive menu that appears when you click on certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being clicked on as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can select an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently in Sound Forge software for quick access to many commands Sign Bit Data that has positive and negative values and uses zero to represent silence Unlike the signed format twos complement is not used Instead negative values are represented by setting the highest bit of the binary number to one without complementing all other bits This is a format option when opening and saving RAW sound files Signed Data that has positive and negative twos complement values and uses zero to represent silence This is a format option when opening and saving raw sound files Signal to Noise Ratio The signal to noise ratio SNR is a measurement of the difference between a recorded signal and noise levels A high SNR is always the goal The maximum signal to noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits per sample In 16 bit audio the signal to noise rat
311. et by adding a constant value to the samples in the sound file In the following example the red line represents the baseline The lower waveform exhibits DC offset note that the waveform is centered approximately 2 dB above the baseline Inf LT OPTRA nO ee Taan abaa Decibel dB A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale For example when comparing the numbers 14 and 7 you could say 14 is two times greater than the number 7 or you could say 14 is 6 dB greater than the number 7 Where did we pull that 6 dB from Engineers use the equation dB 20 x log V1 V2 when comparing two instantaneous values Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale In Sound Forge software most measurements are given in decibels For example if you want to double the amplitude of a sound you apply a 6 cB gain A sample value of 32 767 maximum positive sample value for 16 bit sound can be referred to as having a value of 0 dB Likewise a sample value of 16 384 can be referred to having a value of 6 dB Device Driver A program that enables Windows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by Windows software to control sound card recording and playback Destructive Editing Destructive editing is the type of editing whereby all cuts deletes mixes and other processes are actually processed to the sound
312. etermines the number that the sampler uses as its location reference when sending or receiving samples This number can be biased for specific samplers with the Sample bias option in the Sampler Configuration dialog For more information see Creating a sampler configuration on page 236 4 Begin the process of sending or receiving samples For more information see Sending and receiving samples on page 238 Creating a sampler configuration The Sampler Configuration dialog allows you to create new sample configurations that can be saved as presets and accessed from the Sampler dialog Creating new custom configurations requires you to specify the sampler and sample transfer mode However the process of creating a custom sampler configuration differs based on which transfer mode is used 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog appears 2 Click the Configure button The Sampler Configuration dialog appears Preset Untited 0 MDI SCSI Sample bias 0 Seb See MIDI MIDI In Delete MIDI Output Devices ana MIDI Input Devices Za Microsoft MIDI Mapper lay In USB Keystation y Microsoft GS Wavetable 5 2 Out USB Keystation mn MIDI channel 4 z E Open loop V Send request when retrieving samples E Wait for request when sending samples 3 From the Sampler model drop down list choose the appropriate sampler If the desired sampler is not included in the drop down list choose the generic SMDI or SD
313. ettings button Ex to display the Spectrum Settings dialog The following table explains the role of each control in audio spectrum analysis FFT size 2 048 Cancel FFT overlap 0 to 99 75 Save As Smoothing window Blackman Harris Delete Slices displayed 1 to 64 1 6 Forward Backward Set sonogram resolution 1 to 10 000 samplings Display Range Channel Mono Sync graphs Logarithmic graphing Normal display only gt Freq Min 0 to 95 9 kHz O Max 0 001 to 96 kHz 22 050 Ceiling 149 to 0 dB 0 Floor 150 to 1 dB 150 Monitor Settings T Hold peaks during monitoring 1 to 60 seconds 3 0 Maintain last monitored view Item Description FFT size Choose a value from the FFT size drop down list to set the size in samples of the analysis window and number of discrete frequencies analyzed Higher numbers produce increased frequency resolution at the expense of lower time resolution and longer computational time FFT overlap The value in the FFT overlap box specifies the percentage of overlap between FFT analysis windows Overlapping allows for more accurate analysis Lower settings decrease the number of distinct analysis functions performed which decreases processing time High settings allow for more analysis but can result in slow processing Smoothing window Choose a setting from the Smoothing window drop down list to determine the window function applied to
314. evel of the graph Zooming can be accomplished in several ways 1 Drag on the graph to draw a box around the area you want to magnify You can toggle through mouse selection mode by right clicking while holding the left mouse button The first type is a vertical Zoom window This will allow you to zoom to a frequency range e The second type is horizontal zoom window This will allow you to zoom to an amplitude range e The third type is a combination of vertical and horizontal zoom This will allow you to zoom to a frequency and amplitude range 2 Right click the graph and choose Zoom Out Full to view the entire amplitude and frequency range 3 Right click the graph and choose Normalize dB to set the Spectrum Graph amplitude range equal to the maximum and minimum values in the graph Synchronizing graphs in a multichannel file When viewing a spectrum graph for a multichannel file an individual graph displays for each channel Click the Sync button amp to synchronize the displays so you can view the same region of the FFT in all channels Updating a spectrum graph Select the Auto Refresh button 2 if you want the Spectrum Analysis display to refresh automatically updated when you change your selection in the data window When the button is not selected the display is not updated until you click the Refresh button 2 If you want the graph to refresh automatically during playback or input monitoring select the Rea
315. everal settings for drawing the current selection s waveform on the envelope graph This function is available only for small selections Reset Envelope Clicking the Reset Envelope button clears all but the two original envelope points For the Pan modes these two points prevent unintended panning e For the Stereo expand and Mix Mid Side modes these two points prevent unintended expansion Resample The Resample command allows you to change the sampling rate of a file without altering its pitch or duration Resample Example music bed Preset Einin Hx cane New sample rate 2 000 to 192 000 Hz 22 050 Preview Interpolation accuracy 1 to 4 Medium J High 2 E Bypass W Apply an anti alias filter during resample Set the sample rate only do not resample More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 e Resampling to a lower sample rate results in less frequent samples and a decreased file size but adds aliasing noise to the audio For more information see Apply an anti alias filter during resample on page 187 e Resampling to a higher sample rate results in extra samples being created through interpolation and an increased file size Like increasing bit depth up sampling does not improve the quality of an audio file but permits subsequent audio processing to be performed with greater precision 186 CHAPTER 11 Downsampling audio Open the Musicbed pca file Right click the da
316. ew prior to the cursor position Page Up Move 100 of the current view prior to the cursor position Ctrl Page Up Move 10 of the current view past the cursor position Page Down Move 100 of the current view past the cursor position Ctrl Page Down Center the cursor in the waveform display or Go to the next sample numeric keypad Move 10 samples past the current cursor Ctrltnumeric keypad Go to the previous sample numeric keypad Move 10 samples prior to the current cursor Ctrl numeric keypad 324 APPENDIX A Data selection shortcuts Command Show the Set Selection dialog Select from the cursor to the next previous screen pixel or Select next previous event when the Event tool is selected Select from the cursor to the next previous sample Select from the cursor to the next previous video frame available only if the data window contains a video file Select from the cursor to the first sample visible in the waveform display Select from the cursor to the last sample visible in the waveform display Select from the cursor to the first sample in the data window Select from the cursor to the last sample in the data window Select from the cursor to 10 of the current view prior to the cursor position Select from the cursor to 10 of the current view past the cursor position Select 100 of the current view prior to the cursor position Select 100 of the current view past the cursor position Select from the
317. f 4 l K gt i E p gt Rate 0 00 lt gt 00 00 00 000 You can then edit the file just as you would any mono or stereo file Click the Minimize button to reduce the height of individual channels or click the Restore button E to restore a channel s height Hold Shift while clicking a Minimize button to minimize all channels except the one you clicked Tip You can use the Display tab in the Preferences dialog to change the colors used to represent each channel For more information see Display tab on page 308 110 CHAPTER 6 Recording multichannel audio files With Sound Forge you have the ability to record multichannel audio if your hardware supports this feature For more information see Recording manually on page 134 Using the hardware meters From the View menu choose Hardware Meters to toggle the display of the Hardware Meters window You can use this window to adjust the levels of your audio device s hardware outputs for monitoring and to view a peak meter VU PPM meter phase scope and mono compatibility meter Et 72 63 54 45 36 27 18 a Bt 72 63 54 45 3 27 18 9 VU PPM meter Peak meter Phase scope Mono compatibility meter Adjusting output levels The Hardware Meters window displays a gain fader for each output that is enabled on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 316 You can use these faders to adjust preview levels Importa
318. f European Broadcasting Union SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video SMPTE at 29 97 frames per second hh mm ss ff SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video SMPTE at 29 97 frames per second using hh mmiss ff dropped frame numbers SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio SMPTE at 30 frames per second hh mmiss ff Hours minutes seconds and frames with a hh mm ss ff frame rate of 75 frames per second for creating disc at once CDs Audio CD Time 78 CHAPTER 3 Experimenting with status formats You can experiment with the Voiceover pca file to see how status formats affect values in the selection status bar display boxes 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Options menu choose Status Format and choose Samples from the submenu 3 Select all data in the Voiceover pca window by choosing Select All from the Edit menu Notice the selection status boxes 0 220 507 220 507 e The first selected sample is sample 0 e The last selected sample is 220 507 e The total number of samples in the selection is 220 507 4 Fromthe Options menu choose Status Format and choose Time from the submenu Notice that status values change from samples to hours minutes and seconds 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 5 From the Options menu choose Status Format and choose SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video from the submenu Notice that status values change to hours minutes seconds and frames 00 00 00 00 O0 00 04 29 00 00 04 29 6 Experiment with each statu
319. f the shaded region in the Voiceover data window where the mixing of the selection will begin Release the mouse button The Mix Replace dialog appears Verify that both Volume levels are set to 0 dB and click OK a Wow sound editing tedka mesm Eliese Ekki iow EEJ Sound editing just gets easier EEJ And easier kd A AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 K a Eet SP 00 00 01 475 00 00 05 000 1 512 Creating CD tracks Selection is mixed into the destination window You can create CD tracks by dragging selections or files from the Explorer window to a data window For more information see Adding files to a data window and creating tracks on page 288 Toggling the Mix Paste and CD Track functions An alternate way of specifying a mix paste or CD track is the mouse toggle method 1 2 3 Open the Voiceover pca and Drumhit pca files Select all audio data in the Drumhit data window Drag the selection to the Voiceover data window A shaded region representing the source selection appears in the destination window and a letter or CD icon appears in the box adjacent to the pointer Tip When dragging a selection to paste sound data drag up or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 149 4 Continue holding the left mouse button while clicking the right mouse b
320. f the workspace Maximizes all open data windows Tabs for each data window also appear if the Tabs for maximized data windows setting is set to Top or Bottom For more information see Display tab on page 308 Minimizes all open data windows Restores all minimized windows to their previous window size and position Closes all open data windows Switches focus to another data window LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 33 Playbar The playbar is located in the bottom left corner of a data window You can use the playbar to navigate and play audio files in a variety of ways iq Go to Start Moves the cursor to the start of the file p Go to End Moves the cursor to the end of the file g Stop Stops playback and returns the cursor to its position prior to playback Play Normal Plays from the cursor to the end of the file F If there is a selection plays from the beginning of the selection to the end of the selection Wd Go to Previous Track Moves the cursor to the previous disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or hold Shift to extend a selection Note This button is displayed only if disc at once tracks are present in your data window Current playback mode Mi Go to Next Track Moves the cursor to the next disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or press Shift to extend a selection Note This button is displayed only if di
321. fer mode Select samplers the Kurzweil K2000 among them do not operate properly if there is a SCSI device set to synchronous transfer mode on the same SCSI chain SCSI hard drives and CD ROMs or DVD ROMs often have the option of using a synchronous transfer mode If there is a host versus device synchronous transfer option select the host option Refer to the SCSI device s documentation for more information SCSI termination If the SCSI chain is not properly terminated unreliable SCSI transfers may be experienced Refer to the SCSI card and SCSI device documentation for more information Long or faulty SCSI cables SCSI cables that are very long or not properly shielded may not operate reliably In addition do not use cables that are not certified SCSI cables Adaptec 1540 1542CF does not recognize a sampler If the Adaptec 1540 1542CF does not recognize the sampler a change may be required in the configuration of the Adaptec controller Some samplers do not operate when the Reset SCSI Bus at Power On option of the Adaptec controller is turned on This is the default operation for the 1540 1542CF and must be turned off to allow the system to work with the sampler Note Turning off the Reset SCSI Bus at Power On option may keep other devices on the SCSI chain from resetting correctly when using the system s soft boot feature Other systems may freeze temporarily To guarantee that devices are reset when rebooting with this option turned o
322. ferences You can save custom previewing settings for the current process alone or for all processes 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Click the Previews tab 3 Edit the preview parameters as desired For more information see Previews tab on page 313 4 Click OK The new preview parameters are updated and saved for all effects Bypassing a process while previewing You are also able to A B test an effect by using the Bypass check box to switch between previewing the processed and unprocessed audio file e If you select the Bypass check box the unprocessed audio file is played when you click the Preview button e Ifyou clear the Bypass check box the processed audio file is played when you click the Preview button Graphic Fade Wow sound editing Preset Sys 3 dB exponential fade out Preview button Bypass check box Maximum Gain 100 0dB 200 6dB 400 12 dB Show wave Mono source Reset Envelope More 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 PROCESSING AUDIO 169 Adjusting the data window selection You can easily adjust your data window selection from within most processing dialogs by clicking the More button on the right side of the dialog and specifying the selection parameters explained below Bit Depth Converter Exarnple music bed Preset Untitled Bit depth 16 bit Dither None Noise sh
323. ff Toggle smooth playback scrolling on and off Generate MIDI timecode Trigger from MIDI timecode 326 APPENDIX A Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl Shift lt Number gt Ctrl lt Number gt 0 9 keys not numeric keypad Up Arrow or mouse wheel up Down Arrow or mouse wheel down Shift Up Arrow Shift Down Arrow Ctrlt Up Arrow Ctrl Down Arrow 1 numeric keypad 2 numeric keypad Ctrl Shift Up Down Arrow 5 numeric keypad O Spacebar or F12 Shift Spacebar or Shift F12 Enter or Ctrl F12 X Esc Q F Ctrl K Ctrl Shift K J K or F6 Shift F6 F7 Ctrl F7 Event tool keyboard shortcuts Command Select the previous next editing tool Edit tool Magnify tool Pencil tool Event tool Split events at cursor Show hide fade lengths between events Toggle automatic crossfades on off Select the next event Select the previous event Extend the selection to the next event Extend the selection to the previous event Record dialog shortcuts Command Open Record dialog Start stop recording Play Reset clip indicators Stop recording or playback Go to the start Insert marker Plug In Chainer shortcuts Command Preview Process selection Bypass Save chain preset Toggle Ignore Mix Insert Tail Data options Add plug ins to chain Remove selected plug ins Select the next plug in in the chain Select the previous plug in in the chain Shows or hide the effect automation parameter chooser R
324. ff use the system s reset button or power down and up to reset the system SCSI SMDI compatible menu is not displayed under Windows 98SE and Windows Me Verify proper SCSI termination and check for multiple devices on the SCSI chain using the same SCSI ID If this fails to solve the problem Adaptec SCSI card users may need to update the system s mini port drivers Adaptec has a series of updated mini port drivers available for Windows 98SE and Windows Me on the Web After you download the file you must create a temporary directory or folder on the system and run the WIN95MPD EXE program Follow the directions in the readme txt file to update the drivers for the Adaptec SCSI card 246 CHAPTER 15 Chapter 16 Working with MIDI SMPTE This chapter describes using Sound Forge Pro software in conjunction with internal and external MIDI devices What is MIDI The musical instrument digital interface MIDI is a set of commands or a language that music software and hardware use to communicate The most common way to utilize MIDI is to have a device such as a MIDI sequencer generating and sending MIDI commands to another device such as a synthesizer MIDI triggers You can use numerous internal and external devices to generate MIDI commands and trigger audio playback in the software Playback versus triggered playback Procedures in this section use the Sound Forge MIDI Keyboard as the MIDI device for triggering audio playback Fo
325. files 67 68 Shift Selection Left button 38 Shift Selection Right button 38 shifting selections left right 263 shortcuts creating new 319 customizing 319 320 deleting keyboard maps 320 drag and drop 329 editing 319 importing keyboard maps 320 keyboard 321 328 mouse 330 renaming keyboard maps 320 resetting default keyboard map 320 saving keyboard maps 320 Show shuttle controls on Data Window transport preference 34 306 Show ToolTips preference 43 Show Transport menu preference 308 silence inserting 181 Simple Delay effect 41 203 Simple Synthesis button 39 using 155 single session CD burning See disc at once CD burning sliders resetting 49 shortcuts 49 using 49 slipping events 160 slip trimming events 160 Smooth Enhance process 40 189 SMPTE 247 253 SMPTE 30 button 38 SMPTE Drop button 38 INDEX xiii SMPTE EBU button 38 SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps button 38 SMPTE Non Drop button 38 SMPTE timecode 333 Snap Edge to Grid command 95 Snap Edge to Zero command 95 Snap to Grid command 95 Snap to Zero command 95 Snap to zero crossing slope preference 91 snapping See also Quantize to Frames disabling at high magnifications 96 enabling 94 selections 95 96 to events 94 165 to grid 94 to markers 94 to whole time divisions 94 to zero crossings 95 snapshots erasing 278 showing hiding 277 taking 277 viewing statistics of 278 sonograms adjusting color intensity 280 displayi
326. following guidelines in mind e The outputs of horizontally joined operators are simply mixed The outputs of the bottom operators are mixed to form the final output Mixing unique simple waveforms is referred to as additive synthesis e Operators joined vertically are FM carrier modulator pairs The bottom operator is the carrier and the top operator is the modulator e Operators without other operators directly above are simple waveform generators e When three or more operators are stacked the top operator modulates the operator below it which modulates the following operator and so on 154 CHAPTER 9 Modifying an operator gt aE Select the Current operator radio button corresponding to the operator to be modified Use the envelope graph to modify the amplitude of the operator over time For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49 From the Operator shape drop down list choose a waveform shape Specify the frequency of the operator in the Frequency box Notes fFrequency is set to 0 00 a DC zero frequency waveform is produced regardless of the waveform specified e When you choose Filtered Noise from the Operator shape drop down list Frequency determines the high frequency content of the noise Use the Feedback slider to determine the amount of the operator s output that is used to modulate itself If the operator is also being modulated by another waveform the feedback path and the modulator output are mi
327. for disc at once CDs 294 297 298 obtaining from Gracenote 58 submitting to Gracenote 58 CD tracks bonus tracks 290 creating from events 287 creating from files 288 290 creating from regions 288 deleting 291 inserting 287 pause time 292 294 reordering 291 294 trimming 291 294 CDs See also disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning 283 closing 285 extracting audio from 58 142 143 pre emphasis boost 295 protecting 295 Q subcode 295 Center Release End button 38 Center Release Start button 38 Center Sustaining End button 38 Center Sustaining Start button 38 changing sample rate 101 Channel Converter button 40 dialog 177 intermixing channels 176 mono to multichannel 175 mono to stereo 175 overview 106 175 stereo to mono 176 swapping stereo channels 176 ii INDEX channel meters changing display resolution 45 customizing 45 mono compatibility meters 48 overview 44 peak range 45 phase scopes 48 resetting clipping indicators 45 routing channels to hardware outputs 46 110 showing hiding 44 turning off 301 VU PPM meters 46 47 window 24 channels converting mono stereo 105 intermixing 176 previewing in multichannel files 53 repairing 151 153 routing to hardware outputs 46 110 swapping in stereo files 176 Chorus effect 41 203 Clear Undo Redo History command 78 Click and Crackle Removal button 42 clipboard copying current video frame to 268 copying Cutlist to
328. fore you do any processing to a sound file This undo buffer allows you to rewrite previous versions of the sound file if you decide you don t like changes you ve made to the sound file This undo buffer is erased when the file is closed or the Clear Undo Redo History command is selected Undo Redo These commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state when you don t like the changes you have made or reapply the changes after you have undone them Undo Redo History This is a list of all of the functions that have been done to a file that are available to be undone or redone Undo Redo History gives you the ability to undo or redo multiple functions as well as preview the functions for quick review of the processed and unprocessed material This list can be displayed from within the View menu Unsigned Data that has only positive values and uses half the maximum value to represent silence This is a format option when opening and saving raw sound files Virtual MIDI Router VMR A software only router for MIDI data between programs Sound Forge software uses the VMR to receive MIDI time code and send MIDI clock No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR so routing can only be performed between programs running on the same PC Sony supplies a VMR with Sound Forge software called the Sony Virtual MIDI Router Wave An digital audio standard developed by Microsoft and IBM One minute of uncompressed audio requires 10
329. formation see Customizing region labeling on page 123 USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 121 Inserting regions based on rapid sound attacks 1 Open the Fill pca file 2 From the Tools menu choose Auto Region The Auto Region dialog appears Auto Region Drum Fill reset JE x l l Cancel fo Yo 80 0 15 1 gt ore ore Less Less E Attack sensitivity Release sensitivity Minimum level 1 to 100 0 1 to 100 0 0 1 to 100 0 Minimum beat duration 0 01 to 3 seconds 0 05 Use release point for end of region Build regions using the current tempo More 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 444 00 00 00 4 3 Clear the Build regions using the current tempo check box if it is selected 4 Specify a preset from the Preset drop down list or configure a new setting using the dialog s active parameters shown in the table below Parameter Description Attack sensitivity Determines the sensitivity of the attack detection algorithm to rapid volume increases Release sensitivity Determines the minimum decrease in sound level required to create a region end point Minimum level Determines the threshold audio level required to create a new region Minimum beat duration Specifies the minimum length in seconds that must elapse before a new region can be created Use release point for end of Requires a region end when the sound level drops by the factor specified by the region Release sensitivi
330. formation is optional If the Title box in the CD Information window or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed e You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text If you select the Write CD Text check box on the Burn Disc at Once CD dialog this data will be written to your disc In order to display CD Text your CD player must support CD Text Adjusting pause time Double click the Pause box to edit the pause time between tracks Type a new value in the box and tracks will move accordingly in the timeline 294 CHAPTER 20 Toggling protection and emphasis flags Select the Prot check box to add a flag to the Q subcode to prevent digital copying of your CD In order to use copy protection the CD player must support the copy protection flag Select the Emph check box to add a pre emphasis flag to the Q subcode Pre emphasis is a basic noise reduction process that is implemented by a CD player Emphasis involves boosting high frequencies during CD writing and cutting those frequencies during playback The emphasis process reduces high frequency noise without disrupting the natural frequency of the source material Selecting the Emph check box does not impart the pre emphasis boost on a track it can only set the flag In order for pre emphasis to occur the CD recorder and player must support th
331. frames This allows you to find the frame to which a given point in the sound file corresponds Default beats per measure The number of beats in each measure for displaying in measures and beats For example 2 4 time would have two beats per measure This setting will be also be used in the Edit Tempo dialog Default beats per minute The number of beats per minute that is the tempo of a song for displaying lengths This setting will be also be used in the Edit Tempo dialog RMS level scan time The amount of sound data surrounding the cursor used to calculate the RMS level in the Levels toolbar Peak level scan time The amount of sound data surrounding the cursor used when searching for a peak level to display in the Levels toolbar O VU 4 dBu level Choose a setting from the drop down list or type a value in the box to calibrate the VU PPM meters to their associated levels on the peak meters VU meters display sound in dB VU where 0 VU is a reference level and there is headroom above 0 VU The Sound Forge peak meters display peaks in dB FS decibels relative to full scale In digital audio there is no headroom above 0 dB FS Choosing a setting from this drop down list subtracts a nominal dB value from the VU meters so that a signal displayed on the VU meters remains slightly below 0 dB on the peak meters VU meter integration time Type a value in the box to set the amount of data surrounding the cursor that will be used to calculate le
332. g The summary information from the Summary window will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Displays the entered copyright information when a user selects About This Presentation from the RealPlayer s shortcut menu or Properties from the Windows Media Player shortcut menu Note When rendering Windows Media files title information is based on the settings in the Summary window View gt Metadata gt Summary Information or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Summary window will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Defining Scott Studios data commands For WAV files using Scott Studios data command markers can be used to define information about the WAV file Command Description SCOTT EOM Calculates when the next queued clip starts playing in a Scott Studios system For more information refer to your Scott Studios documentation SCOTT Cue In Sets the beginning of a file in a Scott Studios system without performing destructive editing For more information refer to your Scott Studios documentation Inserting command markers 1 Position the cu
333. g Alt Shift D R 5 1 Video Alt Shift D V Saving a window layout Tip Press Ctrl Alt D release the keys and then press a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to save the layout in that space 1 Arrange the windows and docked windows as desired 2 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Save Layout As from the submenu The Save Layout As dialog is displayed Note Choose Save Layout from the submenu if you want to update the current window layout A bullet is displayed next to the current layout 3 Inthe Name box type the name you want to use to identify the layout This name will be used in the Organize Layouts dialog 4 Choose a setting from the Shortcut drop down list to set the shortcut that will be used to load the layout For example if you choose 4 you could press Alt Shift D release the keys and then press 4 on your keyboard to load the layout CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 303 5 The Folder box displays the path to folder where the layout will be saved Window layouts are saved in the following folders by default e In Windows XP C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 e In Windows Vista C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 You can click the Browse button to choose a different folder 6 Click OK to save the new layout Loading a saved layout From the View menu choose Window Layouts
334. g Description Burn audio Begins recording audio to your CD when you click the Start button You will need to close the disc before it can be played in an audio CD player Test then burn audio Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns Recording begins after the test if it is successful Test only Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD Close disc Closes your disc without adding any audio when you click the Start button Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player Erase RW disc Erases your rewritable CD when you click the Start button You should use this option if your rewritable CD already has data on it 3 Select your burning options Option Description Buffer underrun protection Select this check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning Erase RW disc before burning If you re using a rewritable CD select this check box to erase the CD before you begin burning if your rewritable CD already has data on it Close disc when done burning Select this check box to close the CD after burning Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player Note You can close the disc using a separate step later For more information se
335. g controls see Graphic Fade controls on page 179 5 Edit the fade envelope using the following controls e Click the envelope to create a new point Drag a point to move it to a new position e Double click or right click a point to delete it e Right click an envelope segment and choose a new fade type from the shortcut menu For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49 6 Click OK The custom graphic fade is applied to the selected audio Graphic Fade controls The following controls are located in the Graphic Fade dialog Control Description Maximum Gain Select a radio button to adjust the range of the envelope graph Show wave The Show wave drop down list provides several settings for drawing the current selection s waveform on the envelope graph This function is available only for small selections Reset Envelope Clicking the Reset Envelope button clears the envelope of all points except the original two PROCESSING AUDIO 179 Fade Fade In The Fade In command is used to linearly fade a selection from a volume of Inf to a volume of 0 GB The size of the selection determines the length of the fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and choose In from the submenu The fade is applied and volume increases over the length of the entire file B Example music bed A AE limono PmERT m e 0 H H E to 00 00 00 000 120 1 908 A Fade Fade Out
336. g fromthe PlaVlISl erecsitreri riteni Cartan Eo AEE EEES EREE EEA EREE EEEREN 130 Creating a new file from the Playlist nnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnsnsnsosoresreresesen 130 Configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee eee e eee eeeeennees 130 Saving a Playlist Cutlist file 2 0 0 ccc ccc cece ete ence e ene ene e eee e eee eeeneeeeeneees 131 Opening a Playlist Cutlist file lt cgcnsddsscengewsscaseeigins cakeadgeeatassaawedesetenetiax 132 Copying the Playlist Cutlist to the clipboard cece cece cece eee e eee eeeees 132 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS Recording and Extracting AUdIO ccc cece cece eee eee eee eee e cece eee eeeeees 133 RECOM QUCIO 254600800 v ke EERE E ies oaheawdeneyeeoi ns ene ons ewes 133 Specifying recording and playback Options cc cece cece cence eee ene eeeneeeeeee 133 Recording manually Lecsedees hears coon oeun weiss t bend tee eae heehee Wdasah ears EE aA 134 Recording automatically 4 24 cn dawedaeedauereilnneskesaweheswostwaeeiasieeeanetaancsengees 136 Choosing a recording MOdE ccc ec ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 139 Adjusting TOM DC ONSCUs ccavieastsadedcakandgaiee ENRI AREER E SAREES UR ERIAS 139 Playing Dackrecorded audio ssiiswiceseri arinin d ded neua 140 Synchronizing with other devices sssssesussesesossesesessesesosorseserersoeesereso 140 MONITONNG audio INPUT sei oi ivennso0e eeri ereer ie see eri eas es eo NEEN 141
337. g the Event tool processes and effects are applied to each event individually The processed result is only the length and number of channels in the event at the time of processing not the entire length and number of channels of the underlying media You can process multiple selected events at once but Sound Forge software processes each event separately Note You cannot use format changing processes such as Bit Depth Converter and Resample when using the Event tool Processing multiple events creates a single operation in the Undo Redo History window For more information see Using the Undo Redo History window on page 76 For more information about applying effects see Applying an effect on page 191 USING THE EVENT TOOL 163 Selecting events When working with the Event tool f you can select one or more events but you cannot create time selections To select an event click it Double click an event to select it and adjust the loop bar to the length of the event BB Shine koba l My Lats kii i lfm in TEAT kK gt E gt of Rate 0 00 lt gt p 00 01 03 930 00 01 43 584 00 00 39 653 1 16 066 Selecting events using menu commands From the Edit menu choose Event and then choose Select Next Event or Select Previous Event from the submenu to select the next or previous event in the data window Choose Extend to Next Event or Extend to Previous Event to extend the current selection to the next or
338. g toolbar the next time you start the application Running a script You can run scripts using a single click if you have customized the Scripting toolbar to include buttons for scripts that you have created 1 Click in the data window where you want to apply the script to establish focus 2 Click the button of the script that you would like to run on the Scripting toolbar Tip You may need to hover a button to display a ToolTip which displays the name of the script associated with the button USING SCRIPTING 231 Using the Batch Converter You can use the Batch Converter to modify and manipulate audio files without having to process each file individually Converting using an existing batch job 1 From the Tools menu choose Batch Converter The Batch Converter window is displayed Pd Batch Converter anal o Files to Convert Process Metadata Save Status Add File Add Folder Remove File Folder Size KE Modified Musicbed pea C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 485 1 26 2009 3 04 PM _ Run Job Close Select a combination of files processes metadata and save options then click Run Job 2 Open the batch job that you want to run a Click the Open Job button 3 The Open dialog is displayed b Browse to the folder where your batch job bj file is saved c Select a batch job and click the Open button 3 Select the Files to convert tab
339. ge Pan plug in is added to the Plug In Chainer If the Plug In Chainer is not visible it will be opened Note fa data window already has a volume envelope pressing P or V will hide the envelope 3 Adjust volume or panning with the envelope in the data window 200 CHAPTER 12 Adjusting effect parameters with envelopes An envelope is displayed in the data window for each effect parameter that you ve chosen to automate Envelope points represent plug in parameter settings at a specific point in time You can add points adjust their positions and change the fade curves between points to modify effect parameters and the transitions between them Note When you automate an effect s frequency parameter such as the modulation frequency parameter in the amplitude modulation effect you may notice that the frequency changes are more apparent when moving through the lower frequencies This is because frequency scales plug ins use a logarithmic scale but effect automation uses linear interpolation To make the automated frequency changes sound more natural change the fade curve types to change the interpolation rates between envelope points For high to low frequency sweeps use a fast fade curve for low to high frequency sweeps use a slow curve Previewing effect automation To hear the results of your effect automation without applying it to the sound file click the Preview button in the Plug In Chainer window You can select
340. ger outside of Sound Forge software to manage ACID and Vegas presets as well Note f you purchased the boxed version of Sound Forge Pro software the Preset Manager is included on the Sound Forge Pro application disc If you purchased the downloadable version you can get the Preset Manager on our Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com download utilities To display the Preset Manager choose Preset Manager from the Tools menu In the Preset Manager choose Contents and Index from the Help menu for instructions on how to manage your presets WORKING WITH EFFECTS 199 Automating effect parameters When you add an effect that supports automation to the Plug In Chainer a list of the effect s automatable parameters is displayed on the right side of the window You can use these controls to add show hide and enable bypass automation envelopes Plug in parameters can be edited using the automation envelope in the data window Note Choosing a new effect chain preset will clear the current effect automation settings Adding an effect automation envelope 1 Inthe Plug In Chainer select the button chorus_ for an effect that includes auttomatable parameters The plug in s controls are displayed and a list of the effect s automatable parameters is displayed on the right side of the Plug In Chainer Plug In Chainer E3 BD X gt mM E B sE aat off ee SRF W ae Eda a Untitled Parameter Automate Show Enable
341. gger events and playback of sound files Consult your MIDI sending device to see what controller messages it sends MIDI Notes MIDI notes are a specific type of MIDI message Sound Forge software can use MIDI notes to trigger events and playback of sound files Any MIDI sequencer or controller will send MIDI notes MIDI Port A MIDI port is the physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI hardware This port can be a MIDI in out or through Your computer must have a MIDI capable card to output MIDI time code to an external device or to receive MIDI time code from an external device MIDI Time Code MTC MTC is an addendum to the MIDI 1 0 specification and provides a way to specify absolute time for synchronizing MIDI capable applications MTC is essentially a MIDI representation of SMPTE time code Mix Mixing allows multiple sound files to be blended into one file at user defined relative levels Multiple Bit Rate Encoding Multiple bit rate encoding also known as Intelligent Streaming for the Windows Media platform and SureStream for the RealMedia G2 platform allows you to create a single file that contains streams for several bit rates A multiple bit rate file can accommodate users with different Internet connection speeds or these files can automatically change to a different bit rate to compensate for network congestion without interrupting playback Note To take advantage of multiple bit rate encoding you must publish your med
342. ght clicking and choosing a new format from the shortcut menu For more information see Selecting status formats on page 78 62 CHAPTER 3 Viewing selection statistics Choosing Statistics from the Tools menu displays a Statistics window showing information about the current selection or if there is no selection on the entire file E Statistics Example music bed Ruler Format Time Level Format Decibels dB Cursor position Time Sample value at cursor dB Minimum sample position Time Minimum sample value dB Maximum sample position Time Maximum sample value dB RMS level dB Average value dB Zero crossings Hz Copy to Clipboard ie 00 00 07 148 24 914 00 00 01 096 0 723 00 00 01 101 2 228 22 690 45 060 1 141 62 The following table describes all statistical categories displayed in the Statistics window Statistical Category Ruler Format Level Format Cursor position Sample value at cursor Maximum minimum sample position and sample value RMS level Average value Zero crossings Copy to Clipboard Description Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine the format you would like to use for the Cursor position Minimum sample position and Maximum sample position categories For more information see Selecting status formats on page 78 Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify how the left and right channel levels at the
343. ght mouse button while holding down the left mouse button to toggle between fast scrolling and slow scrolling Rotate the mouse wheel forward Rotate the mouse wheel back Ctrl rotate the mouse wheel forward or back Shift rotate the mouse wheel forward or back Ctrl Shift rotate the mouse wheel forward or back Appendix B Microsoft Audio Compression Manager The Microsoft Audio Compression Manager ACM is a standard interface for audio compression in Windows This interface allows applications such as Sound Forge Pro to use compression algorithms provided by other companies Sound Forge software fully supports audio compression through the ACM This allows you to use any ACM compatible compression Compressed WAV files are transparently opened and all available compression formats for WAV files are provided in the Save As dialog There are two major components to the ACM e Audio data compression and decompression e Transparent playback and recording of non hardware supported audio files Audio data compression and decompression The first component of the ACM allows audio data to be compressed and decompressed Audio compression is used to decrease the amount of data required to represent a sound and results in smaller sound files However there are drawbacks to using audio compression on sound files e Most audio compression algorithms degrade sound quality This is referred to as lossy compression because info
344. gion Click a region s Play button H in the Regions List 1 Right click the region tag and choose Edit from the shortcut menu The Regions List appears 2 Click the region s Play button j Splitting regions Splitting a region divides an existing region at the current cursor position producing two separate regions 1 Inthe Regions List window View gt Metadata gt Regions List select the region you want to split 2 Position the cursor where you want the split to occur 3 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Split from the submenu or right click a region in the Regions List window and choose Split from the shortcut menu Notes Ifthe cursor is placed within the region you re splitting the region will be split at the cursor position Ifthe cursor is placed outside the region your re splitting a new region will be created from the closest edge of the original region to the cursor position 124 CHAPTER 7 Triggering a region using MIDI commands 1 Right click the region tag F and choose Edit from the shortcut menu The Regions List appears 2 Choose a trigger type from the Trigger drop down list 3 Inthe Channel box specify the MIDI input channel for triggering 4 Inthe Note box specify the MIDI note that will trigger region playback This value can be entered as a MIDI note value such as C4 or as a MIDI note number such as 60 Notes Ifthe Trigger from MIDI Timecode command Options gt M
345. graph and statistics data Using a sonogram The sonogram is another way of displaying spectral data variations over time In a sonogram the X horizontal axis represents time and the Y vertical axis represents frequency Spectrum Analysis E3 2 048 Blackman Harris Gx A 28 5 a Gal A 12 34 2 88 4 950 Freq 0 i 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 603 00 00 04 417 00 00 06 231 00 00 08 044 00 00 09 858 i 40 do EE 109 de Frequency Hz File Start End Settings Position Active Example music bed 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 2 048 Blackman Harris 75 Slice Peak The amplitude of each frequency component in the sonogram is represented by the color intensity of each point in the graph This method of displaying spectral information is useful for identifying distinctive spectral patterns created from sounds such as speech musical instruments and ambient noise Displaying a sonogram 1 Open an audio file and select the portion of the waveform you want to analyze The sound or note you want to analyze should be in the center of the highlighted area Note Analyzing long sections of audio can take a long time and decreases the time resolution so your selection should be relatively short Also if the audio has a low amplitude level you can boost it by using the Volume or Normalize functions For more information see Volume on page 190 and Normalize on page 183 2 From the View menu choose Spectr
346. graph you want to edit USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 281 Item Sync graphs Logarithmic graphing Freq Min Frequency minimum Max Frequency maximum Ceiling Floor Hold peaks during monitoring Maintain last monitored view Description If you are analyzing a multichannel file select the Sync graphs check box to synchronize the displays so you can view the same region of the FFT in all channels Select the Logarithmic graphing check box to display the X axis in logarithmic mode rather than linear mode In logarithmic mode more of the graph is devoted to lower frequencies Note Logarithmic graphing affects the display only when Normal Display is selected Determines the lowest frequency displayed in the graphs Determines the highest frequency displayed in the graphs Determines the highest amplitude displayed in the graphs Determines the lowest amplitude displayed in the graphs Select this check box to indicate the highest value of each frequency on the spectrum graph with a small horizontal line The length of time in seconds that the peak is held is determined by the value entered in the edit box Select this check box if you want to maintain the state of the Spectrum Graph when you stop playback Clearing this check box results in the graph resetting to the cursor position when playback stops Saving spectrum graph settings After you configure the controls in the Spectrum Settings dialog you can save the
347. gt Eep or 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 223 1 48 256 CHAPTER 17 Looping techniques Depending upon the source material creating a natural sounding loop can be a difficult task Many factors beyond your control may produce distracting pops and glitches thereby calling unwanted attention to the loop Although looping skill is largely the product of practice and experimentation there are some guidelines to consider Match endpoint amplitudes One of the easiest ways to minimize the occurrence of glitches when creating loops is to select loop endpoints that have an amplitude of zero These points are known as zero crossings Match endpoint waveform slope Another technique for reducing loop glitches is to avoid matching loop endpoints where the waveform slope does not match If the waveform slope changes drastically a pop plays when the sample is looped Loop Tuner Loop Tuner 00 00 02 325 00 00 01 723 00 00 02 285 00 00 01 513 ne gt e top or A gt 51 377 37 882 gt lt 737 14 338 ie wep toy tom A ae z 50 495 eee ee 6 673 4 236 Non matching slope Matching slope Match endpoint sound levels The overall amplitude or loudness approaching the loop s endpoints should be as similar as possible to prevent distracting glitches Unfortunately it is frequently difficult to avoid this problem particularly with rapidly decaying source material Avoid very short loops If the loop is shorter than 5
348. hance To start the XFX Smooth Enhance plug in choose Smooth Enhance from the Process menu For more information on using the XFX Smooth Enhance plug in click the Help button E in the Smooth Enhance dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Time Time Stretch To start the XFX Time Stretch plug in choose Time Stretch from the Process menu For more information on using the XFX Time Stretch plug in click the Help button E in the Time Stretch dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Time lastique Timestretch To start the lastique Timestretch plug in choose Time from the Process menu and then choose lastique Timestretch from the submenu For information about using the lastique Timestretch plug in click the Help button E in the lastique Timestretch dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index PROCESSING AUDIO 189 Volume The Volume command alters the volume of an audio selection Volume Example music bed 0 00 dB cancel 100 00 Preview Bypass Gain ae Mores 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Increasing the volume of a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing the word Wow 3 From the Process menu choose Volume The Volume dialog is displayed 4 From the Preset drop
349. has room for the tails and then mix the processed audio back into your source file Saving plug in chains After you ve set up an effect chain you may want to save it for later use When you save a plug in chain you not only save the order of the effects in the chain but also the parameters of each individual effect 1 Create an effects chain in the Plug In Chainer window 2 Enter a name for the new chain in the Chain Preset box WORKING WITH EFFECTS 195 3 Click the Save Chain Preset button H The new chain is saved in the Chain Preset drop down list Plug In Chainer i Enter a name in the 3 Click the Save Chain 7 X gt m Preset button to save Chain Preset box o Distortion I Dither H Save Chain Preset pliom j gt the new chain Tip You can also save a chain preset by pressing Ctrl S entering a name for the preset and pressing Enter Saving individual plug in settings as a custom preset After you have adjusted effect parameters in the Plug In Chainer window you can save your settings as a custom preset for later use You can select a custom saved preset from the Preset drop down list to apply the same effect settings at a later time You also have the option of saving the entire chain as a chain preset For more information see Saving plug in chains on page 195 Note Effect automation envelope points are not saved with presets If you are using effect automation envelopes and save a preset du
350. he Acoustic Mirror tool While they produce interesting effects the acoustic signature cannot be correctly replicated What you need to create custom impulses The equipment required to create custom impulses depends upon whether you want to create the impulse from a physical acoustic space or from a piece of equipment Regardless of the method you need a playback device that reproduces test tones and a recording device that has microphone or line level inputs Be aware that the quality of the impulse is directly affected by the quality of your playback and recording devices The flatter your system s response the more accurate the impulse response Recovering an impulse from an acoustic space To recover an impulse from an acoustic space you need the following equipment e A playback device and speakers e A stereo pair of microphones to record the test tone e A recording device for recording the signal captured by the microphones Recovering an impulse from an electronic device To recover an impulse from an electronic device you need the following equipment e A playback device that connects to the device s inputs e A recording device that connects to the device s outputs Recording the impulse in an acoustic space When you have assembled the required equipment you are ready to begin recording the impulse The following sections describe the typical impulse recording procedure Transferring the test tone The first step in recordi
351. he CD layout bar to perform many of the track editing functions from the Track List window Changing track starting and ending points Drag either end of the track to adjust the track s starting or ending position The pause time between tracks is displayed in a ToolTip BB 100 Unnamed Things eco ae a 4 00 00 00 7 He Inf Bo 2 a Inf aanas emea 00 03 30 933 2 000 EERS 00 04 42 866 elle lt fs Tec 00 10 00 00 1 i K gt E p a Rate 0 00 op 00 07 01 360 00 04 42 866 1 53 791 Reordering tracks Drag a CD track to move the track its associated media and the pause time before the track An indicator is displayed to show you where the event will be moved BB 100 Unnamed Things koda l 1 gt eiil K gt E p gt g Rate 0 00 lt 4O gt 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 866 1 53 791 If you drag a track in a project where a single event spans more than one track Sound Forge will split the event as necessary Tip Hold Shift while clicking CD tracks to select a range of tracks Deleting tracks Right click a track and choose Delete from the shortcut menu BURNING CDS 291 Hiding the CD layout bar From the Options menu choose Data Window and then choose CD Tracks from the submenu The CD layout bar is hidden Choose CD Tracks from the submenu again to display the CD layout bar Tip Right click
352. he destination data window for your recording By default the software records into the active data window If this is not where you want to record use one of the following methods to prepare for recording If Then You want to record into a Click the Window button and choose a data window from the Record destination different data window window drop down list Click OK to return to the Record dialog You want to record intoa new Click the New button in the Record dialog and specify the attributes sample rate bit window depth and channels for the new file Click OK to return to the Record dialog Note The maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For example if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs If you record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To route inputs to channels in the data window click a channel number and choose a new input port from the menu To determine which inputs are recorded type a value in the Channels box For example you could type 1 4 to record channels 1 through 4 or type 1 3 4 to record only channels 1 3 and 4 From the Mode drop down list choose a recording mode For more information see Choosing a recording mode on page 139 Use the Threshold Options tab at the bottom of the Record dialog to set the audio levels at which recording will st
353. he following image the red line represents the baseline Beats Per Minute BPM The tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beats in one minute If the tempo is 60 BPM a single beat will occur once every second 338 APPENDIX E Bit The most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or 0 corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system As an example the 8 bit binary number 10011010 represents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples Bit Depth The number of bits used to represent a single sample For example 8 or 16 bit are common sample sizes While 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 or 24 bit samples Buffer Memory used as an intermediate repository in which data is temporarily held while waiting to be transferred between two locations A buffer ensures that there is an uninterrupted flow of data between computers Media players may need to rebuffer when there is network congestion Bus A virtual pathway where signals from tracks and effects are mixed A bus s output is a physical audio device in the computer from which the signal will be heard Byte Refers to a set of 8 bits An 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16 bit sample takes t
354. he largest peak in your file Using the channel meters From the View menu choose Channel Meters to open or close the channel meters By default Sound Forge software provides peak meters that you can use to monitor your audio levels You can also choose to display VU PPM peak program meters a phase scope and a mono compatibility meter The peak meters display instantaneous levels during playback to help you determine the loudest level in your audio signal and whether the signal is clipping To prevent clipping keep an eye on your peak meters Peak levels should never exceed 0 dB You can use the Status tab in the Preferences dialog to calibrate the VU PPM meters to their associated levels on the peak meters and adjust the VU meters sensitivity Channel E E Mono compatibility meter Phase scope Peak meter VU PPM Meters Showing or hiding the Channel Meters window From the View menu choose Channel Meters to open or close the channel meters window You can dock the Channel Meters window on any edge of the Sound Forge workspace 44 CHAPTER 2 Showing or hiding meters You can display a peak meter VU PPM a phase scope and mono compatibility meter for each channel To toggle the display of each meter right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window and choose a command from the shortcut menu A check mark appears to indicate which meters are currently visible e For more informa
355. heck box selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog To access the Preferences dialog choose Preferences from the Options menu From the File menu choose Save As to save the current data window to a project file The Save As dialog appears Using the Save in drop down list locate the folder where you want to save the project From the Save as type drop down list choose Sound Forge Pro Project File frg In the File name box type a name for the file TOA S Click the Save button A frg file is created with the name you specified and a folder with a similar name projectname_frg for example is created in the same location for the temporary files Important The associated project folder created by this process should not be deleted as this will cause your project file to be unusable Getting media files The software can open a variety of audio and video files There are two main methods for locating previewing and opening media files From the File menu choose Open to display the Open dialog e From the View menu choose Explorer to display the Explorer window These methods are explained in greater detail in the following sections Note To have pulldown fields automatically removed when opening 24 fps progressive scan DV video files select the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box on the Video tab of the Preferences dialog To open your 24p DV video files as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i
356. heck box is selected the Position field in the status bar will show the cursor position during playback Turn off this option if you have a very slow computer or video card Select this check box if you want the record time displayed in the Record dialog Clear the check box if you have a very slow computer or video card Select this check box if you want to automatically reopen files when you save to a different format Changes in bit depth channels or compression format will result in reopening and will allow you to listen to any changes in sound quality Clear the check box and select the Prompt to open new file after Save As check box if you want to be prompted to open the saved file in a new data window When both check boxes are cleared Sound Forge software does nothing after saving to a different format If you re saving a file to several compressed formats clearing these check boxes prevents you from having to reopen the file after saving each format When the Automatically reopen files after Save As check box is cleared select this check box if you want the application to prompt you to open the destination file to a new data window after saving a sound file to a different format Opening the file in a new data window will allow you to hear any changes in quality between the original file and the result of the Save As operation Select this check box if you want to lock media files after you ve opened them Clear the check box if y
357. here clipping occurs Markers can be quickly selected from the list in the Go To dialog Also markers are displayed in the Regions List for quick playback 1 Select the audio you want to scan 2 From the Tools menu choose Detect Clipping The Detect Clipping dialog appears Detect Clipping Shine Preset Eys Detect all 0 dB dipping i x Cancel Threshold 0 00 dB 40 toOdB F 100 00 Clip Length 3 1 to 100 samples More 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 930 00 03 30 930 116 CHAPTER 7 3 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as necessary a Drag the Threshold slider to determine the sound level you want to find b Seta value in the Clip Length box to specify how many sequential samples must meet the Threshold setting to constitute clipping 4 Click the OK button The selection is scanned and a marker is added whenever there are a number of sequential samples determined by the Clip Length setting with the same value above the Threshold setting Tip Use Detect all clip related plateaus from the Preset drop down list to detect clipped peaks that may exist in your file after decreasing the levels in the file You can then use the Pencil tool or the Clipped Peak Restoration tool in the Sony Creative Software Inc Noise Reduction plug in to restore the clipped peaks USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 117 Using command markers in streaming media files C
358. his check box is selected Sound Forge software will not allow recording beyond the specified record sync Use internal timer for SMPTE end time This ensures that your record length is exact regardless of any inaccurate timecode Select this check box if you want to use the internal timer for SMPTE generation rather than position generation Use free wheel for SMPTE loss values reported by the sound card driver Since many sound cards do not report their position accurately it is usually better to use the internal timer for SMPTE generation Choose a value from the Internal timer resolution drop down list to specify the internal timer accuracy used for generating SMPTE Low values produce more accurate SMPTE generation but may also decrease system performance Select this check box to stop playback if the incoming MIDI timecode signal stops When this check box Enable SMPTE playback offset is not selected Sound Forge playback will continue until the user stops playback manually In the Free wheel time box specify the amount of time that Sound Forge playback will continue after the incoming MIDI timecode signal stops If timecode starts again during this time playback will continue In the Free wheel slack box specify how fast the software should expect timecode updates before going into Free wheel mode If you have a fast computer this value can be set to a lower value if you want to stop playback immediately when timecode is
359. his setting has the same effect as dragging the sustain portion of the dry gain envelope in the data window Select the Invert Data check box to invert the destination audio at the baseline reverse the phase Inverting data can help match transitions and compare the phase relationship of the two sound files Fade In Type a value in the Fade In box or use the spinner to set the length of the fade in between the source and destination audio Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the attack portion of the envelope in the data window Click the Fade Curves button ES and choose a curve type from the menu to set the speed of the fade in Proportional Fade Select the Proportional fade lengths check box if you want to specify fade lengths as a percentage of the selection Lengths Fade Out Type a value in the Fade Out box or use the spinner to set the length of the fade out between the source and destination audio Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the attack portion of the envelope in the data window Click the Fade Curves button ES and choose a curve type from the menu to set the speed of the fade out More Click to display additional controls at the bottom of the dialog that you can use to change the selection you want to process 6 Click the OK button to apply the mix Mixing audio from the clipboard 1 Open and play the Drumhit pca file The file contains a snare drum and crash cymbal sound 2 Verify that
360. hortcut keys Shortcut currently assigned to Editing or creating shortcuts From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog appears 2 Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to indicate the type of command you want to assign to a keyboard shortcut 3 Selecta command in the list Tip You can type a word in the Show commands containing box to filter the list of commands to display only commands that contain the word you typed 4 Click the Shortcut keys box and press the key combination you want to assign to the selected command Tip f you type a key combination that has already been assigned to another command the Shortcut currently assigned to box displays the existing assignment To find the existing command click the Locate button 5 Click the Add button to assign the key combination in the Shortcut keys box to the selected command CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 319 Saving a keyboard mapping 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog is displayed 2 Click the Save as button and type a name to save your current keyboard shortcuts to an ini file in the following folder e Windows Vista C Users user name AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 e Windows XP C Documents and Settings user name Application Data Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Note The AppData or Application Data folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders
361. how up in the drop down list on the top of most function dialogs in Sound Forge software Punch In Punching in during recording means automatically starting and stopping recording at user specified times Pulldown In telecine conversion fields are added to convert 24 fps film to 30 fps video In 2 3 pulldown for example the first frame is scanned into two fields the second frame is scanned into three fields and so on for the duration of the film 2 3 pulldown is the standard for NTSC broadcasts of 24p material Use 2 3 pulldown when printing to tape but not when you intend to use the rendered video as source media Removing 2 3 pulldown is inefficient because the pulldown fields that are created for frame 3 span two frames 24 fps film top and resulting NTSC video with 2 3 pulldown fields bottom Use 2 3 3 2 pulldown when you plan to use your rendered video as source media When removing 2 3 3 2 pulldown Sound Forge software simply discards frame three and merges the pulldown fields in the remaining frames 24 fps film top and resulting NTSC video with 2 3 3 2 pulldown fields bottom Pulse Code Modulation PCM PCM is the most common representation of uncompressed audio signals This method of coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage PCM is the standard format for wav and aif files Q Subcode Compact disc players use the Q channel to display the music playing time The Q channel is b
362. hronizing audio and video If your video has been opened from a slow device such as a CD ROM DVD ROM or network drive Sound Forge software may have trouble accurately playing back the audio and video in sync You should always copy your video files to a fast hard drive Listed below are a few tips that can help when trying to synchronize the audio and video e After assembling or editing the audio you wish to use with your video place markers during video playback to correspond to any major synchronization points You can locate a particular frame by dragging the cursor along the audio if the Video Preview window is open from the View menu choose Video Preview or the Animate Video Strip option is enabled from the Options menu choose Video gt Animate Video Strip After primary locations have been identified drag your audio to these markers to mix and paste audio e Features such as Insert Silence Delete Clear and Time Stretch are commonly used to correct synchronization Another useful trick is to create a region representing the offset between a video frame and audio event Then you can enable Lock Loop Region Length and drag the offset region to a preceding silent section Use the region as a template for adjusting the audio stream length either copying and pasting to insert time or deleting to remove time 302 CHAPTER 21 Chapter 22 Customizing Sound Forge Pro Software You can customize Sound Forge Pro software to suit your pro
363. iZotope MBIT Dither 40 174 175 Mute 182 Normalize 183 184 Pan Expand 40 185 Resample 186 187 Reverse 189 Smooth Enhance 189 Time Stretch 189 Volume 190 projects creating 55 folders 55 projects continued saving 68 saving paths in rendered files 69 proper use of software 143 protecting CDs 295 publishing files to Web 36 80 punch in adjusting pre post roll 140 recording mode 139 Q subcode 295 quantization errors defined 102 minimizing 103 104 Quantize to Frames 96 rapid sound attacks 122 RealMedia streaming media commands 118 receiving samples 238 Record button 37 recording Acoustic Mirror test tone 215 adjusting pre post roll 140 audio configuration 133 auditioning 140 automatically labeling windows and regions 141 calibrating DC adjustment 139 changing blinking status 141 inserting markers 114 141 manually 134 136 modes 139 monitoring audio input levels 141 multichannel audio 134 136 playing back recorded audio 140 punch in mode 139 recalibrating DC adjustment 140 synchronizing with other devices 140 triggering by MIDI timecode 138 triggering by set threshold 137 138 triggering by time 136 recovering files after crash 80 Rectangular dither 173 Red Book CD burning See disc at once CD burning Redo button 36 redoing operations 76 78 refreshing Spectrum Anaylsis graphs 276 regions automatically naming 123 benefits of using 113 building using current te
364. ia files to a Windows Media server or a RealServerG2 Musical Instrument Device Interface MIDI A standard language of control messages that provides for communication between any MIDI compliant devices Anything from synthesizers to lights to factory equipment can be controlled via MIDI Sound Forge software uses MIDI for synchronization purposes Noise shaping Noise shaping is a technique which can minimize the audibility of quantization noise by shifting its frequency spectrum For example in 44 100 Hz audio quantization noise is shifted towards the Nyquist Frequency of 22 050 Hz APPENDIX E 345 Nondestructive Editing This type of editing involves a pointer based system of keeping track of edits When you delete a section of audio in a nondestructive system the audio on disk is not actually deleted Instead a set of pointers is established to tell the program to skip the deleted section during playback Normalize Refers to raising the volume so that the highest level sample in the file reaches a user defined level Use normalization to make sure you are using all of the dynamic range available to you Nyquist Frequency The Nyquist Frequency or Nyquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing For example the Nyquist Frequency of 44 100 Hz is 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz will produce aliasing distortion in the sampl
365. ialog you can find the next glitch in the file without viewing the Find dialog To find the next glitch using the current settings hold Shift while choosing Find from the Tools menu or hold Shift while clicking the Find button on the Tools toolbar Using the Shift key in this way is not limited to finding glitches You can hold Shift and choose any command from a menu to repeat the command with the same settings For more information see Repeating an operation on page 147 Repairing audio There are several ways to repair audio glitches Copying the other channel For glitches in a single channel of a multichannel file you can replace the glitched section of the damaged channel with the corresponding data from a good channel Note This method works only if the channels contain similar audio 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Create a selection in the channel containing the glitch three or four times longer maximum 50 ms than the glitch itself BB Sound2 a fos x j rN A AE o0 00 00 00 00 05 i 00 00 10 ed a a tt Reed epee pee pyrite nm NR ee 3 From the Tools menu choose Repair and choose Copy Other Channel from the submenu The selected data is replaced with the corresponding data from the good channel In addition rapid crossfades are created at the beginning and end of the replacement selection to prevent a new glitch from being created Tip f this method fails to repair th
366. ible in the current area of the waveform display Allows for quick navigation and playback of any part of an audio file The overview bar also indicates the portion of the waveform currently depicted in the waveform display as well as the selected region Click to move the cursor Double click to center the cursor in the waveform display Right click to start or pause playback Drag to activate the audio event locator LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 31 Component CD layout bar Time zoom resolution Time zoom in out Level zoom in out Maximize width 32 CHAPTER 2 Description The CD layout bar displays information about the tracks you ve created for a disc at once CD Each CD track shows the track s number and length A red indicator is drawn at the end of the CD layout bar to represent the end of the disc if the disc length is known End of disc indicator You can use the CD layout bar to perform many of the track editing functions from the Track List window For more information see Moving tracks on the CD layout bar on page 291 Specifies the number of samples of data represented by each horizontal point on the screen This determines the length of time displayed in the data window Smaller resolution values display less time Changes the zoom resolution for the time horizontal axis Changes the zoom resolution for the level vertical axis Resizes the data window to maximize its size within
367. icate that a trigger has been configured Regions List E Name Start End Length Trigger Chan Note H Silence 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None 1 C5 2 Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 Note On Play 1 c4 3 H Sound editing just gets easier 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None 1 C5 4 H And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None 1 C5 A small musical note indicates a region trigger 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 providing each region with a unique MIDI trigger Using region playback triggers 1 From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu A check mark appears adjacent to the command indicating it is active and the software is ready to receive MIDI commands 2 Click C4 on the MIDI Keyboard The Wow region plays 3 Click other trigger keys on the MIDI Keyboard and observe how this feature can be used to play regions on cue or quickly rearrange an audio file Note Only one region can be played at any given time Overlapping causes the active region s playback to be interrupted and the new region s playback to begin Triggering playback from additional internal external MIDI devices The basic concepts of MIDI routing and triggering from the Sound Forge MIDI Keyboard described in previous sections apply to any hardware or software device capable of generating MIDI commands Follow the same basic steps to trigger playback
368. ick Play to play all selected samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window Selecting samples Each sample in an instrument file is contained within an event in the data window The data window selection determines which parts of the waveform will be processed Event positions are locked You cannot move events within the data window Effects and processes can be applied to individual events or multiple selected events You can select an individual sample by clicking the event in the data window hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple samples sos x gfh Banko gt Funk Slap G1 Funk Pop G1 Funk Slap A 1 Funk Pop C2 Funk Slap 4 0 Funk Slap Bass 8 samples pl E bgal bel e bga legel 3 W 2 Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples 00 00 00 000 7 00 00 00 500 00 00 01 000 M 3 Funk Split D3 10 samples M 4 FunkSlap NV 8 samples M 5 FunkPop NV 7 samples M 6 Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples JII 7 Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples M 8 Funk Slap NC 8 samples W 9 FunkPop NC 7 samples W 10 Funk Slap amp Pop NC 15 samples 11 Funk Split D3 NC 10 samples aS Sample Pool 15 Funk Slap G1 Funk Pop G1 A Funk Slap A 1 Funk Pop C2 4 Funk Slap C2 K A Be efe 00 00 00 000 1 128 M 1 Funk Pop Bass 7 samples r IE H H E e it e 240 CHAPTER 15 You can select all samples in a bank by clicking the bank in the
369. if your computer has sufficient memory Loop Choose Loop and specify a Number of beats and Root note for transposing if you want ACID to treat your file as a loop Loops are small audio clips that are designed to create a repeating beat or pattern Loops are usually one to four measures long and are stored completely in RAM for playback Loop files change tempo and can pitch shift with an ACID project Root note for transposing Click the down arrow and choose a note from the drop down list to set the base note for tracks that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a track transposed to the project key a track that contains a drum sample for example choose Don t transpose Number of beats Double click to edit the length of the file Selecting a value that does not match the actual file will cause ACID to play the loop at a different speed than normal For example specifying a length of 8 beats for a 4 beat loop will cause the loop to play at half speed at any given tempo ACID Beatmapped Choose ACID Beatmapped if you want to add key and tempo information to a long audio file By default ACID will start the Beatmapper Wizard for files longer than 30 seconds Root note for transposing Click the down arrow and choose a note from the drop down list to set the base note for tracks that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a track transposed to the project key a track that contains
370. iles For more information on cutting copying and pasting data see Editing audio on page 70 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 53 54 CHAPTER 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started The Sound Forge Pro digital audio editing tool is for users from all musical backgrounds It is an extremely deep program containing features that may only be required by the most advanced or specialized users Nonetheless a firm grasp of Sound Forge basics is essential This chapter is designed to provide you with information on Sound Forge fundamentals Creating a project You can use Sound Forge project files to organize and work with your media files nondestructively When you save a project file two things are created a frg file and a subfolder that contains your media file and all of the temporary files created while working on your project The frg file is not a multimedia file but is used to render the final file after editing is finished When you copy cut paste and otherwise edit your project the process is nondestructive meaning you can edit without worrying about corrupting your source files Within the project file you can also undo any past operations including those occurring before your last save When you are finished working with a project file you can save your work to a media file using the Render As option on the File menu Note To use the advanced undo redo capabilities mentioned above you must have the Allow Undo past Save c
371. in creative ways 217 inactive data windows vs active data windows 64 increasing volume of selections 190 initiating MIDI playback 249 Insert CD Index button 39 Insert CD Track button 39 Insert Command button 39 Insert Marker button 39 Insert Pan Envelope button 39 Insert Region button 39 Insert Sample Loop button 39 Insert Silence button 39 Insert toolbar 39 Insert Volume Envelope button 39 inserting CD index markers 287 CD tracks 287 command markers 119 markers 114 markers during playback 114 markers during recording 114 markers while recording 141 inserting continued regions 120 121 regions automatically 121 123 silence 181 installing 18 interactive tutorials 19 36 intermixing channels 176 internal MIDI devices 250 samplers 235 International Standard Recording Codes ISRC 295 interpolating audio to repair glitches 42 151 introduction 17 19 Invert Flip process 40 181 IRCAM 335 ISRC codes 295 iZotope 64 Bit SRC process 40 188 iZotope MBIT Dither process 40 174 175 JKL shuttle soeed preference 84 keyboard shortcuts creating 319 customizing 43 319 320 default configuration 321 328 deleting keyboard maps 320 editing 319 importing keyboard maps 320 renaming keyboard maps 320 resetting the default keyboard map 320 saving keyboard maps 320 Keyboard window See MIDI keyboard labels automatically generating for markers 115 automatically generating for regions 123
372. in the United States and other countries Steinberg Media Technologies AG VST is a registered trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG ASIO is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG Tagged Image File Format TIFF Adobe Tagged Image File Format is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries All rights reserved Targa file format The Targa file format is a trademark of Pinnacle Systems Inc Thomson Fraunhofer MP3 MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Supply of this product does not convey a license nor imply any right to distribute content created with this product in revenue generating broadcast systems terrestrial satellite cable and or other distribution channels streaming applications via internet intranets and or other networks other content distribution systems pay audio or audio on demand applications and the like or on physical media compact discs digital versatile discs semiconductor chips hard drives memory cards and the like An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http mp3licensing com Sony Creative Software Inc 1617 Sherman Avenue Madison WI 53704 USA The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a guarantee or commitment on behalf of Sony Creative Software Inc in any way All updates or additional info
373. indow Ctrl F5 Toggle playback scrolling on and off F6 Toggle smooth playback scrolling on and off Shift F6 Go to the next data window Ctrl F6 Go to the previous data window Ctrl Shift F6 Maximize all data windows Ctrl F10 Maximize the Sound Forge application window Alt F10 Show hide windows docked at the bottom of the workspace F11 Show hide windows docked at the sides of the workspace Shift F11 Show hide all docked windows excluding floating window docks Ctrl F11 Maximize the width of the active data window Ctrl Enter 322 APPENDIX A Data window shortcuts Command Select previous next editing tool Keyboard Shortcut D Shift D Select normal edit tool Ctrl D Select all data in the active window Ctrl A Copy the selected data onto the clipboard Ctrl C Paste the clipboard contents into a new data window Ctrl E Mix data from the clipboard with the active window Ctrl M Trim crop to the current selection Ctrl T Paste data from the clipboard into the active window Ctrl V Move cut the selected data onto the clipboard Ctrl X Repeat last process effect or tool Ctrl Y Undo the last action Ctrl Z Redo the last undone action Ctrl Shift Z Clear delete the selected data nothing will be placed on the clipboard Delete Note f the Treat as Cutlist command available in the Edit menu Playlist Cutlist submenu is selected deleting a selection creates a region in the Cutlist window but does not remove the selection Place acommand ma
374. ing a file is almost instantaneous This file is stored in the directory where the audio file resides and has an sfk extension If this file is not in the same directory as the audio file or is deleted it will be recalculated the next time you open the file Pixel Aspect The pixel aspect determines whether the pixels are square 1 0 which refers to computers or rectangular settings other than 1 000 which typically refers to televisions The pixel aspect ratio is unrelated to the frame s aspect ratio Playlist The Playlist is a list of regions set to play in a specific order The Playlist allows for nondestructive editing and rearranging of a sound file quickly and easily Multiple versions of the playlist can be saved in an external playlist file for easy comparison 346 APPENDIX E Pre roll Post roll Pre roll is the amount of time elapsed before an event occurs Post roll is the amount of time after the event Pre and post roll have various uses in Sound Forge software Pre roll can be added to a crossfade preview to listen to the sound before the crossfade begins to give context to it Pre roll can also be used in the Playlist to hear previous regions when playback is initiated from the middle of the Playlist Preset A preset calls up a bulk setting of a function in Sound Forge software If you like the way you adjusted the EQ but do not want to have to spend the time getting it back for later use save it as a preset All presets s
375. ing box in the status bar to update the available time on a CD Default time between CD tracks Type a value in the edit box to specify the length of time that is inserted between disc at once CD seconds tracks Default CD length minutes Type the default length for CD media This length is used if the software has not yet scanned your CD drive or if no CD is in your drive This length is used to calculate the amount of time remaining on the disc that is displayed in the status bar CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 315 Audio tab The Audio tab allows you to specify playback and recording options Basic audio preferences Item Description Audio device type Choose a driver type from the drop down list e Microsoft Sound Mapper The default setting Allows the Sound Mapper to choose appropriate playback and recording devices e Windows Classic Wave Allows you to choose a specific audio device using a classic Wave driver e ASIO Allows you to choose a specific audio device using a low latency ASIO driver Playback Click the Playback tab to adjust playback routing and buffering settings Playback device routing Use this control to assign channels from multichannel audio files to outputs on your sound card the numbered columns represent audio channels and the rows represent the selected playback device s outputs Select the Enable check box to enable an output and select a radio button to assign the channel to an output
376. input parameters The syntax for the arguments is as follows in C Test input dls amp out C Test output dls amp repeat 2 The script to handle the parameters would look as follows using System using System IO using System Collections using System Runtime InteropServices using System Windows Forms using System Drawing using SoundForge using SoundForge BatchConverter public class EntryPoint public string Begin IScriptableApp app string inFile GETARG in string outFile GETARG out int count GETARG repeat Adding scripts to the Scripting menu When you start the program Sound Forge software looks at the Script Menu folder in the Sound Forge program folder to determine which scripts appear in the Scripting submenu This folder is C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Script Menu by default 1 To change the contents of the submenu add or delete scripts in the Script Menu folder Tip To prevent duplication of script files you can use shortcuts in the Script Menu folder 2 From the Tools menu choose Scripting and then choose Rescan Script Menu Folder to update the menu 228 CHAPTER 14 Creating a script Sound Forge scripting uses the Microsoft NET framework for scripting You can write scripts in JScript Visual Basic NET or C 1 From the View menu choose Script Editor to display the Script Editor window if it isn t already displayed 2 Click the New Script Templ
377. interrupted Select this check box to specify an offset that will be added to the time displayed in the Sound Forge play counter For example if you want to generate MIDI timecode starting at 01 00 00 00 instead of inserting 1 hour of silence at the beginning of your sound file you can specify that amount in this box When using Record Sync you ll often want to set this value to the Enable MTC SMPTE Input Synchronization Start time The Sound Forge ruler and play counter will not display this offset 312 CHAPTER 22 Previews tab The Previews tab allows you to specify options for previewing files Item Limit non realtime previews to Pre roll Post roll Reactive previewing Audio event locator Pre roll Loop time Cut preview configuration Pre roll Post roll Play Looped adjust pre roll Playlist pre roll Description Select this check box and specify the length of audio that will be used when generating a preview Low values decrease the amount of time needed to generate a preview when tuning effects or processing values Select this check box and specify how many seconds of unprocessed audio will be played before the processed selection Use this to listen to the transition from unprocessed to processed data Tip Pre roll can be toggled on and off by right clicking the dialog and choosing Pre roll from the shortcut menu Select this check box and specify how many seconds of unprocessed audio will be pl
378. io is 96 dB while in 8 bit audio its 48 dB However in practice this SNR is never achieved especially when using low end electronics Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI SCSI is a standard interface protocol for connecting devices to your computer The SCSI bus can accept up to seven devices at a time including CD ROM drives hard drives and samplers 350 APPENDIX E Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE SMPTE time code is used to synchronize time between devices The time code is calculated in hours minutes second frames where frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Frame rates for SMPTE time code are 24 25 29 97 and 30 frames per second Sound Card The sound card is the audio interface between your computer and the outside world It is responsible for converting analog signals to digital and vice versa There are many sound cards available on the market today covering the spectrum of quality and price Sound Forge software will work with any Windows compatible sound card Status Format The status format is the format by which Sound Forge software displays the time ruler and selection times These include Time Seconds Frames and all Standard SMPTE frame rates The status format is set for each sound file individually Streaming A method of data transfer in which a file is played while it is downloading Streaming technologies allow Internet users to receive data as a steady continuo
379. ion results in pitch bending effects vibrato Frequency modulation within audio band frequencies 20 Hz 20 000 Hz creates many different side band frequencies that drastically alter the timbre of the sound Frequency Modulation FM Synthesis This type of synthesis relies on the principles of Frequency Modulation The FM Synthesis tool allows you to use frequency modulation FM and additive synthesis to create complex sounds from simple waveforms In frequency modulation the frequency of a waveform the carrier is modulated by the output of another waveform the modulator to create a new waveform If the frequency of the modulator is low the carrier will be slowly detuned over time However if the frequency of the modulator is high the carrier will be modulated so quickly that many additional frequencies or sidebands are created In Sound Forge software up to four waveforms operators can be used in a variety of configurations Depending on the configuration an operator can be a carrier a modulator or a simple unmodulated waveform Frequency Spectrum The frequency spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies In audio the audible frequency range is between 20 Hz and 20 000 Hz The frequency spectrum sometimes refers to the distribution of these frequencies For example bass heavy sounds have a large frequency content in the low end 20 Hz 200 Hz of the spectrum Head Related Transfer Function HRTF Sounds ar
380. ion see Bend on page 206 Pitch Shift Changes the pitch of a selection with or without preserving the duration of the file For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Resonant Filter Restricts the range of a sound using low pass band pass or high pass filtering and then boosts and adds oscillation to the resonant frequency For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Reverb Simulates the acoustics of different environments For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Vibrato Creates periodic pitch modulation in an audio file For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Wave Hammer Acts as a classic compressor and volume maximizer For more information see What is the Wave Hammer plug in on page 221 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 41 Tools toolbar The Tools toolbar contains buttons corresponding to commands in the Tools menu Ay i Extract Audio from CD Extracts audio from CD and opens for editing For more information see Extracting audio from CDs on page 142 Burn Track at Once CD Burns the selected audio track to CD For more information see Burning track at once TAO CDs on page 284 Burn Disc at Once CD Burns a disc at once CD using the current CD layout For more information see Burning disc at once DAO CDs on page 286 Auto Region Creates regions in an audio file according to ra
381. ip When you convert files to a compressed format such as MP3 peaks that are at or near 0 dB may be clipped by the compression process You may want to consider normalizing first to reduce the possibility of clipped peaks Normalizing to a peak level of 0 9 dB is a good starting point a Choose a plug in from the Select drop down list and click the Add Effect button to add it to the end of the list The plug in dialog is displayed b Adjust the effect s settings and click the OK button For more information about an individual effect s settings click the Help button in the plug in window c Repeat steps 3a and 3b as necessary to create your effects list Perform the following actions as needed If Then You need to change an effect s preset Select the effect in the list and click the Change Preset button You need to change an effect s position inthe chain Select the effect in the list and click the Move up or Move down button USING SCRIPTING 233 4 Select the Metadata tab and type values for any metadata file information that you want to save in the output files If Then The Overwrite check box is not selected and the destination The existing information is preserved keywords however will file already includes information for a metadata item be appended The Overwrite check box is selected and the destination file The existing information is overwritten with the information already includes information fo
382. ir own coloration to the sound For best results we recommend using the test tones included on the Sound Forge application disc Recovering the impulse After you have recorded your test tones they must be processed and converted into impulse responses The following sections describe the typical impulse recovery procedure Trimming the test tone 1 Open your test tone file the room processed output test tone in the software 2 Locate the first timing spike and delete all audio before it Cut as close to the beginning of the timing spike as possible but do not delete the spike itself 3 Locate the second timing spike and delete all data from the start of the second spike to the end of the file Again cut as close to the start of the timing spike as possible You should now have an audio file with a spike at the beginning a test tone and silence 4 Save the test tone file USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 215 Naming configuring and recovering the impulse 1 From the Effects menu choose Acoustic Mirror The Acoustic Mirror dialog is displayed 2 Click the Recover tab Sony Acoustic Mirror Funky saxophone riff Preset Untitled Ox This page is used to create your own impulse file from a test tone that you have recorded and _ saved to a sound file It does not affect processing of normal sound files Preview Recorded file Browse m Bypass Test file used accel X R
383. ired position The pointer displays as a multi directional arrow and the selected points move together 4 Release the mouse button The entire envelope graph adjusts 100 To DI 6 Reposition multiple envelope points Changing the fade curve between two points To change the type of fade between two envelope points right click an envelope segment and choose a fade type Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade and Hold from the shortcut menu Selecting or clearing all envelope points Press Ctrl A to select or clear all envelope points Adding an envelope point 1 Hover over the envelope Place the pointer on the envelope and 50 double click to add a point 2 Double click the mouse A point is added to the envelope graph and can be positioned as needed For more information see Moving an envelope point on page 50 Deleting an envelope point Right click the point to be deleted and choose Delete from the shortcut menu The point is deleted and the envelope adjusts 50 CHAPTER 2 Delete all points Delete all envelope points by clicking the Reset Envelope button Displaying the waveform on an envelope graph Certain envelope graphs such as in the Graphic Fade dialog allow you to view the audio waveform on the graph If the selection is small the waveform is automatically displayed Otherwise selecting an option from the Show wave drop down list displays the waveform Displaying multichann
384. is displayed at the bottom of the data window You can cancel the operation at any time by clicking the Cancel button to the left of the progress meter or you can press the Escape key Saving effect settings as a custom preset After you have adjusted the parameters in the effect dialog you may want to save your settings as a custom preset for later use You can select the preset from the Preset drop down list to apply the same settings at a later time 1 Adjust the parameters in the effect dialog to achieve the effect you want 2 Click the Save Preset button The Save Preset dialog is displayed 3 Enter anew preset name and click OK The new preset is added to the Preset drop down list Using the Plug In Chainer The Plug In Chainer allows you to create a chain of 32 DirectX and VST plug ins You can preview each plug in in the chain simultaneously in real time as long as your computer has adequate processing power You can switch between the Plug In Chainer window and data windows without leaving the Plug In Chainer This means you can change your selection in the data window or even switch to another data window all without closing the Plug In Chainer window Because the Plug In Chainer offers these advanced features you may want to use the chainer to create a single effect chain instead of applying an effect from the Effects or FX Favorites menu For more information see Adding effects on page 191 Note The Process Selection
385. isplay window settings To display the Time Display window choose Time Display from the View menu Tip Right click the Time Display window and choose an option from the shortcut menu Option Description Position When selected the Time Display window shows the position of the edit or play cursor The format of the display will depend on the Status Format setting For more information see Selecting status formats on page 78 Sync Trigger Status When selected the Time Display window shows incoming MIDI timecode and trigger signals Note The current MIDI Input port is set on the MIDI Sync tab of the Preferences dialog Playlist Position When selected the Time Display window shows the position of the cursor relative to the beginning of the playlist during playback from the Playlist window The format of the display will depend on the Status Format setting For more information see Selecting status formats on page 78 CD Track Position When selected the Time Display window shows disc at once CD track numbers In this mode the Time Display will show track numbers and the running time for each track Negative values indicate the pause time before a track Time Display 03 00 00 52 Passive Update When selected the Time Display window will be updated only when the processor is idle Use this when using a slow computer to prevent the audio from glitching The smallest increments may not be exact but the major time increments will b
386. it Pause Time Changes the pause time display to an edit box where you can type a new value 292 CHAPTER 20 Drag either end of the track to adjust the track s starting or ending position The pause time between tracks is displayed in a ToolTip a 100 Unnamed Things Track 1 Shine Track 2 Play 00 03 30 933 2 000 EREA jain lt j Tes Ki gt i E gt ef Rate 0 00 or 00 07 01 360 00 04 42 866 1 53 791 The Pause column in the Track List window allows you to edit the pause time between tracks Type a new value in the box and tracks will move accordingly in the timeline m 00 03 30 933 00 03 30 933 Shine The Dorothy Heralds 1 00 03 32 933 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 426 Play The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 D 1 00 07 03 360 00 11 45 225 00 04 42 866 One of These Days The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 D BURNING CDS 293 Using the Track List window From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Track List from the submenu to toggle the display of the Track List window Track List 00 00 00 000 1 00 03 32 933 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 426 Play The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 1 00 07 03 360 00 11 45 225 00 04 42 866 One of These Days The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 The Track List window is essentially a text representation of the events on the CD layout bar for a disc at once CD You can use the Track List window to view track and in
387. ith MIDI SMPTE 0 cece eee e cece eee e eee e teen eeeeees 247 Wet iS Vs cae ates boas boss eo4s e oa eee be oa eae es ane aan dae nae ew a AR 247 WUC GEIS caurasnawen cases E E E aul e anew aeewendene uae ET 247 Playback versus triggered playback ccc c ccc ccc cece een eee eee e eee eee eeeeenaes 247 Triggering file playback ccc ccc cece cence eee nee e eee e nents eee eeeeennnes 247 Triggering region playback ccc cece cc cece eee eee e eect e eee e seen nett eeeeenees 249 Triggering playback from additional internal external MIDI devices cence eee 250 Advantages of external MIDI controllers 0 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeenes 250 Sound Forge software and MIDI timecode synchronization 0cee ee ee ees 251 Playing regions using MTC from a sequencer 1 cece cece cence eee ene teen ee teeeeees 251 Playing regions using MTC from an external device ccc ccc eect e nee ee eeennes 252 Using Sound Forge software to generate MTC for a MIDI sequencer 0 0 e cee ee ees 252 Using Sound Forge software to generate MTC for an external device 00 e eee ee 253 12 TABLE OF CONTENTS OODS 4 654 anes hone vee oa eut oa meee E sana ouesoeadheseus See un tee4sesausewes 255 Sustaining and release OOPS cece eee eee eee eee eee e eee nee eeeeeees 255 Creating a sustaining LOOP ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
388. itioning i V Enhanced timestretch and pitch shifting with the lastique Timestretch plug Basic Editing in Event Based Editing Ws Support for processing musical instrument files dls sf2 gig D Markers Regions and Commall Wf The Global media cache setting on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog Editing with the Playlist Cutlist allows you to reserve RAM for media recently read from or written to disk Applying Processes and Effects WV Metadata windows Repairing Glitches Clicks and W Floating window docks Scripting V Enhanced window layout management save recall and share custom SPES window layouts Y Vv Tabbed browsing for maximized data windows Sampling Y v Y v 4 mW gt You can now set default fade types for effects on the Editing tab in the Preferences dialog Description Information pane Provides a list of available help topics Click a closed book w to open the pages and then click on a topic page Provides a complete listing of the help topics available Scroll through the list of available topics or type a word in the Type in the keyword to find box to quickly locate topics related to that word Select the topic and click the Display button to view it Allows you to enter a keyword and display all of the topics in the online help that contain the keyword you have entered Type a keyword in the Type in the word s to search for box and click the List Topics but
389. ject needs and working preferences Many of the settings depend on your equipment or studio setup Sound Forge Pro software can be set to work with the components that you use in your studio Saving and recalling window layouts A window layout stores the sizes and positions of all windows and floating docks in the Sound Forge Pro workspace You can store any number of window layouts on your computer and up to ten window layouts are available in the View menu and via keyboard shortcuts so you can quickly recall frequently used layouts For example you could have a layout dedicated to disc at once creation and another for ADR work Note Window layouts are saved in the folders listed below You can transfer layouts between computers by copying the ForgeWindowLayout files In Windows XP C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 In Windows Vista C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 Loading default window layouts Sound Forge software comes with three built in window layouts a default layout a layout optimized for Red Book CD authoring work and a layout optimized for 5 1 video work To load these layouts choose Window Layouts from the View menu and then choose Default Red Book Authoring or 5 1 Video from the submenu You can also use the following keyboard shortcuts to load these layouts Layout Keyboard shortcut Default Alt Shift D D Red Book Authorin
390. k and RMS scans on the audio and displays the RMS level and the highest peak level detected When previewing a normalize effect the entire file must be scanned to preview even a small selection Clicking Scan Levels saves the current Peak and RMS values and allows you to preview different Normalize to settings without re scanning the entire file _scantevels Current Peak and RMS levels Peak 0 1dB RMS 17 4dB An asterisk adjacent to a level value indicates that the value is not current This occurs when the selection is updated or the dialog is initially opened To update values click Scan Levels Scantevels Noncurrent Peak and RMS levels Peak 0 1dB RMS 16 0 dB If values have never been calculated two dashes display Click Scan Levels to calculate values Scanteves Nonexistent Peak and RMS levels Peak RMS ma Note f the RMS level never reaches the Ignore below threshold a value of 96 dB displays If this occurs decrease the Ignore below threshold level and rescan The If clipping occurs drop down list is used to specify how the normalize function handles clipping that may occur when an audio file is processed using the RMS option This list provides four options Apply dynamic compression Audio peaks that will result in clipping are limited below 0 dB using non zero attack and release times to minimize distortion This mode is useful for getting loud and clear audio during mastering e Normalize pea
391. k or recording Prefix Type a prefix in the box if you want Sound Forge to assign a name to new markers when you insert a marker during playback or recording Clear the box if you do not want to include a prefix if you want to number markers only for example Use counter and start at Select this check box and type a number in the box if you want Sound Forge to number new markers when you insert a marker during playback or recording Insert leading zeros in field Select this check box and specify a field width if you want to use leading zeros in width of marker names when you insert a marker during playback or recording For example if you specify a field width of 3 markers numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 4 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Changing the marker position You can change a market s position by dragging it to a new location or by updating its position to the current cursor location You can also enter precise values to move a marker to a specific location Changing the marker position using drag and drop 1 Drag the marker tag F to a new position on the data window ruler 2 Release the mouse button The marker is dropped at its new location Note Markers will snap to other markers regions and command markers Hold Shift while dragging to override snapping Updating the marker position to the current cursor location 1 Place the cursor where you want to update the marker position to 2
392. k value to 0 dB The selection s peak amplitude level is normalized to 0 dB thereby allowing the maximum possible constant gain without clipping the selection However less gain is applied than would be necessary to achieve the Normalize to RMS level e Ignore saturate Audio is permitted to clip and distort e Stop processing Audio peaks that will result in clipping force the normalize function to cease processing and alert you that clipping will occur at the current level Note When normalizing multichannel audio normalization is computed on the loudest sample value found in a channel and identical gain is applied to all channels If a single channel is selected in a multichannel file normalization processes only that channel When you select the Use current scan level check box the current scan levels are used without initiating a new scan This is useful when applying scan levels from a different selection or file to the current selection thereby allowing identical gains to be applied to multiple files This option can also be used to scan a selection of an audio file containing the loudest or most constant levels and then apply that scan to normalize the entire file Pan Expand Pan Expand allows you to create panning effects and stereo compression expansion in selections Creating a pan A pan is used to control the apparent position of a sound between the left and right channels of a stereo file 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2
393. kle Removal Delete Ex Clipped Peak Restoration iH Distortion New Folder e Dither Refresh Hy ExpressFX Amplitude Modulation Up One Level Hiv ExpressFX Audio Restoration Hy ExpressFX Chorus Hy ExpressFX Delay Ei ExpressFX Distortion m Automatable idi Packaged Chains B FX Favorites 4 Applying a plug in or chain to a media file You can add a plug in to a chain in the Plug In Chainer by dragging an effect from the Plug In Manager window Plug In Manager di Sony ifi Amplitude Modulation 4 Audio Restoration fh Chorus Hy Click and Crackle Removal Ex Clipped Peak Restoration efi Distortion Hy Dither Ei ExpressFX Amplitude Modulation Hy ExpressFX Audio Restoration Hy ExpressFX Chorus His ExpressFX Delay Hy ExpressFX Distortion di Automatable di Fackaged Chains a FX Favorites F 1 From the View menu choose Plug In Manager The Plug In Manager window is displayed WORKING WITH EFFECTS 197 2 Select the data you want to process If no data is selected processing will be applied to the entire file Note When you re working with multichannel files only the selected region in the selected channel is processed Most functions can be applied to individual or all channels However since all channels in a multichannel file must be equal in length functions that affect the length of the data cannot be performed on individual channels These functions includ
394. l The right channel is set to silence Right Channel The mono data is placed in the right channel The left channel is set to silence Both Channels The mono data is copied into both channels Converting from stereo to mono Open the Saxriff pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application Right click the Channels status box indicating Stereo and choose Mono from the shortcut menu The Stereo To Mono dialog appears Stereo To Mono Funky sax ome Left Channel eS Cancel Right Channel aa Mix Channels Select the Mix Channels radio button and click OK The left and right channels combine into a mono channel For more information see Specifying the audio source on page 106 CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 105 Specifying the audio source The Source radio buttons in the Stereo To Mono dialog allow you to specify what stereo data is used to create the mono file The following table describes the available data sources Source Description Left Channel Mono data is taken only from the left channel of the stereo file Right Channel Mono data is taken only from the right channel of the stereo file Mix Channels Mono data is created by mixing both channels of the stereo file Using the Channel Converter You can also use the Channel Converter to convert files between mono and multichannel formats Using the Channel Converter provides the added flexibility of independent level settings for ea
395. l Time Monitoring button 276 CHAPTER 19 Viewing multiple spectrum graphs Once you create a selection in the data window you can display up to 64 individual spectrum graphs each representing a specific point in time 1 Open an audio file 2 From the View menu choose Spectrum Analysis The Spectrum Analysis window appears 3 Click the Settings button The Spectrum Settings dialog appears For more information see Adjusting Spectrum Analysis settings on page 281 4 Typeanumber in the Slices displayed box The Forward and Backward radio buttons activate 5 Select either the Forward or Backward radio button Selecting the Forward radio button displays the first slice of the selection in the foreground of the spectrum graph e Selecting the Backward radio button displays the last slice of the selection in the foreground of the spectrum graph 6 Click OK 7 Use the Slice slider to add or remove slice graphs in the Spectrum Analysis dialog Spectrum Analysis 2 048 Blackman Harris Gx A a is EM 123 4 46 amp Mono rn Da d d L h ip N Athan TE Use the Slice slider ut to add or remove slice graphs Frequency Hz Decibels dB FFT Bin Peak Creating and comparing snapshots of the Spectrum Analysis window You can store up to four snapshots to compare multiple spectrum graphs You can take snapshots from a single data window or from different da
396. l monitor device Details If project format is invalid for DV output conform to the following Sync offset frames VST Effects tab Description Choose a device from the drop down list to configure an IEEE 1394 device for use with an external monitor Sound Forge will send your video output to this device when you click the External Monitor button in the Video Preview window More information on this device are displayed in the Details pane You can make additional preview playback adjustments near the bottom of the Video tab once you ve selected an external monitor device e If necessary you can adjust the video to display properly on your external monitor Choose the desired format from the drop down list e If audio and video do not play back in synchronization drag the Sync offset slider to specify a frame offset to restore synchronization Displays information about the device selected in the External monitor drop down list If your source media does not conform to DV standards choose a setting from the drop down list The video is adjusted to display properly on your external monitor If your audio is not synchronized with your external monitor you can configure an offset for your hardware Drag the slider to synchronize audio and video This setting affects synchronization for previewing on an external monitor Audio and video synchronization in the Sound Forge workspace is not affected The VST Effects tab al
397. l until it has the same apparent loudness as a 0 dB square wave This results in all the dynamic range of the signal being flattened and all peaks being either clipped or seriously compressed Note As a rule normalizing using Peak levels to 0 dB is acceptable but normalizing using Average RMS level to anything above 6 dB is not recommended Determines the level of audio data included in the RMS calculation Data below the threshold is ignored effectively eliminating silent sections from RMS calculation The Ignore below fader should be set a few dB above perceived silence If Ignore below is set to Inf all audio data is used However if the value is set too high above 10 dB the RMS value may never rise above the threshold In this case normalization cannot occur For this reason you should evaluate the threshold by clicking the Scan Levels button Determines how quickly the scan responds to transient peaks Determines how quickly the scan should stop using transient peak material after it begins to drop in level Slower release times result in more data being included in RMS calculation Allows the scan to compensate for the Fletcher Munson Equal Loudness Contours The Fletcher Munson Equal Loudness Contours illustrate that very low and high frequency audio is less perceptible to the human ear than mid range audio Therefore selecting this option forces the scan to factor this into RMS calculation Clicking Scan Levels initiates Pea
398. lacing glitches 152 replicating audio 146 regions in Playlist 129 Resample button 40 Resample process 186 187 resampling downsampling 187 upsampling 187 resetting clipping indicators 45 default keyboard map 320 envelopes 51 fader values 49 slider values 49 Resonant Filter effect 41 207 restoring selections 92 Reverb effect 41 208 Reverse process 40 189 Rewind button 34 37 RMS Root Mean Sqaure level 63 rotating audio 40 264 routing channels to hardware outputs 46 110 sample files 17 sample rate changing 101 for CD burning 283 Sampler Loops window 28 Sampler tool 42 236 Samples button 38 sampling configuring Sampler Tool 236 external samplers 235 internal samplers 235 MIDI keyboard 243 244 open loop vs closed loop 237 Sample Dump Standard SDS 245 Sampler tool 236 saving sampler configurations 238 SCSI SMDI hardware and setup 245 sending and receiving samples 238 unsupported internal samplers 235 Save All command 67 Save As dialog 36 65 66 Save button 36 saving all open files 67 custom templates 67 Cutlist files 131 files 65 loop points 265 metadata with files 107 Playlist files 131 project paths in rendered files 69 saving continued projects 68 Regions List to file 127 sampler configurations 238 summary information 107 video files 272 workspaces 68 Scott Studios commands 119 script commands 118 Script Editor button 43 scripting ad
399. laying at optimum volume set the levels on the recording device Recording devices levels should also be set as high as possible but not permitted to clip or distort Safe levels are determined by whether you are recording to an analog or digital medium Recording the test tone Begin recording on the recording device and begin playback of the test tone Remember to include the spikes at the beginning and end of the test tone Record the test tone several times using the initial setup then move the microphones and record the test tones several more times Continue moving the microphones and recording until you have exhausted the space s acoustic possibilities Recording impulses in this manner provides you with several distinct impulses for each space Recording the impulse through an electronic device The recording process is similar if you are recording the output of an electronic device but there are no speakers or microphones to be placed Using the appropriate cables connect the playback system s outputs to the electronic device s inputs and the electronic device s outputs to the recording system s inputs Once the devices are connected play the test tone through the electronic device and record its output on the recording system Other impulses Any number of methods can be used to create an impulse including starter pistols clap boards or even a sharp hand clap The drawback of these impulse generators is that they add the
400. ld be played Click the down arrow to choose a new setting If you choose Custom you can type a new value Displays the start of the release loop You can double click the value to edit it Displays the end of the release loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the end will automatically update the Release length value Displays the length of the release loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the length will automatically update the Release end value Indicates how many times the release loop should be played Click the down arrow to choose a new setting If you choose Custom you can type a new value For example if you set the Sustain count to 3 and the Release count to 2 the sustain loop would be played 3 times and then the release loop would be played twice The MMA manufacturer code for the target device If the sample is not intended for a specific manufacturer set the value to 0 For more information see http www midi org techspecs manid php The sampler that created the sample Click the down arrow and choose a sample period from the drop down list or choose Custom to type a value in the edit box to set the duration of each sample in nanoseconds Indicates the MIDI note that will cause a sampler to play the sound file at the pitch sample rate it was originally recorded Click the down arrow to choose a new unity note and octave Allows you to pitch shift
401. le to accept MIDI commands on any channel Troubleshooting the MIDI keyboard If after configuration the keyboard fails to produce sound check the following items e Verify that the output velocity of the keyboard is set to a value greater than 100 e Verify that the MIDI input channel in the sound module is set to the same channel as the keyboard e Verify that the device is configured to receive MIDI input e Verify the device output volume level e Verify external MIDI connections if applicable SAMPLING 243 Specifying instruments 1 Choose Send Program Changes from the MIDI Out button 2 menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate that this option is turned on If this option is turned off patches cannot be switched 2 From the Voice drop down list choose the new voice and click any key Note Patch names are arranged as specified in the General MIDI Standard For synthesizers not using the General MIDI convention use the patch number instead of the instrument name Generating chords You can also generate chords instead of single notes by choosing a chord structure from the keyboard s Note Chord drop down list Chords are generated using the specified note as the root of the chord or interval 244 CHAPTER 15 Setting up MIDI SDS hardware To use MIDI SDS protocol with an external sampler that supports MIDI SDS you must install a MIDI card with MIDI input and output ports in the system
402. lection the Paste command deletes the selected data before inserting a Wow sound editing oO kE pavow Rls E vow Eiso editing just gets easier EGA a easier i amp 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 00 09 02 000 00 00 03 000 00 00 04 000 00 00 05 000 4 0 Inf 4 0 4 lt it r o kK gt E gt of Rate 0 00 neri 00 00 00 733 00 00 00 733 1 398 To confirm that the data has been pasted into the file click the Play All button Wow Wow Sound editing just gets easier and easier plays back Pasting by dragging and dropping a selection 1 2 Choose the Edit tool 4 Drag the mouse in the data window to create a selection anywhere in Voiceover pca Tip f the Always open dropped files in new window check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is cleared you can also hold Ctrl while dragging a file or region from the Explorer window to a data window to paste sound data When the check box is selected dropping a file on the Sound Forge workspace always creates a new data window Hold Ctrl and drag the selection to the location where you want to paste the data The cursor appears as a mouse pointer with the letter P g and a vertical line appears to show you where the paste will occur You can click the right mouse button while dragging to toggle mix paste and CD track drag and drop modes Tip When dragging a selection to paste sound data drag up
403. les to be embedded in files If you use the Sound Forge software to edit a file containing data created in another application Sound Forge software tracks the embedded data and places it back in the file when it is saved in its original format Saving additional embedded information To save additional embedded information choose Save As from the File menu and select the Save metadata with file check box If the file type does not support metadata you are prompted to save the metadata in an external file with an sfl extension CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 107 Removing additional embedded information To save a file without additional embedded information choose Save As from the File menu and clear the Save metadata with file check box 108 CHAPTER 5 Chapter 6 Editing Multichannel Audio With Sound Forge Pro software you can edit multichannel audio files in the same way you work with mono or stereo files Sound Forge software supports multichannel files in the following formats Dolby AC 3 ac3 AC 3 is available as a render format only Raw Audio raw Sony AVC mp4 m2ts avc Sony Wave 4 w64 Wave wav Video For Windows avi specifically DV SDI Windows Media Audio Video wma or wmv ATRAC oma Material Exchange Format mxf Note MXF files require a video stream If you want to save an audio only file to MXF format you must first attach a video stream For more information see A
404. lipboard Plays the audio on the clipboard For more information see Previewing clipboard contents on page 70 36 CHAPTER 2 ed Trim Crop Removes all data from the file that is not currently selected This command has no effect if there is no selected data This command does not copy data to the clipboard For more information see Trimming Cropping on page 74 Undo Reverses the last edit operation For more information see Using Undo and Redo on page 76 Redo Reverts the previously undone edit operation For more information see Using Undo and Redo on page 76 Save As Saves the current file with a new name or format Repeat Repeats the last operation This command can be For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog used with most processing functions The previous on page 65 operation s parameters are repeated To specify new parameters hold Shift and click this button For more information see Repeating an operation on page 147 g Render As Renders the current project file to a media file 4 Edit Tool Selects the Edit tool For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 65 Publish Opens the Publish Setup wizard so you can upload G _ Magnify Tool Selects the Magnify tool For more your media file to the Web For more information see information see Using the Magnify tool on page 89 Publishing files to the Web on page 80 Cut Removes selected audio data and places it on the
405. lity with other software applications When this check box is selected the software will ignore fact chunks in compressed WAV files Compressed WAV files use fact chunks to specify how many actual samples are represented in the file If a compressed file is improperly authored this may cause some of the compressed data to not be loaded If you suspect that not all sound data is being loaded from a compressed file try checking this option and reopening the file Tip Ifyou change the setting of this check box delete any proxy sfap0 files associated with compressed WAV files When this check box is selected the total amount of free disk space available on your specified temporary drive is displayed on the status bar Use the Temporary files and record folder box at the bottom of the General tab to set the folder that will be used for temporary files and recorded data When this check box is selected Rewind and Forward buttons will appear on each data window s transport controls Select this check box if you want to open the MIDI device assigned to the MIDI keyboard if it is not already open when you click a key on the MIDI keyboard You may want to turn off this option if you are using the same MIDI output device for MIDI synchronization or for your sequencer If this option is turned off you need to click the On button on the keyboard prior to using it to send notes When this check box is selected information from Sony will b
406. loads data for the next region to be played from the playlist Displays the current playback position of an audio file being played from the playlist Right clicking this box displays a shortcut menu that allows you to specify a new format Sync Status display Allows you to monitor the status of incoming outgoing MIDI commands Insert toolbar The Insert toolbar contains buttons corresponding to all commands located in the Insert menu S Insert Marker Inserts a marker at the cursor location For more information see Using markers on page 114 Insert Region Inserts region tags at the beginning and end of the current selection For more information see Using regions on page 120 Insert Sample Loop Inserts sustaining loop tags at the beginning and end of the current selection For more information see Creating a sustaining loop on page 255 Insert Command Inserts a command marker at the cursor location For more information see Using command markers in streaming media files on page 118 Insert CD Track Inserts a CD track using the current selection as the track length For more information see Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDs on page 286 Insert CD Index Inserts a CD index marker at the cursor location For more information see Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDs on page 286 T Insert Volume Envelope Adds a volume envelope to the active data window For more information see Adding
407. lows information to flow in both directions Using closed loop transfers the source sends data in small packets and the destination upon receiving the packet either retains the data or discards the packet and requests the data to be resent Using closed loop protocol the source does not send the next packet of data until the destination requests it This makes closed loop transfers more reliable than open loop transfers In addition to being less reliable open loop transfers are slower than closed loop transfers especially when sending samples using the Sampler Tool This is due to intentional delays placed between data packets to compensate for varying sampler speeds Closed loop transfers typically guarantee the most efficient timing between packets If possible avoid using an open loop to receive samples from a sampler The Sampler Tool cannot control the flow of data packets and there is a high probability that data will be missed Tip Open loop transfers can be useful when you do not have enough cables to connect both the MIDI input and MIDI output ports SAMPLING 237 Saving sampler configurations Once you complete a sampler configuration you can save it as a preset and quickly access it in the future 1 From the Sampler Configuration dialog click Save As The Save Preset dialog appears Save Preset OK New preset name kd Cancel 2 Enter a descriptive name in the New preset name box and click OK The new configur
408. lows you to specify where your VST plug ins are installed Item Default VST search folder Alternate VST search folder 1 Alternate VST search folder 2 Select VST effects to be available as audio plug ins 318 CHAPTER 22 Description This is the folder in which the application looks for VST effects during startup Enter a path in the edit box or click Browse to indicate where the application can find VST effects Enter a path in the edit box or click Browse to indicate where the application can find VST effects Lists the VST effects that are currently available Select a VST effect s check box to make it available for use as a plug in Note When you use a VST plug in the software will lock it for the remainder of your session A lock is displayed next to the check box to indicate that the plug in cannot be removed until you close and restart the application Customizing keyboard shortcuts From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard to customize the keyboard shortcuts available in the Sound Forge interface The Shortcut keys box displays the currently assigned shortcut keys for the selected command Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to choose which shortcuts you want to see Customize Keyboard Keyboard map Dew ooo r Save in Show commands containing Regions List Playlist Track List Script Editor Global Cursor Hide Show Cursor To Data End Data End Data Home Data Home Left By 10S5amples S
409. lp button BE in the plug in dialog Clipped Peak Restoration Rounds the tops of clipped peaks and applies peak limiting to the area immediately surrounding the audio clip For more information click the Help button e in the plug in dialog Audio Restoration Removes clicks and background noise associated with vinyl records For more information click the Help button p in the plug in dialog Crossfade Loop Mixes audio occurring before the loop start point into the end of the loop to smooth transitions For more information see Crossfading loops on page 260 Sampler Allows you to transfer samples to from the Sound Forge application For more information see Sampling on page 235 Statistics Displays statistics corresponding to the current file or selection For more information see Viewing selection statistics on page 63 Preset Manager Backs up and transfers user configured presets from effects processes and plug ins For more information see Using the Preset Manager on page 199 Batch Converter Allows you to modify and manipulate multiple audio files without having to process each file individually For more information see Using the Batch Converter on page 232 The Levels toolbar displays the audio levels in the left and right channels in the user specified format You can right click to choose the format from a shortcut menu Left channel level TF 595 Right channel level 42 CHAPTER 2 Scripting toolb
410. lume Maximizer taD cc ccacareneedeearaeues AARTEN TEINER EAEAN REA TESA 223 Ea eRe a eL e E T E EEEE bade E E E ETET 225 Se Olin TOTECO errre EE EEEE AEE TEETE EEA 225 SES E EEE A EE A EEOAE EEEE 225 Additional scripting information ccc ccc cee eee cece eee e nent ee eeneeeneeneees 225 Using the Script Editor WINdOW ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeees 226 Opening and running aSCVIPT 1 eee eee eee eee e teen eee e ee eeeeeaanes 227 Running a script from the Script Editor WINGOW cece ccc eee nett eee eenenes 227 Running a script from the Scripting MENU ccc eee cece eee eee e eee een eenees 227 Running a script from the command line cece eect eee e een ennees 227 SCID U CMGI GS 22 eee arc ence noteg ra len einai owas eh aera ec E EAAS EAER 228 Adding scripts to the Scripting Menu ccc ccc eee cece e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeenes 228 Gran arses cs pe eenee Wadden sec eue tees carers ire es E EN went ences 229 Editing ali EXISTING SCDE 460csdendudav sue dotrandiwand ed o8ahs sawed enous hewen ew A 229 Using the Scripting toolbar ccc ccc cc cc cee cee eee eee eeeeeeeeees 230 Adding or removing toolbar buttons ccc cee eee cece eee e eee e seen eeeeeanes 230 Creating custom DUTTON IMAGES cece eee eee ee ee eee e eens eens ee eeeeeeeeeeaes 231 RUNNING AES IDE ousecorcweuade ewe cawieset ay sa ends atau ETE EENE ews aera AA TEENE 231 Using the Batch C
411. ly change the dynamics of a song This technique is possible because the tail of processed audio is automatically mixed with the adjacent unprocessed audio Adding realistic stereo to mono recordings You can give mono recordings realistic stereo characteristics by selecting the Convert mono to stereo check box in the General tab of the Acoustic Mirror dialog when applying the specified impulse file The stereo image produced using this method is virtually indistinguishable from an actual stereo recording If you choose to use the Acoustic Mirror effect for stereo simulation you may find the output too reverberant If this is the case decrease the Apply envelope and limit decay value Frequently setting this value to as little as 0 1 seconds provides stereo realism without adding a distracting amount of reverb Creating special effects Processing an audio file using a non impulse WAV file can produce any number of unexpected and interesting special effects To demonstrate this concept create several short less than 12 seconds audio files using the FM Synthesis tool and save them as individual WAV files Now choose any of these files from the Impulse drop down list and preview the results We have included several short files on the Sound Forge application disc to allow you to experiment with this technique After some experimentation you should begin to notice a few general rules regarding this use of the tool e Impulse files that cover the
412. menting with different locations and repositioning the start and end points you can create seamless loops You can also configure the zero crossing finders to locate positive slope crossings negative slope crossings or all zero crossings Configuring the zero crossing finders 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Click the Editing tab 3 From the Snap to zero crossing slope drop down list choose the desired slope and click OK Fine tuning loop points You can use the Loop Tuner to fine tune loop points in three ways e To move loop points by small amounts use the Loop Start Position and Loop End Position arrow spinners Clicking the up or down arrow increments the loop point by one sample e To move loop points by larger amounts use the mouse to drag the spinner up or down e To move loop points by very large amounts use the mouse to drag the ruler at the top of the Loop Start or Loop End display Click the arrow spinners to Drag the ruler to move move by one sample by large amounts 80 896 E 59 648 00 00 02 705 00 00 03 668 00 00 00 963 OOO CO OA CTE 0 POS di e I ane LOOPING 259 Locking loop length The Lock Loop Length button allows you to freely move the start and end points of a loop without altering its length When the button is selected any editing that moves a loop point affects both loop points thereby keeping the loop length constant Clicking the
413. mpiled as DLLs Scripting references Sample scripts You can find the most recent scripting API application programming interface and sample scripts on our Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com download devkits Additional scripting information For additional information about scripting we encourage you to check out the Sound Forge scripting forum on our Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com forums showtopics asp forumid 27 USING SCRIPTING 225 Using the Script Editor window From the View menu choose Script Editor to display the Script Editor window You can use the Script Editor window to open run create or edit scripts Script Editor E Untitled Ln 1 Col 1 Script Args Bb B g E Script area Splitter panel Output area e Script area Displays the current scripts written code e Output area Displays text results for the current script e Splitter panel Allows you to adjust the size of the output area window by dragging it up or down The Script Editor toolbar is displayed by default when you open the Script Editor window 5 Open Opens the Open Script dialog New Script Template Opens a basic C JScript or VBScript template needed to write a script Save Saves the current script DEP Run Script Runs the current script Ea Save As Saves the current files with a new 2 Compile Script Compiles and tests your name or format script 226 CHAPTER 14 Opening and running a
414. mple transfers Internal samplers Internal samplers are cards installed in your system that unlike typical sound cards actually allow sounds to be downloaded into memory and played at varying pitches to simulate a musical instrument Using an unsupported internal sampler If you have an internal sampler not directly supported by the Sampler Tool you have two options e Use the MIDI SDS transfer protocol Usean open loop transfer Note f you have a Windows compatible internal sampler contact the manufacturer about supporting SDS in Windows drivers SAMPLING 235 Configuring the Sampler Tool Configuring the Sampler Tool is fairly straightforward especially if the desired configuration exists in the list of presets 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog appears Configuration Untitled Close Send Sample gt Logical send receive sample number 0 to 16 383 0 l Get Sample Actual send receive sample number D Configure Sampler SMDI or SDS capable sampler Channel 1 Send Request Output Input MIDI unity note C5 60 Fine tune cents 0 000 2 From the Configuration drop down list choose the desired configuration If the desired configuration is not listed you must create it in the Sampler Configuration dialog For more information see Creating a sampler configuration on page 236 3 Enter a value in the Logical send receive sample number box This value d
415. mpo 122 creating CD tracks from 288 creating from markers 116 deleting 124 deleting all 124 INDEX xi regions continued deleting all within a selection 116 124 editing default names 311 extracting to new files 125 inserting based on marker position 123 inserting based on musical time intervals 122 inserting based on rapid sound attacks 122 inserting using drag and drop 121 inserting using keyboard 121 inserting using menu commands 120 inserting using time ruler shortcut 121 inserting while recording 121 locking lengths 125 moving 124 naming 123 playback using MTC 251 252 previewing 124 renaming 123 selecting 123 splitting 124 triggering using MIDI commands 125 Regions List benefits of using 113 changing region order 126 copying to clipboard 127 opening Regions List files 127 overview 26 saving to file 127 viewing 126 Regions List button 39 Regions List files opening 127 saving 127 Regions Playlist toolbar 39 release loops creating 256 defined 255 renaming effects plug ins 198 markers 114 regions 123 Render As dialog 36 65 66 rendering creating custom settings 67 saving project path 69 reordering CD tracks 291 294 repairing audio Audio Restoration plug in 153 copying the other channel 151 interpolating audio 151 replacing with preceding audio 152 using Pencil tool 152 Repeat button 36 repeating an operation 147 Replace button 42 xii INDEX rep
416. mpression that is applied When compressing in Peak mode the compressor applies compression where it detects audio signal peaks that surpass the threshold However when compressing using RMS mode the compressor processes the audio using the detected average RMS value of the entire file The Root Mean Square RMS of audio is a measure of its intensity over a period of time Therefore the RMS level of audio corresponds to the loudness perceived by a listener when measured over small intervals of time As a result rapid transient peaks may not be processed when compressing in RMS mode When you select the Auto gain compensate check box the compressor output is boosted by a constant amount derived from the Threshold and Ratio settings This option prevents a loss in overall level when compressing audio Tip When using the Auto gain compensate option the Output gain fader should be used to fine tune the signal output level When you select the Use longer look ahead check box the compressor scans farther ahead in the incoming audio to determine how much compression is needed This results in compression being applied before the threshold surpassing audio actually occurs thereby allowing for a slower Attack time value However the pre compression effect fades that occur prior to attacks of this option may be distracting Selecting the Smooth saturation check box lowers the amount of distortion caused when applying heavy compression When
417. n d Hv Gapper Snipper Select the desired plug ins Click Add The selected plug ins are added to the chain and can be configured and arranged as needed Tip You can also double click a plug in to add it to the chain WORKING WITH EFFECTS 193 Removing a plug in from a chain To remove a specific plug in from a chain select it and click the Remove Selected Plug In button The plug in is removed and the remaining plug ins are adjusted Tip You can also remove plug ins by performing one of the following actions e Press Ctrl Tab to select the next plug in or Ctrl Shift Tab to select the previous plug in and then press Ctrl Delete to remove the selected plug in from the chain Right click a plug in in the chain and choosing Remove from the shortcut menu You can arrange the order of plug ins in the chain in either the Plug In Chainer or the Plug In Chooser Note The order of plug ins in a chain can have a dramatic effect on the final product of audio signal processing Arranging plug in order in the Plug In Chainer In the Plug In Chainer window drag an effect to a new location in the chain Plug In Chainer Plug In Chainer Untitled HX gt igi iv ali Untitled HX gt ig ik q B detMiodulation Distortion Dither o o Distortion Dither _ Amplitude Modulation Jo Drag a plug in in the Plug In Chainer to a new location in the chain
418. n normal increments without changing the envelope points horizontal positions Hold Alt while dragging an envelope point to move the point s horizontal position without changing its value With the Envelope tool you can drag horizontally to select multiple envelope points in the selected data window Adding envelope points To create more complex envelopes you will need to add points To add an envelope point double click the envelope You can then drag and position the point as necessary To delete a point right click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Flipping an envelope You can flip an envelope to invert the envelope around its center Volume panning and effect automation envelopes can be flipped Flipping all points 1 Right click an envelope or a point A shortcut menu is displayed 2 Choose Flip All Points from the shortcut menu Flipping selected points 1 Create atime selection with the Envelope tool to select the points you want to flip 2 Right click an envelope in the time selection A shortcut menu is displayed 3 Choose Flip Selected Points from the shortcut menu Setting fade properties You can adjust the fade curve for each envelope segment individually To change the fade curve right click an envelope segment and choose a fade command such as Linear Fade or Fast Fade for example from the shortcut menu Cutting copying and pasting envelope points 1 Select the Envelope tool
419. n take advantage of using drag and drop operations to perform many common tasks Drag and drop operations make controlling the Sound Forge software faster and more intuitive and allow for increased editing power The major drag and drop editing operations are paste mix and create CD tracks Dragging mono selections into multichannel destinations When pasting or mixing a mono selection into a multichannel file you can mix the selection to both channels by dropping it on the destination data window s center line Otherwise the selection is mixed into the left or right channel exclusively Snapping to points in drag and drop operations A major advantage of drag and drop editing is the ability to snap to markers regions time increments or other points in the destination window All drag and drop operations can be configured to snap or align to points established within the destination file The following table describes all points that drag and drop selections snap to in the destination file Points Description Cursor Start of block snaps to cursor position Selection Start of block snaps to start or end points of a selection Start Start of block snaps to start of file End Start of block snaps to end of file EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 147 Points Markers Regions Start and End Markers Time Measures etc Video Frames Events Description Start of block snaps to marker Start of block snaps to region st
420. nalog out amp H O O H O t c i gt e Click OK to close the Preferences dialog and save your changes 3 Click the Record button on the transport bar or press Ctrl R The Record dialog is displayed Title bar Record to new window Recording attributes H Recording attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Stereo New Close Recording method Method Normal Remote H Remote recording Recording mode Mode Automatic retake automatically rewind hi Selection Set selection 00 00 00 000 Window Set recording Channels Both destination window Lt Channel selection Punch in spinners Transport bar Am W 4 H Recordin g time Time recorded 00 00 00 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Click to view meters and meter reset 4 Meters Advanced Pre post roll Prerecording buffer MTC SMPTE sync settings Input monitoring DC adjust 134 CHAPTER 8 10 11 From the Method drop down list choose Normal Choose the destination data window for your recording By default the application records into the active data window If this is not where you want to record use one of the following methods to prepare for recording If Then You want to record into a Click the Window button and choose a data window from the Record different data window destination window drop down list Click OK to return to the Record dialog You want to record into a
421. nd Each sample is really only a number that contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time e A sound that has been recorded in a digital format used by musicians who make short recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music or sound effects These recordings are called samples In this Help system we try to use sound file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording e The act of recording sound digitally i e to sample an instrument means to digitize and store it Sample Dump A sample dump is the process of transferring sample data between music equipment Because of the large amounts of data required to store digital sound sample dumps may take a very long time when using the MIDI Sample Dump Standard SDS However when using the faster SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI protocol sample dumps can be performed many times faster Sample Dump Standard SDS The MIDI Sample Dump Standard is a way to transfer samples between music equipment Samples transferred with SDS are sent across MIDI cables at the MIDI data rate of 31 250 Hz baud SMDI is a much faster sample transfer method for musicians Sample Rate The Sample Rate also referred to as the Sampling Rate or Sampling Frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz provide higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz However more storage space
422. nd quickly pressing and releasing the right mouse button Right clicking is frequently used to display shortcut menus Identical to clicking but instead of pressing and releasing the mouse button once it is done twice in quick succession Double clicking always indicates the left mouse button Identical to clicking but instead of pressing and releasing the mouse button once it is done three times in quick succession Triple clicking always indicates the left mouse button Clicking the right mouse button while holding down the left mouse button This is used to toggle options and is a shortcut for drag and drop editing and using the Magnify tool Holding down the Shift key while clicking the mouse Shift clicking is typically used to skip dialogs and quickly repeat operations Holding down the Ctrl key while clicking the mouse Ctrl clicking is used to modify the operation of a normal click Holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse pointer and releasing the mouse at the desired location Dragging is used to quickly move sections of data between windows as well as to adjust sliders scrollbars and faders Holding down the right and left mouse buttons while adjusting sliders and faders increases the resolution of the movement This is useful when making fractional adjustments to parameters Tip After you are familiar with Sound Forge basics you may want to use mouse and keyboard shortcuts For more information see
423. ne eeenees 201 Removing effect automation envelopes cece ccc cee eee eee eee e eee ee eeeees 201 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 AOJUSTING CNVEIODES 5046 24050 400s ss ewe ne wes EO REEE ENE ERES 202 Addmg envelope DOIMS 64 03 0 lt 00 a0 de cnswsndwt aa seusneadieesausaredaoaaens ioweenaeiaaaets 202 Flipping AN envelope 2 6 ccc ccc eee eee ence e eee eee een eee ee eeeeeeeees 202 Setting fade Proper CS aay snp uigdacancecadamesteicecteuaiewae TA ENEA EAEG 202 Cutting copying and pasting envelope points cece cece ccc e eee e eee e ee eees 202 Copying an envelope to another data window ccc cece eee cee eee e ee eneeeees 203 Sound Forge efec a a aren caswede ie rinia eNA NTER E whee ean sites eases 203 A COUSIN OE Seran oe aie Mun ae oe ew ute au Ge em A are Maas E oie Ge a4 ewer 203 Amplitude Modulation s46244554 00ndestdastaestaeiadienseden ta uwdeseeeetectetenuaeseeessd 203 COIS cay r EEEE E EERTE AA E E oacaunneede EES A A ian anes 203 DAV ECMO aeaaea a EAEE EEEE AE E casas E EE EET 203 POT NEEE AENEAN EA ARTANA AA AENA AA AEA AEE CEDA AEE ENANA 204 Paea E E E A a E E A OT ETE E S EE T E E E ET 204 EAE 1 ear eres E I ar eo E ee ee cee oe E ee E E EE 205 Flange Wah Wah accu coendanes det cuna oeeanasceen ceed connote oust cageeieesssteeeesnquanaus 206 GdPPel SNIDDEl sarrerari ariran rE RrU ete teow rose TEENETEST 206 NOE GIO rrer e E EE E E EE EEEE E E E EA 206 PO a A A E A E E A A 206 RESON APOE aa e A E E E A E E A E
424. nesurnetunnedena E ENNE EEEE aA 43 Monitoring levels in digital AUdIO 1 ccc cece cece teen eee e eee e eee eeeneenes 43 DECIDE icsedcaacianges nes E EE E E EN E EN E E T E EE 43 Digital versus analog levels sieririiirisriririririer rd V ririt Erir TEENETE raS Eei 44 Setting digital audio levels sigurse dod osiaweweedeeessas en dade EEEE EE EEEE RETEA 44 Using the channel Meters cece cece eee eee een ee eee eee e eee ee eeeenes 44 Using the VU PPNI Meters 4 lt 256 lt 4yis cones caneanoewdesemredee essa ESEE UNEEN E 46 Using phase ScOPES guccwsctandaucsnsaecisangimaciaienasesecaewiseeessuiewsdooasaneonteenas 48 Using the mono compatibility meters sesnsnenssesesseseseseesesosoesesersereesese 48 CONTO eenen E E E EEE E EEE E OEREN E ERE EEE EA 49 Faders and Sde lt n cuoaneunen eso Er TIATIA EER EARE ES 49 ENIVEIODe DS aE AEAEE E EEIN IS AARATI AE TAAT ENESA EATA 49 Displaying the waveform on an envelope graph cece ccc eect cece eee eeeeeenes 51 WIUIPICMANNG FICS EEEE E bodasdocns eens stent TE E E 51 Working with multichannel files 2 0 0 0 0c ccc ccc cece cece eee eee e eee eee eeeeneeneees 51 Selecting data in multichannel files 0 ccc cc ccc cece cece eee eee eee e ee eeeeeeeeees 51 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Gerno Started a e a a eR E RER E E E E E E EERE 55 CREATING adOVO e E 55 ceting media TIES errrirrteirrira trine orire rE AARONO 55 Using the Open dialog osison dn ota cdedwedauatadadondi
425. new Click the New button in the Record dialog and specify the attributes sample window rate bit depth and channels for the new file Click OK to return to the Record dialog Note The maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For example if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs If you record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To route inputs to channels in the data window click a channel number and choose a new input port from the menu To determine which inputs are recorded type a value in the Channels box For example you could type 1 4 to record channels 1 through 4 or type 1 3 4 to record only channels 1 3 and 4 Choose a recording mode from the Mode drop down list For more information see Choosing a recording mode on page 139 If necessary set a start time duration or end time for your recording By default recording will begin at the current cursor position To record to a different cursor position use one of the following methods e Type anew cursor position in the Start field If you chose the Punch In recording option in the Mode drop down list you can also type values in the End or Length fields to define your recording period e Click the Go To button 23 and change the cursor position Click OK to return to the Record dialog For more inform
426. ng 278 displaying frequency and amplitude values 279 displaying notes 279 displaying statistics 279 improving contrast 280 improving frequency resolution 280 printing 280 reducing processing time 280 smoothing display 280 synchronizing for multichannel file 280 tuning 280 updating 279 SoundFont files 239 242 Spectrum Analysis See also sonograms changing graph type 276 changing spectrum graph zoom level 276 displaying frequency and amplitude values 275 displaying graph 274 displaying notes 275 displaying statistics 275 erasing snapshots 278 FFT 273 monitoring input output source 275 279 navigating graphs 276 printing graphs 278 printing sonograms 280 refreshing graphs 276 saving custom settings 282 xiv INDEX Spectrum Analysis continued settings 281 showing hiding snapshots 277 snapshots 277 synchronizing graphs for multichannel files 276 taking snapshots 277 thumbnail image 276 viewing multiple graphs 277 viewing snapshot statistics 278 window 24 splitting events 160 regions 124 Standard toolbar 36 Statistics window 42 63 Status bar command descriptions 43 editing file properties 100 status formats 78 80 Status Selection toolbar 38 step down conversion 102 step up conversion 102 stereo files compressing selections 185 converting to mono 176 creating from mono 175 expanding selections 185 swapping channels 176 stereo to mono conversion 105 See also mono to st
427. ng of the file End of file Inserts silence at the end of the file 4 Click the OK button Invert Flip The Invert Flip command inverts the audio selection at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity Inverting a file while creating no audible difference is occasionally useful for matching sample transitions when executing certain pastes mixes or loops 1 Create a selection in the data window 2 From the Process menu choose Invert Flip The selection is inverted PROCESSING AUDIO 181 Mute The Mute command forces the selection to a volume of Inf dB silence Muting an audio selection 1 Create a selection in the data window E Example music bed oo E __ amp E 00 00 00 A T D002 DO 00 04 DO 00 08 6 0 aie fu Heese o 2 WB Example music bed L amp E ODM Wia fu Hy oe Tee 00 00 00 000 182 CHAPTER 11 Normalize The Normalize command maximizes the overall volume of a file without introducing clipping When you normalize a file the entire file is scanned and a constant gain is applied to raise the file s level to a specified value Normalizing audio 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Normalize The Normalize dialog is displayed Normalize Example music bed noe Preset URES JE X Normalize using Peak level C Average RMS level Joudness 100 00 Rite O01 200 DA alj O1 200 S Use
428. ng the impulse is to transfer the desired test tone to your playback device The Sound Forge application disc contains two test tones a 24 second test tone and a 48 second test tone We typically recommend that you use the 24 second tone because longer tones result in greater signal to noise ratios The 48 second tone should be used in particularly noisy environments or when the decay time of the acoustic space is greater than six seconds Tip There are spikes at the beginning and end of each test tone You should include the spikes in the recording to simplify the recovery of the impulse in the later stages of the process Placing equipment When recording the test tone in an acoustic space you must determine where to place your playback system speakers microphones and recording system to produce optimal results Microphone placement is crucial to the quality of the impulse The distance between the speakers and the microphone is the perceived distance of audio processed with the impulse you create For example if you record the test tone with the speakers positioned 100 feet from the microphones all sounds processed with the resulting impulse sound as if they are originating 100 feet from the listener 214 CHAPTER 13 Setting levels After the devices are positioned you should begin playback of the test tone The test tone should be played as loudly as possible or practical to produce the best signal to noise ratio With the test tone p
429. nt The faders in the Hardware Meters window are used to control preview volume only Ifyou want to mix channel levels use the Volume or Envelope plug in Drag to adjust the volume of the channel Double click the center of the thumb to reset the fader to 0 0 dB If the right and left channels are set differently you can double click either thumb to force the other channel to match it Click the Lock Unlock Fader Channels button to lock gang the faders so the left and right channels will always move together Click again to unlock the faders Tip Hold Shift while dragging a fader to temporarily override the current state of the Lock Unlock Fader Channels button if the button is turned off you can hold Shift to drag the faders in locked mode if the button is selected hold Shift to drag the faders independently EDITING MULTICHANNEL AUDIO 111 Showing or hiding meters You can display a peak meter VU PPM a phase scope and mono compatibility meter for each hardware output To toggle the display of each meter right click the Hardware Meters window and choose a command from the shortcut menu A check mark is displayed to indicate which meters are currently visible For more information about peak meters see Using the channel meters on page 44 For more information about VU PPM meters see Using the VU PPM meters on page 46 For more information about phase scopes see Using phase scopes on page 48 For more information about mono
430. nt for the pasted Wow and one event for the original part of the file peer era Wow 5 i Silence Wow Sound editing just gets easier And easier A 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 0 00 00 02 000 00 00 03 000 5 00 00 05 000 a 7 meal e Selected events are highlighted e Events are separated by a thin line 4 0 5 4 i ro o K gt i m f gt Rate 0 00 g 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 733 1 398 Event 1 Event 2 Moving events You can move events horizontally along the timeline by dragging them Moving an event past the end of the current file inserts time into the data window You must remove any unwanted silence when you are finished editing the file When dragging events vertically across channels you are limited to the number of channels in the current file You cannot drag an event past the top or bottom channel in a data window to create more channels in the file Events can cross channel boundaries but overlapping events must lie on the same channels Sound Forge automatically splits or merges event channels as you move events Inf Inf e J al Inf 5 a Inf 4 Crossfaded events before channel split The channels in both events are split when the first event is moved to channels 2 and 3 because overlapping events must lie on the same channels For more information on dragging channel boundaries see Dragging channel boundaries on page 160 You can also Ctrl drag event
431. ntents and Index Wave Hammer Use Wave Hammer to boost the level of an audio signal for mastering or mixing For more information see What is the Wave Hammer plug in on page 221 208 CHAPTER 12 Chapter 13 Using Acoustic Mirror and Wave Hammer This chapter is designed to familiarize you with the Sound Forge Pro Acoustic Mirror and Wave Hammer effects The Acoustic Mirror effect is a powerful digital signal processing tool that allows you to add environmental coloration to your existing recordings The Wave Hammer effect is an audio mastering tool that features a classic compressor and volume maximizer What are the Acoustic Mirror effects The Acoustic Mirror effects represents an advance in reverb technology in that it incorporates the acoustical responses of a given environment or venue into your audio files You may never play Carnegie Hall but that does not mean that your recordings can t sound like it Taking this concept even further this effect allows you to simulate the signal response of vintage musical equipment Imagine the money you ll save not having to buy those paired U 47s The acoustic signature Acoustic Mirror effects use the environment s acoustic signature or impulse response These acoustic signatures are saved as impulse files and given the extension wav or sfi An extensive library of high quality impulse files are included In addition you can collect your own acoustic signatures and crea
432. nu The Save Workspace dialog appears 2 Browse to the folder where the file will be saved 3 Type a name for the file in the File name box and click Save Opening a workspace 1 From the File menu choose Workspace and choose Open from the submenu The Open Workspace dialog appears 2 Browse to the folder containing the desired sfw file 3 Select the desired file and click Open Working with projects Projects are new to Sound Forge software however if you ve used ACID or Vegas software then you ll be quite familiar with how to use Sound Forge projects You should note that Sound Forge projects do function slightly different than ACID and Vegas projects A project file is not a multimedia file It contains pointers to the original source files so you can edit your project nondestructively without changing your source files When you edit a Sound Forge project you can undo edit operations even past your last save For more information see Using Undo and Redo on page 76 Saving projects 1 Click anywhere in the data window to activate it 2 From the File menu choose Save As to display the Save As dialog 3 Select the folder where you want to save the file from one of the following locations From the Save in drop down list choose a drive and folder e From the Recent drop down list choose a folder where you have previously saved files In the File name box type a name for the file or select a file in the browse window to r
433. nvert from mono to stereo the data will be stored in both channels When converting from stereo to mono the data from both channels will be mixed to a single channel e When determining bit rates 1K 1024 7 Ifyou want to preserve metadata such as embedded data from other applications regions markers disc at once CD tracks commands playlist and sampler information in your file select the Save metadata with file check box If the check box is not selected the data will be ignored when you save the file Note f the file type selected in the Save as type drop down list doesn t support metadata you are prompted to save the metadata in an external file with an sfl extension using the same name as your media file Metadata can be saved internally for the following file formats MP3 Windows Media Format WMA and WMV WAV WAV64 SFA PCA and Scott Studios 8 If you are saving to a format with a different aspect ratio than your source media settings then select the Stretch video to fill output frame do not letterbox check box Note When this check box is not selected black bars may appear at the top and bottom letterboxing or sides pillarboxing of the frame to preserve the aspect ratio For more information see Saving a video file on page 272 9 If you see unacceptable video artifacts in the rendered video these artifacts are most obvious with MPEG and streaming formats then clear the Fast video resizing check box
434. ny Noise Reduction DirectX Plug In uses the DirectX Media Streaming Services DMSS API Because DMSS is a standard API a DirectX plug in can be used in any application that supports DMSS Dithering Dithering is the practice of adding noise to a signal to mask quantization noise See also Quantization Noise on page 348 Drag and Drop A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse To drag and drop you click and hold a highlighted selection drag it hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen Dynamic Range The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels It can refer to a musical performance high volume vs low volume signals or to electrical equipment peak level before distortion vs noise floor Endian Little and Big Little and Big Endian describe the ordering of multi byte data that is used by a computers microprocessor Little Endian specifies that data is stored in a low to high byte format this ordering is used by the Intel microprocessors Big Endian specifies that data is stored ina high to low byte format this ordering is used by the Motorola microprocessors Equalization EQ Equalizing a sound file is a process by which certain frequency bands are raised or lowered in level Fast Fourier Transform FFT Analysis A Fourier Transform is the mathematical method used to convert a waveform from the Time Domain
435. o 151 repairing by replacing with preceding audio 152 repairing with Pencil tool 152 glossary 337 353 Go To dialog 38 81 Go to End button 34 37 Go to Next Track button 34 37 Go to Previous Track button 34 37 Go to Start button 34 37 Gracenote 57 58 Graphic Dynamics effect 41 104 204 Graphic EQ 40 178 Graphic Fade button 40 creating 178 customizing 179 dialog 179 overview 178 grid lines See Selection Grid Lines option Half Rectangular dither 173 Halve Selection button 38 halving loops 263 hard disk defragmentation 301 hardware meters adjusting output levels 111 adjusting preview levels 111 mono compatibility meters 48 overview 24 hardware meters continued phase scopes 48 viewing 111 112 VU PPM meters 46 47 hardware setup external monitor 270 MIDI SDS 245 SCSI SMDI 245 help 18 hiding effects plug ins 198 video strip 267 Highpass Triangular dither 173 HRTF impulses 218 importing keyboard shortcut maps 320 impulse files adding summary information 217 configuring 216 creating 214 equipment placement 214 equipment required for creating 214 head related transfer functions HRTF 218 naming 216 recording test tone 215 recording through electronic device 215 recovering 216 recovering from acoustic spaces 214 recovering from electronic devices 214 setting levels 215 transferring test tone 214 trimming impulse files 216 trimming test tone 215 using
436. o determine the maximum and minimum pitch change in semitones half steps Example A range of twelve half steps one octave allows an increase or decrease of the pitch by an octave 206 CHAPTER 12 3 Adjust the envelope to achieve the desired sound Drag the small envelope points up or down e Tocreate a new envelope point double click the envelope e To delete an envelope point right click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu e To change the fade curve between two points right click an envelope segment and choose a command from the shortcut menu Fade Type Fade In Out Envelope Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade Hold Loe To move all envelope points press Ctrl A and drag when the envelope has focus The cursor will be displayed as a hand d Note You can create up to 16 envelope points Click the Reset Envelope button to remove all but the outer two envelope points 4 Select the Preserve original duration check box if you do not want pitch bending to change the size of the sound file This setting works best when performing small pitch corrections up to 2 semitones 5 Click the OK button Displaying the waveform Choose a command from the Show wave drop down list if you want to display the waveform in the envelope graph If you re working with a multichannel file you can choose to view individual channels or the mixed waveform Note The waveform is unavailable when the sele
437. o have a slow attack Audio Compression Manager ACM The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft is a standard interface for audio compression and signal processing for Windows The ACM can be used by Windows programs to compress and decompress wav files See also Wave on page 352 Audio Event Locator The Audio Event Locator is similar to a scrub function However rather than playing the sound file at a slow speed it loops playback around the cursor position This position can be selected by dragging the cursor around in the Sound Forge Overview window Audio Interchange File Format AIFF An audio file format developed by Apple Computer ASX File ASF Stream Redirector file For more information see Redirector File on page 348 Attenuation A decrease in the level of a signal Bandwidth When discussing audio equalization each frequency band has a width associated with it that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ An EQ band with a wide bandwidth will affect a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth When discussing network connections bandwidth refers to the rate of signals transmitted or the amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time stated in bits second a 56 Kbps network connection is capable of receiving 56 000 bits of data per second Baseline The baseline of a waveform is also referred to as the zero amplitude axis or negative infinity In t
438. o quickly display all data in a data window right click the waveform choose Zoom and choose Out Full from the submenu This command sets the zoom ratio and zoom level to the lowest values required to display all data in the window Note Jo reverse this function go to the View menu choose Zoom Time and choose Normal from the submenu Zooming in full To quickly set the zoom factor to its maximum magnification right click the waveform and choose Zoom In Full from the shortcut menu The maximum magnification available is 24 1 Note To reverse this function right click the waveform and choose Zoom Normal from the shortcut menu Optimizing time and level ruler scaling To optimize both the time ruler and level ruler display of a selection double click the level ruler Double clicking the level ruler a second time restores both displays to their default levels Using the Magnify tool The Magnify tool provides an additional way to magnify a section of an audio file You can access the Magnify tool in three ways e From the Edit menu choose Tool and choose Magnify from the submenu e Click the Magnify Tool button amp on the Standard toolbar e Click the Edit Tool Selector in the upper left corner of the data window until the Magnify tool is selected Tip When the Allow Ctrl drag style zoom in data windows check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog you can hold Ctrl while creating a selection to
439. o raise the processed volume 1 dB A ratio of Inf 1 is considered a limiter Output gain The Output gain fader allows you to determine how much the audio signal is boosted following its compression Attack time The Attack time slider allows you to determine how soon after rising above the threshold the audio signal is attenuated Release time The Release time slider allows you to determine how soon after falling below the threshold the audio signal attenuation is interrupted USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 221 Control Smart release Scan mode Auto gain compensate Use longer look ahead Smooth saturation Input Output meter Attenuation meter 222 CHAPTER 13 Description The Smart Release slider allows you to configure the compressor to automatically increase the release time for sustained notes and decrease the release time for sharp transients Setting this value higher increases the internal variability of the specified Release value Generally louder overall audio levels can be achieved with lower Release values However low Release values can also lead to an increase in pumping artifacts Configuring a Smart Release value increases the release time during sustained sounds thereby preventing release changes from occurring too rapidly The Scan mode radio buttons allow you to specify whether Peak or RMS mode is used to determine the loudness of an audio file which in turn determines the amount of co
440. o save converted files using the same name as the original file Append to name Select this radio button and type text in the Append to name box if you want to add a descriptor to the file names of converted files The text you enter will be added to the original file name during conversion For example if your source file is C Audio DoorSlam wav the file could be saved as C Audio DoorSlam BatchConverted wav during conversion In the File Folder section select a radio button to indicate where you want to save processed files Button Description Same as source Select this radio button if you want to save converted files in the same folders as the original files Save files to Select this radio button and type a path in the edit box or click Browse in the Append to name box if you want to save all converted files in a specific folder You can select the Preserve source subfolders check box if you want to use the same folder structure in your source and converted files For example if your source file is C Audio DoorSlam wav you could specify D as your output folder and the file will be saved as D Audio DoorSlam wav during conversion Click the OK button 6 Click the Save Job button to save the updated batch job or click the Save As button to save the edited batch job with a different name 234 CHAPTER 14 Chapter 15 Sampling Used in conjunction with the Sampler Tool Sound Forge Pro software s powerful edi
441. o share your track list information with another application or with a CD replication house For more information see Creating track lists for disc at once CDs on page 295 Creating track lists for disc at once CDs If you need to share your track list information with another application or with a CD replication house you can copy the track list information to the clipboard save it to a text file or print a hard copy BURNING CDS 295 Copying track lists to the clipboard 1 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Copy Track List to Clipboard from the submenu The Copy Track List to Clipboard dialog is displayed Tip Right click the Track List window and choose Copy Track List to Clipboard from the shortcut menu Copy Track List to Clipboard Format for track list output Cue sheet for replication show absolute times CD liner notes show times relative to track 1 Indude summary information with track list output 2 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information e Cue sheet for replication The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the beginning of the CD This is the preferred format for CD replication houses CD liner notes The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the first track on the disc 3 Select the Include summary information with track list output check box if you want to include UPC MCN title engineer and comm
442. o snap events to grid divisions markers or zero crossings Snapping to the grid When snapping is enabled you can also choose to have objects snap to whole time divisions as designated by the marks on the time ruler above the data window From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Grid from the submenu to toggle snapping to grid lines Tips e To change the resolution of the grid choose Status Format from the Options menu and then choose a setting from the submenu or right click the time ruler and choose a format from the shortcut menu Jo turn snapping to the grid on and off press Ctrl F8 Snapping to markers When snapping is enabled you can also choose to have elements in the data windows snap to markers From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Markers from the submenu to toggle snapping for the following marker types Markers Regions Command markers CD tracks and index markers Sample loops Tip To turn snapping to markers on and off press Shift F8 Snapping to events When snapping is enabled and you re using the Event tool you can choose to have events snap to other events in the data window From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Events from the submenu to toggle snapping to event edges Tip To turn snapping to events on and off press Ctrl Shift F 8 94 CHAPTER 4 Snapping to zero crossings When snapping is enabled you can also choo
443. o the folder to add them to the submenu in the FX Favorites menu e Remove plug ins or folders from the FX Favorites menu by selecting the plug in or folder and clicking the Delete button x Deleting a plug in from the FX Favorites folder removes it from the FX Favorites menu but does not delete the plug in from your system 3 Close the Organize Favorites dialog The new plug ins and or submenus appear in the FX Favorites menu Tip You can also add plug ins to the FX Favorites menu using the Plug In Manager Automatically adding and organizing plug ins You can automatically add all the plug ins on your computer to your FX Favorites folder and organize them by the first word in the plug in name usually the company name This replaces any menu structure you may have created with a rebuilt FX Favorites menu 1 From the FX Favorites menu choose Recreate by Plug In Name You are prompted to confirm the reorganization of the FX Favorites folder 2 Click Yes to continue Folders are created and the plug ins are organized based on the first word in the names of the plug ins Using the Preset Manager After you have created custom presets for effects or effect chains you can use the Sound Forge Preset Manager to back up transfer or delete custom presets from any of the effects processes tools and plug ins installed in the software The Preset Manager also functions as a Standalone application meaning that you can use the Preset Mana
444. o use only a subset of the channels in a multichannel file This method is also useful for duplicating or rearranging channels without using the Channel Converter which always processes the entire file Drag the bottom edge of a multichannel event to hide one or more channels You can quickly restore contiguous channels by dragging the event edge back instead of stepping through undo operations Splitting events 1 Select the event to be split For more information see Selecting events on page 164 2 Place the cursor at the timeline position where the split will occur 3 From the Edit menu choose Event and then choose Split from the submenu or press S Note f no events are selected events across all channels are split at the cursor position Slipping events Press Alt while dragging an event The slip cursor appears As you drag the event the contents of the event shift but the event does not move You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length and position but have the event play a different section of the source audio file Tip Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping Slip trimming events Press Alt while dragging the right or left edge of an event The slip trim cursor appears 5 As you drag the event edge the media moves with the event edge Tips Press Alt Shift while dragging any portion of an event to slip trim the right edge The left edge of the event rem
445. oad 188 CHAPTER 11 Item Description Prering Low pass filters are characterized by the amount of ringing they introduce into their output Higher Steepness settings produce increased ringing A setting of 100 produces a linear phase filter with equal pre and post ringing A setting of 0 produces a minimum phase filter that offers no preringing but has nonlinear phase distortion Intermediate settings allow a tradeoff between preringing and postringing and allows you to linearize phase in the pass band Set the sample rate only do Select this check box to change the playback rate without resampling the data This not resample means that the original pitch of the file is not preserved 3 Click OK Reverse The Reverse command reverses the audio selection 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Reverse The reversed audio data displays in the data window a Example music bed o EJE a Example music bed o ese d NX Zz AJ E 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 00 00 06 00 00 08 j00 00 amp Af 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 00 00 06 00 00 08 j00 00 K gt Ee lt o gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 908 K gt Eee or 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 908 Original audio data Reversed audio Rotate Audio You can move the beginning of a loop to the end or the end of a loop to the beginning by rotating the audio For more information see Rotating audio on page 264 Smooth En
446. oasiadedwedeeutaeekeudooenaeeidaaebew oe 56 Using the Explorer WINGOW sirsissdrrres idni TE ECEN TENERNE AEE CEEE EEEN 57 POG GIES E E EE E A EAE E E EEE E 59 Working with video files ccc ccc ccc cee eee e eee eee eee en en eeeeeeeneeees 59 PAVIA aN gana caw ede pasa eas gh eves eae ese 9 Rs aed ee eee Ye eae ce 60 Viewing the current POSITION 2 0 ccc ccc cece eee tenet eee eee eee eee eee ee eennee 60 Data window scrolling during playback ccc ccc cece eee ence eee eee e eee neeeees 60 Playing a file from a specified POINT ccc cece cece nent e nent eeeeeneeeeees 61 Playing in Loop Playback mode ccc cece ccc eee eee e nent teense eeeeeees 61 Playing a selec HoN 44 41 24 20chaasduacneautn pons cadaweh rah ean wedeee TAAA E 61 VIEWING selection Status oo tduwedecdeewinauasslassocsueeilagienseeeslatueteadassarudunwiwnd 62 Viewing selection statistics 2 0 ccc ccc ccc ce eee eee eee eee eee e tees eeeeeeeeenee 63 Creating d ta WINGOWS i2335625 nc ansek eavewheveeewsesnced acs REE EEE 64 Active data windows vs inactive data WINdOWS 0 cece eee cece teen teen eee eeeeeeees 64 Copying data to a new file ccc cece eee eee eee e eee e teen eee eeenneees 64 WV ORK UING WW NCS 5c cece eases nese neces pean esses ened a EERE EEE AE 65 DAV IC AG Ganies act s n ne hac tet oa ue pee E OEE EE E ed han eee dee ee ee 65 Using the Save As Render AS dialog cc ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eee e nee eee
447. of the linear scales traditionally associated with VU meters UK PPM The UK peak program meter also known as a BBC meter is a Type II meter and is displayed with a scale of 1 to 7 which corresponds to a range of 12 to 12 dBu UK Marks dBu N WwW A U OA N o AA O A 1 12 EBU PPM The EBU peak program meter is a Type Il meter and is displayed with a scale of 12 to 12 which corresponds to 12 dBu to 12 dBu 0 on the EBU PPM equals 0 dBu The EBU PPM and UK PPM respond identically to increases in volume but the EBU PPM decays more slowly DIN PPM The DIN peak program meter is a Type meter and is displayed with a scale of 50 dB to 5 dB which corresponds to 44 dBu to 11 dBu 0 dB on the DIN PPM equals 6 dBu Nordic PPM The Nordic peak program meter is a Type meter and is displayed with a scale of 42 dB to 12 dB which corresponds to 42 dBu to 12 dBu 0 dB on the Nordic PPM equals 0 dBu Adjusting the VU PPM meters sensitivity Unlike peak meters which read instantaneous changes in your audio signal the VU PPM meters read a portion of the signal and calculate the average level The size of the signal that the meters read is determined by the meters integration time To set the amount of data surrounding the cursor that will be used to calculate levels in the VU meters specify a value in the VU meter integration time box on the Status tab of the Preferences dialog The PPM scales use a fixed integration time
448. og appears b Type a name in the Name field to create a name to identify the preset c Choose a setting from the Recurrence drop down list to indicate whether you want to record one time only or repeat the selected recording day and time at a regular interval d Use the Start date Start time and Duration boxes to indicate when you want to start and stop recording e Click OK to close the dialog and return to the Record dialog Select a timer setting and click the Arm button Arm in the Record dialog when your re ready to start the timer e Ifyou want to edit a timer setting select it and click the Edit button amp to display the Record Timer Event dialog If you want to remove a timer setting select it and click the Delete button e Ifyou want to remove all past timer settings click the Remove All Past Events from List button a To end timed recording click the Stop button E Click the Close button to close the Record dialog Triggering by a set threshold When your re using threshold triggered recording you can choose to record continuously set a buffer size and Sound Forge software will record to fill the buffer discarding the oldest data as new data is recorded If you want to save data from the buffer you can save it to disk 1 2 3 Click the Record button on the transport bar or press Ctrl R The Record dialog appears From the Method drop down list choose Automatic Threshold Choose t
449. om the Effects menu choose Dynamics and choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Dynamics dialog appears 2 Choose a preset with a small amount of compression 2 1 or less from the Preset drop down list and click OK Normalizing Normalizing a file prior to decreasing its bit depth ensures that the entire dynamic range is used In addition normalization lowers the signal to noise ratio 1 From the Process menu choose Normalize The Normalize dialog appears Normalize Example music bed Cancel Normalize using Peak level Average RMS level loudness ae 0 00 dB SETEE We Preview 100 00 Bypass 00 200 Use equal loudnes nto Normalize to 60 to 0 dB Scan Levels Apply dynamic compression Peak _ EE E i ee RMS 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Select the Peak level radio button 3 Set the Normalize to fader to 0 dB peak and click OK Applying compression and normalization simultaneously 1 From the Process menu choose Normalize The Normalize dialog appears 2 Select the Average RMS level radio button 3 Choose Apply dynamic compression in the If clipping occurs drop down list and click OK 104 CHAPTER 5 Converting mono stereo channels You can convert mono files to stereo or stereo files to mono To perform quick channel conversion without specifying the mix use the Audio channels box on the File Properties window or right click the Channels box in the s
450. ommand markers add interactivity to media streamed over the Internet by inserting metadata into streaming media files As your file plays any number of other actions can be programmed to occur These commands are a part of the Windows Media Audio Windows Media Video and RealMedia streaming formats Most frequently these actions add text or open a related Web site Command markers can also indicate when an instruction function occurs in a WAV file being used in a radio broadcast environment Scott Studios data The following two sections define the markers for both streaming media and Scott Studios files Notes e While streaming media files can be played on any hard drive CD drive or DVD drive They require a special streaming media server provided by your ISP to stream properly across the Internet e Windows Media Player 9 and later will ignore metadata commands unless the Run script commands when present check box is selected on the Security tab of the player s Preferences dialog Be sure to instruct your audience to select this check box before playing your file Defining streaming media commands In a streaming media file command markers can be used to display headlines show captions link to Web sites or any other function you define Some command types are exclusive to either the Windows Media files or RealMedia files Command Player type URL Windows Media and RealMedia Text Windows Media Title RealMedia Author RealMe
451. ommands and functions Toolbars can be dragged throughout the workspace docked resized hidden and customized You can use the Toolbars tab in the Preferences dialog to specify which toolbars you want to display Perform either of the following actions to display this tab e From the Options menu choose Preferences When the Preferences dialog is displayed click the Toolbars tab e From the View menu choose Toolbars Displaying a toolbar 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog is displayed with a list of available toolbars 2 To display a toolbar select the corresponding check box and click OK Preferences eS General Display Editing Labels File Types MIDI Sync Previews Status Toolbars CD Settings Audio Video VST Effects Toolbars WA Standard m aapa Select a check box to Navigation Views display a toolbar Status Selection Regions Playlist Insert Process Effects E Tools Levels Scripting mee Click Customize to add 7 Show ToolTips remove or rearrange buttons on a toolbar Customizing a toolbar 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog is displayed with a list of available toolbars 2 Select the check box for a toolbar and click Customize The Customize Toolbar dialog is displayed Customize Toolbar al Available tools Current tools Separator Add New Record aa Separa
452. ong the X horizontal axis and the amplitude is displayed along the Y vertical axis Tip You can continue to make selections in the sound file with the Spectrum Analysis window open just move the cursor or make selections as you normally would Click the Refresh button 2 in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar to update the display If no selection is made analysis is performed on the samples immediately following the cursor position 274 CHAPTER 19 Monitoring an input and output source Click the Real Time Monitoring button to turn real time spectrum analysis on or off Click the down arrow next to the button and choose a command from the menu to specify whether you want to monitor your sound card s input or output e When you choose Monitor Input Sound Forge will monitor the recording devices selected on the Record page of the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 316 e When you choose Monitor Output Sound Forge will monitor the playback devices selected on the Playback page of Audio tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 316 Notes e When Monitor Output is selected the post processing signal is monitored when you start playback from the Plug In Chainer e Real time spectrum analysis can require significant processing power If the spectrum graph s refresh rate seems sluggish set the display mode to Line Graph decrease the FFT size or tu
453. onization e Configuring the sequencer Configuring the regions 1 Open the Voiceover pca file and view the Regions List and Playlist windows 2 Select the Wow region in the Regions List and drag it to the playlist The Wow region is added to the playlist Lengt ic yt Si E 0 00 00 000 00 00 00 733 00 00 00 733 None Stari Er 1 3 Select the Wow region in the playlist 4 From the Trigger drop down list choose SMPTE Play at Time The SMPTE Time box is activated 5 Enter an appropriate SMPTE start time using the hours minutes seconds frames format A small musical note appears adjacent to region in the playlist to indicate that a start time for this region s playback is configured Name nd Length Trigger Chan Note SMPTE Time 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 733 00 00 00 733 SMPTE Play at Time 1 4 A small musical note indicates a start time Turning on MIDI input synchronization 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed Click the MIDI Sync tab 3 Specify the MIDI input that corresponds to the output port of the sequencer and click OK 4 From the Options menu choose MIDI Triggers The MIDI Triggers dialog is displayed 5 From the Preset drop down list choose Reset all triggers to none This prevents other MIDI commands from creating additional triggers WORKING WITH MIDI SMPTE 251 6 Click OK 7 From the Options menu choose
454. ontents Click the column heading to sort the results in ascending or descending Editing a Playlist Cutlist region You can edit a Playlist Cutlist region by typing new values in the Cnt Start End Length and Name boxes Repeating a region during Playlist playback You can specify the number of times a region repeats during Playlist playback Type a value in the Cnt box in the Playlist window to specify the number of times the Playlist region will repeat before playing the next region USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 129 Using stop points You can attach stop points to regions in the Playlist When a stop point is encountered during playback the corresponding region is repeated the number of times specified by the Count value and playback is halted Creating a stop point Perform one of the following actions to set the stop point for a Playlist e Right click a region in the Playlist window and choose Stop Point from the shortcut menu e Select a region in the Playlist window and press Not on the numeric keypad A check mark appears adjacent to the comment in the shortcut menu and a stop point indicated by a red circle appears in the Playlist Playlist be Cnt Name Start End Length Trigger Chan Note SMPTE Time 1 H 1 Silence 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None 1 C5 00 1 000 2H 1 Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 None 1jc 0 C5 1 Sound editing just gets easier
455. ontrols zoom in out on the waveform several times and observe the numbering of the video frames Tip Select a frame number format by choosing Preferences from the Options menu and selecting an option from the Frame numbering on thumbnails drop down list on the Video tab Animating the video strip During playback of a video file the video strip can display animated or still frames This can visually aid in editing and positioning your audio to match the video From the Options menu choose Video and then choose Animate Video Strip or right click the video strip and choose Animate from the shortcut menu A check mark appears next to this option on the menu when the feature is enabled When the video strip is animated the video strip always displays the frame that corresponds to the cursor position Press Alt Right Arrow or Alt Left Arrow to move the cursor one frame When frame animation is turned off the video strip always shows the frame that corresponds to the left edge of each image in the video Strip Tip f you experience slow or stuttering video preview turn off animated video to reduce the load on your CPU Copying the current video frame to the clipboard You can use the clipboard to copy the video frame at the current cursor position From the Options menu choose Video and then choose Copy Frame or right click the video strip and choose Copy Frame from the shortcut menu The current frame is copied to the clipboard 268
456. onverter ccc cc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 232 Converting using an existing batch job ccc cece cece cent eee e eee eee eeeenees 232 Creating or editing a batch job ccc ccc cece cence eee ene e een e ee eeeeneennees 233 Sal DMN icc a oenbociserrc4 wet vacua E ES EEEE EEE 235 SION ONS sien E E E E EE eee Gr ce ee eee eee ne eee 235 Exteel Sal M0 Els nce ces ces doce ens cece eee N cae sees ere ET E E weaeeees 235 Pte hia Sal DICES aereo ntancac ce oseuue er e esse once a sua nee werner eas 235 Configuring the Sampler TOol ccc ccc eee teen eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeees 236 TABLE OF CONTENTS 11 Creating a Sampler CONFIQUrAaTION 0 cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 236 Open loop versus closed OOD srsssirerisrivsd itinin Ira IEAS EAA REEERE gate 237 Saving sampler configurations s sussesuesesussesreseserreserreserreresere 238 Sending and receiving SAMpIeS 6 ec ccc cee cee eee eee eeeeeeeeees 238 Sendinga sample a acveqees ceo canny doe ERARE ENRETE ae Rat eeuee bee reeeareenteenueeaien 238 Receiving d sAMIDIG gt cantuneneracuirdawin neu ca ce EE PEE eure eae onde rete eeu eens 238 MIDI unity note and Fine tune ccc ccc cee eee e eee e enna eeeeeeees 238 Processing musical instrument fil S 0 ccc cee eee teen eeeeenees 239 Opening musical instrument files ins ceviias dus des idowiuwedwwttwsareadwwa darews Oeaweeadve 239 Previewing SAMPIES cece cece eee eee eee
457. op Loop the Loop 4 lf desired select the Post Loop check box and drag the slider to configure the percentage of the loop to be crossfaded into the post loop audio Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release 7 ODO OUO on WN Uy GEE W Loop 1 to 100 o F 80 F Loop 1 to 100 _ 80 Post Loop 1 to 100 20 Post Loop 1 to 100 90 Preview mode Loop the Loop Preview mode Loop the Loop r 5 From the Preview mode drop down list specify how the Preview button operates Loop the Loop Play Loop through Post Loop or Play as One Shot 6 Preview and tune the crossfade until you cannot detect the loop transitions 7 Click OK 260 CHAPTER 17 Creating loops for ACID software The Sound Forge application is an excellent tool for creating and editing loops to be imported into any of the ACID family of products You can create three different types of files for ACID use e One shot file Loop file e ACID 3 0 or later beatmapped file Creating an ACID one shot file One shots are files that do not stretch with tempo or change pitch to match the key of the ACID project This behavior makes one shots particularly suited for audio such as cymbal crashes sound effects and short vocal lines 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing the Wow and drag it to the workspace A new data window is
458. operties The video properties for a file affect how video is displayed and rendered when you save the file In most situations you can leave these settings at their default values However you can adjust the video properties of a file as needed 1 From the View menu choose File Properties The File Properties window appears 2 Choose a setting from the Video field order drop down list This setting affects how the video is displayed and rendered when you save the file None progressive scan Treats video as non interlaced e Upper field first Treats video as interlaced and reads the interlaced video as upper field first e Lower field first Treats video as interlaced and reads the interlaced video as lower field first Note The Video field order setting remains in effect only as long as the file is open The setting is not retained when you save or close the file 3 Choose a setting from the Video pixel aspect ratio drop down list to determine the ratio used to display and render the video In most cases this value is auto detected for you Configuring your video settings You can use the Video tab on the Preferences dialog to choose your video settings From the Options menu choose Preferences and then click the Video tab The items on this tab are explained below Items Description Frame numbering on This drop down list determines how the frame information is displayed on the video thumbnails strip when you have frame num
459. or click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar The clipboard events are inserted into the data window and existing events on the selected channels are moved down the data window by the total length of the pasted audio If no channels are selected the clipboard events are pasted to all channels Mixing events You can mix files events and selections when using the Event tool by dragging and dropping audio from the current data window other data windows the Sound Forge Explorer window or Windows Explorer Mixed audio is inserted as a new events over the existing events in a data window Crossfades are created but the Mix Replace dialog does not appear Deleting events Deleting an event removes the event s audio from the data window You can delete multiple events at once Deleting operates like a cutting operation but the removed information is not placed on the clipboard For more information see Cutting events on page 159 1 Select the events to be deleted For more information see Selecting events on page 164 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete Clear or press Delete Trimming events 1 Move the cursor over the edge of an event The cursor changes when properly positioned 5 2 Drag the edge of the event to trim it Note You cannot trim an event beyond the edges of the underlying media USING THE EVENT TOOL 159 Dragging channel boundaries You can drag the top and bottom edges of events if you want t
460. or the current audio file only Use the following steps to change the Sound Forge default beat values 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Status tab 3 Type an appropriate value in the Default beats per measure box 4 Type an appropriate value in the Default beats per minute box and click OK Publishing files to the Web You can share your media file with others by publishing it to the Web from within the software You can upload your file to AC IDplanet com or another publishing provider From the File menu choose Publish and follow the instructions to set up your publishing providers and upload your content Recovering files after a crash If Sound Forge software terminates improperly you can recover all open and unsaved audio files not opened in read only mode When a file is opened it automatically creates temporary files that it uses to save any changes made to the file The original file remains unchanged until it is saved If the software terminates improperly the temporary files remain on your hard drive and can be used to recover any unsaved changes made prior to the crash Tip You can specify the folder used to store temporary files by choosing Preferences from the Options menu and designating a Temporary files and record folder ocation on the General tab Recovering files Click the Recover button to restore the changes and undo history for the files listed in the Files
461. ords into the active data window If this is not where you want to record use one of the following methods to prepare for recording If Then You want to record into a different data window Click the Window button and choose a data window from the Record destination window drop down list Click OK to return to the Record dialog You want to record into a new window Click the New button in the Record dialog and specify the attributes sample rate bit depth and channels for the new file Click OK to return to the Record dialog Note The maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For example if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs If you record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To route inputs to channels in the data window click a channel number and choose a new input port from the menu To determine which inputs are recorded type a value in the Channels box For example you could type 1 4 to record channels 1 through 4 or type 1 3 4 to record only channels 1 3 and 4 4 From the Mode drop down list choose a recording mode For more information see Choosing a recording mode on page 139 136 CHAPTER 8 Use the Time Options tab at the bottom of the Record dialog to set the timer a Click the Add button 43 to create a timer setting The Record Timer Event dial
462. orge MIDI output port to send directly to the device s MIDI driver WORKING WITH MIDI SMPTE 253 254 CHAPTER 16 Chapter 17 Looping Sound Forge Pro software is an excellent tool for creating loops and provides the perfect compliment to the revolutionary ACID line of loop based music creation tools Creating loop regions in files is useful only when you intend to transfer the files to a hardware sampler that supports the loop regions Loops A loop is a sample or region in an audio file that is repeated during playback Samples are finite and frequently very short in length Therefore they must be repeated or looped to create longer or sustaining sounds Note Loops can also be used to repeat entire sections of music although the Playlist is better suited to this purpose For more information see Using the Playlist on page 128 Sustaining and release loops A sound envelope contains four elements attack decay sustain and release Attack py Sustain Release Typically the sustain portion of the envelope is looped to lengthen the duration of a sound This is referred to as the sustaining loop While sustaining loops are useful it is frequently necessary to create a second loop taken from later in the envelope This allows you to reproduce longer more complex sounds such as a piano chord struck with the sustain pedal depressed This second type of loop is referred to as the release loop Creating a
463. ormation to keep track of multiple mixes Identifies the location where the file was recorded Identifies the organization that produced the track Data windows Data windows contain audio data as a waveform as well as a number of controls and commands used to edit and process audio Edit Tool Selector Lock Channel Selection Level ruler Position scrollbar Level zoom in out Title bar Time ruler E 100 Unnamed Things Overview bar Marker bar CD layout bar Data window components Component Title bar Level ruler Time ruler Marker bar Edit Tool Selector Playbar Selection status boxes Waveform display Scrub control Position scroll bar Overview bar Track 3 One of Th hip mer Un Time zoom in out 00 04 42 866 o Maximize width KH H oe H H oe o 00 07 03 360 00 11 46 226 00 04 42 866 1 131 072 Time zoom resolution Playbar Scrub control Selection status boxes Description Displays the file name If title information is included in the summary of a file it appears here instead of the file name Double click to maximize and restore the window Displays the amplitude of the waveform Right click to display the level ruler shortcut menu Drag to shift the view up down when zoomed in vertically Displays the current location in the data window Right click to display the time ruler shortcut menu Drag to scroll the data window Displays the position of region end
464. ormats Can also intermix the channels of a file to create panning effects For more information see Channel Converter on page 175 DC Offset Changes the baseline of an audio file For more information see DC Offset on page 177 Graphic EQ Opens the XFX Graphic EQ For more information click the Help button 2 in the process dialog Paragraphic EQ Opens the XFX Paragraphic EQ For more information click the Help button e in the process dialog Parametric EQ Opens the XFX Parametric EQ For more information click the Help button p in the process dialog Graphic Fade Creates user configurable fades For more information see Fade Graphic Fade on page 178 Fade In Fades in the selection For more information see Fade Fade In on page 180 Fade Out Fades out the selection For more information see Fade Fade Out on page 180 Invert Flip Inverts or flips the polarity of the current selection For more information see Invert Flip on page 181 40 CHAPTER 2 3 Mute Mutes the current selection For more information see Mute on page 182 Normalize Normalizes the loudness of an audio file For more information see Normalize on page 183 Pan Expand Creates custom pans expands and mixes For more information see Pan Expand on page 185 Resample Creates a copy of the audio file with a new sample rate For more information see Resample on page 186 iZotope 64 Bit SRC Changes the sample rate of an
465. ot directly supported by the sound card You can select the Sound Mapper as the Playback and Record devices on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog You can perform any additional configuration of the Sound Mapper from the Windows Control Panel The Sound Mapper functions as follows When faced with a sound file recorded at an unusual sample rate such as 22 257 Hz and a sound card that supports 22 050 Hz the sound file normally cannot be played The sample rate of the file must be changed to 22 050 Hz before it can be played back but changing the sample rate without resampling causes a pitch shift However the Sound Mapper plays this file without resampling by mapping the sound to the best format possible and performing the resampling in real time In addition the Sound Mapper plays compressed sound files even on sound cards that do not support compression directly A file compressed with Microsoft ADPCM or The DSP Group s TrueSpeech plays on any sound card without first decompressing the file The Sound Mapper can under the right circumstances record compressed sound files Compressing sound data can be computationally expensive and the amount of time required is dependent upon the specific compression algorithm and how it is implemented Decompressing sound data is typically faster than compressing the same sound data It should be noted however that Sound Forge software does not play and record compressed sound files directly Rather all
466. ou to examine audio frequencies and overtones using either spectrum graphs or sonograms Working in the frequency domain Unlike the waveform display which represents audio in the time domain amplitude vs time Soectrum Analysis allows you to examine sound by representing the sound in the frequency domain amplitude vs frequency Consider the following graphic which depicts the same audio event as a waveform and as a spectrum graph B Example music bed koles Spectrum Analysis 2 048 Blackman Harris i8 A B s o fal M QO M123 4 e a 8 At 00 00 00 f s 00 00 02 00 00 04 4 l gt te K gt a be lt gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 512 KEREY Hz cibels dB Bin Waveform display Peak Spectrum graph Data displayed in the frequency domain whether in the form of a spectrum graph or sonogram shows the amplitudes and frequencies of sine waves that if mixed together would sound much like the original sound Since it s relatively easy to remember how a sine wave sounds at different frequencies it s possible to visualize how simple waveforms sound by looking at the spectrum of the sound Learning to read the frequency components of a sound in conjunction with their corresponding amplitudes makes it possible to determine the fundamental frequency of a sound as well as its overtones Similarly you can identify unwanted noise thereby allowing filtering to be
467. ou triple click in a data window You might want to select this option if triple clicks are falsely detected when you make a selection and then try to perform a drag operation Otherwise decrease Windows double click threshold time When this check box is cleared you can triple click anywhere in a data window to select all data Select this check box if you do not want selections to snap to time or zero crossings when the data window zoom ratio is less than 1 4 This is useful if you commonly zoom in fully to adjust selection points manually yet still want to use automatic snapping when zoomed out Select this check box if you want the loop region to always match the current time selection Clicking to position the cursor in a data window will clear the loop region When no loop region exists and looped playback is enabled the entire data window will play looped When the check box is selected the behavior is similar to Sound Forge 8 0 Clear the check box if you want to be able to position the cursor without clearing the loop region Select this check box if you want the loop bar in a data window to be updated when you mark the beginning or end of a selection When the check box is cleared the loop bar isn t updated until after you ve marked both ends of the selection This check box is not available when Force loop bar to match selection is selected When this check box is selected the Fade In and Fade Out settings for the Mix tool
468. ou want to unlock media files when you switch to another application Select this check box if you want to delete the peak sfk and proxy sfap0 files associated with a media file when you close a data window Select this check box if you want to turn on the Hidden file attribute when creating new peak sfk and proxy sfap0 files In the Windows Control Panel double click Folder Options and select the View tab Select the Show hidden files and folders radio button if you want to be able to see hidden files Select this check box if you want to create an uncompressed proxy sfap0 file when you open a compressed file format Selecting this check box can improve performance on slower computers or for formats that cannot be decompressed quickly for real time playback Select this check box if you want the software to remember the last used sample rate when you open a vox file When the check box is cleared you will be prompted to choose a sample rate each time you open a vox file Select this check box if you want the software to remember the last used settings when you open raw files When the check box is cleared you will be prompted to choose a settings each time you open a craw file When this check box is selected your undo history is maintained until you close the data window or exit the application so you can undo edit operations even if you ve saved your file When this check box is selected quick file saving may no
469. our data window pj Go to End Moves the cursor to the end of the file LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 37 Navigation toolbar The Navigation toolbar contains buttons used to navigate within the current data window Zoom In Full Magnifies the selected area to a 24 1 ratio a Zoom Normal Resets the audio data to its original magnification horizontally Custom Zoom 1 Sets the audio data to a custom time magnification level Custom Zoom 2 Sets the audio data to a custom time magnification level Mark In Marks the in point of a new selection For more a information see Selecting audio during playback on page 91 Mark Out Marks the out point of a new selection For more information see Selecting audio during playback on page 91 p gt 13 Go To Displays the Go To dialog and allows you to quickly move the cursor to a specific point in a file For more information see Setting the cursor position on page 81 Cursor Center Centers the display with the cursor displayed in the center of the data window Cursor to Selection Start Moves the cursor to the beginning of the selection Tempo box 4 Zoom Selection Maximizes the selection vertically and Cursor to Selection End Moves the cursor to the end of the selection Center Sustaining Start Moves the cursor to the beginning of the sustaining loop Center Sustaining End Moves the cursor to the end of the sustaining loop C
470. ox to specify the number of files you want to display Specify a folder for storing temporary files and recorded audio or click the Browse button to specify a new folder Using temporary file space allows you to edit very large files and keeps Sound Forge from using large portions of RAM on your computer Your temporary directory must have enough space to accommodate the total size of all files you plan to edit along with space for any clipboard data and undo buffers If you change the temporary storage folder you will have to restart Sound Forge for the change to take effect The Display tab allows you to specify options for adjusting the appearance of the Sound Forge window Description Default sound file window height Default video strip height Peak ratio default for new sound files Normal zoom ratio Custom zoom ratio 1 Custom zoom ratio 2 308 CHAPTER 22 Option Drag the slider to specify the default data window height for a sound file This magnification level is used when you load a sound file or create a new window Drag the slider to specify the default height of the video strip when you open a video file Choose a ratio from the drop down list to specify the zoom ratio above which the application will use a peak file instead of the original file to draw the waveform If you notice problems with waveform scrolling try decreasing this setting so it is less than your current zoom ratio To calculate the si
471. p down list on the General tab This allows you to view the envelope graphs for the specified impulse file For more information see Impulse on page 210 Dry Out This control is identical to the Dry Out fader on the General tab For more information see Dry Out on page 210 Wet Out This control is identical to the Wet Out fader on the General tab For more information see Wet Out on page 210 Apply envelope and limit decay This control is identical to the Apply envelope and limit decay check box on the General tab For more information see Apply envelope and limit decay to seconds on page 210 Envelope Graph Selecting the Apply envelope and limit decay check box turns on the Envelope Graph You can use the envelope graph to decrease the length of the specified impulse file which consequently decreases the reverberation decay time and processing time You can also use the envelope graph to apply fades to the specified impulse file 0 Time seconds L55 The horizontal axis of the graph represents the time of the impulse file and the vertical axis represents peak amplitude in dB Specifying an impulse file from the Impulse drop down list automatically displays its envelope in the graph Note f the impulse file is greater than 6 seconds in length it does not display in the envelope graph Envelope points Envelope points are used in the envelope graph to specify a fade curve The fade amount can vary from 0 to 100 You can create d
472. page 337 Crossfade Mixing two pieces of audio by fading one out as the other fades in Crossfade Loop Sometimes a sample loop cannot be easily created from the given source material In these instances a crossfade can be applied to the beginning and end of the loop to aid in the smooth transition between the two The Crossfade Loop function provides a method of creating sampling loops in material that is otherwise difficult to loop Cutoff frequency The cutoff frequency of a filter is the frequency at which the filter changes its response For example in a low pass filter frequencies greater than the cutoff frequency are attenuated while frequencies less than the cutoff frequency are not affected Data Window Each opened sound file has its own data window At the top of each data window is a title bar displaying either the title of the sample or the name of the file Also in each data window are the waveform display time and level rulers playbar and other tools that give you information and allow you to navigate throughout the entire sound file 340 APPENDIX E DC Offset DC offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to a recorded audio signal This current results in a recorded waveform that is not centered around the baseline infinity Glitches and other unexpected results can occur when sound effects are applied to files that contain DC offsets Sound Forge software can compensate for this DC offs
473. pe 1 or Type 2 is selected in the Dither mode drop down list the following settings are available e None No noise shaping is applied e Simple A high pass filter is applied to the dither noise e Clear Aggressively moves dither noise toward the Nyquist frequency e Psych5 Uses a fifth order filter to move dither noise away from audible frequency bands e Psych9 Uses a ninth order filter to move dither noise away from audible frequency bands When MBIT is selected in the Dither mode drop down list you can choose a setting from the Noise shaping drop down list to control the amount of noise shaping applied Increased settings will provide more audible noise suppression at the expense of a higher noise floor 174 CHAPTER 11 Item Description Dither bits amount When Type 1 or Type 2 is selected in the Dither mode drop down list you can choose a setting from the Dither bits drop down list to choose whether you want to use 1 or 2 dither bits 1 works well for most applications When MBIT is selected in the Dither mode drop down list you can choose a setting from the Dither amount drop down list to control the amount of dithering applied Normal works well for most applications The None and Low settings can leave some nonlinear quantization distortion or dither noise modulation behind The High setting can eliminate nonlinear quantization distortion at the expense of a higher noise floor Auto blank Select this check box if you wan
474. phasis boost 295 protecting CDs 295 Q subcode 295 sample rate correction 283 iv INDEX disc at once CD burning continued track lists 294 297 displaying sonograms 278 video strip 267 Wave Hammer 221 Distortion effect 41 204 dither 103 173 DLS files 239 242 docking windows See windows Double Selection button 38 doubling loops 263 drag and drop creating data windows 150 mixing 149 mono selections to multichannel destinations 147 pasting 148 Snapping to points 147 toggling mix paste functions 149 drag and drop shortcuts 329 DTMF MEF tones synthesis 39 153 Dynamics effects 204 EBICSF 335 Edit Source Project command 69 Edit Tempo button 38 Edit Tool button 36 editing command marker properties 119 file properties 99 106 loops 257 260 multichannel audio 109 112 multichannel audio files 110 Playlist Cutlist regions 129 effects adding a chain of effects 192 Amplitude Modulation 41 203 applying 191 applying automation 201 applying in Event mode 163 applying in multichannel files 191 audio tail data processing mode 195 automatically organizing 199 automating 200 automating with envelopes 200 bypassing effects on a chain 195 Chorus 41 203 configuring plug ins on a chain 194 Delay Echo 203 Distortion 41 204 Dynamics 204 Envelope 41 205 206 Flange Wah Wah 41 206 FX Favorites menu 198 Gapper Snipper 41 206 effects continued Graphic Dynamics 41 204 hiding
475. pid sound attacks or a specified time interval For more information see Inserting regions based on rapid sound attacks on page 122 and Inserting regions based on musical time intervals on page 122 Extract Regions Extracts all file regions and saves them as individual files For more information see Creating new files from regions on page 125 Detect Clipping Performs clip detection on the current file or selection For more information see Detecting and marking clipping on page 116 Find Searches for clicks and pops volume levels or silent breaks in an audio signal For more information see Finding and repairing audio glitches on page 150 Interpolate Replaces selected audio with interpolated audio data based on the selection s beginning and end samples For more information see Interpolating new audio on page 151 Replace Replaces selected audio data with previous adjacent data For more information see Replacing audio with preceding data on page 152 Copy Other Channel Replaces selected audio with a corresponding selection from the opposite channel For more information see Copying the other channel on page 151 Levels toolbar IK Noise Reduction Analyzes and removes background noise such as tape hiss electrical hum and machinery rumble For more information click the Help button B in the plug in dialog Click and Crackle Removal Detects and removes all clicks and pops For more information click the He
476. plays any regions that have been defined in the selected media file Summary View Displays a short description of the selected media file at the bottom of the Explorer window Details Displays the file size date and when the file was last created or last modified All Files Displays all file types in the active folder Peak files When you first open a file the entire file is scanned and a peak file is created The peak file is stored with the same name and in the same location as the audio file but it is given an sfk extension This peak file is automatically updated whenever the original file is edited Working with video files The Sound Forge application has the ability to open and save many video file formats The video files cannot be edited within the software but this functionality allows you to attach detach and edit audio for the video Once you ve edited the audio you can preview the audio and video together When you open a media file containing video the data window displays the video portion in a video strip above the audio a Time lapse avi a no D002 1D 0004 Inf 3 ac ha Inf 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 004 For more information see Working with Video on page 267 GETTING STARTED 59 Playing a file After you open a file you can play it by clicking the Play All button on the transport bar For more information see Transport toolbar on page 37 Viewing the current position As a file pl
477. ple the signal from Analog in 1 is recorded to channel 1 Analog in 2 is recorded to channel 2 and so on Enable 1 2 3 4 5 a Analog in 1 oO Analog in 2 oO oO oO Analog in 3 oO oO Analog in 4 oO oO oO Analog in 5 oO oO oO oO Analog in 6 oO oO oO oO oO Analog in 7 oO Analog in amp oO oO oO oO D to ui Record buffering seconds Specifies the total amount of buffering that is used during recording If you use your computer for other tasks while recording increasing this setting can reduce the likelihood of those tasks interrupting recording Advanced Click this button to open the Advanced Audio Configuration dialog For more information on these options see below Default All Click to restore the Audio tab to the default settings 316 CHAPTER 22 Advanced audio preferences You can click the Advanced button on the Audio tab to access the advanced audio preferences Setting Audio devices Interpolate position Position bias Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback Audio buffers Buffer size Priority Video tab Description This list contains all of the audio devices that are installed in your computer Select a device from the list to set the options below for that device When this check box is selected the software will attempt to compensate for inaccurate devices by interpolating the playback or recording position If you notice that your play
478. point indicator For more information about snapping see Understanding snapping on page 94 Tips To turn snapping to events on and off press Ctrl Shift F8 e Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping USING THE EVENT TOOL 165 166 CHAPTER 10 Chapter 11 Processing Audio This chapter provides descriptions of processing presets and previews as well as an overview of all functions in the Sound Forge Pro Process menu Applying presets Many Sound Forge dialogs contain drop down lists of presets used to quickly apply processes and effects Presets are especially useful when you are learning the application as they allow you to hear the results of processing as well as view the control settings used to produce these results Note All information regarding presets in this chapter is applicable to DirectX Plug Ins effects from Sony Creative Software Inc Using presets 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and then choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed 3 From the Preset drop down list choose the 20 dB exponential fade out preset Notice that the dialog s controls change to reflect the 20 dB exponential fade out 4 Click the Preview button The following actions occur e The Preview button changes to a Stop button The effect previews on a brief selection of audio For more information see Previewing processed audio on page 169
479. points loop end points and markers You can place name and position markers and regions anywhere in the data window These informational tags can serve as cues or reminders highlighting important events in your project Right click a marker or region tag to display a shortcut menu Drag to edit a tag s position Double click anywhere within a region to select it Toggles through the Edit Magnify Pencil and Event tools Right click to display a shortcut menu that allows you to display or hide data window elements Contains audio transport buttons including Go to Start Go to End Stop Play Normal Go to Previous Next Track Open Play Plug In Chainer Play as Cutlist and Play as Sample For more information see Playbar on page 34 Displays the beginning end and length of a selection If no selection exists only the cursor position displays Double click the leftmost box to edit the current cursor position or selection start position Double click either of the other two boxes to edit the selection end position or the selection length Right click to display the status format shortcut menu Displays a graphical representation of an audio file The horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents amplitude Right click within this display to open the waveform display shortcut menu Scrolls playback of your project at varying speeds Scrolls forward backward through an audio file to display sections of the file not vis
480. pply it in the future check box Tip Ifyou select the Remember my preference and apply it in the future check box Sound Forge will bypass the Raw File Type dialog However you can access and change these settings from the Open dialog by selecting a Raw file and then clicking the Custom button 5 Click OK 6 7 8 Notes The settings you choose for opening the file with the exception of the sample rate will be used when you click Save or save the file using the Default Template setting in the Save As dialog as long as the number of channels in the source file matches the number of channels in the file you re saving The sample rate will be determined from the source file If you do not always use the same settings for reading raw files make sure the Keep media files locked check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Otherwise the individual settings will be lost if you have multiple raw files open and switch away from the Sound Forge window Click Save As The Save Preset dialog is displayed Enter a name for the preset in the New preset name box and click OK The preset is saved and the Raw File Type dialog is displayed Click OK The file opens Remember that the byte order of files generated by CSOUND is not constant CSOUND executables for PC generate files that use Little Endian byte ordering while CSOUND for other platforms tends to generate files with Big Endian ordering In addition MTU files us
481. ption Prefix Type a prefix in the box if you want to assign a name to new regions Clear the check box if you do not want to include a prefix if you want to number regions only for example Use counter and start at Select this check box and type a number in the box if you want to number new regions Insert leading zeros in field Select this check box and specify a field width if you want to use leading zeros in region names For width of example if you specify a field width of 3 regions numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 4 Click the OK button Editing default marker names The Marker labels section of the Labels tab allows you to modify the names that are assigned to markers when you insert markers during playback or recording 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Labels tab 2 Select the Label Markers check box to display text labels for markers in the data window when you insert markers CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 311 3 Adjust additional settings as necessary Item Description New marker prefix Type a prefix in the box if you want to assign a name to new markers Clear the check box if you do not Use counter and start at want to include a prefix if you want to number markers only for example Select this check box and type a number in the box if you want to number new markers Insert leading zeros in field Select this check box and specify a field width if you
482. ptions menu and set a Default video strip height on the Display tab i Drag the bar below the video strip to change the video strip height Enabling frame animation When playing a video file you can specify whether frames are animated or displayed as still frames To turn on frame animation right click the video strip and choose Animate from the shortcut menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate this feature is turned on WORKING WITH VIDEO 267 Using the cursor to select a frame When frame animation is turned on clicking anywhere within the audio portion of the data window displays the corresponding video frame in the video strip To move the cursor by single frames press Alt Right Arrow or Alt Left Arrow Viewing frame numbers You can display frame numbers on each frame in your video strip which can assist you in positioning your audio As you zoom in more tightly each frame in the strip represents one frame in the video Frame number 1 Open a video file and display the video strip 2 From the Options menu choose Video and then choose Number Frames A check mark appears next to this option on the menu when the feature is enabled and a small box with a number appears at the bottom of each frame The small black arrow marks the exact position of the frame Tip You can also right click the video strip and choose Number Frames from the shortcut menu 3 Using the data window s zoom ratio c
483. quantization error on page 103 Note There are no rules regarding maintaining audio quality when decreasing bit depth For this reason you should always experiment with the Dither and Noise shaping controls to determine the optimum settings for each file Converting a file s bit depth Open the Musicbed pca file From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose Bit Depth Converter from the submenu The Bit Depth Converter dialog is displayed Preset Untitled HX Cre 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 From the Bit depth drop down list choose the desired bit depth If necessary use the Dither drop down list to specify the type of dither used to mask the quantization noise results from lowering a file s bit depth For more information see Dither on page 173 If desired use the Noise shaping drop down list to specify any noise shaping to be applied to the file For more information see Noise shaping on page 173 Note When increasing a file s bit depth set the Dither and Noise shaping controls to None and Off respectively 172 CHAPTER 11 Bit Depth Converter controls The following controls are located in the Bit Depth Converter dialog Control Bit depth Dither Noise shaping More Noise shaping dangers Description Choose a setting to specify the number of bits that should be used to store each sample This control allows you to specify the randomness of the dither generated noise used
484. quency greater than one half of the sampling rate the Nyquist Frequency instead of hearing a high pitch you may hear a low frequency rumble See also Nyquist Frequency on page 346 To prevent aliasing an anti aliasing filter is used to remove high frequencies before recording Once the sound has been recorded aliasing distortion is impossible to remove without also removing other frequencies from the sound This same anti aliasing filter must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate Amplitude Modulation Amplitude Modulation AM is a process whereby the amplitude loudness of a sound is varied over time When varied slowly a tremolo effect occurs If the frequency of modulation is high many side frequencies are created that can strongly alter the timbre of a sound APPENDIX E 337 Analog When discussing audio this term refers to a method of reproducing a sound wave with voltage fluctuations that are analogous to the pressure fluctuations of the sound wave This is different from digital recording in that these fluctuations are infinitely varying rather than discrete changes at sample time See also Quantization on page 348 Attack The attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound Percussive sounds drums piano guitar plucks are said to have a fast attack This means that the sound reaches its maximum amplitude in a very short time Sounds that slowly swell up in volume soft strings and wind sounds are said t
485. r From the View menu choose Plug In Manager to show or hide the Plug In Manager For more information see Using the Plug In Manager on page 197 Keyboard window Ctrl Alt 1 The Keyboard window allows you to control internal or external synthesizers and samplers from Sound Forge software From the View menu choose Keyboard to show or hide the Keyboard window For more information see Using the MIDI keyboard on page 243 Script Editor window Ctrl Alt 2 The Script Editor window can be used to open create edit or run scripts From the View menu choose Script Editor to show or hide the Script Editor window For more information see Using the Script Editor window on page 226 Loop Tuner window Ctrl Alt 3 The Loop Tuner window can be used to adjust the starting and ending points of a loop to create smooth transitions From the View menu choose Loop Tuner to show or hide the Loop Tuner window For more information see Editing loops on page 257 Metadata windows From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose a command from the submenu to display metadata windows where you can view and edit information about the current data window Tips e Ifyou want to sort the contents of a metadata window you can click a column heading to sort in ascending or descending order Ifyou want to display all metadata windows docked together choose View gt Metadata gt Show All and then choose a command from the submenu to indicate wh
486. r a metadata item from the Metadata tab existing information will be erased if the box is blank Note f a metadata type is not supported by the output format it will be ignored 5 Select the Save tab to choose file output settings for rendered files a e Click the Add Save Option button to create a new setting or select an existing setting and click the Change Save Options button The Output Options dialog is displayed If you want to convert to multiple formats at once click the Add Save Options button to create a setting for each file type that you want to convert In the File Format section select a radio button to indicate the format that you want to use for processed files Button Description Same as source Select this radio button if you want to save converted files using the same format as the original file Convert to Select this radio button and choose a file type from the Type drop down list if you want to convert your files to a new format The parameters that will be used for rendering your file are displayed in the Template box You can click Change to choose a new template For any output format choose Default Template to preserve the source file s format sample rate bit depth and number of channels in the output file In the File Names section select a radio button to indicate the format that you want to use for processed files Button Description Same as source Select this radio button if you want t
487. r more information see Using the MIDI keyboard on page 243 Simple playback When you click the Play button in the transport bar or playbar the audio file in the active data window plays and you hear the audio MIDI is not involved Triggered playback When the MIDI keyboard triggers playback of the same file the following items occurs e The MIDI Keyboard transmits MIDI commands to the MIDI router e The MIDI router transmits the MIDI commands to the Sound Forge MIDI input port e The audio file plays Note n the case of triggered playback MIDI commands may come from any software or hardware device that generates MIDI Triggering file playback Using the MIDI Keyboard or any other MIDI device to trigger audio playback involves three separate procedures e Configuring the MIDI device in this case the MIDI Keyboard e Enabling MIDI input synchronization e Configuring the MIDI trigger WORKING WITH MIDI SMPTE 247 Configuring the MIDI device 1 2 3 4 From the View menu choose Keyboard The MIDI Keyboard appears On Off Voice Note Chord Output Channel Keyboard Output Velocity Open the Voiceover pca file Click the MIDI Out button 42 and choose the appropriate MIDI router from the menu Keyboard o00 Acoustic Grand Piano Note EJE Za Microsoft MIDI Mapper Microsoft GS Wavetable Synth W Out USB Keystation v Send Program Changes Set the keyboard s Output
488. referred file format from the Save as type drop down list If the format allows you to create custom settings the Custom button becomes active 3 Click Custom The Custom Settings dialog appears 4 Make the appropriate setting changes for the chosen file format For help on individual settings click the Help button m5 Tip To save the custom settings for future use type aname for the template in the Template box and click the Save Template button E 5 Click OK The Custom Settings dialog closes Saving all open audio files Choosing Save All from the File menu automatically prompts you to save all open audio files on the current workspace Note Pressing Shift while choosing the Save All command automatically saves all open files without prompting you to approve each save Saving files as a workspace To accommodate complex editing scenarios you can save the entire workspace as an alternative to saving individual files Workspaces are saved as Sound Forge Workspace sfw files When you open a workspace file all files are restored to their previous sizes positions and magnifications In addition each file s current cursor position custom views and plug ins in the Plug In Chainer are restored For more information see Creating and using views on page 97 and Using the Plug In Chainer on page 192 GETTING STARTED 67 Saving the current workspace 1 From the File menu choose Workspace and choose Save As from the subme
489. rendered with an embedded project path reference you can easily open the source project in the associated application if you need to edit the media By saving your project path reference when you render files in ACID Sound Forge or Vegas you can quickly access the media from Sound Forge via the Edit Source Project shortcut menu Note The project information in the rendered file is only a reference to a project file If you modify the source project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer 1 Right click one of the following items e The waveform in a data window e A media file in the Explorer window 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit Source Project An ACID Vegas or Sound Forge window will open with the source project If you are editing a source project using a computer other than the computer where the project was created then the editing computer must meet the following requirements e The software that was used to create the project must be installed and the project file extension acd acd zip veg or frg must be registered on the editing computer e The editing computer must have the same version or later of the software as the computer where the project was created e The project file must exist on the editing computer using the same file path as on the computer where the proj
490. requency of the gain waveform can be specified to create effects varying from a slow tremolo to unusual sound distortions For information about using the Amplitude Modulation effect click the Help button E in the Sony Amplitude Modulation dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Chorus From the Effects menu choose Chorus to add a pitch modulated and delayed version of the input signal to the unprocessed input signal The effect simulates the variances in pitch and timing that occur naturally when two or more people try to play or sing the same thing at the same time For information about using the Chorus effect click the Help button E in the Sony Chorus dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Delay Echo From the Effects menu choose Delay Echo and then choose a command from the submenu to apply an echo effect to a selection For information about using the Multi Tap Delay and Simple Delay effects click the Help button E in the plug in dialogs or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index WORKING WITH EFFECTS 203 Distortion From the Effects menu choose Distortion to tailor the gain at all input levels of a signal You can create effects ranging from dramatic to subtle distortion simple compression expansion and noise gates For information about using the Distortion eff
491. ring playback the effect s settings at the playback cursor position are saved Saving a preset for an individual Direct X plug in 1 Adjust the effect parameters in the Plug In Chainer window to achieve the effect you want 2 Enter a name for the new preset in the Preset box 3 Click the Save Preset button fq The new preset is saved in the Preset drop down list Saving a preset for an individual VST plug in 1 Adjust the effect parameters in the Plug In Chainer window to achieve the effect you want Enter a name for the new preset in the Preset box Click the Save VST Preset As button i The VST Preset dialog is displayed Browse to the folder where you want to save the fxp file and type a name in the File name box a a Click the Save button The current plug in settings are saved in the fxp file Saving a bank of VST plug in presets 1 Adjust the effect parameters in the Plug In Chainer window to achieve the effect you want Click the Save VST Bank As button gi The Save VST Preset Bank dialog is displayed Browse to the folder where you want to save the fxb file and type a name in the File name box ae a Click the Save button All presets for the current plug in are stored in the bank Loading plug in chains or plug in presets Once you have saved a plug in chain you can easily load it into the Plug In Chainer Loading a plug in chain preset Choose a setting from the Chain drop down list The preset chain loa
492. riple clicking to select all sound file data check box on the Editing tab in the Preferences dialog is cleared Double click the level ruler to zoom the current selection vertically and horizontally If no selection exists the entire waveform display data is zoomed Double click again to zoom out to the full amplitude and to the normal horizontal magnification Double click a slider fader or spinner to reset it to its default value To fine tune a trackbar fader or spinner hold the right and left mouse buttons or hold the Ctrl key when dragging Shift click the Preview button to hear the original sound This is equivalent to enabling the Bypass check box Double click the Sample Rate Sample Size or Channels box at the bottom of the Sound Forge window to edit their values 44 100 Hz 16 bit Stereo 00 45 08 906 00 28 51 093 Double click the Selection Start box in a data window to type a new value Double click the Selection End or Selection Length box to type a new value 00 00 00 742 000001475 00 00 00 733 Click a marker tag FF to move the cursor to the marker s position Click a region For loop tag fF in the ruler to change the current selection to the region or loop end points Ctrl click the Play Normal button to Preview Cut skip selection on playback Ctrl Shift click to play to cursor with pre roll When making a selection past the end or beginning of the waveform display click the ri
493. rker at the current cursor position C Place a marker at the current cursor position Enable snapping F8 Toggle auto snap to grid Ctrl F8 Toggle auto snap to markers Shift F8 Toggle auto snap to event edges Ctrl Shift F8 Toggle auto snap to zero crossings Ctrl B Insert show hide volume envelope V Insert remove volume envelope Shift V Insert show hide pan envelope P Insert remove pan envelope Shift P Create a loop from the current selection Alt L Show set focus to the Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 _or Alt Shift L Stop or cancel the current action including playback Esc S Split event at cursor position when the Event tool tfs is selected APPENDIX A 323 Cursor movement shortcuts Command Keyboard Shortcut Move one pixel right left Right Arrow Left Arrow Go to end of file Ctrl Right Arrow Go to the next region loop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file Go to beginning of file Ctrl Left Arrow Go to the previous region loop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file file Move one sample right left Ctrl Alt Right Arrow Left Arrow Show the Go To dialog Ctrl G Go to the first sample visible in the waveform display or beginning of selection Home Go to the first sample in the data window Ctrl Home Go to the last sample visible in the waveform display or end of selection End Go to the last sample in the data window Ctrl End Move 10 of the current vi
494. rl Shift Left Arrow Shift numeric keypad Shift numeric keypad Shift Ctrl numeric keypad Shift Ctrl numeric keypad T Shift T Z Shift Z Tab Shift Tab lt gt Backspace Sor Alt L Alt Shift L APPENDIX A 325 Navigation and playback shortcuts Command Save a view in cell lt Number gt where lt Number gt ranges from 1 to 8 Restore a view using cell lt Number gt where lt Number gt ranges from 1 to 8 Move cursor to corresponding marker or select corresponding region Increase time magnification Zoom in Decrease time magnification zoom out Increase level magnification Decrease level magnification Zoom to selection if a selection exists otherwise Zoom In Full or Zoom event when the Event tool 4 is selected Zoom normal zooms to default zoom ratio set in Preferences Display custom zoom ratio 1 Display custom zoom ratio 2 Pan data window up down if zoomed in vertically Switch cursor to opposite end of selection Set Mark In at the current cursor position Set Mark Out at the current cursor position Play or Stop the contents of the data window in default mode Play All Play Pause Switch play mode through Normal Plug In Chainer Play as Sample and Play as Cutlist playback modes Stop playback Toggle looped playback Seek cursor on playback Preview cut skip selection on playback with pre roll Play to cursor with pre roll Scrub playback Toggle playback scrolling on and o
495. rmation contained in the sound is lost when it is compressed The amount of sound degradation is dependent upon the algorithm e Compressed audio requires more processing time than uncompressed data The amount of processing time is dependent on the algorithm as well as the system s hardware Typically opening and saving compressed files takes longer than uncompressed files e Compressed files are not as portable as uncompressed files To distribute WAV files in a compressed format you must verify that the audience can use them Also not all audio software can use compressed WAV files which may make using other applications with the Sound Forge software difficult In Sound Forge software any compressed WAV file can be opened if a compatible ACM driver is installed If no compatible ACM driver is available for a compressed WAV file you are alerted to the problem Saving compressed WAV files is as simple as specifying the compression algorithm in the Format drop down list of the Custom Settings dialog Once a compressed file is saved updates to the file are automatically saved using the selected compression algorithm The compression format can be changed later or reverted to an uncompressed format using the Save As dialog APPENDIX B 331 Transparent playback and recording of non hardware supported audio files The second component of the ACM is called the Sound Mapper It allows playback and recording of audio data formats that are n
496. rmation relating to the contents of this manual will be posted on the Sony Creative Software Inc web site located at http www sonycreativesoftware com The software is provided to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement and Software Privacy Policy and must be used and or copied in accordance therewith Copying or distributing the software except as expressly described in the End User License Agreement is strictly prohibited No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express written consent of Sony Creative Software Inc Copyright 2009 Sony Creative Software Inc Program Copyright 2009 Sony Creative Software Inc All rights reserved Hp le re Celluce alc ie at ne en ee eS 17 Contents Introducing Sound Forge Pro Software ec ccc cece eee teen eet eeeeneneeees 17 Eca e a oe ee E ee er ee eee Te reer 17 System VEGUIFEIMGINS rsrs docu hceene irani doen inbncaene ering apimcesendonsncisencaseus 17 TOCAR SUDDO a1 bowser nese E E A ENE ar E einen seen cus neekaueens 17 Installing Sound Forge Pro Software cece ccc ccc eee eee teen eee eeneneeees 18 Geng NEID eerren Er serosa bonus beste mek TEE EO EEEE EE 18 One WENO erea cose E E ane E E EAR A E EROE 18 AEP ACTIVE TULONIAIS oerrinne EEEE TAE NEEE 19 A DONEN Derer a E E E E A N A 19 Learning the Sound Forge Pro Workspace cece ccc ccc cece eeeaees 21 WISIING UNG TOUS E aera E nn Garcinw sar
497. rn off snapshots Viewing frequency and amplitude values notes and statistics As you move the cursor through the spectrum graph the amplitude and frequency values at the current position are displayed in a ToolTip next to the cursor and in the Statistics area at the bottom of the window pamen e ee pcg r E3 a a 23 4101s d Use the cursor to display amplitude and frequency values 2 664 69 93 123 Snapshot 1 45 dB at 86 Hz 2 Statistics area Right click the graph and choose Show Position from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of ToolTips The setting for each graph in a multichannel file is independent If you want to display the nearest musical note equivalent of the cursor position in a ToolTip right click the graph and choose Show Notes from the shortcut menu 7 H t E wey ia JECT m _ T s a Dm o01 2 3 4 2 8 Use the cursor to display musical note equivalent Frequency Hz 2 571 E8 Decibels dB 72 91 FFT Bin 119 Peak 45 dB at 86 Hz F3 Right click the Spectrum Analysis window and choose Show Statistics from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the Statistics area at the bottom of the Spectrum Analysis window USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 275 Navigating a spectrum graph After a spectrum graph is displayed Grab Pan mode allows you to scroll vertically and horizontally To enable Grab Pan mode right click th
498. roken down into three modes e Mode 1 Contains the running times from both the beginning of the disc total disc time and the beginning of the track track relative time e Mode 2 Identifies the track number who recorded the track where it was recorded and in what year e Mode 3 Identifies UPC media catalog number for the disc A special mode of Q data is stored within the lead in area This Q data contains information on two or four channel format copy protection and pre emphasis APPENDIX E 347 Quantization Quantization is the process by which measurements are rounded to discrete values Specifically with respect to audio quantization is a function of the analog to digital conversion process The continuous variation of the voltages of a analog audio signal are quantized to discrete amplitude values represented by digital binary numbers The number of bits available to describe these values determines the resolution or accuracy of quantization For example if you have 8 bit analog to digital converters the varying analog voltage must be quantized to 1 of 256 discrete values a 16 bit converter has 65 536 values Quantization Noise Quantization noise is a result of describing an analog signal in discrete digital terms see quantization This noise is most easily heard in low resolution digital sounds that have low bit depths and sounds like a shhhhh type sound while the audio is playing It becomes more apparent when the signal
499. rom the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 3 Click the Clear button to remove the selected layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu If you want to replace the selected layout select a layout in the Available layouts in current folder box and click the Replace button 4 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Note Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu does not remove the ForgeWindowLayout file from your computer Deleting a layout from your computer 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 304 CHAPTER 22 3 Click the Delete Layout button to remove the selected layout from your computer Note You cannot delete a layout that is included in the Current layouts in menu ist First select the layout in the Current layouts in menu list and click the Clear button Next select the layout in the Available layouts in current folder ist and click the Delete Layout button 4 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Customizing the Time Display window From the Options menu choose Time Display and choose an option from the submenu to adjust the Time D
500. ropping 74 audio event locator configuring 85 scrubbing with 84 Audio Restoration plug in 42 153 audio synthesis DTMF MF tones 153 FM synthesis 154 155 simple 155 auditioning recorded audio 140 Auto Preview button 57 Auto Region tool button 42 musical time intervals 122 rapid sound attacks 122 Auto Trim Crop process 40 171 172 Auto crossfade Mix with selection preference 74 Automatic Crossfades command 161 Automatic retake recording mode 139 140 automatically labeling markers 115 regions 123 automating effect parameters 200 automation effects 201 auto scrolling 60 auto snapping disabling at high magnifications 96 Batch Converter button 42 43 creating or editing batch jobs 233 metadata 234 running existing batch jobs 232 BICSF 335 bit depth decreasing 102 defined 102 increasing 102 Bit Depth Converter 40 172 173 blinking status while recording 141 bonus tracks 290 Broadcast Wave window 27 Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog 42 298 299 INDEX i Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog 42 284 285 burning CDs See disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning bypassing processes while previewing 169 calculating loop tempo 265 CD index markers 287 CD information editing 58 submitting to Gracenote 58 window 28 CD layout bar deleting CD tracks 291 end of disc indicator 291 hiding 292 pause time 292 reordering CD tracks 291 trimming CD tracks 291 CD Text editing
501. rrent data window check boxes The files will be added to the end of the current data window and a CD track will be created for each file Tip You can use the Default time between CD tracks control on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog to adjust the default pause time For more information see CD Settings tab on page 315 Creating new data windows using audio files on your computer If no audio files are open in the Sound Forge workspace a new data window will be created when you drop files on the Track List window 1 Close all open data windows 2 Inthe Windows Explorer or Explorer window select the files that you want to include in your CD You can hold Shift or Ctrl to select multiple files BURNING CDS 289 3 Drag the files to the Track List When you drop the files a track is created for each file and pause time is added before each track la anali a k3 ctr i 00 05 00 e 4 00 15 00 j Track 1 White Track 2 Shine Track 3 Play EEA 00 03 30 933 00 03 28 426 J li lt e Mh gt b i lae K gt E gt o Rate 0 00 wW 00 15 28 773 4 61 779 A Pause time Tips e When you create tracks using media files that include title and artist metadata this information will be added to the Track List window as CD Text e You can use the Default time between CD tracks control on the CD Settings tab of
502. rs separate the names by a semicolon and a blank Engineer Joe Mixer Matt Describes the classification of the original work Separate multiple keywords with a semicolon and a blank Madison aerial view scenery Describes the changes in lightness settings on the digitizer required to produce the file The format of this information depends on hardware used Describes the format of the original subject of the file The title of the subject of the file such as Madison From Above The number of colors requested when digitizing an image The name of the title the file was originally intended for such as Encyclopedia of Midwest Geography Describes the contents of the file such as Aerial view of Madison The name of the software package used to create the file Identifies the changes in sharpness for the digitizer required to produce the file The format of this information depends on the hardware used The name of the person or organization who supplied the original subject of the file The original form of the material that was digitized such as slide paper map and so forth This is not necessarily the same as IMED The technician who digitized the file Sets the title that is displayed for Microsoft Sound Systems The length of the file in milliseconds The track number of the media from the original source media The Web address associated with the file Sets the version of the file You can use versioning inf
503. rsor where you want to place the command marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Command or press C The Command Properties dialog appears 3 Complete the Command Properties dialog a Fromthe Template drop down list select a custom template For more information see Saving command properties as a custom template on page 119 b From the Command drop down list select the type of command you wish to create or type a custom command c Enter parameters to define the behavior of the command in the Parameter box d Specify the timing of the command in the Position box This value is automatically set to the current cursor position Command Properties Template Untitled Hx Command URL Parameter http www sonycreativesoftware com Position 00 00 03 078 Ea 4 Click OK The new command marker appears in the data window BB Example music bed D RO XT JA URL t w ww sonycrestivesoftware com j00 00 05 i f j00 00 5 At 00 00 00 4 05 Inf 4 4 0 5 K a Et lt P 00 00 03 078 1 956 Editing command properties Right click a command marker and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to open the Command Properties dialog and edit the marker Saving command properties as a custom template If you plan to use a command more than once you can save command properties as a template You can then reuse the command properties by selecting the template from the Template drop down list
504. rward Three letters JKL are used as a keyboard scrub control e Press J for reverse playback Press again to accelerate the playback rate Press K to pause playback e Press L for forward playback Press again to accelerate the playback rate There are several ways to adjust the playback speed e Hold K while pressing J or L to emulate a shuttle knob mode e Press K J to turn the knob to the left or K L to turn the knob to the right e Press K again or Spacebar to return to normal mode Scrubbing with the audio event locator Dragging the mouse within the overview bar initiates playback of small audio loops adjacent to the cursor position This is not technically a scrub function but it serves a similar purpose It allows you to audition brief audio segments and quickly locate specific events within a file Playback stops when the mouse button is released 84 CHAPTER 4 Configuring the audio event locator You can set the amount of pre roll and loop duration for the audio event locator 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Previews tab 3 Inthe Audio event locator section edit the Pre roll and Loop time values as desired and click OK Zooming and magnifying Because there are considerably more samples in a sound file than horizontal points pixels on the screen many data samples must be represented by each horizontal point when audio data displays in the data window D
505. ry when Quantize to Frames is enabled the snap point will be quantized to the nearest frame boundary 96 CHAPTER 4 Creating and using views Views are used to save and recall selections zoom ratios and waveform display positions Sound Forge software can retain eight different views for any audio file each containing any or all of the following elements Selection Cursor position e Magnification e Position scroll bar placement Tip Views are discarded when you close the file To save views with a file save the file as part of a workspace For more information see Saving files as a workspace on page 67 Displaying the Views toolbar 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars 2 Select the Views check box and click OK The Views toolbar appears Views X 1 2 3 A5 G amp G F 8 Creating views Open the Voiceover pca file and create a selection containing Wow Click the Set button on the Views toolbar A view can now be created Click the 1 button 1 The selection is saved as view 1 and the 1 button 1 is underscored to indicate that a view was created Create a new selection anywhere in the audio file preferably at an increased magnification Click the Set button 6 followed by the 2 button 2 The selection is saved as view 2 Click the 1 button 1 The view 1 selection is used ay ek oF oe a Click the 2 button 2 The view 2 selection is used NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 97
506. s and save the file with a descriptive name 262 CHAPTER 17 Editing loops for ACID software You can use a number of tools to prepare audio for use in ACID software Halving or doubling a loop These commands allow you to quickly change the size of a selection B Drum Fill re oC fa BB Drum Fill ice fot aS E Drum Fill Ee a m a 4E 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 00 00 02 000 a 00 00 00 000 100 00 01 000 r y j00 00 02 000 ram ajj lt i e a aji lt ft r a K gt E gt 00 00 00 470 00 00 00 766 00 00 00 295 1 256 K gt E gt 00 00 00 470 00 00 00 618 00 00 00 147 1 256 K gt E gt 00 00 00 470 00 00 01 061 00 00 00 591 1 256 Loop Half loop Double loop Halving a loop From the Edit menu choose Selection and choose Halve from the submenu Doubling a loop From the Edit menu choose Selection and choose Double from the submenu Shifting a selection left or right The shift selection commands allow you to quickly create a new selection adjacent to the current selection while maintaining the size of the original Creating a new selection to the left of the current selection From the Edit menu choose Selection and choose Shift Left from the submenu Tip You can also click the Shift Selection Left button on the Navigation toolbar or press lt Creating a new selection to the right of the current selection From the Edit menu choos
507. s box The default value is 4 7 From the File menu choose Save As and save the file with a descriptive name LOOPING 261 Creating an ACID beatmapped file ACID beatmapped files can change tempo and pitch to match an ACID project You must specify the file s original tempo and root note for transposing upon configuration If you do not specify these values no tempo or key changes occur Beatmapped files are typically used in ACID software version 3 0 or later for extended vocal tracks or other long audio files that do not loop 1 Open the Voiceover pca file and select the entire waveform 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu The ACID Properties window appears 3 Select ACID Beatmapped from the ACID type drop down list Complete the information for an ACID beatmapped file e Select a value from the Root note for transposing drop down list so that ACID software can transpose the file to match the project key Select Don t transpose from this list to keep the key from being changed e Specify the file s original tempo 40 300 bpm in the Tempo box so that ACID software can stretch the file to match the project tempo For more information see Setting loop tempo on page 265 e Enter a value in the Downbeat offset samples box to indicate the location of the first downbeat ACID Properties Name Don t transpose 120 000 44 099 4 From the File menu choose Save A
508. s check box and type a number in the box if you want Sound Forge to number new regions after you insert one Insert leading zeros in field Select this check box and specify a field width if you want to use leading zeros in width of region names when you insert one For example if you specify a field width of 3 regions numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 4 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Selecting a region Right click the starting or ending region tag F and choose Select Region from the shortcut menu The region is highlighted Double click the start or end region tag The region is highlighted USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 123 Moving a region 1 Drag the desired region tag F to a new position Both associated region tags are highlighted 2 Release the mouse button The region s values update in the Regions List Tip To move both region tags at once press Alt while dragging Deleting a region Right click the region tag F and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Deleting all markers and regions Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All from the submenu All markers and regions are removed Deleting all markers and regions within the selected area Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All in Selection from the submenu All markers and regions in the selected area are removed Previewing a re
509. s format and make note of how each format appears Notes e Selecting a new format changes the status format for the current data window only e To quickly change a file s status format right click any of the data window s status display boxes and choose a new format from the shortcut menu Configuring the Measures amp Beats format Choosing the Measures amp Beats format allows you to specify the beats per minute and beats per measure values used to calculate measures and beats Changing a file s beat values 1 From the Options menu choose Status Format and then choose Edit Tempo from the submenu The Edit Tempo dialog appears Edit Tempo Wow sound editing Start 00 00 00 000 hr mn sc xxx OK End 00 00 05 000 Cancel Length 00 00 05 000 Input format Time ka S Flay Selection length in beats 10 000 Bsa kiipe Tempo in beats per minute 120 000 Number of beats in a measure 4 2 Type an appropriate value in the Tempo in beats per minute box 3 Type an appropriate value in the Number of beats in a measure box and click OK Alternately you can make a selection in the file equal to one measure and then type the number of beats in the sample measure in the Selection length in beats box The Tempo value is automatically calculated based on the selection length and number of beats GETTING STARTED 79 Changing the default beat values The previous procedure changes the beat values f
510. s on page 171 Auto Trim Crop controls The following controls are located in the Auto Trim Crop dialog Control Function Attack threshold Release threshold Fade in Fade out Description This drop down list contains five modes Keep edges outside of the selection Removes silence within the selection but retains all data outside of the selection Remove edges outside of the selection Removes silence within the selection and deletes all data beyond the selection Remove silence between phrases creates regions Removes silence within the selection and creates regions from individual phrases For more information see Minimum inter phrase silence on page 172 Remove data beyond loop points Removes all data beyond the selected loop For more information see Minimum length following loop end on page 172 Remove data from start and limit file length Allows you to specify an amount of sound to be deleted from the beginning of each file and specify a maximum length for converted files If a file is longer than this length it is trimmed This preset is useful for creating sample clips Determines the threshold level for detection of the trim crop start point Inf indicates complete silence and 0 dB indicates maximum amplitude level Determines the threshold level for detection of the trim crop end point Inf indicates complete silence and 0 dB indicates maximum amplitude level Determines the length in milliseconds
511. s the amount of the original channel data that will be mixed to the new file Invert Mix Select this check box to reverse the polarity of the new channel More Click this button to view additional options that you can use to adjust your data window selection For more information see Adjusting the data window selection on page 170 DC Offset Audio that is not centered around the zero baseline in the waveform display is said to have a DC offset DC offsets are typically caused by electrical conflicts between the sound card and input device The DC Offset function located on the Process menu is used to change the baseline of an audio file by adding a constant value to each sample to compensate for offsets DC Offset Example music bed et a Preset H x canel e Automatically detect and remove O 7 Preview O Adjust DC offset by 32 768 to 32 767 D Bypass W Compute DC offset from first 5 seconds only peee ore 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Estimating DC Offset You can estimate the DC offset of an audio file by choosing Statistics from the Tools menu E Statistics Example music bed Ruler Format Time r Level Format Decibels dB on Time 00 00 00 000 Sample value at cursor dB 52 139 Minimum sample position Time 00 00 01 096 Minimum sample value dB 40 723 Maximum sample position Time 00 00 01 101 Maximum sample value dB 2 228 RMS level dB 22 6
512. s to other data windows or to the workspace to create new data windows Editing events Copying events You can copy events to the clipboard and paste them into any data window You can copy a single event or multiple events Copying preserves the original event information edits and other modifications Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not affected and do not change 1 Select the events to be copied For more information see Selecting events on page 164 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar The selected events are copied to the clipboard and the waveform is unchanged 158 CHAPTER 10 Cutting events Cutting events removes them from the file but places the cut information on the clipboard After the events are on the clipboard you can paste them into any data window Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut 1 Select the events to be cut For more information see Selecting events on page 164 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut or click the Cut button 34 on the Standard toolbar The selected events are removed from the data window and placed on the clipboard Pasting events After events are copied or cut to the clipboard you can paste them to a different place in the file or to a different data window 1 Move the cursor to the desired location on the timeline 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste
513. sample This high level of zoom can be useful when editing with the Pencil tool 4 For more information see Repairing audio glitches manually with the Pencil tool on page 152 a Example music bed P R08 eee amp At 00 00 00 070 Waveform at 24 1 zoom ratio K gt i m p gt Rate 0 00 i 00 00 00 000 NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 85 Changing the zoom ratio To edit the zoom ratio use the Zoom In Out spin control located adjacent to the zoom ratio display e Clicking the plus minus buttons increases decreases the zoom ratio by single step increments e Dragging the spin control increments the zoom ratio quickly in the corresponding direction Notes e When a file is opened the horizontal magnification is set to the value specified by the Normal zoom ratio setting in the Display tab in the Preferences dialog To access the Preferences dialog choose Preferences from the Options menu e Right clicking the waveform display allows you to quickly access time ruler zoom commands from the shortcut menu Using zoom time commands If you prefer using commands you can control the time magnification from the View menu The following table briefly describes the available time zoom commands You can access these commands from the View menu by choosing Zoom Time and choosing the desired command from the submenu Command Description In Full Increases the zoom ratio to represent each audio sample with 24 screen pix
514. sampled at a lower rate sample points are removed from the sound file decreasing its size but also decreasing its available frequency range Resampling to a higher sample rate Sound Forge software will interpolate extra sample points in the sound file This increases the size of the sound file but does not increase the quality When downsampling be aware of aliasing See also Aliasing on page 337 Root Mean Square RMS The Root Mean Square RMS of a sound is a measurement of the intensity of the sound over a period of time The RMS level of a sound corresponds to the loudness perceived by a listener when measured over small intervals of time 348 APPENDIX E Ruler Level The level ruler is the area on a data window to the left of the waveform display It shows the vertical axis units as a percentage or in decibels Ruler Time The time ruler is the area on a data window above the waveform display It shows the horizontal axis units as well as marker region and loop tags Ruler Tags Ruler tags are the small tab shaped controls on the time ruler that represent the location of markers regions and loop points in the waveform display Sample The word sample is used in many different and often confusing ways when talking about digital sound Here are some of the different meanings e Adiscrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing For example an audio CD ROM contains 44 100 samples per seco
515. sc at once tracks are present in your data window Play Plug In Chainer Previews the audio processed through plug ins when the Plug In Chainer window is open If there is a selection plays from the beginning of the selection to the end of the selection If the Plug In Chainer window is not open the Open Plug In Chainer button E is displayed instead Play as Cutlist Plays the file with the regions in the cutlist omitted This button is displayed only if you treat the playlist as a cutlist Play as Sample Plays the file with the sustaining and release loops repeating the specified number of times This button is displayed only if you have defined a sample loop When you play a file from the playbar a small horizontal line appears beneath the selected Play button s icon This indicates the current playback mode which is the mode used when you click the transport bar Play button For more information see Transport toolbar on page 37 Changing the current playback mode To change the current playback mode click a playbar button or press X Optional Rewind and Forward buttons You can choose to display Rewind 44 and Forward gt shuttle controls on the playbar From the Options menu choose Preferences and select the Show shuttle controls on Data Window transport check box on the General tab 34 CHAPTER 2 Toolbars Sound Forge toolbars contain buttons used to quickly perform many of the program s c
516. se pointer at the top of the event 2 When you see the envelope cursor drag the volume envelope to the desired level As you drag the event s decibel level is displayed in a ToolTip You can make fine adjustments by holding Ctrl or clicking the right mouse button while dragging the envelope Volume envelope if Gain is 1 00 dB Decibel level Note When you have multiple events selected the gain of all selected events is adjusted simultaneously 162 CHAPTER 10 Setting an event s fade in and fade out The event handles allow you to change an event s fade in and out volume You can also change the type of curve that the event uses to control the volume s fade in or fade out 1 Place the mouse pointer on a handle upper corners of the event The pointer changes to the fade cursor 2 Click the corner of the event and drag to create a fade Fade Offset 00 00 04 555 To remove a fade drag the end of the fade curve back to the edge of the event Changing an event s fade curve You can set the shape of the fade curve fast linear slow smooth or sharp that an event uses to raise or lower the volume over time To access the different fade curves right click anywhere in the event s fade in or fade out region and choose Fade Type from the shortcut menu Right click to select the fade curve type a N Fast l N i LA Linear hm Fa Smooth N Applying processes and effects to events When usin
517. se to have elements in the timeline snap to zero crossings From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Zero Crossings from the submenu to toggle snapping to zero crossings Tip To turn snapping to zero crossings on and off press Ctrl B Snapping the current selection From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose a command from the submenu to force the edges of the current selection to the points you choose Snapping helps you align your selection with items in the data window Note f you want to use snapping when positioning the cursor and making selections you can use the commands on the Options gt Snapping submenu to enable snapping and set snapping options The Selection submenu commands are explained below Command Snap to Grid Snap Edge to Grid Snap to Zero Snap Edge to Zero Description This option forces both edges of a selection to a whole time division as designated by the marks on the time ruler above the data window Tips e You can also press T e To change the resolution of the grid choose Status Format from the Options menu and then choose a setting from the submenu or right click the time ruler and choose a format from the shortcut menu This option forces the active edge of a selection to a whole time division as designated by the marks on the time ruler above the data window The active edge of a selection is defined by the blinking cursor Press Home or End to change the activ
518. section of audio 1 Place the mouse pointer on one of the shorter event s handles The fade cursor appears 2 Drag the handle to the desired position TI A j TEA AFATAN ER d fl bce J ul ta MN Events without crossfade Events with manual crossfade MATANT USING THE EVENT TOOL 161 Changing crossfade curves You can change the crossfade curves that are used to fade in and out between two events aA a F Right click a crossfade gt lt 7S eed to choose a different kral be crossfade curve y N NA X A XN NADI 1 Right click anywhere in the crossfade region to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Fade Type and then choose the desired fade type from the submenu Using event envelopes ASR You can apply envelopes to individual events Envelopes also known as ASRs attack sustain and release give you the ability to control an event s fade in fade out and overall volume level When you create an event handles are added that are used to set the envelope As you drag these handles on events a volume envelope appears indicating how the event is being affected i Envelope handles Event envelope a I Setting an event s volume When you place the mouse pointer at the top of an event the pointer changes to a hand cursor d that you can use to lower the event s overall volume 1 Place the mou
519. selected click Play All to play all samples in the data window Ifyou have samples selected click Play All to play all selected samples in the data window Play Plays the file in current playback mode Play Normal Play Plug In Chainer Play as Cutlist or Play as Sample Playback for musical instrument files behaves slightly differently than playback in a normal data window e If no samples are selected click Play to play all samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window e If you have samples selected click Play to play all selected samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window Pause Pauses playback and maintains the cursor at its current position Stop Stops playback and returns the cursor to its prior position Go to Start Moves the cursor to the start of the file Go to Previous Track Moves the cursor to the previous disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or hold Shift to extend a selection Note This button is available only if disc at once tracks are present in your data window Rewind Moves the cursor backward in the current file pp Forward Moves the cursor forward in the current file ppj Go to Next Track Moves the cursor to the next disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or press Shift to extend a selection Note This button is available only if disc at once tracks are present in y
520. selection If you lose a selection while editing you can step backward through the previous five time selections From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Cycle from the submenu or press Backspace From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Toggle from the submenu or press S or to switch between the last selection and the last cursor position 92 CHAPTER 4 Using selection grid lines From the Options menu choose Selection Grid Lines to display grid lines that divide the selection into four equal parts These lines make creating loops from existing material easier 6 0 To change the number of divisions that will be used choose Options gt Set Grid Divisions and then choose a setting from the submenu For example if you re trying to create a loop in 3 4 time changing the grid divisions to 3 allows you to divide a selection into three beats NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 93 Understanding snapping If when extending a selection the end points seem to jump to a different position an auto snap option is turned on Turn snapping on or off From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Enable from the submenu to turn snapping on or off When snapping is enabled objects will snap to the following points e The cursor e Time selection edges Tips To turn snapping on and off press F8 e Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping You can also choose t
521. set drop down list For more information see Saving plug in chains on page 195 Otherwise add the desired plug ins to a new custom chain For more information see Adding a plug in to a chain on page 193 Configure the parameters of each plug in For help on the different plug in controls click the Help for Effect button or click a control and press Shift F1 Click the Preview button to test the effect chain If needed you can select different parts of the audio in the data window to preview different sections before applying the effect chain You can also click the Bypass button tm to temporarily bypass the effect For more information see Bypassing effects on page 195 Tip You can also click the Play Plug in Chainer button on the data window to preview the effects chain Use the Play Normal button to bypass the effects If the effect changes the duration of a sound for example Reverb or Simple Delay choose how the audio tail created by the effect should be processed For more information see Selecting the processing mode for audio tail data on page 195 Note The Insert Tail Data and Mix Tail Data commands may not function when using third party reverb plug ins You can use the Insert Silence command to make room for the tails or apply the reverb in a new data window that has room for the tails and then mix the processed audio back into your source file Click the Process Selection button is or press Ctrl Shift
522. sing MIDI commands 116 updating to current cursor location 115 Measures amp Beats status format 38 79 80 viii INDEX metadata copying to clipboard 25 editing extended summary information 107 editing summary information 107 saving with files 107 viewing extended summary information 107 viewing summary information 107 meters channel 44 disabling 301 hardware 111 112 viewing 112 Microsoft Audio Compression Manager ACM 331 MIDI conflicting SCSI IDs 245 device configuration 248 devices 250 fine tune value 238 initiating playback 249 input synchronization 248 keyboard 243 244 open loop vs closed loop 237 periodic transfer failures 246 playback vs triggered playback 247 resetting triggers 249 Sample Dump Standard SDS 235 245 SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI 235 SMPTE 247 253 synchronizing while recording 140 timecode synchronization 251 253 trigger configuration 248 triggered playback 247 triggering markers 116 triggers 247 unity note 238 using commands to trigger regions 125 MIDI keyboard configuring 243 displaying 243 generating chords 244 specifying instruments 244 troubleshooting 243 turning on 243 window 25 minimizing quantization errors 103 104 Mix button 36 Mix Replace dialog 74 76 mixing by dragging and dropping 74 149 events 159 from clipboard 75 monitor for video previewing 270 monitoring audio input levels while recording 141 monitoring levels
523. sired impulse file and click Preview The processed audio file is played Notice that all dialog controls are set to their default values USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 209 4 Drag the Dry Out fader up Notice the audible change in output as the balance between the Wet Out and Dry Out values changes Tip f you are experiencing difficulty previewing processing in real time decrease the Quality speed value 5 Drag the Response delay slider to the right Notice the audible change in the reverb s delay The Acoustic Mirror dialog contains four tabs General Envelope Summary and Recover Each tab contains controls that allow you to precisely configure the effect as well as recover custom impulses Notice that the Acoustic Mirror dialog contains the preset and preview controls found in all of the Sound Forge process and effect dialogs For more information see Applying presets on page 167 and Previewing processed audio on page 169 General tab controls The following sections describe all controls located in the General tab Control Impulse Response width Response delay Pan left to right Dry Out Wet Out Apply envelope and limit decay to seconds Low shelf start frequency High shelf start frequency Convert mono to stereo Quality speed 210 CHAPTER 13 Description The Impulse drop down list allows you to specify an impulse file from a list of those previously used Clicking Browse displays th
524. so workspaces adding to View menu 304 deleting from computer 304 loading saved layouts 304 overview 303 removing from View menu 304 saving 303 windows docking 23 floating 23 hiding docked windows 24 preventing from docking 23 Windows Media files markers and script commands 118 streaming media commands 118 workspaces See also window layouts opening 68 overview 67 saving 68 writing CDs See disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning zero crossings finding for loops 259 Snapping to 95 Zoom In Full button 38 Zoom Level commands 87 Zoom Normal button 38 Zoom Selection button 38 Zoom Time commands 86 88 zooming custom settings 88 events 165 horizontally 85 level ruler 86 87 level ruler with Magnify tool 90 shortcuts 89 time and level ruler with Magnify tool 90 time commands 86 time ruler 85 time ruler with Magnify tool 90 vertically 86 87 Zoom Level commands 87 zoom ratio 85 86 xvi INDEX
525. sor jumps to the new location and playback continues The feature is useful for quickly navigating a file and locating general events NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 83 Scrubbing Scrubbing is a type of timeline playback that gives you precise control over the speed and direction of playback Both linear and logarithmic scale scrubbing are allowed Tip Choose a setting from the JKL shuttle speed drop down list on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to control the scrub speed and range when using the keyboard or multimedia controllers Scrubbing with the scrub control slider The scrub control slider gt located at the bottom of the data window can be dragged back and forth The farther from the center that the slider is dragged the faster the playback both forward and in reverse H H E gt e Bate 0 00 ser 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 732 1 345 Note You can also drag the Normal Rate indicator which is located below the scrub control to adjust playback speed or double click Rate and type a playback rate Scrubbing on the timeline You can scrub the project by using the timeline Position the cursor on the timeline hover the mouse pointer over the cursor and press Ctrl Left click and drag the mouse left or right to scrub the timeline The cursor changes again to a pan scrub icon OO OS 4 Left click and drag to scrub Scrubbing with the keyboard Keyboard scrub letters Reverse Pause Fo
526. ss critical warnings that will result in an unreadable disc Use SPTI Direct for CD burning Select this check box if you want to use SPTI SCSI Pass Through Interface to communicate with your CD burning drive Overwrite CD Text autodetection If the software incorrectly detects that your CD recorder is not able to write CD Text select this check results box to turn on CD Text writing for your drive Note Check the documentation provided with your CD recorder to determine whether the drive is able to write CD Text Include Wide SCSI devices when Select this check box if you want to scan for wide SCSI CD drives when you attempt to extract data from searching for drives or burn CDs When the check box is cleared the application will not scan for wide SCSI devices which can increase compatibility with some USB device drivers that incorrectly identify themselves as wide SCSI Skip drive database autodetect When the check box is cleared an internal configuration file is used to determine your drive s drive capabilities on startup capabilities If you encounter problems burning CDs select this check box and your drive to determine its capabilities when the application starts Automatically detect CD length Select this check box if you want to automatically detect the length of your blank CDs when you insert them in your drive When this check box is cleared the Default CD length minutes setting is used and you can click the CD Time Remain
527. submenu The Bit Depth Converter dialog appears 3 From the Bit depth drop down list choose 8 bit 4 f desired choose an option from the Dither drop down list For more information see Dither on page 103 5 If desired choose a Noise shaping type For more information see Noise shaping on page 103 6 Click OK Note There are no rules regarding maintaining audio quality when decreasing bit depth Experiment with the Dither and Noise shaping controls to determine the optimum settings for each audio file 102 CHAPTER 5 Understanding dither and noise shaping You can adjust Dither and Noise shaping settings when decreasing a file s bit depth Dither The Dither value determines the randomness of the dither generated noise used to mask quantization distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth This drop down list requires you to select from several shapes each of which roughly describes the pattern that would be produced if you plotted a graph with the dither amplitude on the X axis and the probability of the dither values on the Y axis As is frequently the case when working with audio you should experiment with dither values to yield the best results However keep the following information in mind Setting Description Half Rectangular Eliminates distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth but the noise level is more likely to be dependent on the signal This setting uses a maximum dither noise
528. supports multiple inputs you can use Sound Forge to perform multichannel recording Tips Sound Forge is not a multitrack editor Check out our Vegas and ACID families of products for full multitrack recording and editing You can use multichannel recording to create surround audio or capture field recordings Ifyou experience gapping or glitching when recording multichannel audio try increasing your buffer size You can increase the Record buffering setting on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog or click the Advanced button on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to increase your device s buffers 1 Connect your audio sources to your sound card s inputs For more information on connecting audio sources refer to your sound card s user documentation 2 Enable your recording inputs a From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Audio tab b Choose your recording device from the Audio device type drop down list c Click the Record tab d Select the Enable check box for each input you want to enable for recording and then select a radio button to assign the input to an audio channel In the following example the signal from Analog in 1 is recorded to channel 1 Analog in 2 is recorded to channel 2 and so on Enable 1 2 3 4 5 a Analog out 1 O O O O Analog out 2 H i i O Analog out 3 O n H Analog out 4 H O H O Analog out 5 H H H O Analog out 6 O H O O H Analog out 7 H H O O O A
529. sustaining loop 1 Open the Drumhit pca file and create a selection containing the snare hit at the beginning of the waveform B Drum Hit kalajem 00 00 01 000 j00 00 02 000 j00 00 C lt u j xp p gt of Rate 0 00 aay 00 00 00 005 00 00 00 133 00 00 00 128 1 256 With the Loop Playback button selected in the transport bar click the Play Normal button on the playbar to preview the loop LOOPING 255 3 From the Insert menu choose Sample Loop or press Alt L The data window displays the appropriate tags in the ruler to specify the loop s start and end points The Play as Sample button appears on the playbar E Drum Hit a F Sustaining Loop q M Loopstart and end tags amp AE 50 00 00 000 00 00 00 100 so il 4 Right click the sustaining loop and choose Edit Sample Loop from the shortcut menu or press Alt Shift L The Sampler Loops window appears Sampler Loops Value Sustaining 00 00 000 to 0 2 997 00 00 00 005 nd 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 133 ngth 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 128 La oo La n C a La La int 0 to 999 iterations Infinite tar 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 99 7 00 00 00 000 DUAA WI 1997 00 00 00 000 ount 1 to 999 iterations 1 Irr 5 In the Sustain count box choose Custom and then type a value of 10 Press Enter 6 Click the Play as Sample button on the pl
530. t be available Tip Ifyou want to be able to undo edit operations even after closing and reopening your file save a Sound Forge project Select this check box if you want to use higher precision IEEE floating point temporary files for audio files This setting results in more accurate processing but requires more disk space and yields slower processing When the check box is cleared the bit depth of the temporary file will match the source file When this check box is selected you can hold Ctrl while dragging the cursor to scrub in data windows CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 307 Option Allow Ctrl drag style zoom in data windows Automatically name regions and markers if not playing Always open dropped files in new window Show Transport menu Recently used file list Temporary files and record folder Display tab Description When this check box is selected you can hold Ctrl and drag in a data window to zoom to a selection When regions and markers are added this option automatically prompts you for a name This does not happen when adding markers on the fly during playback When this check box is selected files that are dropped onto the Sound Forge workspace are automatically opened in a new data window When this check box is selected the Transport menu is available in the Sound Forge menu bar Select the check box if you want to display a list of recently used files on the File menu Use the edit b
531. t click the Record dialog and choose Blinking Status from the shortcut menu A check mark displays adjacent to the command to indicate that the frame is configured to flash Extracting audio from CDs You can extract data from CDs and open tracks in the Sound Forge workspace Tip Double click a cda file in the Explorer window or drag it to the workspace to extract a CD track without opening the Extract Audio from CD dialog You can also extract audio from the Open dialog by choosing CD Audio cda from the Files of type drop down list in the Open dialog 1 Insert a CD in the drive 2 From the File menu choose Extract Audio from CD The system s drives are identified The Extract Audio from CD dialog is displayed If the system is equipped with multiple CD ROM or DVD ROM drives you must select the desired drive from the Drive drop down list near the bottom of the dialog Extract Audio from CD ae Action lead by track OK Tracks to extract Cancel Track Type Stark End Lengh 01 Shine Audio 00 02 00 03 34 70 0332 7 Refresh 02 Play Audio 0334 70 07 05 27 0330 4 03 One of These Days Audio 07 05 27 11 50 17 O4446 Play 04 white Audio 11 50 17 15 32 58 0342 4 05 Synergy Audio 1532 58 18 25 26 03 524 MusiclD 0E 100 Unnamed Things Audio 19 25 26 2330 21 0404 mm een vom pre ba A Li SS S O Mmd m e Co Info i ii F Create regions for each track Create markers for each index ch
532. t dialog to specify a folder and file name 3 Click Save USING MARKERS REGIONS AND THE PLAYLIST CUTLIST 131 Opening a Playlist Cutlist file Importing a Playlist file offers the flexibility of using multiple Playlists for a file Opening a new Playlist file clears the current Playlist Make sure you have saved the current Playlist before continuing 1 From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and choose Open from the submenu or right click the Playlist Cutlist and choose Open from the shortcut menu 2 Use the Open Regions Playlist window to browse to an existing regions file 3 Specify the type of file you want to import from the Files of Type drop down list e Choose Playlist File sfl to import a Sound Forge Regions List Playlist file e Choose Session 8 File prm to import a file that supports both Session 8 and Sound Forge regions e Choose Windows Media Script File txt to import a file that includes Windows Media script commands e Choose Wave File wav to import markers and regions from another sound file 4 Click Open Copying the Playlist Cutlist to the clipboard Editing a Playlist Cutlist in a text editor allows you to make an annotated list that you can print for reference From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and then choose Copy onto Clipboard or right click the Playlist Cutlist and choose Copy onto Clipboard from the shortcut menu The list is copied to the Windows clipboard for use with a tex
533. t editor 132 CHAPTER 7 Chapter 8 Recording and Extracting Audio This chapter describes the processes for recording audio and extracting audio from a CD in Sound Forge Pro software Recording audio Sound Forge provides two central methods for recording manual normal and automatic In normal recording you choose your settings and control your recording session while you re sitting at your PC With automatic recording you can choose your settings and set your trigger parameters for recording automatically whether you re at your PC or not Sound Forge also allows you to record multichannel audio if your audio device supports multiple inputs Specifying recording and playback options Basic audio preferences From the Options menu choose Preferences and select the Audio tab to specify recording and playback options For more information see Basic audio preferences on page 316 Advanced audio preferences The Advanced Audio Configuration dialog allows you to view information about and adjust settings for the playback or recording device selected on the Preferences window from the Options menu choose Preferences Audio tab To view advanced preferences click the Advanced button For more information see Advanced audio preferences on page 317 RECORDING AND EXTRACTING AUDIO 133 Recording manually You can record into an existing window or create a new window at the time of recording If you have an audio device that
534. t includes title and artist metadata this information will be added to the Track List window as CD Text In order to burn valid CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist information is optional If the Title box in the CD Information window or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed e You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text 1 Add title and artist information for your CD a From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose CD Information from the submenu The CD Information window appears b Inthe Name Title CD Text box type the name of the CD c Inthe Artist CD Text box type the name of the artist who performed the material on the disc CD Information 100 Unnamed Things The Dorothy Heralds Al BURNING CDS 297 2 Add title and artist information for each track on your CD a From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Track List to display the Track List window b Double click the Title CD Text box and type the name of the track c Double click the Artist CD Text box and type the name of the artist who performed the track Shine The Dorothy Heralds Play The Dorothy Heralds One of These Days The Dorothy Heralds 3 Burn your disc Select the Write CD Text check box in the Burn Disc at On
535. t input focus to the Hardware Meters window Alt 5 Show set input focus to the Channel Meters window Alt 6 Show set input focus to the Undo Redo History window Alt 7 Show set input focus to the Spectrum Analysis window Alt 8 Show set input focus to the Plug In Chainer window Alt 9 Show set input focus to the Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 0 Show set input focus to the MIDI Keyboard window Ctrl Alt 1 Show set input focus to the Script Editor window Ctrl Alt 2 Show set input focus to the Loop Tuner window Ctrl Alt 3 Show set input focus to the Regions List Ctrl Alt M O Show set input focus to the Playlist Cutlist window Ctrl Alt M 1 Show set input focus to the Track List window Ctrl Alt M 2 Show set input focus to the ACID Properties window Ctrl Alt M 3 Show set input focus to the Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 Show set input focus to the CD Information window Ctrl Alt M 5 Show set input focus to the Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 or Alt Shift L Show set input focus to the Summary Information window Ctrl Alt M 7 Tile the data windows vertically Shift F4 Restore the Sound Forge application window Alt F5 Recall window layout Alt Shift D then press 0 9 Save window layout Ctrl Alt D then press 0 9 Load default window layout Alt Shift D then press D Load Red Book authoring window layout Alt Shift D then press R Load 5 1 channel video window layout Alt Shift D then press V Cascade the data windows Shift F5 Restore the active data w
536. t once CD burning burning CDs 284 285 closing CDs 285 defined 283 mono tracks 283 sample rate correction 283 Transport menu 308 Transport toolbar 37 Triangular dither 173 Trigger from MIDI Timecode button 39 triggered playback 247 triggered region playback 249 triggering markers with MIDI commands 116 triggering regions with MIDI commands 125 triggers overview 247 resetting 249 Trim Crop button 36 trimming CD tracks 291 294 events 159 selections 74 171 172 troubleshooting Acoustic Mirror 218 MIDI keyboard 243 SCSI SMDI 245 system performance 301 302 tuning sonograms 280 tutorials 19 Undo button 36 Undo Redo History window 24 76 78 undoing operations 76 78 unity note 238 Update loop bar on Mark In Out preference 91 updating displays 301 302 sonograms 279 Spectrum Analysis graphs 276 Vegas software 69 Vibrato effect 41 208 video animating video strip 268 attaching to audio files 270 copying current frame to clipboard 268 detaching from audio files 271 external monitor 270 frame animation 267 frame numbering 268 overview 59 previewing 269 270 saving 272 video strip 267 Video Preview window 24 269 270 viewing Playlist 128 Regions List 126 views 38 97 Views toolbar 38 97 Volume process 40 190 volume unit meters See VU PPM meters VU PPM meters 46 47 Wave Hammer 41 221 223 Web publishing files to 80 INDEX xv window layouts See al
537. t the plug in to suppress dithering noise during silent portions of your audio Minimize peaks Select this check box if you want to suppress peaks in the dither noise signal Silence harmonics Select this check box if dithering distorts the timbre of your audio When the check box is selected harmonic quantization distortion is moved away from the overtones of audible frequencies 3 Click OK Channel Converter The Channel Converter is used to change the number of channels in an audio file The Channel Converter dialog can also be used to reverse the channels of a stereo file or intermix the channels of a multichannel file to create interesting panning effects Tip To perform quick channel conversion without specifying the mix use the Audio channels box on the File Properties window or right click the Channels box in the status bar and choose a setting from the shortcut menu For more information see Editing file properties on page 99 Notes e Ifyou want to apply a panning envelope to a mono file use the Channel Converter to convert the file to stereo first e You can use mono files in the Pan Expand dialog accessible from the Process menu by choosing Pan Expand if you choose Pan preserve stereo separation or Pan mix channels before panning from the Process mode drop down list When you click OK to apply your changes the file will be converted to stereo and your panning settings will be applied Converting a mono file to ster
538. ta formats APPENDIX E 343 Invert Data Inverting sound data reverses the polarity of a waveform around its baseline Inverting a waveform does not change the sound of a file however when you mix different sound files phase cancellation can occur producing a hollow sound Inverting one of the files can prevent phase cancellation In the following example the red line represents the baseline and the lower waveform is the inverted image of the upper waveform Limiting Limiting is essentially a hard compressor Limiting is often used to keep signals from going above a certain level but can also be applied to create heavily compressed effects Limiting should only be performed on peaks if the Threshold level is set too low heavy distortion will occur See also Compression Ratio audio on page 340 Loop Loops are small audio clips that are designed to create a repeating beat or pattern Loops are usually one to four measures long Low Pass Filter A low pass filter attenuates all frequencies above a cutoff frequency Low pass filters can be used as anti alias filters or for general tonal shaping Marker A marker is an anchored accessible reference point in a file Markers are stored in the Regions List and can be used for quick navigation Media Control Interface MCI A standard way for Windows programs to communicate with multimedia devices such as sound cards and CD players If a device has an MCI device dri
539. ta remains it is because the length of the clipboard contents was less than the length of the selection Replicating Replicating allows you to overwrite your current data window selection with several copies of the clipboard contents When replicating you must specify whether you want to use partial copies of the clipboard contents or only complete copies Using partial copies of the clipboard content completely overwrites the selected data window area Using complete copies of the clipboard content prevents a portion of the data window selection from being overwritten unless the selection length is an exact multiple of the length of the clipboard contents Note The Replicate command will paste as many copies of the clipboard as will fit in the current selection If no selection exists in the data window the command is not available Replicating a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing Wow B Wow sound editing En ios m fisie Evo ison editing just gets easier EFA And esser by amp AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 l 00 00 04 iim 4 it Tier ee mT nee 0 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 512 3 Copy the selection The data is placed on the clipboard 1 4 Create a selection containing Sound editing just gets easier ilj Wow sound editing e ex fisie Avo lon me mal amp AE 00 00 00 i 00 04 editing just gets easier
540. ta window and choose File Properties from the shortcut menu The File Properties window is displayed Notice that this file has 44 100 Hz sample rate and a file size of 0 48 MB Click OK From the Process menu choose Resample and then choose Resample from the submenu The Resample dialog is displayed From the Preset drop down list choose Resample to 8 000 Hz with anti alias filter and click OK The audio is resampled at 8 000 Hz From the File menu choose Save As Save the resampled file with a new name and close it Open the resampled file and view its File Properties window The sample rate is lower 8 000 Hz and the file size is smaller Play the file Notice the obvious decrease in audio quality Note Use this new file to perform the following up sampling procedure Upsampling audio i Verify that the file created in the previous procedure is the active data window From the Process menu choose Resample and then choose Resample from the submenu The Resample dialog is displayed From the Preset drop down list choose Resample to 48 000 Hz with anti alias filter and click OK The audio is resampled at 48 000 Hz From the File menu choose Save As Save the resampled file with a new name and close it Open the new file and view its File Properties window Notice that the sample rate is higher 48 000 Hz and the file size is larger Play the file Notice that resampling to a higher sample rate produces an audio quality at 4
541. ta windows Note Snapshots are not available in sonogram display or when the Slices displayed setting in the Spectrum Settings dialog is greater than 1 Taking a snapshot 1 Navigate to the portion of the graph you want to capture 2 Click the Set Snapshot button and then click a snapshot button 1 in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar Available snapshots buttons are displayed in black and buttons that are in use are displayed in blue and underlined Showing and hiding snapshots 1 Select anumbered button in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar to display a stored snapshot All selected snapshots will be displayed in the Spectrum Analysis window at the same time 2 Clicka selected snapshot button to exclude it from the display 3 Select the Hide active plot button amp to hide the current spectrum so you can concentrate on your snapshots USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 277 Erasing snapshots You don t need to erase individual snapshots to update or replace them Simply click the Set Snapshot button and then click a snapshot button 1 in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar to update its image If you want to erase all snapshots click the Clear all snapshots button s Viewing snapshot statistics Information about each snapshot is displayed at the bottom of the Spectrum Analysis window Settings Printing the graph Click the Print button 4 to print the contents of the Spectrum Analysis window including the
542. tatus bar and choose 2 Stereo or 1 Mono from the shortcut menu For more information see Editing file properties on page 99 Converting from mono to stereo 1 2 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application Right click the Channels box in the status bar and choose Stereo from the shortcut menu The Mono To Stereo dialog is displayed Mono To Stereo Wow sou Destination OK Left Channel E Cana e Right Channel _ _ _ Both Channels Select the Left Channel radio button and click OK The mono data is placed in the upper half of the data window left channel and silence is placed in the right channel For more information see Specifying the audio destination on page 105 Play the file Wow sound editing just gets easier and easier plays in only the left channel Tip f your sound card supports only mono data stereo files can be played by specifying the Microsoft Sound Mapper as the playback device To do this choose Preferences from the Options menu Click the Audio tab and choose Microsoft Sound Mapper from the Audio device type drop down list Specifying the audio destination The Destination radio buttons in the Mono To Stereo dialog allow you to specify where the mono audio data is placed in a stereo file The following table describes the available data destinations Destination Description Left Channel The mono data is placed in the left channe
543. te custom impulse files Adding an acoustic signature to an audio file 1 Open and play the Saxriff pca file Note This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 From the Effects menu choose Acoustic Mirror The Acoustic Mirror dialog is displayed Note You must have an active file in the Sound Forge workspace to start the Acoustic Mirror tool 3 Click the Browse button located next to the Impulse field and locate the Acoustic Mirror Impulse Files folder on the Sound Forge application disc 4 Double click the folder Several impulse subfolders display 5 Double click the Large venues folder Several impulse files display 6 Double click Stadium Camp Randall 50 yrd line sfi This impulse file s acoustic signature is added to the Saxriff pca file and you are returned to the Acoustic Mirror dialog 7 Click Preview The processed file plays and the sax riff is virtually placed in a football stadium sized venue 8 Select or clear the Bypass check box to toggle between the processed and unprocessed audio Adjusting the acoustic signature After you add an acoustic signature to a file you can use the controls of the Acoustic Mirror dialog to precisely configure the reverb effect More importantly you can preview configuration changes as quickly as you make them 1 Opena file and display the Acoustic Mirror dialog 2 Verify that the Real time check box is selected 3 From the Impulse drop down list choose the de
544. th box Punch In mode makes it possible to record over a specific section of audio without the risk of affecting the remainder of the audio file You can preview the punch in region by clicking the Play button B Note Punch in is the default mode when recording with a selection in the data window Use the Record dialog s DC adjust check box to compensate for DC offsets generated by your system s sound card during recording A DC offset of approximately 30 dB is not uncommon for sound cards even with very low noise floors and this displays in the record meter as 60 dB This does not mean that the system is losing 30 dB of resolution but for the meters to accurately display ranges to 90 dB you must calibrate the DC adjust Calibrating the DC adjustment Before using the DC adjust feature you must calibrate it for the selected recording device 1 Select the DC adjust check box The Calibrate button activates along with displays labeled Left and Right WDC adjust Calibrate 2 Click the Calibrate button Sound Forge software listens to the selected recording device and calculates the offset RECORDING AND EXTRACTING AUDIO 139 Recalibrating the DC adjustment If you have multiple sound cards you should recalibrate the DC adjust each time you select a new recording device Certain sound cards must also be recalibrated each time the sample rate changes or when switching between mono and multichannel recording Tip You can
545. that the hard drive specified for temporary storage must have sufficient free space to store large quantities of data With time and usage hard drives become fragmented leading to discontiguous files and slow access This is particularly true for older hard drives Because the software is hard drive intensive faster disk access equates better performance Therefore the initial step in improving system performance is hard drive defragmentation The computer s operating system is typically equipped with a defragmenting program that should be run prior to using Sound Forge software Increasing total buffer size The total buffer size value determines the amount of RAM used for recording to playing from the hard drive A total buffer size of 512 KB is recommended but increased buffering may be necessary if you detect gaps during playback Increasing the total buffer size requires additional memory Combined with a large preload size this may result in a delay when starting and stopping playback 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Click the Audio tab 3 Use the Playback buffering slider to configure an appropriate buffer size value and click OK Turning off the playback cursor and record counter The playback cursor and record counter options determine whether these displays are updated during recording and playback If you detect dropouts and skipping at high sample rates greater than 44 100
546. the Acoustic Mirror effect The following sections describe problems that may be encountered when working with the Acoustic Mirror tool Stuttering during real time previewing It is not uncommon to experience problems when previewing processing in real time The following sections contain several suggestions to remedy the situation Lower the Quality speed setting Lower the value of the Quality speed control on the General page When previewing lengthy impulse responses a setting of 1 or 2 may be necessary however the quality suffers This setting should always be returned to 5 prior to processing to maintain effect quality Increase the DirectX buffering size 1 Open the Acoustic Mirror dialog 2 Right click an empty area of the dialog outside of the four tabs and choose Configuration from the shortcut menu The Real Time Preview Configuration dialog is displayed 218 CHAPTER 13 3 Reconfigure the Buffers to process per second and Total playback buffers controls Typically lowering the Buffers to process per second value and increasing the Total playback buffers value reduces gapping during real time previewing Close all memory intensive applications Real time previewing may be limited by any additional applications operating on the desktop To avoid this situation close all memory intensive applications prior to using this effect Add additional RAM to the system We require at least 512 MB of RAM to operate Sound Forge
547. the Edit Tool Selector to display or hide components for the selected data window For more information see Displaying data window components on page 33 100 Unnamed Things Status E gt z Os FE alal lt l lt e lt l lt lt lt lt p Time Ruler La Time Zoom Overview v T Video Strip mal Level Ruler Level Zoom Scrollbar CD Tracks Hi b Data Window Only h l ea Set as Default Editing pause time for a disc at once CD Pause time is the space between CD tracks This space may contain silence as in a standard commercially produced CD or can contain audio as in a live performance captured on CD The Red Book standard calls for two seconds of pause time but you can edit the default pause time on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog When you hover in the pause time between two tracks Sound Forge displays the pause time You can edit the pause time in several ways e Hover your mouse between two tracks in the CD layout bar The pause time is displayed in a ToolTip Double click the ToolTip and e Right click between two tracks and choose a command from the shortcut menu Command Description Select Pause Time Creates a time selection equal to the pause time between tracks Set to Default Pause Time Moves all tracks upstream so the default pause time exists between the tracks where you clicked Ed
548. the Play button on the transport bar The file plays from the cursor position If you do not hear playback you may have inadvertently created a small selection To determine if you created a selection examine the status boxes in the bottom right corner of the data window a Wow sound editing o meen Siene EFJ Wow EJEJ Sound editing just gets easier EMERY And easier amp AE 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 090 j00 00 02 000 00 00 03 000 00 00 04 000 00 00 4 0 7 Inf pete ta 4 l Po a Id gt i E gt e Rate 0 00 lt 0 00 00 02 317 00 00 05 000 r433 Selection status bar 4 0 e If only the first box contains a value there is no selection e If all three boxes contain values a selection has been created Clear the selection by clicking anywhere in the data window For more information see Viewing selection status on page 62 Tip When Options gt Seek Cursor on Playback is selected playback will restart when you position the cursor If you do not want to interrupt playback when positioning the cursor clear this command Playing in Loop Playback mode You can play an entire file or a selection in Loop Playback mode In Loop Playback mode the audio is played in a continuous loop Click the Loop Playback button on the transport bar or press Q to turn Loop Playback mode on and off Tip When Options gt Seek Cursor on Playback is selected playb
549. the Preferences dialog to adjust the default pause time Using the Track List window to create tracks The Track List window is essentially a text representation of the markers on the CD layout bar You can use the Track List window to view track and index markers edit track position and length edit track names adjust pause time toggle protection and emphasis flags and edit ISRC data For more information see Using the Track List window on page 294 Adding bonus tracks at the end of CDs You can hide a track at the end of a CD by adding silence at the end of the last track and adding the new track after the silence Drag the end of the final track marker to the new end of the CD Because both events exist within a single track they will be treated as one track by an audio CD player 00 08 33 293 Silence between final track and bonus track 290 CHAPTER 20 Moving tracks on the CD layout bar The CD layout bar displays information about the tracks you ve created for your disc at once CD project Each CD track shows the track s number active take name and length Note A red indicator is drawn at the end of the CD layout bar to represent the end of the disc if the disc length is known You can use the Automatically detect CD length and Default CD length controls on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog to set CD length Track 11 Thank You 00 04 56 480 End of disc indicator You can use t
550. the Regions List You can also drag regions from the Regions List to the Playlist To add a region from the Regions List to a playlist drag it from the waveform display or the Regions List to the Playlist Cutlist window You can also drag regions within a playlist to rearrange the playback order To create a region drag the current selection to the time ruler To create a disc at once CD track drag a selection to the Track List window From the Options menu choose Drag and Drop Editing and then choose CD Track from the submenu if you want to create disc at once tracks during drag and drop editing Choosing this command has the same effect as toggle clicking the right mouse button while dragging until the cursor is displayed as a mouse pointer with a CD of APPENDIX A 329 Mouse shortcuts Command Select All Zoom Time and Level Return Control Value to Default Fine Tune Control Value Preview Main Status Bar Selection Status Bar Go to Marker Set Selection to Region Loop Play Normal Button on playbar Slow and Fast Selection Scroll Toggle Zoom in horizontally Zoom out horizontally Zoom in out vertically Scroll left right 10 of the current view prior Move cursor left or right move current selection point if selection exists 330 APPENDIX A Function Double click the waveform display to select the entire sound file Triple click when regions loops or markers are present if the Disable t
551. the Script Editor window if it isn t already displayed 2 Click the Open button E in the Script Editor window choose the script you want to edit and then click Open The script data is displayed in the top portion of the Script Editor window Note You cannot edit scripts that have been compiled as DLLs 3 Edit the script as necessary The comments in the script will help you find the parameters you need to edit Note Comments are indicated with double forward slashes 4 Click the Compile Script button to compile and test your edited script If there are any errors they will be displayed at the bottom of the window 5 Click the Save button to replace the script you edited or click the Save As button to save the edited script with a different name or in a different location USING SCRIPTING 229 Using the Scripting toolbar Adding or removing toolbar buttons 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog appears with a list of available toolbars 2 Select the Scripting check box Preferences Eam General E A E BE A Ea abel Ble aae e r Previews Satus Toobar VST Bfects Toolbars W Standard E Transport E Navigation E Views E Status Selection E Regions Playlist E Process E Bfects El Tools E Levels E ACID Loop Creation Tools Fal Scripting Customize Show Tool Tips 3 Click Customize The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 4 Us
552. the clipboard contents only The selection is shorter than or equal to the clipboard Data is overwritten for the length of the selection only contents Overwriting a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing Wow a Wow sound editing co fees SSS fisie Evos isc editing juet gets easier EFA Ard case e AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 l 00 04 4 0 Inf 5 0 dlm a It mh 4 gt K gt Eott lt P 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 512 3 Copy the selection The data is placed on the clipboard 4 Create a selection of approximately the same length containing the final and easier B Wow sound editing oo ees fisiere Avo fso editing just gets easier EEA And easier od a AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 l 00 00 04 4 I p p 4 K gt h Et Y 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 1 512 EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 145 5 From the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Overwrite from the submenu or right click the data window and choose Overwrite from the shortcut menu The selection is overwritten with the clipboard contents a Wow sound editing tedka za p fisice RA fso editing just gets easier ERA and 8 At 00 00 00 00 00 02 i 00 04 ll lt it Tee mT nee lt O 00 00 03 639 00 00 04 373 00 00 00 733 1 512 Note f any of the selection da
553. the data window to select it 2 From the File menu choose Save Note When saving a new file the Save As dialog appears If the file was previously saved choosing Save automatically saves the file without your input Using the Save As Render As dialog The Save As dialog allows you to save an audio file with a new name in an alternate format or with new attributes The Render As dialog allows you to render a file using a standard template or you can customize the settings to suit your needs Once you create custom settings you can save those settings as a template Save As Savein Audio Files Pe E I Name Artists Album Genre wy A musicbed wav Recent Places gt A musicsample wav ia A Saxriff wav a scalenoteF wav ee A Tutfill wav ij A Tutmusic wav 4 A Tutorl wav Administrator i Toia ia r A a Tutorsmp wav Computer A lt Network File name Voiceover wav v Select file type Saveastype Wave Microsoft wav Cancel Select recent directories Recent D Media Audio Files Help Select template __ Template Project Settings Template description ___ Description Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM Aloisi Summary Select saving metadata option Save metadata with file Free space Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox 14 346 8 Sel
554. the impulse response This increases the impulse response s signal to noise ratio Clicking the Recover Impulse button starts the impulse recovery process After the process is complete an impulse file is created and saved in the folder specified in the Impulse output file box Impulse recovery mode You can choose from three Impulse recovery mode options to determine the method used to recover the impulse Use the start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes Auto detect timing spikes or Do not use timing spikes Each of these modes is described below e Use the start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes This option specifies that the beginning and end of the recorded file are used as timing spikes This option is recommended for the best results during impulse recovery You must trim the file as close to the timing spikes as possible for this method of recovery to work most effectively The first sample of the file should contain the start of the first spike and the last sample of the file should contain the start of the second spike Therefore most of the second spike is deleted e Auto detect timing spikes This option specifies that the timing spikes exist near the start and end of the recorded file and that they should be auto detected Timing spikes are used to correct for clock or tape speed mismatches If you have not trimmed the recorded file so that the timing spikes are at the very beginning and end select this op
555. the input data before analysis The window function affects the sharpness of peaks in an FFT graph and the leakage into neighboring frequencies e Choose Rectangle to apply no window This results in a very sharp peak but high leakage e Choose Triangular also called a Bartlett or Parzen window to apply a window that results in less leakage than the rectangle window e Hamming Hanning and Blackman windows are commonly used in audio applications e Choose Blackman Harris to obtain the least sideband leakage of the six options The major drawback of Blackman Harris is rounded graph peaks Slices displayed The Slices displayed value determines the number of FFT slices displayed When displaying multiple slices in the spectrum graph slices are displayed chronologically forward or backward based on whether you have the Forward or Backward radio button selected Set sonogram resolution The Set sonogram resolution value determines the number of FFT samplings used in a sonogram This keeps the processing time and graph resolution constant Increasing this value increases the horizontal graph resolution but requires more processing time When this check box is cleared the number of samplings is determined by the length of the selection and the FFT overlap setting Note ncreasing the samplings increases the horizontal graph resolution but requires more processing time Channel Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify which
556. the start of the loop This arrangement allows you to fine tune loops by viewing a graphical representation of the junction between the end and the start of a loop Displaying the Loop Tuner 1 Open the Loop pca file A sustaining loop appears in the data window 2 From the View menu choose Loop Tuner The Loop Tuner appears and displays the waveform of the file s loop Loop Tuner ee ee ee See amp eee 2 eee A Wet Loop End window Loop Start window Loop End Position Loop Start Position jae ete toy tee G 1756 1636 Loop Endpoint Lock Loo i Length j Zero crossing finders pipe Play Post Loop Play Loop Play Pre Loop Loop Select Playing loops using the Loop Tuner The Loop Tuner contains three playback buttons Play Pre Loop Play Loop and Play Post Loop mit Play Pre Loop Starts playback of a file from its beginning and stop playback at the loop start tag pap Plays Loop Starts playback of the looped region The number of times the loop plays is dependent upon the Loop count value in the Edit Sample dialog Use this button to audition the loop for pops and glitches For more information see Creating a sustaining loop on page 255 tom Play Post Loop Starts playback immediately following the loop end point and continue through the end of the file Tip You can use the Play as Sample button gt in the playbar to audition the entire sample with configured loops Switching between the sustain and release loops
557. ting capabilities allow you to create edit and transfer samples between external and internal samplers This chapter describes the procedures used to transfer dump samples between the computer and sampler with the Sampler Tool Samplers Samplers are devices that produce on demand playback of audio samples at varying pitches For the purposes of this manual we will concentrate on two basic varieties external samplers and internal samplers External samplers External samplers are typically capable of recording samples or transferring prerecorded samples into their memory You can choose between two methods to transfer samples to external samplers e MIDI Sample Dump Standard SDS SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI MIDI Sample Dump Standard SDS The MIDI SDS is used to send and receive digital samples using normal MIDI hardware and cable connections Due to the limited bandwidth of the MIDI protocol and the large amount of data required by digital samples a MIDI SDS transfer can be time consuming Furthermore SDS is limited to mono samples though certain samplers allow two mono samples to be joined as a stereo sample SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI The SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI allows music hardware and software to communicate using SCSI hardware and cables Because SCSI hardware has a greater bandwidth than MIDI SMDI transfers are considerably faster than SDS transfers In addition SMDI supports mono and stereo sa
558. tion By observing the overview bar you can determine the following items e The section of the audio file currently displayed in the data window e The location and size of a selection in relation to the audio file and data window The current cursor location Understanding the overview bar 1 Open the Voiceover pca file and verify that the waveform display is zoomed completely out 1 512 in this case a Wow sound editing o lt le K a oo ad 00 00 00 000 Notice that the entire overview bar is dark gray indicating that the entire file appears in the data window 2 Place the mouse pointer over the word Wow and click A small vertical marker representing the cursor appears in the overview bar BB Wow sound editing o Wow RMB Sound editing just gets easier FERRY And easier wal a 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 6 0 Inf 6 0 il 4 i USEE SEE KH gt meee O 00 00 00 986 00 00 05 000 1 512 3 Create a selection containing the word Wow A shaded block sized in relation to the size of the selection within the entire audio file appears in the overview bar a Wow sound editing lt 4 ob me ma K gt eee lt o 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 512 82 CHAPTER 4 Click the Zoom In button twice The dark gray area in the overview bar becomes incrementally smaller as less of the waveform appears in the
559. tion about VU PPM meters see Using the VU PPM meters on page 46 e For more information about phase scopes see Using phase scopes on page 48 e For more information about mono compatibility meters see Using the mono compatibility meters on page 48 Resetting clipping indicators When audio levels are too high clipping can occur A red indicator appears at the top of the meter to show when audio is clipping Do any of the following to reset the indicator e From the Options menu choose Channel Meters and then choose Reset Clip from the submenu e Click to reset the indicator or right click the meters and choose Reset Clip from the shortcut menu Channel E Channel E Clipping y Click the clipping indicator indicator to reset it You can also detect and mark clipped audio using the detect clipping tool For more information see Detecting and marking clipping on page 116 Changing the meters display resolution The peak meters display levels in dB FS To change the resolution of the meters do either of the following e From the Options menu choose Channel Meters choose Peak Range from the submenu and then choose a display range e Right click the channel meter choose Peak Range from the submenu and then choose a display range Note Choosing a wide range allows you to see low level signals at the expense of precision display at high levels Changing the meters display options You can choose
560. tion for the best results With this option you need only ensure that the first spike occurs within one second of the start of the file and that the second spike exists in the file To improve detection accuracy you can also boost the level of the start and end spikes in the recorded file Tip f the spike s level is close to the noise floor select the Use the beginning and end of the recorded file as timing spikes option Do not use timing spikes This option specifies that no timing spikes are used This is the least desirable option as no timing information is used To use this option you must trim the recorded file so that the test tone starts and ends at the start and end of the file with no blank audio before or after This option should only be used if the timing spikes are lost in the recording or if you are certain that the play and record clocks are synchronized such as when using an ADAT USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 213 Creating impulse files You can obtain impulse responses from anything that accepts test tone input and supports recording the output This includes physical spaces as well as electronic audio equipment Creating custom impulse files requires planning work and additional audio equipment Note mpulses derived from electronic devices that produce nonlinear effects such as overdrives distortion pedals pitch shifters harmonic enhancers chorus pedals or flange pedals cannot be modeled using t
561. tion of the cursor Tip You can also click the Insert Marker button on the Insert toolbar or press M 3 Ifyou want to name the marker right click the tag and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type a name for the marker in the edit box and press Enter B Drum Fill lt l x Marker tag a ee eee ee ee ee bes 4 0 Ai 4 0 mmeg rT K gt i m p gt s Rate 0 00 lt or 00 00 00 565 00 00 00 339 1 192 Inserting markers during playback To insert markers in real time during playback press M Inserting markers during recording To insert markers during recording click the Insert Marker button in the Record dialog or press M For more information see Inserting markers while recording on page 141 Naming or renaming markers Right click the marker tag F and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type the name of the marker in the edit box and press Enter when you re finished Double click to the right of the marker and type a name in the edit box 114 CHAPTER 7 Customizing marker labeling You can set Sound Forge to automatically label new markers as they are created 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Labels tab 3 Inthe Marker labels area adjust the labeling controls as desired Control Description Label Markers Select this check box if you want Sound Forge to automatically name markers when you insert them during playbac
562. tive positive or any zero crossing Extend Edge to Next Zero This option forces the active edge of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file The active edge of a selection is defined by the blinking cursor Press Home or End to change the active edge Tips You can also press Shift Z e The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a negative positive or any zero crossing Disabling auto snapping at high magnifications When editing an audio file displayed at a high magnification you may want to turn off snapping to time or zero crossings This allows you to position a selection s start and end points exactly where you choose 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Editing tab 2 Select the Disable auto snapping below 1 4 zoom ratios check box and click OK Quantizing to frames From the Options menu choose Quantize to Frames to force edits to occur on project frame boundaries This setting is independent of grid and marker snapping and is useful when editing audio for video and creating disc at once CD projects When Quantize to Frames is turned on the following actions will always occur on frame boundaries e Positioning the cursor e Making selections e Placing markers and regions Note f you drag to a snap point that does not occur on a frame bounda
563. to send a request for the sample to the sampler when you click Get Sample Clearing the Send request check box requires that the sample transfer be initiated from the sampler even after you click Get Sample Typically pressing the appropriate button on the sampler satisfies this request 9 Select the Wait for request when sending samples check box if you want the Sampler tool to wait for the sampler to request the sample transfer before sending the sample even after you click Send Sample Typically pressing the appropriate button on the sampler satisfies this request Clearing the Wait for request check box configures the Sampler Tool to send the sample as soon as you click Send Sample Open loop versus closed loop Open loop describes a unidirectional communication protocol When the Open loop check box is selected the source transmits all data to the destination without listening for instruction from the destination The destination has no control over how the data is sent and cannot ask for information to be repeated This lack of feedback makes open loop transfers prone to error Sampler Configuration Example music bed Preset Untitled OK MIDI channel 4 Open loop The Open Loop check box in the J Send request when retrieving samples Sam p ler Confi guration dial og Wait for request when sending samples If the Open loop check box is cleared the communication protocol is referred to as closed loop A closed loop al
564. to the Frequency Domain Since the Fourier Transform is computationally intensive it is common to use a technique called a Fast Fourier Transform FFT to perform spectral analysis The FFT uses mathematical shortcuts to lower the processing time at the expense of putting limitations on the analysis size The analysis size also referred to as the FFT size indicates the number of samples from the sound signal used in the analysis and also determines the number of discrete frequency bands When a high number of frequency bands are used the bands have a smaller bandwidth which allows for more accurate frequency readings File Associations This dialog allows you to associate sound file extensions such as wav au snd etc with Sound Forge software This dialog is opened from the File tab of the Preferences dialog File Format A file format specifies the way in which data is stored In Windows the most common audio file format is the Microsoft wav format For information on the different file formats supported by Sound Forge software click here Frame Rate Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synchronizing to video or other audio To synchronize with audio a rate of 30 non drop is typically used To synchronize with video 30 drop is usually used 342 APPENDIX E Frequency Modulation FM Frequency Modulation FM is a process by which the frequency pitch of a sound is varied over time Subaudio frequency modulat
565. ton Select the topic from the list and click the Display button to view it Allows you to keep topics that you revisit often in a separate folder To add a topic to your favorites click the Add button on the Favorites tab Interactive tutorials You can learn more about many of the features in Sound Forge by using the interactive tutorials installed with the software You can access the tutorials at any time by choosing Interactive Tutorials from the Help menu Help on the Web Additional Sound Forge information is available on the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site From the Help menu choose Sony on the Web and choose the desired location from the submenu The software starts your system s Web browser and attempts to connect to the appropriate page on the Sony Web site INTRODUCTION 19 20 CHAPTER 1 Chapter 2 Learning the Sound Forge Pro Workspace This chapter provides a detailed overview of Sound Forge Pro toolbars and controls Using the mouse The following table defines the mouse related terms used throughout this manual Mouse Term Pointing Clicking Right clicking Double clicking Triple clicking Toggle clicking Shift clicking Ctrl clicking Dragging Slow dragging Description Moving the mouse pointer over an item Pointing to an item and quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button If there is no left or right specification left clicking is implied Pointing to an item a
566. tor Play All Remove EOpen Play _ E save OM Pause Move Up E Save As Stop a fender As I Go to Start Move Down E Publish Rewind Separator Pi Forward Reset ae Cut G copy a Paste F Mix Play Clipboard TE Trim Crop Go to End WH Go to Previous Track PH Go to Next Track T Regions List T Playlist 3 Use the controls in the Customize Toolbar dialog to add remove or rearrange the buttons on the selected toolbar Click Reset to restore the toolbar to its default setting 4 Click OK LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 35 Docking a toolbar When you drag a floating toolbar to any edge of the main screen the toolbar docks on that edge Floating a toolbar When you drag a docked toolbar away from an edge the toolbar becomes a floating toolbar Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is displayed by default when you start the application The buttons on this toolbar provide quick access to many common commands E New Creates a new data window For more information see Creating data windows on page 64 Open Displays the Open dialog For more information see Using the Open dialog on page 56 Save Saves the current audio data For more information see Saving a file on page 65 D audio file The mix start point is either the cursor point or the start or end of the selection in the destination data window For more information see Mixing on page 74 Play C
567. ttach it to a video file and save it as a video file 1 Open the audio file you want to use For more information see Getting media files on page 55 From the File menu choose Attach Video The Open dialog is displayed Locate and select a video file you want to attach and click the Open button to attach the video file From the View menu choose File Properties The File Properties window is displayed a E To change the field order setting for the video file choose an option from the Video field order drop down list The options are explained below e None progressive scan For video to be viewed on a computer monitor Upper field first For output that is jittery or shaky or if specified by your hardware manual Lower field first For DV output 6 To change the video s pixel aspect ratio choose an option from the Video pixel aspect ratio drop down list The pixel aspect ratio should be based on the destination and use of the final media file Note The file must be saved in a video file format to permanently attach the video For more information see Saving a video file on page 272 270 CHAPTER 18 Detaching video from an audio file You can detach the video stream from a media file 1 Open the media file you want to use For more information see Getting media files on page 55 2 From the File menu choose Detach Video The video stream is removed and the video strip is hidden Setting video options Video file pr
568. ttaching video to an audio file on page 270 When working with MXF files the number of channels in your source media must match the number of output channels specified by the rendering template If necessary use the Channel Converter before rendering Render format Number of channels DV MXF Always contains 4 audio channels You can use the Channels drop down list on the Audio tab of the Custom Template dialog to choose how many channels will be filled with audio For example if you choose 2 from the Channels drop down list the rendered file will contain 4 audio channels two channels will contain audio and two channels will contain silence IMX MXF Always contains 8 audio channels You can use the Channels drop down list on the Audio tab of the Custom Template dialog to choose how many channels will be filled with audio For example if you choose 2 from the Channels drop down list the rendered file will contain 8 audio channels two channels will contain audio and six channels will contain silence HD MXF Can contain 2 or 4 audio channels You can use the Channels drop down list on the Audio tab of the Custom Template dialog to choose how many channels will be rendered For example if you choose 2 from the Channels drop down list the rendered file will contain only 2 audio channels EDITING MULTICHANNEL AUDIO 109 Routing channels to hardware outputs If you re working with multichannel files and have a sound card with multipl
569. ty value 5 Click OK Regions are inserted in the audio file based on the dialog parameters Note All regions created using the Auto Region tool are automatically added to the Regions List and Playlist Inserting regions based on musical time intervals When you select the Build regions using the current tempo check box in the Auto Region dialog Tools gt Auto Region regions are inserted according to the current beats per minute setting You can change a file s tempo information including the measures beats and beats per minute settings by choosing Status Format and then Edit Tempo from the Options menu For more information see Changing a file s beat values on page 79 1 Open the Musicbed pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 From the Tools menu choose Auto Region The Auto Region dialog appears 3 Select the Build regions using the current tempo check box 4 Enter desired values in the Measures and Beats boxes e To create a region on every beat set Measures to 0 and Beats to 1 e To create a region at every measure set Measures to 1 and Beats to 0 5 Click OK Regions are created in the data window based on the Measures value the Beats values and the current beats per minute setting 122 CHAPTER 7 Inserting regions based on marker positions 1 Open the Fill pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 Play the file and drop several markers using th
570. u choose Selection and then choose Set from the submenu or press Ctrl Shift D The Set Selection dialog appears 2 From the Input format drop down list choose the format to be used for creating the selection The values in the Start End and Length boxes change to reflect the specified format 3 Configure the selection by typing appropriate values in the Start and End or the Start and Length boxes 4 Ifyou are working with a stereo file choose Left Right or Both from the Channel drop down list or for a multichannel file type the appropriate channel numbers in the Channel box 5 Click OK Using the Set Selection dialog The following sections briefly describe additional controls located in the Set Selection dialog Set Selection Funky saxophone riff Selection Custom cancel Cancel Start hr mintsc xxx Play Play End 00 00 02 432 E Play looped Length 00 00 02 318 snap Zero_ Channel Both Y Snap Time Input format me o Time Control Description Play Clicking Play plays the current selection Play looped Selecting the Play looped check box allows you to play the selection in Looped Playback mode Snap Zero Clicking Snap Zero forces the Start and End values of the selected area to the next zero crossing Snap Time Clicking Snap Time forces the Start and End values of the selected area to a whole time division as designated by the markings on the data window s time rul
571. u or press Alt 2 The Regions List window for Voiceover pca appears 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Playlist from the submenu or press Alt 3 The Playlist window for Voiceover pca appears Notice that the file contains regions but the Playlist is empty You must add regions to the Playlist before arranging them Understanding the Playlist display When you add a region to the Playlist its appearance is similar to its appearance in the Regions List with the exception of the Count Cnt column Located to the left of the Name column the Count Cnt column displays the number of times the corresponding region plays before the Playlist proceeds to the next region 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 None 1 Sound editing just gets easier 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None i 1 C5 00 00 00 000 1 And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None 1 C5 00 00 00 000 Adding regions to the Playlist You can add regions from the Regions List to the Playlist using commands or drag and drop You can also add regions to the Playlist directly from the data window Adding regions to the Playlist using commands 1 Select a region in the Regions List 2 From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and choose Add from the submenu or right click a region in the Regions List window and choose Add to Playlist from the shortcut menu The
572. u can copy audio data from a data window to the clipboard without changing the original file Once audio data is on the clipboard you can paste it into existing files or use it to create new files Copying data to the clipboard 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 Create a selection containing Wow BB Wow sound editing SSS fisie Eiso editing just gets easier BE i oE S aa Sea pated 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 347 3 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button The selected data is copied to the clipboard but the waveform is unchanged Previewing clipboard contents To preview the contents of the clipboard choose Clipboard from the View menu and choose Play from the submenu Tip You can view detailed information on the size and attributes of the clipboard contents in the Clipboard Contents window From the View menu choose Clipboard and then choose Contents from the submenu to display the Clipboard Contents window Clipboard Contents Format PCM Attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Stereo Length 00 16 532 Samples 1 458 176 Total bytes 2 916 352 Recycling clipboard contents Once audio data is on the clipboard you can paste or mix it into an infinite number of windows Data remains on the clipboard until you replace it with new data 70 CHAPTER 3 Pasting Once audio data is on the
573. ues increase the selection s volume Note A value of Inf corresponds to mute 0 190 CHAPTER 11 Chapter 12 Working with Effects Effects or plug ins can be used to improve the quality of the audio or to create special artistic effects Additional DirectX and VST plug in effects both from Sony and other third party vendors can also be used Adding effects You can choose an effect from the Effects menu to apply to a file or just a portion of a file If you ve added an effect to the FX Favorites menu you can select it from that location as well For more information see Organizing effects in the FX Favorites menu on page 198 Applying an effect 1 Select the data you want to process If no data is selected the effect is applied to the entire file If you re using the Event tool select the events you want to process For more information see Selecting events on page 164 Note When you re working with multichannel files only the selected region in the selected channel is processed Most functions can be applied to an individual channel or all channels However because the channels in a multichannel file must be equal in length functions that affect the length of the data cannot be performed on individual channels These functions include Insert Silence Resample Time Stretch Gapper Snipper Pitch Bend and Pitch Shift without preserving duration If you want to apply one of these processes in a single channel
574. um Analysis The Spectrum Analysis dialog is displayed 3 Click the Sonogram button Mj to display your data as a sonogram 4 Use the toolbar at the top of the window to set your other display options Tip You can also click the Settings button in the Spectrum Analysis window to set additional options 278 CHAPTER 19 If there is no selection in the waveform display window the sonogram analyzes the sound data from the current cursor position to the end of the file Displaying frequency and amplitude values notes and statistics As you move the cursor through the sonogram the amplitude and frequency values at the current position are displayed in a ToolTip next to the cursor and in the Statistics area at the bottom of the window Spectrum Analysis ala es a m MA o E 4 950 Use the cursor to h display amplitude and frequency values 00 00 04 417 00 00 06 231 o e EE 109 a Frequency Hz 3 111 G3 Position 00 00 03 510 Active Example music bed 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 2 048 Blackman Harris 75 Slice 89 eak 40 dB at 4 950 Hz D 9 a a a a a Statistics area Right click the sonogram and choose Show Position from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of ToolTips The setting for each sonogram in a multichannel file is independent If you want to display the nearest musical note equivalent of the cursor position in a ToolTip right click the sonogram and choose Show Notes from the short
575. us stream after a brief buffering period Without streaming users would have to download files completely before playback Telecine The process of creating 30 fps video television from 24 fps film cinema See also Inverse Telecine IVTC on page 343 Pulldown on page 347 Tempo Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical composition usually specified in beats per minute BPM Threshold A threshold determines the level at which the signal processor begins acting on the signal During normalization levels above this threshold are attenuated Time Format The format by which Sound Forge software displays the time ruler and selection times These can include Time Seconds Frames and all standard SMPTE frame rates Trim Crop Trim Crop is a function that will delete all data in a sound file outside of the current selection This is a necessary function when dealing with samples to be played by a sampler to get rid of blank time at the beginning and ending of samples u Law u Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications Law is very similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder APPENDIX E 351 Undo Buffer This is the temporary file created be
576. used to arrange regions for playback From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Playlist from the submenu to show or hide the Playlist window For more information see Using the Playlist on page 128 Track List window CtrI Alt M 2 The Track List window is used to arrange tracks for a disc at once CD From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Track List from the submenu to show or hide the Track List window For more information see Using the Track List window on page 294 26 CHAPTER 2 ACID Properties window Ctrl Alt M 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu to display the ACID Properties window where you can view and edit ACID specific information in a sound file For more information about creating ACID loops see Creating loops for ACID software on page 261 Item Description Time signature Displays the number of beats in your clip and the note that receives one beat You can double click the value to edit it ACID type Displays the clip s ACID type Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the drop down list to change the clip type One Shot Choose One Shot if you want ACID to treat your file as a one shot One shots are RAM based audio clips that do not change tempo or pitch with an ACID project and are not designed to loop Sounds such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Longer files can be treated as one shots
577. ut The following sections briefly describe the methods of creating regions To work through these procedures use the Fill pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application Inserting regions using menu commands 1 Open the Fill pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Regions List from the submenu The Regions List appears For more information see Using the Regions List on page 126 3 Create a selection containing the final drum hit near the end of the waveform display From the Insert menu choose Region or press R The selection appears in the Regions List 5 Double click the Name box for the new region Type a name for the region and press Enter Regions List Name l End Trigger Chan Note Last drum hit 00 00 01 219 00 00 01 501 00 00 00 282 None 1l B Drum Fill balba Region tags A AE 00 00 00 000 boe o qo i4 gt i gt s Rate 0 00 wr 00 00 01 219 00 00 01 501 00 00 00 282 1 192 120 CHAPTER 7 Inserting regions by dragging selections One of the easiest ways to insert a region is to drag a selection from a data window into the Regions List 1 Create a selection containing the opening drum roll in Fill pca ail Drum Fill kodad Last drut 1 pee A AE 00 00 00 000 l 00 00 01 000 TPA 00 00 01 500 a 00 00 02 000 0 Inf 4
578. utton The mouse icon and the appearance of the selection region change to indicate the current drag and drop mode 5 Release the left mouse button The source audio data is pasted mixed or inserted as a CD track Creating new windows by dragging and dropping a selection Drag and drop also allows you to create a new data window from a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing Wow 3 Drag the selection to an empty area of the Sound Forge workspace and drop it A new data window is created containing the selection data with the attributes of the original file Tip When dragging a selection to paste sound data drag up or down before moving the mouse left or right Dragging left or right before moving the mouse vertically adjusts the selection length Finding and repairing audio glitches Glitches are commonly the result of analog audio editing analog to digital transfer or electronic noise Sound Forge software provides you with a tool for locating audio glitches and three distinct tools for repairing them channel interpolate and replace In addition you can repair audio glitches manually using the Pencil tool Locating glitches The Find tool allows you to quickly locate glitches specific volume levels or silence in a file The Find tool s glitch algorithm locates glitches by examining the file for instances where the waveform matches the specified threshold slope and sensitivity criteria
579. veform can be a carrier a modulator or a simple unmodulated waveform Generating a waveform 1 From the Insert menu choose Synthesis and choose FM from the submenu The FM Synthesis dialog appears Tip You can also click the FM Synthesis button x on the Insert toolbar FM Synthesis Example music bed Preset Untitled x Total output waveform length Cancel 0 001 to 600 0 seconds 1 000 n Preview Insert waveform at End of file x H Configuration LJ Ea Current operator 1 2 3 4 12 0 dB ee 25 12 Operator shape Sine Frequency 0 00 to 22 050 Hz 440 00 fr Feedback 0 to 100 4 T e Amplitude nf to 0 dB reset 2 Specify the length in seconds of the generated waveform in the Total output waveform length box 3 Use the Configuration slider to configure the arrangement and number of operators used to generate the waveform For more information see Specifying the number and arrangement of operators on page 154 Modify individual operators as needed For more information see Modifying an operator on page 155 4 From the Insert waveform at drop down list choose a position to determine where the generated waveform is placed in the file Click OK Specifying the number and arrangement of operators Dragging the Configuration slider changes the graphical representation of the arrangement and number of operators used to generate the waveform When configuring your waveform keep the
580. vels in the VU meters This setting has no effect on the PPM scales which use fixed integration times e UK PPM 10 ms e EBU PPM 10 ms e DIN PPM 5 ms e Nordic PPM 5 ms Toolbars tab The Toolbars tab allows you to specify which toolbars you want to display Display or hide toolbars Select the check box to display a toolbar clear a check box to hide a toolbar Display or hide ToolTips Select the Show ToolTips check box if you want to display pop up descriptions when the mouse is held over certain items Customizing a toolbar 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog appears with a list of available toolbars 2 Select the check box for a toolbar and click Customize The Customize Toolbar dialog is displayed 3 Use the controls in the Customize Toolbar dialog to add remove or rearrange the buttons on the selected toolbar Click Reset to restore the toolbar to its default setting 4 Click the OK button 314 CHAPTER 22 CD Settings tab The CD Settings tab allows you to specify settings for burning and extracting audio from CDs Item Description Use strict Red Book specification for Select this check box if you want to be notified prior to burning a disc at once CD if anything about DAO validation your CD project is against strict Red Book standards These warnings are not critical and in most cases you will not write an unreadable disc if you proceed Clearing this check box will not suppre
581. ver it can easily be controlled by most multimedia Windows software Microsoft Sound Mapper The Sound Mapper is a special device that attempts to select the most appropriate sound card map on which to play a sound or it will translate the sound into a format that can be played on your sound card Mid Side recording Mid side MS recording is a microphone technique in which one mic is pointed directly towards the source to record the center mid channel and the other mic is pointed 90 degrees away from the source to record the stereo image For proper playback on most systems MS recordings must be converted to your standard left right also called AB track MIDI See Musical Instrument Device Interface MIDI on page 345 344 APPENDIX E MIDI Channels MIDI allows for 16 discrete channels for sending data When dealing with MIDI triggers Sound Forge software needs to know what MIDI channel to look at for receiving the trigger The channel this information is sent to in Sound Forge software depends on the device sending the MIDI messages MIDI Clock A MIDI device specific timing reference It is not absolute time like MIDI Time Code MTC instead it is a tempo dependent number of ticks per quarter note MIDI clock is convenient for synchronizing devices that need to perform tempo changes mid song MIDI Controllers MIDI controllers are a specific type of MIDI message Sound Forge software can use MIDI controllers to tri
582. want to use leading zeros in marker names For width of example if you specify a field width of 3 markers numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 4 Click the OK button File Types tab The File Types tab allows you to indicate which types of files you want to associate with Sound Forge software When file is associated with Sound Forge software you can double click a sound file in the Windows Explorer and it will open for editing 1 Select a file type from the list The File association details box near the bottom of the tab displays information about the selected file type as well as the current association 2 Select the check box for each sound file format you want to associate with Sound Forge software or clear the check box to remove a file association 3 Click the OK button MIDI Sync tab The MIDI Sync tab allows you to specify preferences for MIDI and synchronization Item Description Output Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list to specify the MIDI output device for synchronization Input when Generate MIDI Timecode is enabled Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list to specify the MIDI input device for synchronization and Bound record time on SMPTE triggering when Trigger from MIDI Timecode is enabled This is the device through which Sound Forge will receive all MIDI triggering and synchronization input including SMPTE MTC MIDI triggers and Regions Playlist triggers When t
583. whether labels peaks and valleys are displayed in the meters and whether the meters are displayed on top of other windows when they are not docked Do either of the following to change the meters display options e From the Options menu choose Channel Meters and then choose a command from the submenu e Right click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu Command Description Expand Meters Toggles expanded width meters Turning off expanded meters can conserve screen space Interleave Meters Toggles interleaved or stacked display of VU PPM meters with the corresponding channel meters Show Labels Toggles the meter level labels on and off Hold Peaks When selected the highest peak levels are represented by a thin line on the meter Hold Valleys When selected the lowest peak levels are represented by a thin line on the meter LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 45 To change the layout of the meters in the Channel Meters window right click the meters choose Layout from the shortcut menu and then choose a command from the submenu Command Description Horizontal Vertical Auto Choose a command to change the orientation of the meters in the Channel Meters window Stretch to Fit Stretches the meters to fit the window Narrow Width Toggles narrow or normal width meters Using narrow meters can conserve screen space Interleave Peak VU Toggles interleaved or stacked display of VU PPM meters with the corresponding
584. will pay attention to the destination selection and file length when mixing between files This setting has no effect in the following situations e When the material you are mixing does not overlap either end of the destination selection or the end of the destination file e When no selection exists in the destination e When you mix data within a single data window When the check box is cleared Fade In and Fade Out setting are not affected by the selection in the Mix destination Drag this slider to specify the time before a window underneath the cursor becomes active during drag and drop operations Use this drop down list to specify how zero crossings are detected when you choose Snap to Zero e Negative Slope Zero crossings are detected only on a negative slope Any Crossing Zero crossings are detected on both positive and negative slopes e Positive Slope Zero crossings are detected only on a positive slope Tip t is usually best to use either Positive Slope or Negative Slope so that noticeable pops and clicks are not generated by cutting data Specify the maximum time in samples that will be used to search for the next zero crossing Specify the sample value below which data will be considered a zero crossing Note Setting this value above zero can compensate for DC offset However if possible you should remove DC offset first Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the maximum zoom ratio at which the
585. wo bytes of memory to store Channel Converter The Channel Converter is a function that converts files from mono to stereo and stereo to mono with independent level control of the new channels This function can also create interesting effects by converting stereo files to stereo with various levels and inversion of channels Channel Meters The Channel Meters in Sound Forge software display the peak output levels of the sound file currently playing These meters have selectable resolution and options to hold peaks and valleys Chorus Chorusing is an effect created by combining a signal with a modulating delayed copy of itself This effect creates the illusion of multiple sources creating the same sound Clipboard The clipboard is where sample data is saved when you cut or copy it from a data window You can then paste mix or crossfade the sample data stored on the clipboard with another data window This sample data can also be used by other Windows applications that support Sound data on the clipboard such as Sound Recorder Clipping Occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level In digital systems clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value such as 32 767 in 16 bit data Clipping causes sound to distort Codec Coder Decoder refers to any technology for compressing and decompressing data The term codec can refer to software hardware or a combination of both technologies
586. xed together to modulate the carrier Use the Amplitude fader to determine the output gain that is applied to the current operator after the amplitude envelope Note f the operator is a modulator this control along with the envelope determines the amount of frequency modulation applied to the carrier Ifthe amplitude of a modulator is high harsh audio may result Generating simple waveforms The Simple Synthesis tool is used to generate simple waveforms of a given shape pitch and length 1 From the Insert menu choose Synthesis and choose Simple from the submenu The Simple Synthesis dialog appears Tip You can also click the Simple Synthesis button on the Insert toolbar Simple Synthesis Example music bed Preset ls Hx 12 008 Cancel 25 12 Waveform shape Sine r Preview Length 0 001 to 600 0 seconds 1 000 Start Frequency 0 01 to 22 050 Hz 60 00 End Frequency 0 01 to 22 050 Hz 90 00 1g Sweep CEng A E Insert new waveform at End of file From the Waveform shape drop down list choose a shape to specify the shape of a single period of the current operator s waveform In the Length box specify the length in seconds of the generated waveform In the Start Frequency box specify the frequency of the waveform If you want to sweep a range of frequencies select the End Frequency check box and specify an ending frequency in the box Select the Log Sweep check
587. y affect other processes Use the Video tab to specify preferences for displaying video Item Frame numbering on thumbnails Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV Deinterlace method Resample source video when rendering to a higher frame rate Description Determines how individual frame information located in a box at the lower left hand corner of each frame will be displayed in the video strip when frame numbering is turned on The frame information box can include Frame Numbers or Media Timecode Select this check box if you want to remove pulldown when you open 24 fps progressive scan DV video files When the check box is cleared Sound Forge software will read 24p video as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine how Sound Forge software separates the two fields that make up a video frame when you render to a progressive format e Blend Fields Maintains the data in the two fields by blending them together This method can produce a smooth motion blurred image Interpolate Deletes one field and uses the remaining field to interpolate the deleted lines This produces sharper images than Blend Fields but can introduce jagged motion or stair stepping artifacts Select this check box if you want to interpolate video frames when you render to a frame rate that is greater than the source file s frame rate CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 317 Item Externa
588. y the number of samples If this value is not zero it usually indicates a DC offset in the recording process The number of times per second that the waveform fluctuates from a negative to a positive value This value can be used as a rough estimate of the frequency of the audio data for very simple waveforms Copies all contents of the Statistics window to the clipboard This can be useful if you want to compare statistics of multiple files in a spreadsheet Note To copy specific data or cells select the cells that you want to copy and press Ctrl C GETTING STARTED 63 Creating data windows 1 From the File menu choose New The New Window dialog appears New Window mE Sample rate 2 000 to 192 000 Hz 44 100 Bit depth 16 bit ne Cancel Channels 1 to 32 2 Stereo r Maximum editing time 13 37 16 Complete the New Window dialog a From the Sample rate drop down list choose a sample rate b From the Bit depth drop down list choose a bit depth c Choose a setting from the Channels drop down list to select the number of channels stored in the file For more information see Editing file properties on page 99 Click OK A new data window with the specified attributes appears Tip New windows are automatically named for you You can customize this automatic naming feature to suit your needs For more information see Editing default data window names on page 311 Active data windows vs inactive
589. you to determine the level to which peaks above the Threshold setting are boosted or cut Release time The Release time slider allows you to determine how soon after falling below the threshold the audio signal attenuation is interrupted Use longer look ahead When you select the Use longer look ahead check box the volume maximizer scans farther ahead in the incoming audio to determine the amount of limiting that is needed This results in limiting being applied before the threshold surpassing audio actually occurs However the pre limiting effect fades that occur prior to attacks of this option may be distracting Input Output meter This meter allows you to monitor the level of the incoming and outgoing signals When an Input button is displayed the meters are displaying the incoming signal level Clicking Input toggles the button to an Output button and displays the outgoing signal level Clicking Output returns you to the incoming signal display Attenuation meter This meter allows you to monitor the audio signal attenuation derived from the current settings USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 223 224 CHAPTER 13 Chapter 14 Using Scripting You can use scripting to streamline repetitive tasks and implement customized features When the Script Editor window displays you can use it to create edit or run scripts Sound Forge software can use scripts written using JScript VBScript or C as well as scripts that have been co
590. ze of the resulting peak files divide the size of the file by the peak ratio For example a 100 MB sound file will need a 0 39 MB 100 256 peak file when using 1 256 Choose a zoom ratio from the drop down list to specify the default horizontal magnification This magnification level is used when you load a sound file create a new window or use the Zoom Normal command High values show more data and small values show more detail Choose a zoom ratio from the drop down list to specify a custom level of horizontal magnification This zoom ratio will be used when you perform any of the following actions e Click the Custom Zoom 1 or Custom Zoom 2 button on the Navigation toolbar From the View menu choose Zoom Time and then choose a Custom Zoom command from the submenu e Right click in a data window choose Zoom from the shortcut menu and then choose a Custom Zoom command from the submenu Description Tabs for maximized data windows Color preference for Icon color saturation Icon color tint Option Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose whether you want to display tabs to help you browse maximized data windows e Choose None if you do not want to display tabs You can navigate data windows by choosing a window from the Window menu or by pressing Ctrl Tab e Choose Top to display tabs above the waveform display Shine Play One of These Days White a Bi E 00 00 00 O01 i_l Ba E hatak asd e

Sound Forge Pro 10.0 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents